LeroySomer VSD

3890 en - 2009.
01 / c
This manual is to be given

to the end user
Universal variable speed drive

User guide
General Information
The manufacturer accepts no liability for any consequences resulting from inappropriate, negligent or incorrect
installation or adjustment of the optional operating parameters of the equipment or from mismatching the variable speed
drive with the motor.
The contents of this guide are believed to be correct at the time of printing. In the interests of a commitment to a policy
of continuous development and improvement, the manufacturer reserves the right to change the specification of the
product or its performance, or the contents of the guide, without notice.
All rights reserved. No parts of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electrical or
mechanical including photocopying, recording or by an information storage or retrieval system, without permission in
writing from the publisher.
Drive software version

This product is supplied with the latest version of software. If this product is to be used in a new or existing system with
other drives, there may be some differences between their software and the software in this product. These differences
may cause this product to function differently. This may also apply to drives returned from LEROY-SOMER.
The software version of the drive can be checked by looking at Pr 11.29 (or Pr 0.50) and Pr 11.34. The software version
takes the form of zz.yy.xx, where Pr 11.29 displays zz.yy and Pr 11.34 displays xx, i.e. for software version 01.01.00,
Pr 11.29 would display 1.01 and Pr 11.34 would display 0.
If there is any doubt, contact LEROY-SOMER.
Environmental statement
LEROY-SOMER is committed to minimising the environmental impacts of its manufacturing operations and of its
products throughout their life cycle. To this end, we operate an Environmental Management System (EMS) which is
certified to the International Standard ISO 14001.
The electronic variable-speed drives manufactured by LEROY-SOMER have the potential to save energy and (through
increased machine/process efficiency) reduce raw material consumption and scrap throughout their long working
lifetime. In typical applications, these positive environmental effects far outweigh the negative impacts of product
manufacture and end-of-life disposal.
Nevertheless, when the products eventually reach the end of their useful life, they can very easily be dismantled into their
major component parts for efficient recycling. Many parts snap together and can be separated without the use of tools,
while other parts are secured with conventional screws. Virtually all parts of the product are suitable for recycling.
Product packaging is of good quality and can be re-used. Large products are packed in wooden crates, while smaller
products come in strong cardboard cartons which themselves have a high recycled fibre content. If not re-used, these
containers can be recycled. Polythene, used on the protective film and bags for wrapping product, can be recycled in the
same way. LEROY-SOMER' packaging strategy favours easily-recyclable materials of low environmental impact, and
regular reviews identify opportunities for improvement.
When preparing to recycle or dispose of any product or packaging, please observe local legislation and best practice.
Issue Number: b (12)

Software: 01.15.00 onwards
How to use this guide
This user guide provides complete information for installing and operating the drive from start to finish.
The information is in logical order, taking the reader from receiving the drive through to fine tuning the performance.
NOTE
There are specific safety warnings throughout this guide, located in the relevant sections. In addition, Chapter 1 Safety
Information contains general safety information. It is essential that the warnings are observed and the information
considered when working with or designing a system using the drive.
This map of the user guide helps to find the right sections for the task you wish to complete, but for specific information,
refer to Contents on page 4:
1 Safety information
2 Product information
3 Mechanical installation
4 Electrical installation
5 Getting started
6 Basic parameters
7 Running the motor
8 Optimization
9 SMARTCARD operation
10 Onboard PLC
11 Advanced parameters
12 Technical data
13 Diagnostics
14 UL listing information
Contents
1 Safety Information .................................6 5 Getting Started.................................... 92
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes .............................6 5.1 Understanding the display .................................. 92
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning ........................6 5.2 Keypad operation ............................................... 92
1.3 System design and safety of personnel ................6 5.3 Menu structure ................................................... 93
1.4 Environmental limits ..............................................6 5.4 Menu 0 ............................................................... 94
1.5 Compliance with regulations .................................6 5.5 Advanced menus ............................................... 95
1.6 Motor .....................................................................6 5.6 Changing the operating mode ............................ 96
1.7 Adjusting parameters ............................................6 5.7 Saving parameters ............................................. 96
5.8 Restoring parameter defaults ............................. 96
2 Product Information ..............................7 5.9 Parameter access level and security ................. 97
2.1 Ratings ..................................................................7 5.10 Displaying parameters with non-default values only
2.2 Model number .....................................................11 97
2.3 Operating modes .................................................11 5.11 Displaying destination parameters only ............. 98
2.4 Compatible encoders ..........................................12 5.12 Serial communications ....................................... 98
2.5 Drive features ......................................................13
2.6 Nameplate description ........................................15 6 Basic parameters ................................ 99
2.7 Options ................................................................17 6.1 Single line descriptions ...................................... 99
2.8 Items supplied with the drive ...............................20 6.2 Full descriptions ............................................... 104
3 Mechanical Installation .......................21 7 Running the motor ............................ 114

3.1 Safety information ...............................................21 7.1 Quick start Connections ................................... 114
3.2 Planning the installation ......................................21 7.2 Changing the operating mode .......................... 114
3.3 Terminal cover removal .......................................21 7.3 Quick Start commissioning/start-up ................. 118
3.4 Solutions Module / keypad installation / removal 25 7.4 Quick start commissioning/start-up (LS Soft) ... 122
3.5 Mounting methods ...............................................28 7.5 Setting up a feedback device ........................... 122
3.6 Enclosure for standard drives .............................38
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient temperature ... 8 Optimization ...................................... 126
39 8.1 Motor map parameters ..................................... 126
3.8 Heatsink fan operation ........................................40 8.2 Maximum motor rated current .......................... 136
3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high environmental 8.3 Current limits .................................................... 136
protection ............................................................40 8.4 Motor thermal protection .................................. 136
3.10 External EMC filter ..............................................44 8.5 Switching frequency ......................................... 137
3.11 Internal/heatsink mounted braking resistor .........50 8.6 High speed operation ....................................... 137
3.12 Electrical terminals ..............................................54
3.13 Routine maintenance ..........................................56 9 SMARTCARD operation ................... 139
9.1 Introduction ...................................................... 139
4 Electrical Installation ...........................57 9.2 Transferring data .............................................. 140
4.1 Power connections ..............................................57 9.3 Data block header information ......................... 142
4.2 AC supply requirements ......................................61 9.4 SMARTCARD parameters ............................... 142
4.3 Supplying the drive with DC / DC bus paralleling 62 9.5 SMARTCARD trips ........................................... 144
4.4 Heatsink fan supply .............................................62
4.5 Control 24Vdc supply ..........................................62 10 Onboard PLC ..................................... 146
4.6 Low voltage DC power supply .............................63 10.1 Onboard PLC and SYPTLite ............................ 146
4.7 Ratings ................................................................63 10.2 Benefits ............................................................ 146
4.8 Output circuit and motor protection .....................66 10.3 Limitations ........................................................ 146
4.9 Braking ................................................................68 10.4 Getting started .................................................. 147
4.10 Ground leakage ...................................................71 10.5 Onboard PLC parameters ................................ 147
4.11 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) ..................71 10.6 Onboard PLC trips ........................................... 148
4.12 Serial communications connections ....................80 10.7 Onboard PLC and the SMARTCARD .............. 148
4.13 Control connections ............................................81
4.14 Encoder connections ...........................................85
4.15 Low voltage DC mode enable and heatsink fan
supply connections (size 4 to 6) ..........................88
4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) ........89
4 Unidrive SP User Guide

www.leroy-somer.com Issue Number: b
11 Advanced parameters .......................149
11.1 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference ..............156
11.2 Menu 2: Ramps .................................................160
11.3 Menu 3: Frequency slaving, speed feedback and
speed control ....................................................163
11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control ..................168
11.5 Menu 5: Motor control .......................................172
11.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock ..........................177
11.7 Menu 7: Analog I/O ...........................................179
11.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O ............................................182
11.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary
sum and timers .................................................185
11.10 Menu 10: Status and trips .................................188
11.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up .........................189
11.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable selectors
and brake control function .................................190
11.13 Menu 13: Position control .................................196
11.14 Menu 14: User PID controller ............................202
11.15 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Solutions Module set-up 205
11.16 Menu 18: Application menu 1 ...........................229
11.19 Menu 21: Second motor parameters ................230
11.20 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up ..................232
11.21 Advanced features ............................................233
12 Technical Data ...................................242

12.1 Drive technical data ..........................................242
12.2 Optional external EMC filters ............................256
13 Diagnostics ........................................260
13.1 Trip indications ..................................................260
13.2 Alarm indications ...............................................276
13.3 Status indications ..............................................276
13.4 Displaying the trip history ..................................277
13.5 Behaviour of the drive when tripped .................277
14 UL Listing Information ......................278

14.1 Common UL information ...................................278
14.2 Power dependant UL information .....................278
14.3 AC supply specification .....................................278
14.4 Maximum continuous output current .................278
14.5 Safety label .......................................................279
14.6 UL listed accessories ........................................279
List of figures ....................................280

List of tables ......................................282
Index ...................................................284
Unidrive SP User Guide 5

Issue Number: b www.leroy-somer.com
Safety Product Mechanical Electrical Getting Basic Running SMARTCARD Onboard Advanced Technical UL Listing
Optimization Diagnostics
nformation Information Installation Installation Started parameters the motor operation PLC parameters Data Information
1 Safety Information 1.4 Environmental limits

Instructions in this User Guide regarding transport, storage, installation
1.1 Warnings, Cautions and Notes and use of the drive must be complied with, including the specified
environmental limits. Drives must not be subjected to excessive physical
force.
A Warning contains information which is essential for
avoiding a safety hazard. 1.5 Compliance with regulations
WARNING The installer is respons ble for complying with all relevant regulations,
such as national wiring regulations, accident prevention regulations and
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) regulations. Particular attention
A Caution contains information which is necessary for must be given to the cross-sectional areas of conductors, the selection
avoiding a risk of damage to the product or other equipment. of fuses or other protection, and protective earth (ground) connections.
CAUTION This User Guide contains instruction for achieving compliance with
specific EMC standards.
NOTE Within the European Union, all machinery in which this product is used
A Note contains information which helps to ensure correct operation of must comply with the following directives:
the product. 98/37/EC: Safety of machinery.
89/336/EEC: Electromagnetic Compat bility.
1.2 Electrical safety - general warning
The voltages used in the drive can cause severe electrical shock and/or 1.6 Motor
burns, and could be lethal. Extreme care is necessary at all times when Ensure the motor is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
working with or adjacent to the drive. recommendations. Ensure the motor shaft is not exposed.
Specific warnings are given at the relevant places in this User Guide. Standard squirrel cage induction motors are designed for single speed
operation. If it is intended to use the capability of the drive to run a motor
1.3 System design and safety of at speeds above its designed maximum, it is strongly recommended that
personnel the manufacturer is consulted first.
The drive is intended as a component for professional incorporation into Low speeds may cause the motor to overheat because the cooling fan
complete equipment or a system. If installed incorrectly, the drive may becomes less effective. The motor should be installed with a protection
present a safety hazard. thermistor. If necessary, an electric forced vent fan should be used.
The drive uses high voltages and currents, carries a high level of stored The values of the motor parameters set in the drive affect the protection
electrical energy, and is used to control equipment which can cause of the motor. The default values in the drive should not be relied upon.
injury. It is essential that the correct value is entered in parameter 0.46 motor
Close attention is required to the electrical installation and the system rated current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
design to avoid hazards either in normal operation or in the event of
equipment malfunction. System design, installation, commissioning/ 1.7 Adjusting parameters
start-up and maintenance must be carried out by personnel who have Some parameters have a profound effect on the operation of the drive.
the necessary training and experience. They must read this safety They must not be altered without careful consideration of the impact on
information and this User Guide carefully. the controlled system. Measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
The STOP and SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) functions of changes due to error or tampering.
the drive do not isolate dangerous voltages from the output of the drive
or from any external option unit. The supply must be disconnected by an
approved electrical isolation device before gaining access to the
electrical connections.
With the sole exception of the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
DISABLE) function, none of the drive functions must be used to
ensure safety of personnel, i.e. they must not be used for safety-
related functions.
Careful consideration must be given to the functions of the drive which
might result in a hazard, either through their intended behaviour or
through incorrect operation due to a fault. In any application where a
malfunction of the drive or its control system could lead to or allow
damage, loss or injury, a risk analysis must be carried out, and where
necessary, further measures taken to reduce the risk - for example, an
over-speed protection device in case of failure of the speed control, or a
fail-safe mechanical brake in case of loss of motor braking.
The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function has been
approved1 as meeting the requirements of EN954-1 category 3 for the
prevention of unexpected starting of the drive. It may be used in a
safety-related application. The system designer is responsible for
ensuring that the complete system is safe and designed correctly
according to the relevant safety standards.
1
Independent approval by BGIA has been given.

Information Information Installation Installation Started parameters the motor operation PLC parameters Data Information
2 Product Information
2.1 Ratings
The Unidrive SP is dual rated. Available output
The setting of the motor rated current determines which rating applies - current Overload limit -
Heavy Duty
Heavy Duty or Normal Duty.
The two ratings are compatible with motors designed to IEC60034. Maximum Overload limit -
continuous Normal Duty
The graph aside illustrates the difference between Normal Duty and current (above
Heavy Duty with respect to continuous current rating and short term 50% base
overload limits. speed) -
Normal Duty
Maximum
continuous
current -
Heavy Duty
Motor rated
current set
in the drive
Heavy Duty - wi h high Normal Duty
overload capability
Normal Duty Heavy Duty (default)

For applications which use Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction For constant torque applications or applications which require a high
motors and require a low overload capability, and full torque at low overload capability, or full torque is required at low speeds (e.g. winders,
speeds is not required (e.g. fans, pumps). hoists).
Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors require increased The thermal protection is set to protect force ventilated induction motors
protection against overload due to the reduced cooling effect of the fan and permanent magnet servo motors by default.
at low speed. To provide the correct level of protection the I2t software NOTE
operates at a level which is speed dependent. This is illustrated in the If the application uses a self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motor
graph below. and increased thermal protection is required for speeds below 50% base
NOTE speed, then this can be enabled by setting Pr 4.25 = 1.
The speed at which the low speed protection takes effect can be
changed by the setting of Pr 4.25. The protection starts when the motor
speed is below 15% of base speed when Pr 4.25 = 0 (default) and below
50% when Pr 4.25 = 1.
Operation of motor I2t protection (It.AC trip)
Motor I2t protection is fixed as shown below and is compatible with: Motor I2t protection defaults to be compatible with:
• Self ventilated (TENV/TEFC) induction motors • Forced ventilation induction motors
• Permanent magnet servo motors
Motor total Motor total

current (Pr 4.01) current (Pr 4.01)
as a percentage as a percentage
of motor rated I2t protection operates in his region of motor rated I2t protec ion operates in this region
current current
100% 100%
70% 70%
Max. permissible Max. permissible
continuous continuous
current current
Pr 4.25 = 0 Pr 4.25 = 0
Pr 4.25 = 1 Pr 4.25 = 1
15% 50% 100% Motor speed as a 50% 100% Motor speed as a

percentage of base speed percentage of base speed

The continuous current ratings given are for maximum 40 C (104 F), 1000m altitude and 3.0 kHz switching. Derating is required for higher switching
frequencies, ambient temperature >40 C (104 F) and high altitude. For further information, refer to section 12.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating
for switching frequency and temperature) on page 242.
Table 2-1 200V drive ratings (200V to 240V ±10%)

Model Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Maximum Nominal Motor Maximum Open Closed Nominal Motor
Peak
continuous power power continuous loop peak loop peak power power
LS CT current
output current at 220V at 230V output current current current at 220V at 230V
A kW hp A A A A kW hp
1M/TL 0201 2.2 3.3 3 8 (3 3)* 0.37 0.5
1.2M/TL 0202 3.1 4.6 5.4 (4.6)* 0.55 0.75
0 1.5M/TL 0203 4.0 6.0 7 0 (6 0)* 0.75 1.0
2M/TL 0204 5.7 8.5 9.9 (8 5)* 1.1 1.5
2.5M/TL 0205 7.5 11.2 13.1 (11.2)* 1.5 2.0
1.5TL 1201 5.2 1.1 1.5 5.7 4.3 6.4 7.5 0.75 1.0
2TL 1202 6.8 1.5 2.0 7.4 5.8 8.7 10.1 1.1 1.5
1 2.5TL 1203 9.6 2.2 3.0 10.5 7.5 11.2 13.1 1.5 2.0
3.5TL 1204 11 3.0 3.0 12.1 10.6 15.9 18.5 2.2 3.0
4.5TL 2201 15.5 4.0 5.0 17.0 12.6 18.9 22 3.0 3.0
2 5.5TL 2202 22 5.5 7.5 24.2 17 25.5 29.7 4.0 5.0

8TL 2203 28 7.5 10 30.8 25 37.5 43.7 5.5 7.5
11TL 3201 42 11 15 46 31 46.5 54.2 7.5 10
3
16TL 3202 54 15 20 59 42 63 73.5 11 15
22TL 4201 68 18.5 25 74 56 84 98 15 20
27TL 4202 80 22 30 88 68 102 119 18.5 25

4
33TL 4203 104 30 40 114 80 120 140 22 30
40TL 5201 130 37 50 143 105 157 183 30 40
5 50TL 5202 154 45 60 169 130 195 227 37 50
*The closed loop peak current is based on 175% of the maximum continuous output current when the drive is used on a 3 phase supply. The value in
brackets is the peak current based on 150% of the maximum continuous output current when the drive is used on a 1 phase supply.


Peak
LS CT current
1T 0401 1.3 1.9 2.2 0 37 0.5
1.2T 0402 1.7 2.5 2.9 0 55 0.75
0 1.5T 0403 2.1 3.1 3.6 0.75 1.0
2T 0404 3.0 4.5 5.2 1.1 1.5
2.5T 0405 4.2 6.3 7.3 1.5 2.0
1.5T 1401 2.8 1.1 1.5 3.0 2.1 3.1 3.6 0.75 1.0
2T 1402 3.8 1.5 2.0 4.1 3.0 4.5 5.2 1.1 2.0
2.5T 1403 5.0 2.2 3.0 5.5 4.2 6.3 7.3 1.5 3.0
1 3.5T 1404 6.9 3.0 5.0 7.5 5.8 8.7 10.1 2.2 3.0
4.5T 1405 8.8 4.0 5.0 9.6 7.6 11.4 13.3 3.0 5.0
5.5T 1406 11 5.5 7.5 12.1 9.5 14.2 16.6 4.0 5.0
8T 2401 15.3 7.5 10 16.8 13 19.5 22.7 5.5 10
11T 2402 21 11 15 23 16.5 24.7 28.8 7.5 10
2 16T 2403 29 15 20 31 25 34.5 40.2 11 20
20T 2404 29 43.5 50.7 15 20
22T 3401 35 18 5 25 38 32 48 56 15 25
27T 3402 43 22 30 47 40 60 70 18.5 30
3
33T 3403 56 30 40 61 46 69 80.5 22 30
40T 4401 68 37 50 74 60 90 105 30 50
50T 4402 83 45 60 91 74 111 129.5 37 60

4
60T 4403 104 55 75 114 96 144 168 45 75
75T 5401 138 75 100 151 124 186 217 55 100
5 100T 5402 168 90 125 184 156 234 273 75 125
120T 6401 205 110 150 225 180 231 269 90 150
6 150T 6402 236 132 200 259 210 270 315 110 150


Peak
LS CT current
3.5TM 3501 5.4 3.0 3.0 5.9 4.1 6.1 7.1 2.2 2.0
4.5TM 3502 6.1 4.0 5.0 6.7 5.4 8.1 9.4 3.0 3.0
5.5TM 3503 8.4 5.5 7.5 9.2 6.1 9.1 10.6 4.0 5.0
3 8TM
11TM
3504
3505
11
16
7.5
11
10
15
12.1
17.6
9.5
12
14 2
18
16.6
21
5.5
7.5
7.5
10
16TM 3506 22 15 20 24.2 18 27 31.5 11 15
22TM 3507 27 18.5 25 29.7 22 33 38.5 15 20
33TH 4603 36 22 30 39.6 27 40 5 47.2 18.5 25
40TH 4604 43 30 40 47.3 36 54 63 22 30
4 50TH 4605 52 37 50 57.2 43 64 5 75.2 30 40

60TH 4606 62 45 60 68 52 78 91 37 50
75TH 5601 84 55 75 92 63 93 108.5 45 60
100TH 5602 99 75 100 108 85 126 147 55 75

5
120TH 6601 125 90 125 137 100 128 149 75 100
6 150TH 6602 144 110 150 158 125 160 187 90 125
The power ratings above for model size 4 and larger are for the 690V drives when used on a 500V to 575V supply.
Peak
LS CT current
22TH 4601 22 18.5 25 24.2 19 27 31 5 15 20
27TH 4602 27 22 30 29.7 22 33 38 5 18.5 25
33TH 4603 36 30 40 39.6 27 40.5 47 2 22 30
40TH 4604 43 37 50 47.3 36 54 63 30 40
4 50TH 4605 52 45 60 57.2 43 64.5 75 2 37 50
60TH 4606 62 55 75 68.2 52 78 91 45 60
75TH 5601 84 75 100 92 63 93 108.5 55 75
5 100TH 5602 99 90 125 108 85 126 147 75 100
120TH 6601 125 110 150 137 100 128 149 90 125
6 150TH 6602 144 132 175 158 125 160 187 110 150

2.1.1 Typical short term overload limits

The maximum percentage overload limit changes depending on the selected motor. Variations in motor rated current, motor power factor and motor
leakage inductance all result in changes in the maximum possible overload. The exact value for a specific motor can be calculated using the
equations detailed in Menu 4 in the Advanced User Guide.
Typical values are shown in the table below for closed loop vector RFC mode (VT) and open loop (OL) modes:
Table 2-5 Typical overload limits for SPz and size 1 to 5
Operating mode Closed loop from cold Closed loop from 100% Open loop from cold Open loop from 100%
Normal Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 110% for 165s 110% for 9s 110% for 165s 110% for 9s
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 175% for 40s 175% for 5s 150% for 60s 150% for 8s
Heavy Duty overload with a typical 4 pole motor 200% for 28s 200% for 3s 175% for 40s 175% for 5s
Table 2-6 Typical overload limits for size 6

Operating mode Closed loop from cold Closed loop from 100% Open loop from cold Open loop from 100%
Normal Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 110% for 165s 110% for 9s 110% for 165s 110% for 9s
Heavy Duty overload with motor rated current = drive rated current 150% for 60s 150% for 8s 129% for 97s 129% for 15s
Generally the drive rated current is higher than the matching motor rated current allowing a higher level of overload than the default setting as
illustrated by the example of a typical 4 pole motor.
The time allowed in the overload region is proportionally reduced at very low output frequency on some drive ratings.
NOTE
The maximum overload level which can be attained is independent of the speed.
2.2 Model number Open loop vector mode

The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency
The way in which the model numbers for the Unidrive SP range are
except at low speed where the drive uses motor parameters to apply the
formed is illustrated below.
correct voltage to keep the flux constant under varying load conditions.
SP 1 2 04 Typically 100% torque is available down to 1Hz for a 50Hz motor.
Model : Unidrive SP Fixed V/F mode

The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the frequency
Frame size : 0 - SPz
1 - Size 1 except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided which is set by
2 - Size 2 the user. This mode can be used for multi-motor applications.
3 - Size 3
4 - Size 4 Typically 100% torque is available down to 4Hz for a 50Hz motor.
5 - Size 5
6 - Size 6 Quadratic V/F mode
7 - Size 7
The voltage applied to the motor is directly proportional to the square of
Voltage rating : 2 - 200V the frequency except at low speed where a voltage boost is provided
4 - 400V
5 - 575V which is set by the user. This mode can be used for running fan or pump
6 - 690V applications with quadratic load characteristics or for multi-motor
Indicates sub-rating within frame size applications. This mode is not suitable for applications requiring a high
2,5 T starting torque.
2.3.2 RFC mode
Rating in kVA with Heavy Duty
Rotor flux control provides closed loop control without the need for
M/TL : one phase or three phase voltage rating 200 to 240V ± 10V position feedback by using current, voltages and key motor parameters
TL : three phase voltage rating 200 to 240V ± 10V
T : three phase voltage rating 380 to 480V ± 10V to estimate the motor speed. It can eliminate instability traditionally
TM : three phase voltage rating 500 to 575V ± 10V associated with open loop control such as operating large motors with
TH : three phase voltage rating 500 to 690V ± 10V
light loads at low frequencies.
For further details, refer to section 8.1.2 RFC mode on page 128.
2.3 Operating modes 2.3.3 Closed loop vector mode
The Unidrive SP is designed to operate in any of the following modes: For use with induction motors with a feedback device installed.
1. Open loop mode The drive directly controls the speed of the motor using the feedback
Open loop vector mode device to ensure the rotor speed is exactly as demanded. Motor flux is
Fixed V/F mode (V/Hz) accurately controlled at all times to provide full torque all the way down
Quadratic V/F mode (V/Hz) to zero speed.
2. RFC mode 2.3.4 Servo
3. Closed loop vector
For use with permanent magnet brushless motors with a feedback
4. Servo
device installed.
5. Regen
The drive directly controls the speed of the motor using the feedback
2.3.1 Open loop mode device to ensure the rotor speed is exactly as demanded. Flux control is
The drive applies power to the motor at frequencies varied by the user. not required because the motor is self excited by the permanent
The motor speed is a result of the output frequency of the drive and slip magnets which form part of the rotor.
due to the mechanical load. The drive can improve the speed control of Absolute position information is required from the feedback device to
the motor by applying slip compensation. The performance at low speed ensure the output voltage is accurately matched to the back EMF of the
depends on whether V/F mode or open loop vector mode is selected. motor. Full torque is available all the way down to zero speed.
For further details refer to section 8.1.1 Open loop motor control on
page 126.

2.3.5 Regen
For use as a regenerative front end for four quadrant operation.
Regen operation allows bi-directional power flow to and from the AC
supply. This provides far greater efficiency levels in applications which
would otherwise dissipate large amounts of energy in the form of heat in
a braking resistor.
The harmonic content of the input current is negligible due to the
sinusoidal nature of the waveform when compared to a conventional
bridge rectifier or SCR/thyristor front end.
2.4 Compatible encoders

Table 2-7 Encoders compatible with Unidrive SP
Pr 3.38
Encoder type
setting
Quadrature incremental encoders with or without
Ab (0)
marker pulse
Quadrature incremental encoders with UVW
commutation signals for absolute position for Ab.SErvo (3)
permanent magnet motors with or without marker pulse
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with or
Fr (2)
without marker pulse
Forward / reverse incremental encoders with UVW
commutation signals for absolute position for Fr.SErvo (5)
Frequency and direction incremental encoders with
Fd (1)
or without marker pulse
Frequency and direction incremental encoders with
UVW commutation signals for absolute position for Fd.SErvo (4)
Sincos incremental encoders SC (6)
Heidenhain sincos encoders with Endat comms for
SC.EndAt (9)
absolute position
Stegmann sincos encoders with Hiperface comms
SC.HiPEr (7)
for absolute position
Sincos encoders with SSI comms for absolute
SC.SSI (11)
position
SSI encoders (Gray code or binary) SSI (10)
Endat comms only encoders EndAt (8)
UVW commutation only encoders* Ab.SErvo (3)
* This feedback device provides very low resolution feedback and should
not be used for applications requiring a high level of performance

2.5 Drive features

Figure 2-1 Features of the SPz drive
48V connection
(for low voltage EMC bracket
DC operation)
Ground Status LED
screw AC supply Marker tag
location
Line to Brake
ground resistor slot
varistor
screw Solutions
Keypad Module
Internal slot 2
connection
EMC cover
filter SMARTCARD
screw slot
Braking Solutions
resistor Rating Module
connections label slot 1
cover
Serial port Encoder In
connector connection
Approvals
Control label
terminals
Relay
Fan
terminal
Control cable
strain relief
Motor
connections
Ground
EMC bracket screw

Figure 2-2 Features of the size 1 to 6 drive
±DC Bus / Braking / ±DC Bus (High 48V connection / ±DC Bus (High 48V connection /
48V connection (for current) ±DC Bus (Low current) ±DC Bus (Low
low voltage operation) / Braking current) / Braking current)
SMARTCARD
slot Internal Internal Internal
Approvals label EMC
EMC EMC
Keypad filter filter filter
connection Status LED
Serial port Rating label
connector
Solutions Module
slot 1
Solutions Module
slot 2
Solutions Module
slot 3 1 2 3
Control terminals
Encoder
connection Relay terminals
AC supply / AC supply / AC supply /

motor motor motor
connections connections connections
AC
supply
Internal Power
EMC filter stage
label
DC
supply
AC
supply
Internal Power
EMC filter stage
label
DC
supply
AC
supply
Internal
EMCfilter
DC
supply
4 5 6
Motor Motor Motor

connections connections connections
Brake Low voltage DC Brake Low voltage DC Brake Low voltage DC mode
resistor mode enable resistor mode enable resistor enable / heatsink fan
supply connections
NOTE
The size 6 drive requires a 24V supply for the heatsink fan.

2.6 Nameplate description

See Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 for location of rating labels.
Figure 2-3 Typical drive rating labels for SPz
Rating label
Model Frequency Serial

number
S/N: 3000005001
Input I/P 200-240V 50-60Hz 1/3ph 13.5/7.9A
voltage O/P 0-240V SPZ 2 M/TL 3ph 5.7/5.7A Single/three
phase input current
Output voltage Motor Single/three phase
range output peak output current
Approvals label
Model Rating
Date code
SP0204 1.1kW Q26

Please read the manual before connecting
Electric Shock Risk: Wait 10 mins
between disconnecting supply
and accessing terminals
Serial S/N: 3000005001 RoHS ND. CONTROL
number SPZ 2 M/TL Compliant EQU PMENT Approvals
R
E171230
Designed in the U.K. Made in China

Figure 2-4 Typical drive rating labels for size 1 to 6 drives

Rating label (size 1 to 6)
Input voltage Input No. of Typical input

rating frequency phases current for
Normal Duty
I/P 200-240V 50-60Hz 3ph 7.1A rating
Model SP1201 S.No: 3000005001
O/P 0-240V SP 1,5 TL 4.3 / 5 2A Serial
number
Output voltage Heavy Duty / Normal Duty
range rating output current
Key to approvals
Approvals label (Size 1 to 6)
Model CE approval Europe

Heavy Duty /
Please read manual before connecting.
Normal Duty
SP1201 0.75 / 1.1kW power rating C Tick approval Australia
Electric Shock Risk: Wait 10 min between
disconnecting supply & removing covers
IND.
USA &
UL / cUL approval
CONT. Approvals Canada
SP 1,5 TL EQ.
Ser No: 3000005001 Made In U.K

Serial
number STDL25
Customer and
date code
Power stage label (Size 5 and 6 only)
Heavy Duty /
Model
Normal Duty Customer and
power rating date code
SP5402 75 / 90kW STDN39
Please read manual before connecting.
Electric Shock Risk: Wait 10 min between
disconnecting supply & removing covers
Input voltage I/P 380-480V 50-60Hz 3ph 152.0A
Output voltage O/P 0-480V 156 / 168A Approvals
Ser No: 3000005001 SP 100 T E171230
Serial
number Made In U K
Input Heavy Duty / No. of phases &

frequency Normal Duty Typical input current for
rating output current Normal Duty rating

2.7 Options
Figure 2-5 Options available with Unidrive SP
SMARTCARD*
Keypad
Internal braking
resistor (SPz, size
1 and 2 only)
Feedback Automation Fieldbus
External
footprint / CT Comms
bookcase cable
EMC filter
* A SMARTCARD is provided as standard. For further information, refer

to Chapter 9 SMARTCARD operation on page 139.
All Solutions Modules are color-coded in order to make identification easy. The following table shows the color-code key and gives further details on
their function.
Table 2-8 Solutions Module identification
Type Solutions Module Color Name Further Details
Universal Feedback interface
Feedback interface for the following devices:
Inputs Outputs
SM-Universal
Light Green • Incremental encoders • Quadrature
Encoder Plus • SinCos encoders • Frequency and direction
• SSI encoders • SSI simulated outputs
• EnDat encoders
Resolver interface
Light Blue SM-Resolver Feedback interface for resolvers.
Simulated quadrature encoder outputs
Incremental encoder interface

Feedback interface for incremental encoders without
Brown SM-Encoder Plus
Feedback commutation signals.
No simulated encoder outputs available
Incremental encoder interface
Feedback interface for incremental encoders without
SM-Encoder Output
Dark Brown commutation signals.
Plus
Simulated encoder output for quadrature, frequency and
direction signals
Drive encoder input converter
15-way D-type
N/A Provides screw terminal interface for encoder wiring and spade
converter
terminal for shield
Single ended encoder interface
Single ended
Provides an interface for single ended ABZ or UVW encoder
N/A encoder interface
signals, such as those from hall effect sensors. 15V and 24V
(15V or 24V)
versions are available.


Extended I/O interface
Increases the I/O capability by adding the following to the
existing I/O in the drive:
Yellow SM-I/O Plus
• Digital inputs x 3 • Analog output (voltage) x 1
• Digital I/O x 3 • Relay x 2
• Analog inputs (voltage) x 2
Extended I/O interface
Increase the I/O capability by adding the following to the
Automation Yellow SM-I/O 32 existing I/O in the drive:
(I/O • High speed digital I/O x 32
Expansion) • +24V output
Additional I/O
1 x Analog input (± 10V bi-polar or current modes)
Dark Yellow SM-I/O Lite
1 x Analog output (0-10V or current modes)
3 x Digital input and 1 x Relay
Additional I/O with real time clock

Dark Red SM-I/O Timer As per SM-I/O Lite but with the addition of a Real Time Clock
for scheduling drive running
Applications Processor (with CTNet)

Dark Green SM-Applications 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
application software with CTNet support
Applications Processor
White SM-Applications Lite 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
application software
Automation
(Applications) Applications Processor (with CTNet)
Moss Green
SM-Applications 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
Plus application software with CTNet support. Enhanced
performance over SM-Applications
Applications Processor
SM-Applications Lite 2nd processor for running pre-defined and /or customer created
White
V2 application software. Enhanced performance over SM-
Applications Lite


Profibus option
Purple SM-PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS DP adapter for communications with the drive
DeviceNet option
Medium Grey SM-DeviceNet
Devicenet adapter for communications with the drive
Interbus option
Dark Grey SM-INTERBUS
Interbus adapter for communications with the drive
CANopen option
Light Grey SM-CANopen
CANopen adapter for communications with the drive
Fieldbus SERCOS option

Class B compliant. Torque velocity and position control modes
Red SM-SERCOS supported with data rates (bit/s): 2MB, 4MB, 8MB and 16MB.
Minimum 250s network cycle time. Two digital high speed
probe inputs 1s for position capture
Ethernet option
10 base-T / 100 base-T; Supports web pages, SMTP mail and
Beige SM-Ethernet
multiple protocols: DHCP IP addressing; Standard RJ45
connection
EtherCAT option
Brown Red SM-EtherCAT
EtherCAT adapter for communications with the drive
LonWorks option
Pale Green SM-LON
LonWorks adapter for communications with the drive
Table 2-9 Keypad identification

Type Keypad Name Further Details
LED keypad option

SPz Keypad
Keypad with a LED display for SPz
LED keypad option

Keypad SM-Keypad
Keypad with a LED display for size 1 to 9
LCD keypad option

SM-Keypad Plus
Keypad with an alpha-numeric LCD display with Help function

2.8 Items supplied with the drive

The drive is supplied with a printed manual, a SMARTCARD, a safety information booklet, the Certificate of Quality, an accessory kit box including the
items shown in Table 2-10, and a CD ROM containing all related product documentation and software tools.
Table 2-10 Parts supplied with the drive
Description SPz Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6
Control
connectors
Relay connector
CAUTION
UL warning label Risk of Electric Shock
Power down unit 10minutes
before removing cover
Grounding
bracket
Through panel
mounting gasket
Through panel
mounting bracket
Surface
mounting
brackets
Top surface
mounting
brackets
Nylon washers M8
M6 M6 M6 M6
Sealing clips
Mounting screws
M8x20
Grounding clamp
Ground cable
bridge and M5
nuts
DC terminal
cover grommets
Ferrite ring
Supply and
motor connector
Ground mounting
screws M6x12
Fan supply
connector
IP54 gasket
IP54 insert

Information Information Installation Installation Started paramters the motor operation PLC parameters Data Information
3 Mechanical Installation 3.2.3 Cooling

The heat produced by the drive must be removed without its specified
This chapter describes how to use all mechanical details to install the operating temperature being exceeded. Note that a sealed enclosure
drive. The drive is intended to be installed in an enclosure. Key features gives much reduced cooling compared with a ventilated one, and may
of this chapter include: need to be larger and/or use internal air circulating fans.
• Through-hole mounting For further information, refer to section 3.6.2 Enclosure sizing on
• IP54 as standard or through-panel mounting page 38.
• Enclosure sizing and layout
• Solutions Module fitting
3.2.4 Electrical safety
The installation must be safe under normal and fault conditions.
• Terminal location and torque settings
Electrical installation instructions are given in Chapter 4 Electrical
3.1 Safety information Installation on page 57.
Follow the instructions

3.2.5 Fire protection
The drive enclosure is not classified as a fire enclosure. A separate fire
The mechanical and electrical installation instructions must
be adhered to. Any questions or doubt should be referred to enclosure must be provided.
the supplier of the equipment. It is the respons bility of the 3.2.6 Electromagnetic compatibility
WARNING owner or user to ensure that the installation of the drive and Variable speed drives are powerful electronic circuits which can cause
any external option unit, and the way in which they are electromagnetic interference if not installed correctly with careful
operated and maintained, comply with the requirements of attention to the layout of the wiring.
the Health and Safety at Work Act in the United Kingdom or Some simple routine precautions can prevent disturbance to typical
applicable legislation and regulations and codes of practice in
industrial control equipment.
the country in which the equipment is used.
If it is necessary to meet strict emission limits, or if it is known that
Competence of the installer electromagnetically sensitive equipment is located nearby, then full
The drive must be installed by professional assemblers who precautions must be observed. In-built into the drive, is an internal EMC
are familiar with the requirements for safety and EMC. The filter, which reduces emissions under certain conditions. If these
assembler is responsible for ensuring that the end product or conditions are exceeded, then the use of an external EMC filter may be
WARNING
system complies with all the relevant laws in the country required at the drive inputs, which must be located very close to the
where it is to be used. drives. Space must be made available for the filters and allowance made
for carefully segregated wiring. Both levels of precautions are covered in
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of section 4.11 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) on page 71.
15kg (33lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these 3.2.7 Hazardous areas
models.
The drive must not be located in a classified hazardous area unless it is
A full list of drive weights can be found in section installed in an approved enclosure and the installation is certified.
WARNING
12.1.19 Weights on page 250.
3.3 Terminal cover removal
Enclosure
The drive is intended to be mounted in an enclosure which
Isolation device
prevents access except by trained and authorized
The AC supply must be disconnected from the drive using an
personnel, and which prevents the ingress of contamination.
WARNING approved isolation device before any cover is removed from
It is designed for use in an environment classified as
WARNING
the drive or before any servicing work is performed.
pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 60664-1. This
means that only dry, non-conducting contamination is
acceptable. Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC supply has been
3.2 Planning the installation disconnected. If the drive has been energized, the AC
The following considerations must be made when planning the installation: WARNING supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work
3.2.1 Access may continue.
Access must be restricted to authorized personnel only. Safety Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal
regulations which apply at the place of use must be complied with. resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible
The IP (Ingress Protection) rating of the drive is installation dependent. that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
For further information, please refer to section 3.9 Enclosing standard from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output
drive for high environmental protection on page 40. terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the
display to go blank immediately, it is possible the capacitors
3.2.2 Environmental protection will not be discharged. In this case, consult LEROY-SOMER
The drive must be protected from: or their authorized distr butor.
• moisture, including dripping water or spraying water and
condensation. An anti-condensation heater may be required, which
3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers
must be switched off when the drive is running. SPz is not fitted with any terminal covers.
• contamination with electrically conductive material Size 1 is fitted with two terminal covers: Control and DC terminal covers.
• contamination with any form of dust which may restrict the fan, or Size 2 is fitted with three terminal covers: Control, High current DC /
impair airflow over various components Braking and low voltage DC terminal covers.
• temperature beyond the specified operating and storage ranges Size 3 is fitted with four terminal covers: Control, High current DC /
• corrosive gasses Braking, low voltage DC and AC terminal covers.
NOTE Size 4, 5 and 6 are fitted with three terminal covers: Control, input and
During installation it is recommended that the vents on the drive are output terminal covers.
covered to prevent debris (e.g. wire off-cuts) from entering the drive.

In order to provide access to the mounting holes when a size 1, 2 or 3

drive is through-panel mounted, the control terminal cover must be
removed. For size 3 the high current DC / Braking and AC terminal
covers must also be removed. Once the drive has been mounted, the
terminal covers can be replaced.
Figure 3-1 Location and identification of terminal covers
High current Low High current Low
DC DC / Braking voltage DC DC / Braking voltage DC
Input
1 2 3
Control Control AC Control
Input
Input
4 5 6
Output Control Output Control Output Control

To remove a terminal cover, undo the screw and lift the terminal cover off as shown. The control terminal cover must be removed first before the DC
(size 1) / low voltage DC (sizes 2 and 3) terminal cover can be removed.
When replacing the terminal covers the screws should be tightened with a maximum torque of 1 N m (0.7 b ft).
Figure 3-2 Removing the size 1 terminal covers
Pozi Pz2
Pozi Pz2
Pozi Pz2

Figure 3-5 Removing the size 4, 5 and 6 terminal covers (size 4 illustrated)
Pozi Pz2
3.3.2 Removing the finger-guard and DC terminal

cover break-outs
Figure 3-6 Removing the finger-guard break-outs Figure 3-7 Removing the DC terminal cover break-outs
1 2
1
All sizes
2
Sizes
1 to 3
1 2 only
1 2
Size 3
only Size 2
only
Grasp the DC terminal cover break-outs with pliers as shown (1) and
1 2
twist to remove. Continue until all required break-outs are removed (2).
Sizes 4 to 6 Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are removed. Use
only the DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the accessory box (Table 2-
10 on page 20) to maintain the seal at the top of the drive.
Grommets are available for the size 4 to 6 finger-guards. Two versions
are available allowing for either single or double cable entries. These are
not required if the optional conduit box is installed.
Place finger-guard on a flat solid surface and hit relevant break-outs with
hammer as shown (1). Continue until all required break-outs are removed
(2). Remove any flash / sharp edges once the break-outs are removed.

Figure 3-8 Size 4 to 6 finger-guard grommets
Single cable entry grommet Double cable entry grommet
The grommets are available as a kit of four grommets under the

following part numbers:
9500-0074 Kit of four single entry grommets
9500-0075 Kit of four double entry grommets
3.4 Solutions Module / keypad installation / removal
Power down the drive before installing / removing the

Solutions Module. Failure to do so may result in damage to
the product.
CAUTION
Figure 3-9 Installation of a Solutions Module on SPz
NOTE
On SPz the protective tab from the Solutions Module slot must be
removed before attempting to fit a Solutions Module.

Figure 3-10 Installation and removal of a Solutions Module on size 1 to 6

Fitting Solutions Module Removing Solutions Module Three Solutions Modules fitted
Solutions Module
B
in slot 1
A Solutions Module
in slot 2
Solu ions Module
in slot 3
A
To install the Solutions Module, press down in the direction shown above The drive has the facility for all three Solutions Module slots to be used
until it clicks into place. at the same time, as illustrated.
To remove the Solutions Module, press inwards at the points shown (A) NOTE
and pull in the direction shown (B). It is recommended that the Solutions Module slots are used in the
following order: slot 3, slot 2 and slot 1.
Figure 3-11 Installation of a keypad on SPz

Figure 3-12 Installation and removal of a keypad on size 1 to 6

Fitting keypad Removing keypad
To install, align the keypad and press gently in the direction shown until it
clicks into position.
To remove, while pressing the tabs inwards (A), gently lift the keypad in
the direction indicated (B).
NOTE
The keypad can be installed / removed while the drive is powered up and
running a motor, providing that the drive is not operating in keypad
mode.

3.5 Mounting methods Unidrive SP size 1 to 6 units can be either surface or through-panel
mounted using the appropriate brackets. SPz can only be surface
SPz can be mounted using a DIN rail, either fixed at the top or the mounted.
bottom of the drive (as illustrated in Figure 3-13). Two screws are
required to fix the drive to the backplate at the opposite end to the DIN The following drawings show the dimensions of the drive and mounting
holes for each method to allow a back plate to be prepared.
rail.
Figure 3-13 Mounting the SPz using a DIN rail If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of
time, the heatsink can reach temperatures in excess of 70°C
(158°F). Human contact with the heatsink should be
WARNING
prevented.
Many of the drives in this product range weigh in excess of

15kg (33lb). Use appropriate safeguards when lifting these
models.
A full list of drive weights can be found in section
47mm (1.85in) WARNING
12.1.19 Weights on page 250.
312.7mm
(12.31in)
3.5.1 Surface mounting

Figure 3-14 Surface mounting the SPz drive
47mm
226mm (8.9in) 7.5mm
(1.85in)
(0.3in)
220mm (8.66in)
322mm 249.7mm 292mm 304mm

(12.68in) (9.83in) (11.49in) (11.96in)
226mm (8.9in)
∅5.4mm (0.21in) 6mm
62mm 229mm (9.02in) (0.24in)
M5
(2.44in)

Figure 3-15 Surface mounting the size 1 drive

100mm 219mm
(3 937in) (8.622in)
40.05.0mm
(1 5750.197in)
 6.5mm
(0.256in)
30 0mm
(1.181in)
368mm 386mm
370.01.0mm
(14.488in) (15.197in)
(14 5670.039in)
 6.5mm
(0.256in)

219mm
155mm (8.622in)
(6.102in)
1061.0mm
4.1730 039in
 6.5mm
(0.256in)
24.5mm
(0.965in)
368mm
(14.488in) 337.51.0mm
371.6mm
(14 630in) (13 2870.039in)
21mm (0 827in)
 6 5mm
(0 256in)


250mm (9.843in) 260mm (10.236in)
1061 0mm
(4.1730 039in) 6.5mm
(0.256in)
97mm 47mm
(3 819in) (1.850in)
368mm
(14.488in) 3271 0mm
361mm
(14.213in) (12 8740.039in)
21mm (0.827in)
6.5mm
(0.256in)
310mm (12.205in) 298mm (11.732in) 258.60.5mm

(10.1810.020in)
8 5mm
(0.335in)
25.70.5mm
(1.0120.020in)
528.8
510mm 546.8mm 0.5mm
(20.079in) (21.528in) (20.819
0 020in)
18.4mm (0.724in)
8 5mm
(0.335in)

310mm (12.205in) 298mm (11.732in) 258 60.5mm

(10.1810.020in) 8.5mm
(0.335in)
25.70.5mm
(1.0120.020in)
820mm 857 3mm 839.3

(32.283in) (33.752in) 0 5mm
(33 043
0 020in)
18.4mm (0.72in)
8.5mm
(0.335in)


258.6 ±0.5mm
310mm (12.205in) 298mm (11.732in) (10.181 ±0.020in) 8 5mm
(0 335in)
18 9mm (0.744in)
25.7 ±0.5mm
(1.012 ±0.020in)
1131mm 1168.8mm 1150.8 ±0 5mm

(44.528in) (46.016in) (45.307 ±0.020in)
18 9mm (0.744in)
8 5mm
(0 335in)

3.5.2 Through-panel mounting

When the drive is through-panel mounted, the main terminal cover(s)
must be removed in order to provide access to the mounting holes. Once
the drive has been mounted, the terminal cover(s) can be replaced.
Figure 3-21 Through-panel mounting the size 1 drive
219mm (8.622in)
100mm 139mm (5.472in)

(3.973in) 70 00 3mm
 6.5mm
(2.7560 012in)
(0 256in)
35 0.15mm
(1.3780.006in)
15 60 5mm
93.00 5mm (0.6140.020in)
(3.6610 020in)
391mm 342mm 343.00.5mm 368.01.0mm

368mm (15.394in) (13.465in) (13 5040.020in) (14.4880 039in)
(14.488in)
 6.5mm 9.40.75mm
(0 256in) (0.3700.030in)
80mm
(3.150in)

219mm (8 622in)
155mm (6.102in) 80mm 700.3mm
139mm (5.472in) (3.150in) (2.7560.012in)
35.00.15mm 6.5mm
(1.3780.006in) (0.256in)
64.60.5mm
(2 5430 020in)
1480.5mm
(5.8270.020in)
391mm 368.01.0mm
368mm (15.394in) (14.4880.039in)
(14.488in) 293mm 2940 5mm
(11.535in)
(11.5750.020in)
9.30.5mm
(0.3660.020in) 6 5mm
(0 256in)
101.50.5mm
(3 9960.020in)


260mm (10.236in)
250mm(9 843in) 140mm (5.512in) 120mm (4.724in)
6.5mm
(0 256in)
560.5mm
(2.2050.020in)
2360.5mm
(9.2910.020in)
368mm
(14.488in)
283mm
(11.142in) 2870 5mm
(11.2990.020in)
80.3mm
(0.3150.012in)
6.5mm
(0 256in)

298mm (11.732in)
98mm
310mm (12.205in) 200mm (7 874in) (3 858in) 258 60.5mm
26 650 5mm (10.1810.020in) 8.5mm
1.0490.020in) (0.335in)
R6.5mm
(0.256in)
286.00 5mm
(11.2600 020in)
540.3
510mm 558mm 484mm 487.00 5mm 0.5mm
(20.079in) (21.969in) (19.055in) (19.1730.020in) (21.272
0.020in)
R6.5mm
(0 256in)
14.20 5mm
0.5590 020in) 8.5mm
258 60.5mm (0.335in)
(10.1810.020in)
When a size 4 is through-panel mounted, the grounding link bracket

must be folded upwards. This is required to provide a grounding point for
the grounding bracket. See section 4.11.1 Grounding hardware on
page 71 for more information.

298mm (11.732in)
310mm (12 205in) 98mm

258.60 5mm
200mm (7.874in) (3.858in) 8.5mm
(10.1810.020inm)
(0.335in)
26.70 5mm
(1.0510 020in) R6 5mm
(0.256in)
286.00.5mm
(11 2600.020in)
852 6
820mm 868mm 794.5mm 797.50.5mm 0.5mm
(32.283in) (34.173in) (31 280in) (31.3980.020in) (33.567
0.020in)
R6.5mm
(0 256in)
14 20 5mm
(0.5590 020in)
258.60.5mm 8.5mm
(10.1810.020in) (0.335in)
When a size 5 is through-panel mounted, the grounding link bracket

must be folded upwards. This is required to provide a grounding point for
the grounding bracket. See section 4.11.1 Grounding hardware on
page 71 for more information.

298mm (11.732in)
98mm 258 6±0.5mm

8.5mm
310mm (12.205in) 200mm (7.874in) (3 858in) (10.181±0 020in)
(0.335in)
27.1±0 5mm
(1 067±0 020in)
R6 5mm
(0 256in)
286.0±0 5mm
(11 260±0.020in)
1161.2
1131mm 1179.3mm 1105 6mm 1107.8±0.5mm ±0.5mm
(44 528in) (46.429in) (43 528in) (43 614±0 020in) (45.717
±0.020in)
R6.5mm
(0.256in)
13.7±0 5mm
(0 539±0 020in)
258 6±0.5mm 8.5mm

(10.181±0 020in) (0.335in)
NOTE
In order to achieve IP54 rating (NEMA 12) for through-panel mounting,
an IP54 insert must be installed (size 1 and 2) and the heatsink fan
should be replaced with an IP54 rated fan (sizes 1 to 4). Additionally, the
gasket provided should be installed between the drive and the backplate
to ensure a good seal for the enclosure. If the heatsink mounted braking
resistor is to be used with the drive through-panel mounted, refer to
section 3.11 Internal/heatsink mounted braking resistor on page 50 prior
to mounting the drive. For further information refer to section
3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high environmental protection on
page 40.

Table 3-1 Mounting brackets Figure 3-29 Location of top surface mounting brackets for size 5 and 6
Model Hole
Surface Through-panel
size size
1 x2 x1
6.5mm
2 x2 x1
(0.256in)
3 x2
4
x4
8.5mm
x4 (0.335in)
5&6
x2
To avoid damaging the through-panel mounting bracket when through-

panel mounting a size 1 or size 2, the through-panel mounting bracket
should be used to mount the top of the drive to the back plate before the
bottom of the drive is mounted to the back plate. The tightening torque
should be 4 N m (2.9 lb ft).
3.5.3 Installation of the mounting bracket on size 4,

5 and 6
Size 4, 5 and 6 use the same mounting brackets for surface and
through-panel mounting.
The mounting bracket has a long section and a short section.
Figure 3-27 Size 4, 5 and 6 mounting bracket
Short section
Long section
The mounting bracket must be installed in the correct orientation with the
long section inserted into or attached to the drive and the short section is
attached to the back plate. Figure 3-28 shows the orientation of the
mounting bracket when the drive is surface and through-panel mounted.
Figure 3-28 Orientation of the size 4, 5 and 6 mounting bracket
Long section
Short section
When through-panel mounted, the mounting brackets on the left hand

side of the drive can be secured using the screws already located there.
On the right hand side, the mounting brackets are just inserted into the
slots in the chasis of the drive; no fixing screws are present here.
Size 5 and 6 also require two top mounting brackets when the drive is
surface mounted. The two brackets should be installed to the top of the
drive as shown in Figure 3-29.
The maximum torque setting for the screws into the drive chassis is
10 N m (7.4 lb. ft).

3.6 Enclosure for standard drives

3.6.1 Enclosure layout
Please observe the clearances in the diagram below taking into account any appropriate notes for other devices / auxiliary equipment when planning
the installation.
Figure 3-30 Enclosure layout
Optional braking resistor and overload Locate optional braking

resistor external to
cubicle (preferably near to
Locate as the cubicle).
required Locate the overload protection
device as required
Enclosure
AC supply ≥100mm
contactor and (4in)
fuses or MCB
Ensure minimum clearances

are maintained for the drive A SPz and size 1: ≥ 0mm (0in)
and external EMC filter. Forced Sizes 2 to 6: ≥30mm (1.181in)
or convection air flow must not
be restricted by any object or
cabling
A A
The external EMC filter can be

bookcase mounted (next to the Note
drive) or footprint mounted (with For EMC compliance:
the drive mounted onto the filter). 1) When using an external EMC
filter, one filter is required for
each drive
2) Power cabling must be at
least 100mm (4in) from the
≥100mm drive in all directions
(4in)
External
controller
Signal cables
Plan for all signal cables
to be routed at least
300mm (12in) from the
drive and any power cable
3.6.2 Enclosure sizing P

A e = -----------------------------------
1. Add the dissipation figures from section 12.1.2 Power dissipation on k  Tint – T ext 
page 245 for each drive that is to be installed in the enclosure.
Where:
2. If an external EMC filter is to be used with each drive, add the
dissipation figures from section 12.2.1 EMC filter ratings on Ae Unobstructed surface area in m2 (1 m2 = 10.9 ft2)
page 257 for each external EMC filter that is to be installed in the T
ext Maximum expected temperature in oC outside the
enclosure.
3. If the braking resistor is to be mounted inside the enclosure, add the enclosure
average power figures from for each braking resistor that is to be Tint Maximum permissible temperature in oC inside the
installed in the enclosure. enclosure
4. Calculate the total heat dissipation (in Watts) of any other equipment P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
to be installed in the enclosure. enclosure
5. Add the heat dissipation figures obtained above. This gives a figure k Heat transmission coefficient of the enclosure material
in Watts for the total heat that will be dissipated inside the enclosure. in W/m2/oC
Calculating the size of a sealed enclosure Example
The enclosure transfers internally generated heat into the surrounding To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
air by natural convection (or external forced air flow); the greater the • Two SP1406 models operating at the Normal Duty rating
surface area of the enclosure walls, the better is the dissipation • Each drive to operate at 6kHz PWM switching frequency
capability. Only the surfaces of the enclosure that are unobstructed (not • Schaffner 16 A (FS6008-16-07) external EMC filter for each drive
in contact with a wall or floor) can dissipate heat. • Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
Calculate the minimum required unobstructed surface area Ae for the • Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 C
enclosure from: • Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 C

Dissipation of each drive: 187 W (see Table 12-4 Losses @ 40°C Where:
(104°F) ambient on page 245) V Air-flow in m3 per hour (1 m3/hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
Dissipation of each external EMC filter: 9.2 W (max) (see section Text Maximum expected temperature in C outside the
12.2.1 EMC filter ratings on page 257) enclosure
Total dissipation: 2 x (187 + 9.2) =392.4 W Tint Maximum permissible temperature in C inside the
The enclosure is to be made from painted 2 mm (0.079 in) sheet steel enclosure
P Power in Watts dissipated by all heat sources in the
having a heat transmission coefficient of 5.5 W/m2/oC. Only the top, enclosure
front, and two sides of the enclosure are free to dissipate heat.
Po
The value of 5.5 W/m2/ºC can generally be used with a sheet steel k Ratio of ------
Pl
enclosure (exact values can be obtained by the supplier of the material).
Where:
If in any doubt, allow for a greater margin in the temperature rise.
P0 is the air pressure at sea level
Figure 3-31 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free to
PI is the air pressure at the installation
dissipate heat
Typically use a factor of 1.2 to 1.3, to allow also for pressure-drops in
dirty air-filters.
Example
To calculate the size of an enclosure for the following:
• Three SP1403 models operating at the Normal Duty rating
H • Each drive to operate at 6kHz PWM switching frequency
• Schaffner 10A (FS6008-10-07) external EMC filter for each drive
• Braking resistors are to be mounted outside the enclosure
• Maximum ambient temperature inside the enclosure: 40 C
• Maximum ambient temperature outside the enclosure: 30 C
D Dissipation of each drive: 101 W
W
Dissipation of each external EMC filter: 6.9 W (max)
Total dissipation: 3 x (101 + 6.9) = 323.7 W
Insert the following values:
Insert the following values:
Tint 40 C
Tint 40 C
Text 30 C
Text 30 C
k 5.5
k 1.3
P 392.4 W
P 323.7 W
The minimum required heat conducting area is then: Then:
392,4
A e = --------------------------------
5,5  40 – 30  3  1,3  323,7
V = --------------------------------------
40 – 30
2 2 2 2
= 7.135 m (77.8 ft ) (1 m = 10.9 ft )
Estimate two of the enclosure dimensions - the height (H) and depth (D), = 126.2 m3/hr (74.5 ft3 /min) (1 m3/ hr = 0.59 ft3/min)
for instance. Calculate the width (W) from:
A e – 2HD
3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient
W = -------------------------
H+D temperature
Inserting H = 2m and D = 0.6m, obtain the minimum width: Drive derating is required for operation in high ambient temperatures
7,135 –  2  2  0,6  Totally enclosing or through panel mounting the drive in either a sealed
W = ----------------------------------------------------
2 + 0,6 cabinet (no airflow) or in a well ventilated cabinet makes a significant
difference on drive cooling.
=1.821 m (71.7 in)
The chosen method affects the ambient temperature value (Trate) which
If the enclosure is too large for the space available, it can be made
should be used for any necessary derating to ensure sufficient cooling
smaller only by attending to one or all of the following:
for the whole of the drive.
• Using a lower PWM switching frequency to reduce the dissipation in
The ambient temperature for the four different combinations is defined
the drives
below:
• Reducing the ambient temperature outside the enclosure, and/or
applying forced-air cooling to the outside of the enclosure 1. Totally enclosed with no air flow (<2 m/s) over the drive
• Reducing the number of drives in the enclosure Trate = Tint + 5°C
• Removing other heat-generating equipment 2. Totally enclosed with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
Calculating the air-flow in a ventilated enclosure Trate = Tint
The dimensions of the enclosure are required only for accommodating 3. Through panel mounted with no airflow (<2 m/s) over the drive
the equipment. The equipment is cooled by the forced air flow. Trate = the greater of Text +5°C, or Tint
Calculate the minimum required volume of ventilating air from: 4. Through panel mounted with air flow (>2 m/s) over the drive
3kP Trate = the greater of Text or Tint
V = ---------------------------
T int – T ext Where:
Text = Temperature outside the cabinet
Tint = Temperature inside the cabinet
Trate = Temperature used to select current rating from tables in
Chapter 12 Technical Data .

3.8 Heatsink fan operation The main gasket should be installed as shown in Figure 3-33. Any
screws / bolts that are used for mounting should be installed with the
The drive is ventilated by an internal heatsink mounted fan. The fan nylon washers provided in the kit box to maintain a seal around the
housing forms a baffle plate, channelling the air through the heatsink screw hole. See Figure 3-36.
chamber. Thus, regardless of mounting method (surface mounting or
In order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the heatsink with size
through-panel mounting), the fitting of additional baffle plates is not
1 and 2, it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by installing the IP54
required.
insert as shown in Figure 3-34 and Figure 3-35.
Ensure the minimum clearances around the drive are maintained to
Figure 3-33 Installing the gasket
allow air to flow freely.
The heatsink fan on SPz and size 1 and 2 is a dual speed fan and on Enclosure
size 3 to 6 it is a variable speed fan. The drive controls the speed at rear wall
which the fan runs based on the temperature of the heatsink and the Drive
drive's thermal model system. The size 3 to 6 is also fitted with a variable
Gasket
speed fan to ventilate the capacitor bank.
The heatsink fan on SPz and size 1 to 5 is supplied internally by the
drive. The heatsink fan on size 6 requires an external 24Vdc supply. See
section 4.4 Heatsink fan supply on page 62 for more information.
3.9 Enclosing standard drive for high

environmental protection
An explanation of environmental protection rating is provided in section
12.1.9 IP / UL Rating on page 248.
The standard drive is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-
conductive contamination only) (NEMA 1). However, it is possible to
configure the drive to achieve IP54 rating (UL Type 12 / NEMA 12) at the
rear of the heatsink for through-panel mounting (some current derating is
required for size 1 and 2). Refer to Table 12-2.
This allows the front of the drive, along with various switchgear, to be
housed in an IP54 (UL Type 12 / NEMA 12) enclosure with the heatsink
protruding through the panel to the external environment. Thus, the
majority of the heat generated by the drive is dissipated outside the
enclosure maintaining a reduced temperature inside the enclosure. This
also relies on a good seal being made between the heatsink and the rear
of the enclosure using the gaskets provided.
For Type 12 the drive must be mounted on a flat surface of a Type
12 enclosure.
Figure 3-32 Example of IP54 (UL Type 12 / NEMA 12) through-
panel layout
IP54 (UL Type 12 / NEMA 12)

enclosure
IP20
(NEMA1)
Drive with
IP54 insert
and IP54
fan installed
Gasket
seal

Figure 3-34 Installation of IP54 insert for size 1 Figure 3-35 Installation of IP54 insert for size 2
3 3
2
Remove metal clip (1).
1 2 Push tab in the direction
shown (2) and lift hinged
baffle as shown (3)
1
Push plastic tabs in the

direction shown (1).
Push tab in the direction
shown (2), and lift hinged
4 baffle as shown (3).
5
IP54 insert
Remove IP54 insert from
IP54 insert hinged baffle by releasing
gasket clip (4). 4
6 Rotate the IP54 insert
7 o
through 180 so that the
flat side faces away from
the fan (5).
Remove the backing from 5
the IP54 insert gasket and
stick it into the recess of
the IP54 insert (6). (The
gasket can be found in
the accessories box.)
Lower IP54 insert into
position as shown (7).
Take IP54 insert from

the accessories box (4).
Lower the IP54 insert into
the ventilation hole in the
8 9 heatsink (5).
Close hinged baffle (8)
and click into position.
Replace metal clip (9).
In order to remove the IP54 insert, repeat steps (1), (2) and (3), reverse
steps (7), (6), (5) and (4) and repeat steps (8) and (9). Close hinged baffle (6)
and click into position,
ensuring tabs locate
correctly.
In order to remove the IP54 insert, repeat steps (1) (2) and (3), reverse
steps (5) and (4) and repeat step (6).

For sizes 4 to 6 it may be necessary to improve the rigidity of the through 1. Use a thicker panel for the mounting wall of the enclosure through
panel mounting surface due to the larger distance between the top and which the drive is mounted.
bottom mounting brackets and the need to maintain compression on the 2. Use an internal backplate to pull the rear wall of the enclosure up to
gasket. the drive gasket. See Figure 3-36 for details. (Nylon washers are
When the drive is mounted, if the gap between the drive flange (which supplied in the standard drive kit for sealing off any nut and bolt
the gasket rests on) and the rear wall of the enclosure is 6mm at any fixings that exit through the rear wall of the panel).
point around the drive then the following methods can be used to 3. If an internal backplate is not available a separate clamp can be
compress the gasket further: used to simulate option 2. See Figure 3-37. 4 off sealing clamps are
supplied in the drive kit box.
Figure 3-36 Option 2 for achieving IP54 (UL type 12 / NEMA 12) through-panel mounting
Backplate
Enclosure
rear wall
A
Holes equispaced along length of drive

B
2 3 4 3 4 5
1 5 6 6
2
1
A B
M8
M6
Table 3-2 Description of fixings Table 3-3 Quantity of nylon washers supplied with the drive
Item Description Size Quantity of M8 (A) Quantity of M6 (B)
1 Bolt 1 0 3
2 Flat washer 2 0 3
3 Nylon washer (from kitbox) 3 0 4
4 Flat washer 4 4 4
5 Spring washer 5 4 4
6 Nut 6 4 4

Figure 3-37 Option 3 for achieving IP54 (UL Type 12 / NEMA 12) through panel mounting
Enclosure
rear wall
Sealing
bracket
(4 places)
For increased fan lifetime in a dirty environment the heatsink fan must be Table 3-5 Power losses from the front of the drive when through-
replaced with an IP54 rated fan. Contact the supplier of the drive for panel mounted
details. If the standard fan is used in a dirty/dusty environment, reduced Frame size Power loss
fan lifetime will result. Regular cleaning of the fan and heatsink is
recommended in this environment. The heatsink fan installed in sizes 5 1 50W
and 6 are IP54 rated as standard. 2 75W
The guidelines in Table 3-4 should be followed. 3 100W
Table 3-4 Environment considerations 4 204W
5 347W
IP54
Environment Fan Comments 6 480W
Insert
Not
Clean Standard
installed
Regular cleaning
Dry, dusty (non-
Installed Standard recommended. Fan lifetime
conductive)
may be reduced.
Regular cleaning
Dry, dusty Standard /
Installed recommended. Fan lifetime
(conductive) IP54
may be reduced.
Regular cleaning
IP54 compliance Installed IP54
recommended.
NOTE
A current derating must be applied to the size 1 and 2 if the IP54 insert
and/or IP54 rated fan are installed. Derating information is provided in
section 12.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating for switching
frequency and temperature) on page 242.
Failure to do so may result in nuisance tripping.
NOTE
When designing an IP54 (NEMA 12) enclosure (Figure 3-32),
consideration should be made to the dissipation from the front of the
drive.

3.10 External EMC filter

In order to provide our customers with a degree of flexibility, external EMC filters have been sourced from two manufacturers: Schaffner & Epcos.
Filter details for each drive rating are provided in the tables below. Both the Schaffner and Epcos filters meet the same specifications.
Table 3-6 Drive EMC filter details (SPz and size 1 to 6)
Drive Schaffner Epcos
LS CT Reference Weight Reference Weight

1 phase
SPz 1M/TL to 2.5M/TL SP0201 to SP0205 FS23072-19-07 1.2 kg (2.64 lb)
3 phase
SPz 1M/TL to 2.5M/TL SP0201 to SP0205 FS23073-17-07 1.2 kg (2.64 lb)
SPz 1T to 2.5T SP0401 to SP0405 FS23074-11-07 1.2 kg (2.64 lb)
1.5TL & 2TL SP1201 & SP1202 FS6008-10-07 B84143-A10-R207
1.4 kg (3.1 lb) 2.1 kg (4.6 lb)
2.5TL & 3.5TL SP1203 & SP1204 FS6008-16-07 B84143-A16-R207
1.5T to 3.5T SP1401 to SP1404 FS6008-10-07 B84143-A10-R207
1.4 kg (3.1 lb) 2.1 kg (4.6 lb)
4.5T & 5.5T SP1405 & SP1406 FS6008-16-07 B84143-A16-R207
4.5TL to 8TL SP2201 to SP2203 FS6008-32-07 2.0 kg (4.4 lb) B84143-A32-R207 3.3 kg (7.3 lb)
8T to 20T SP2401 to SP2404 FS6008-32-07 2.0 kg (4.4 lb) B84143-A32-R207 3.3 kg (7.3 lb)
11TL to 16TL SP3201 & SP3202 FS6008-75-07 3.5 kg (7.7 lb) B84143-A75-R207 5.1 kg (11.2 lb)
22TL to 33TL SP4201 to SP4203 FS6008-101-35 4.0 kg (8.8 lb) B84143-A101-R207 7.8 kg (17.2 lb)
40TL & 50TL SP5201 & SP5202 FS6008-164-40 6.8 kg (15.0 lb) B84143-A165-R207 12.0 kg (26.5 b)
22T to 33T SP3401 to SP3403 FS6008-62-07 B84143-A75-R207
3.5 kg (7.7 lb) 5.1 kg (11.2 lb)
3.5TM to 22TM SP3501 to SP3507 FS6008-30-07 B84143-A30-R207
40T to 60T SP4401 to SP4403 FS6008-101-35 4.0 kg (8.8 lb) B84143-A101-R207 7.8 kg (17.2 lb)
22TH to 60TH SP4601 to SP4606 FS6008-58-53 3.8 kg (8.4 lb) B84143-A58-R207 8.0 kg (17.6 lb)
75T & 100T SP5401 & SP5402 FS6008-164-40 6.8 kg (15.0 lb) B84143-A165-R207 12.0 kg (26.5 b)
75TH & 100TH SP5601 & SP5602 FS6008-95-35 4.4 kg (9.7 lb) B84143-A95-R207 10.0 kg (22.0 b)
120T & 150T SP6401 & SP6402 FS6008-260-99 B84143-A260-S207
5.25 kg (11.6 lb) 8.6 kg (19.0 lb)
120TH & 150TH SP6601 & SP6602 FS6008-160-99 B84143-A0160-S207
The external EMC filters for SPz and size 1 to 3 can be footprint or bookcase mounted, see Figure 3-38 and Figure 3-39. The external EMC filters for
sizes 4 to 6 are designed to be mounted above the drive, as shown in Figure 3-40.
Mount the external EMC filter following the guidelines in section 4.11.5 Compliance with generic emission standards on page 77.
Figure 3-38 Footprint mounting the EMC Figure 3-39 Bookcase mounting the EMC Figure 3-40 Size 4 to 6 mounting of EMC
filter filter filter

Figure 3-41 SPz external EMC filter
359mm (14.13in)
339mm (13.35in)
304mm (11.97in)
M5 M5 38mm 61mm
(1.50in) (2.40in)
∅ 5.3mm (M5) ∅ 5.3mm (M5)

(0.21in) Torque settings of connector = 0.8 N m (0.21in)
29mm (1.14in)
Figure 3-42 Size 1 external EMC filter

A
Y
Z
3
X
2
W C X
V
Y Z
Cable size:
2
B 2.5mm
14AWG
H
D Y Z
V: Ground stud: M5
X: M6 threaded holes for footprint mounting of the drive
Y: Footprint mounting holes 6.5mm (0.256in)
Z: Bookcase mounting holes 6.5mm (0.256in)
All filter mounting holes are suitable for M6 fasteners.
Reference Manufacturer A B C D H W
FS6008-10-07 440 mm
Schaffner
FS6008-16-07 390 mm 423 mm 74 mm 45 mm (17.323 in) 100 mm
B84143-A10-R207 (15.354 in) (16.654 in) (2.913 in) (1.772 in) 450 mm (3.937 in)
Epcos
B84143-A16-R207 (17.717 in)

Z
Y
L3
L1
W C X
L2
X L2
L3'
L1
Cable size:
Y V 4mm2
Z 10AWG
D E Y Z
V: Ground stud: M5
Z: Bookcase mounting slots 6.5mm (0.256in) wide
All filter mounting holes are suitable for M6 fasteners.
Reference Manufacturer A B C D E H W
428.5 mm
FS6008-32-07 Schaffner
371.5 mm 404.5 mm 125 mm 55 mm 30 mm (16.870 in) 155 mm
(14.626 in) (15.925 in) (4.921 in) (2.165 in) (1.181 in) 431.5 mm (6.102 in)
B84143-A32-R207 Epcos
(16.988 in)

Z
Y
X X
W C
Cable size:
16mm2
Y 6AWG
Z
D E Z
V: Ground stud: M6
Z: Bookcase mounting slots 6.5mm (0.256in) wide
Reference Manufacturer A B C D E H W
FS6008-62-07
361 mm 414 mm
FS6008-75-07 Schaffner
(14.213 in) 396 mm 210 mm 60 mm 30 mm (16.299 in) 250 mm
FS6008-30-07
(15.591 in) (8.268 in) (2.362 in) (1.181 in) (9.843 in)
B84143-A75-R207 365 mm 425 mm
Epcos
B84143-A30-R207 (14.370 in) (16.732 in)

Figure 3-45 Size 4 and 5 external EMC filter
Schaffner
Epcos
W
C
A
H
D E
V: Ground stud: M10

Z: Bookcase mounting slots 6.5mm (0.256in wide)
Reference Manufacturer A B C D E F H W
225 mm
FS6008-101-35
100 mm 65 mm (8.858 in)
(3.937 in) (2.559 in) 208 mm
FS6008-58-53
170 mm 1.5 mm (8.189 in)
Schaffner
(6.693 in) 120 mm 85 mm (0.059in) 249 mm
FS6008-164-40
(4.724 in) (3.346 in) (9.803 in)
260 mm 275 mm 100 mm 65 mm 300 mm 225 mm
FS6008-95-35
(10.236 in) (10.827 in) (3.937 in) (2.559 in) (11.811 in) (8.858 in)
207 mm
B84143-A101-R207
150 mm 90 mm 65 mm 2 mm (8.150 in)
(5.906 in) (3.543in) (2.559 in) (0.079 in) 205 mm
B84143-A58-R207 Epcos
(8.071 in)
B84143-A165-R207 170 mm 120 mm 85 mm 1 mm 249 mm
B84143-A95-R207 (6.693 in) (4.724 in) (3.346 in) (0.039 in) (9.803 in)

D
C
G I
Z Z
W Z E
Z
V
Z Z
V: Ground stud: M10

Z: Hole size: Æ10.5mm
CT part no. Manufacturer A B C D E F G H I J W

295 mm
66 mm
FS6008-260-99 (11.614
(2.958 in)
191 mm 110 mm 136 mm 38 mm in)
Schaffner
(7.717 in) (4.331 in) (5.354 in) (1.496 in) 357 mm
140 mm 210 mm 2 mm 128 mm 53.5 mm 230 mm
FS6008-160-99 (14.055
(5.512 in) (8.268 in) (0.079in) (5.039 in) (2.106 in) (9.055 in)
in)
B84143-A260-S207 364 mm
200 mm 108 mm 147 mm 36.5 mm 127 mm
Epcos (14.331
B84143-A0160-S207 (7.874 in) (4.252 in) (5.787 in) (1.437 in) (5.000 in)
in)

3.11 Internal/heatsink mounted braking resistor

3.11.1 SPz internal braking resistor
The SPz has been designed to accommodate an optional internal resistor. When the internal resistor is used, an external thermal protection device is
not required as the resistor is designed such that it will fail safely under fault conditions. The in-built software overload protection is set up at default to
protect the resistor.
Figure 3-47 Fitting an optional internal braking resistor (top view of drive)
Brake
connections
Thermistor
2 connector
3
4 5
1. Remove screws
2. Remove grill
3. Fit the optional internal braking resistor in the slot provided and electrically connect the braking resistor (connections shown in Figure 4-1 on
page 57). Ensure that the braking resistor thermistor is connected to the drive
4. Locate the braking resistor onto the drive tab
5. Refit the grill and mounting screws by reversing the procedure in points 1 and 2

3.11.2 Size 1 and 2 heatsink mounted braking resistor
If the drive has been used at high load levels for a period of time, the heatsink and heatsink mounted braking resistor can reach
temperatures in excess of 70°C (158°F). Human contact with the heatsink and heatsink mounted braking resistor should be prevented.
WARNING
To avoid the risk of fire when the drive is surface mounted with the braking resistor installed, the back plate should be a non-flammable
material.
WARNING
The size 1and 2 have been designed with an optional space-saving heatsink mounted resistor. The resistor can be installed within the heatsink fins
of the drive. When the heatsink mounted resistor is used, an external thermal protection device is not required as the resistor is designed such that
it will fail safely under fault conditions. The in-built software overload protection is set up at default to protect the resistor. The resistor is rated to
IP54 (NEMA12).
If the drive is to be through-panel mounted with the heatsink mounted brake resistor installed, then the aperture in the panel through which the
drive is mounted must be modified as shown in Figure 3-48 and Figure 3-49. This is in order to allow for the braking resistor cables and grommets.
Figure 3-48 Through-panel mounting cut-out details for size 1 Figure 3-49 Through-panel mounting cut-out details for size 2
60mm 115mm
(2.362in) (4.528in)
15.0mm
15.0mm (0.591in)
(0.591in)
15.6mm 66mm 6.5mm
(0.614in) (2.598in) (0.256in)
6.5mm
(0.256in)
93mm
(3.661in)
148mm
(5.827in)
The part numbers for the resistor kits are as follows: Each kit contains the following:
Size 1: 1220-2756-01 • A braking resistor assembly
Size 2: 1220-2758-01 • A through-panel grommet
• An installation sheet
• A wire clip (Size 2 only)
3.11.3 Size 1 braking resistor fitting instructions
Figure 3-50 Fitting the heatsink mounted braking resistor on size 1
• Remove both terminal covers as detailed in section
3.3.1 Removing the terminal covers on page 21.
• Remove the two break-outs that line-up with the BR and +DC
terminal connections as detailed in section 3.3.2 Removing the
finger-guard and DC terminal cover break-outs on page 24.
• Install the braking resistor to the heatsink as shown in Figure 3-50.
The resistor is installed with captive screws.
• The screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 2 N m
(1.5 lb ft).
• Ensure the cables are routed between the fins of the heatsink, and
that the cables are not trapped between heatsink fins and the
resistor.
Figure 3-51 Connecting the brake resistor on a surface mounted size 1

• Install the DC terminal cover grommets supplied in the accessory
box with the drive, to the cables. To ensure a good seal, the
grommets are a tight fit. Lubrication may be required to help install
the grommets to the cables.
• Terminate the cables with suitable crimps and connect to the BR
and +DC terminals. Tighten the screw terminals to a maximum
torque of 1.5 Nm (1.1 lb ft).
• Replace both terminal covers.

Figure 3-52 Connecting the brake resistor on a through-panel mounted size 1

• See Figure 3-48 for through-panel mounting cut-out details.
• Pass the cables through the hole in the panel and install the
through-panel grommet.
• Install the through-panel mounting bracket.
and +DC terminals. Tighten the screw terminals to a maximum
torque of 1.5 Nm (1.1 lb ft).
• Replace both terminal covers.
3.11.4 Size 2 braking resistor fitting instructions

Figure 3-53 Removing the baffle plate on a size 2
3
• Remove the DC cover as detailed in section 3.3.1 Removing the
2 terminal covers on page 21.
• Remove the two break-outs that line-up with the BR and +DC
terminal connections as detailed in section 3.3.2 Removing the
1 finger-guard and DC terminal cover break-outs on page 24.
• Lift the hinged fan baffle by pushing plastic tabs in the direction
shown (1). Push tab in the direction shown (2), and lift the baffle as
1 shown (3).
• Remove the metal heatsink baffle plate by removing the two
screws. These two screws are no longer required.
Figure 3-54 Modifying the fan baffle on a size 2

• Remove 5mm (0.197in) from the length of the clip on the plastic
Remove 5mm
(0.197in) from fan baffle.
the length
of this clip
Figure 3-55 Fitting the heatsink mounted braking resistor on a size 2

• Install clip to heatsink in the position shown in diagram opposite.
Route the long cables of the resistor assembly between the fins of
Route the cables the heatsink as shown in Figure 3-55.
between these
two heatsink fins • Install the heatsink baffle plate in place with the cables routed
underneath. Ensure the cables are not trapped between a
heatsink fin and the baffle plate.
• Install the braking resistors to the heatsink. The resistors are
installed with captive screws.
• The screws should be tightened to a maximum torque of 2.0 N m
(1.5 lb ft).
• Close the hinged fan baffle.
• Install cables to heatsink clip.

Figure 3-56 Connecting the brake resistor on a surface mounted size 2

and DC2 terminals.
• Replace the terminal cover.
Figure 3-57 Connecting the brake resistor on a through-panel mounted size 2

• See Figure 3-49 for through-panel mounting cut-out details.
• Pass the cables through the hole in the panel and install the hole
grommet.
• Install the mounting bracket.
and DC2 terminals.
• Replace the terminal cover.
3.11.5 Braking resistor overload protection parameter settings

Failure to observe the following information may damage the resistor.
The drive’s software contains an overload protection function for a braking resistor. On size 1 and 2 this function is enabled at default to
protect the heatsink mounted resistor. Below are the parameter settings.
CAUTION
Parameter 200V drive 400V drive
Full power braking time Pr 10.30 0.04 0.02
Full power braking period Pr 10.31 3.3
SPz Size 1 and 2

Parameter
200V drive 400V drive 200V drive 400V drive
Full power braking time Pr 10.30 0.06 0.01 0.04 0.02
Full power braking period Pr 10.31 2.6 1.7 3.3
For more information on the braking resistor software overload protection, see the Advanced User Guide.
If the heatsink mounted braking resistor is to be used at more than half of its average power rating then the drive's cooling fan must be
set to full speed by setting Pr 6.45 to On (1).
See section 4.9.1 Heatsink mounted braking resistor on page 68 for the
resistor specifications.

3.12 Electrical terminals

3.12.1 Location of the power and ground terminals
Figure 3-58 Locations of the power and ground terminals
AC input / Internal EMC Internal EMC Internal EMC
Low voltage DC / Ground Low voltage DC/ filter ground DC high Low filter ground DC high Low filter ground
Brake connection DC supply/Brake connection current current DC connection current current DC connection
Pozi Pozi
Pozi Pz 2 T30 Torx Pozi Pz 2 T20 Torx T20 Torx Pozi Pz 3 Pozi Pz 2 T20 Torx
Pz 2 Pz 2
0 1 2 3
Control
terminals
2.5mm
Relay
terminals
2.5mm
Pozi Pz 3
Pozi Pz 2 T30 Torx Pozi Pz 2 Pozi Pz 2 AC power
AC output/ Ground terminals
AC power AC power
DC input connections
terminals terminals AC input / DC input
M10 nut
17mm AF
1-6
Control terminals
2.5mm Relay terminals
3mm AC input / DC input
M10 nut
17mm AF
Ground Ground
connections connections
8mm AF 8mm AF
AC input / DC input
M10 nut
17mm AF
4 5 6
M10 nut 2.5mm M10 nut 2.5mm M10 nut 2.5mm

17mm AF 17mm AF 17mm AF
AC output/ Low voltage AC output/ Low voltage AC output/ Low voltage DC
Brake DC enable Brake DC enable Brake enable / Heatsink
fan supply

3.12.2 Terminal sizes and torque settings Table 3-11 Schaffner external EMC filter terminal data (size 1 to 6)
Power Ground
To avoid a fire hazard and maintain validity of the UL listing, connections connections
Reference
adhere to the specified tightening torques for the power and Max cable Ground
Max torque Max torque
ground terminals. Refer to the following tables. size stud size
WARNING
FS6008-10-07 4mm2 0.8 N m 3.5 N m
M5
Table 3-7 Drive control and relay terminal data FS6008-16-07 12AWG (0.6 b ft) (2.6 lb ft)
Model Connection type Torque setting FS6008-32-07 10mm2 2Nm
M5
3.5 N m
8AWG (1.5 b ft) (2.6 lb ft)
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m (0.4 b ft)
FS6008-62-07
Table 3-8 Drive power terminal data FS6008-75-07 16mm2 2.2 N m
M6
3.9 N m
6AWG (1.6 b ft) (2.9 lb ft)
High current FS6008-30-07
Model Low voltage Ground
AC terminals DC and
size DC terminal FS6008-101-35 50mm2 8Nm
M10
25 N m
braking (5.9 b ft) (18.4 b ft)
0AWG
Screw (M6)
Terminal block
FS6008-58-53 25mm2 2.3 N m
M6
3.9 N m
SPz 4.0 N m
1.0 N m (0.73 b ft) 4AWG (1.7 b ft) (2.9 lb ft)
(2.9 lb ft)
Terminal block (M4 screws) FS6008-164-40 95mm2 20 N m
M10
25 N m
1 4/0AWG (14.7 lb ft) (18.4 b ft)
1.5 N m (1.1 b ft)
Plug-in
Terminal Stud (M5)
FS6008-95-35 50mm2 8Nm
M10
25 N m
terminal block
block Terminal 4.0 N m 0AWG (5.9 b ft) (18.4 b ft)
1.5 N m
2 (M5 screws) block (2.9 lb ft) FS6008-260-99 25 N m
(1.1 lb ft) M10
1.5 N m (M4 screws) FS6008-160-99 (18.4 b ft)
(1.1 lb ft) 1.5 N m
Terminal block (M6 screws) (1.1 lb ft) 6.0 N m Table 3-12 Epcos external EMC Filter terminal data
3
2.5 N m (1.8 lb ft) (4.4 lb ft)
Power Ground
4 M10 stud M10 stud connections connections
5 15 N m 12 N m Reference
Max cable Max Ground Max
6 (11.1 lb ft) (8.8 lb ft)
size torque stud size torque
Torque tolerance 10% B84143-A16-R207 4mm2 0.6 N m
M5
3.0 N m
Table 3-9 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes B84143-A10-R207 12AWG (0.4 b ft) (2.2 lb ft)
Model size Terminal block description Max cable size B84143-A32-R207 10mm2 1.35 N m
M5
3.0 N m
8AWG (1.0 b ft) (2.2 lb ft)
All 11 way control connectors 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG)
16mm2 2.2 N m
All 2 way relay connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) B84143-A75-R207
(1.6 b ft)
6AWG 5.1 N m
1 and 2 6 way AC power connector 8 mm2 (8 AWG) M6
10mm 2 1.35 N m (3.8 lb ft)
B84143-A30-R207
4, 5 and 6 Low Voltage DC Enable connector 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) 8AWG (1.0 b ft)
6 Heatsink fan supply connector 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) B84143-A101-R207 50mm2 6.8 N m
B84143-A58-R207 0AWG (5.0 b ft)
The maximum cable size for the power terminals on Unidrive SP SPz is
B84143-A165-R207 95mm2 20 N m 10 N m
4mm2 (10 AWG). M10
B84143-A95-R207 4/0AWG (14.7 lb ft) (7.4 lb ft)
Table 3-10 Schaffner external EMC filter terminal data (SPz)
B84143-A260-S207
Power and ground connections
Reference B84143-A0160-S207
Max cable size Max torque
FS23072-19-07
FS23073-17-07 4mm2 0.8 N m
12AWG (0.6 lb ft)
FS23074-11-07

3.13 Routine maintenance

The drive should be installed in a cool, clean, well ventilated location.
Contact of moisture and dust with the drive should be prevented.
Regular checks of the following should be carried out to ensure drive /
installation reliability are maximised:
Environment
Ensure the enclosure temperature remains at
Ambient temperature
or below maximum specified
Ensure the drive remains dust free – check that
the heatsink and drive fan are not gathering
Dust
dust. The lifetime of the fan is reduced in dusty
environments.
Ensure the drive enclosure shows no signs of
Moisture
condensation
Enclosure
Enclosure door Ensure filters are not blocked and that air is free
filters to flow
Electrical
Screw connections Ensure all screw terminals remain tight
Ensure all crimp terminals remains tight –
Crimp terminals check for any discoloration which could indicate
overheating
Cables Check all cables for signs of damage

4 Electrical Installation 4.1 Power connections

Many cable management features have been incorporated into the 4.1.1 AC and DC connections
product and accessories, this chapter shows how to optimize them. Key Figure 4-1 SPz power connections
features include:
SP020X = 200 to 240V10%
• SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function SP040X = 380 to 480V10%
• Internal EMC filter Mains
• EMC compliance with shielding / grounding accessories Connectors specification: Supply supply
Maximum size of power cable ground
• Product rating, fusing and cabling information = 4.0mm2(10AWG) L1 L2 L3
• Brake resistor details (selection / ratings) Torque setting = 1 N m
Electric shock risk

The voltages present in the following locations can cause
severe electric shock and may be lethal:
WARNING
• AC supply cables and connections Fuses
• DC and brake cables, and connections
• Output cables and connections
• Many internal parts of the drive, and external option units Optional
line reactor
Unless otherwise indicated, control terminals are single
insulated and must not be touched.
Op ional EMC
Low voltage
filter
Isolation device DC (48V)
The AC supply must be disconnected from the drive using
an approved isolation device before any cover is removed
+ _
from the drive or before any servicing work is performed. PE L1 L2 L3
WARNING
AC
STOP function connections
The STOP function does not remove dangerous voltages *This is not
from the drive, the motor or any external option units. required if he
op ional internal
WARNING
braking resistor
is used
SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function
The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function
does not remove dangerous voltages from the drive, the
WARNING
motor or any external option units.
Stored charge
The drive contains capacitors that remain charged to a
potentially lethal voltage after the AC supply has been
disconnected. If the drive has been energized, the AC
WARNING supply must be isolated at least ten minutes before work
may continue.
Normally, the capacitors are discharged by an internal
resistor. Under certain, unusual fault conditions, it is possible
that the capacitors may fail to discharge, or be prevented
from being discharged by a voltage applied to the output U V W DC
_ DC
+
terminals. If the drive has failed in a manner that causes the
display to go blank immediately, it is poss ble the capacitors
will not be discharged. In this case, consult LEROY-SOMER High current
-DC connections
or their authorized distributor.
Equipment supplied by plug and socket

Special attention must be given if the drive is installed in
equipment which is connected to the AC supply by a plug
and socket. The AC supply terminals of the drive are
WARNING connected to the internal capacitors through rectifier diodes
which are not intended to give safety isolation. If the plug
terminals can be touched when the plug is disconnected
from the socket, a means of automatically isolating the plug When using a 200V Unidrive SP SPz on a single-phase supply, the live
from the drive must be used (e.g. a latching relay). and neutral conductors can be connected to any of the AC input
connections on the drive.
Permanent magnet motors
Permanent magnet motors generate electrical power if they
are rotated, even when the supply to the drive is
disconnected. If that happens then the drive will become
WARNING
energized through its motor terminals.
If the motor load is capable of rotating the motor when the
supply is disconnected, then the motor must be isolated from
the drive before gaining access to any live parts.

Figure 4-2 Size 1 power connections Figure 4-3 Size 2 power connections
DC Connections DC Connections DC Connections

(High current DC and braking) (Low current DC and 48V)
Thermal
overload
protection
device
48V -DC +DC BR DC1 DC2 BR 48V -DC +DC

DC1 = -
Internal DC2 = + Internal
EMC filter EMC filter
1 2
AC Connections AC Connections
PE L1 L2 L3 U V W PE L1 L2 L3 U V W
Optional EMC Optional EMC

filter filter
Optional Optional
line reactor line reactor
Fuses Fuses
Motor Motor
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Optional ground Optional ground
Supply Mains connection Supply Mains connection
Ground Supply Ground Supply
If the heatsink mounted resistor is used (size 1 and 2 only), an overload

protection device is not required. The resistor is designed to fail safely
under fault conditions.
See Figure 4-6 for further information on ground connections.

Figure 4-4 Size 3 power connections Figure 4-5 Size 4, 5 and 6 power connections
Input connections
DC Connections DC Connections Mains
Supply
(High current DC and braking) (Low current DC and 48V) Supply
ground
L1 L2 L3
Thermal
overload
protection
device
Fuses
Optional
line reactor
DC1 DC2 BR 48V -DC +DC

Optional
DC1 = - EMC filter
DC2 = + Internal
EMC filter
L1 L2 L3
PE +DC -DC
* Internal
EMC filter
AC Connections
456
L1 L2 L3 PE U V W
Optional EMC
filter
Size 6 only:
Heatsink
fan supply
Optional Output connections connections**
line reactor
U V W
Fuses
*
+DC BR
Motor
L1 L2 L3 Thermal
Optional ground overload
Mains Supply connection protection
Supply Ground device
On size 2 and 3, the high current DC connections must always be used

when using a braking resistor, supplying the drive from DC (low voltage DC Motor
or high voltage DC) or using the drive in a parallel DC bus system. The low
Optional ground
current DC connection is used to connect low voltage DC to the drive connection
internal power supply and to connect the internal EMC filter.
* See section 4.1.2 Ground connections .
See Figure 4-7 for further information on ground connections. ** See section 4.4 Heatsink fan supply on page 62 for more information.

4.1.2 Ground connections Figure 4-6 Size 2 ground connections

SPz
On a SPz, the supply and motor ground connections are made using an
M6 screw at the top (supply) and bottom (motor) of the drive. See Figure
4-1 on page 57.
Size 1
On a size 1, the supply and motor ground connections are made using
the studs located either side of the drive near the plug-in power
connector. Refer to Figure 4-2 on page 58.
Size 2
the grounding bridge that locates at the bottom of the drive. See Figure
4-6 for details.
Size 3
an M6 nut and bolt that locates in the fork protruding from the heatsink
between the AC supply and motor output terminals. See Figure 4-7 for
details.
Size 4, 5 and 6
On a size 4, 5 and 6, the supply and motor ground connections are
made using an M10 bolt at the top (supply) and bottom (motor) of the
drive. See Figure 4-8 on page 61.
The supply ground and motor ground connections to the drive are
connected internally by a copper conductor with a cross-sectional area
given below: Figure 4-7 Size 3 ground connections
Size 4: 19.2mm2 (0.03in2, or slightly bigger than 6 AWG)
Size 5: 60mm2 (0.09in2, or slightly bigger than 1 AWG)
Size 6: 75mm2 (0.12in2, or slightly bigger than 2/0 AWG)
This connection is sufficient to provide the ground (equipotential
bonding) connection for the motor circuit under the following conditions:
To standard Conditions
Supply phase conductors having cross-sectional area
not exceeding:
IEC 60204-1 & Size 4: 38.4mm2
EN 60204-1
Size 5: 120mm2
Size 6: 150mm2
Supply protection device rating not exceeding:
Size 4: 200A
NFPA 79
Size 5: 600A
Size 6: 1000A
If the necessary conditions are not met, an additional ground connection
must be provided to link the motor circuit ground and the supply ground.
Plain washers
Spring washer
M6 bolt

Figure 4-8 Size 4, 5 and 6 ground connections Operation with IT (ungrounded) supplies:
Special attention is required when using internal or external
Supply EMC filters with ungrounded supplies, because in the event
ground
of a ground (earth) fault in the motor circuit the drive may not
WARNING
trip and the filter could be over-stressed. In this case, either
the filter must not be used (removed) or additional
independent motor ground fault protection must be provided.
Refer to Table 4-1.
For instructions on removal, refer to Figure 4-22 Removal of
internal EMC filter and line to ground varistors (SPz) , Figure
4-23 Removal of internal EMC filter (size 1 to 3) and Figure
4-24 Removal of internal EMC filter (sizes 4 to 6) on
page 74.
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of
the drive.
A ground fault in the supply has no effect in any case. If the motor must
continue to run with a ground fault in its own circuit then an input
isolating transformer must be provided and if an EMC filter is required it
must be located in the primary circuit.
Unusual hazards can occur on ungrounded supplies with more than one
source, for example on ships. Contact the supplier of the drive for more
information.
Motor Table 4-1 Behaviour of the drive in the event of a motor circuit
ground ground (earth) fault with an IT supply
Drive size Internal filter only External filter (with internal)
The ground loop impedance must conform to the
requirements of local safety regulations. SPz May not trip – precautions
Drive trips on fault
(200V) required
The drive must be grounded by a connection capable of
carrying the prospective fault current until the protective SPz
WARNING Drive trips on fault Drive trips on fault
device (fuse, etc.) disconnects the AC supply. (400V)
The ground connections must be inspected and tested at 1 and 2 Drive trips on fault Drive trips on fault
appropriate intervals. May not trip – precautions
3 Drive trips on fault
required
4.2 AC supply requirements May not trip – precautions May not trip – precautions
4 to 6
Voltage: required required
SPx2xx (M/TL)200V to 240V ±10%
SPx4xx (T) 380V to 480V ±10% 4.2.2 Supplies requiring line reactors
SPx5xx (TM)500V to 575V ±10% Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from
SPx6xx (TH)500V to 690V ±10% poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network.
Number of phases: 3* Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately
2% are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but may
*200V SPz drives can also be used on a single phase supply.
result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because of
Maximum supply imbalance: 2% negative phase sequence (equivalent the voltage drop.
to 3% voltage imbalance between phases).
For all drive ratings, 2% line reactors permit drives to be used with a
Frequency range: 48 to 65 Hz supply unbalance of up to 3.5% negative phase sequence (equivalent to
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current 5% voltage imbalance between phases).
must be limited to 100kA Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for example:
4.2.1 Supply types • Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive.
All drives are suitable for use on any supply type i.e TN-S, TN-C-S, TT • Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to
and IT. the supply.
• Supplies with voltage up to 600V may have grounding at any • Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such
potential, i.e. neutral, centre or corner (“grounded delta”) that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds
• Supplies with voltage above 600V may not have corner grounding 20%.
Drives are suitable for use on supplies of installation category III and Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the
lower, according to IEC60664-1. This means they may be connected input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in
permanently to the supply at its origin in a building, but for outdoor extreme cases, failure of the drive.
installation additional over-voltage suppression (transient voltage surge Drives of low power rating may also be susceptible to disturbance when
suppression) must be provided to reduce category IV to category III. connected to supplies with a high rated capacity.
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply
capacity exceeds 175kVA:
SPz 1M/TL to 2.5M/TL
SPz 1T to 2.5T
1.5TL to 3.5TL
1.5T to 2T
Model sizes 4.5T to 60TH have an internal DC choke and 40TL to

150TH have internal AC line chokes, so they do not require AC line 4.4 Heatsink fan supply
reactors except for cases of excessive phase unbalance or extreme
supply conditions. The heatsink fan on SPz and sizes 1 to 5 is supplied internally by the
When required, each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual drive. The heatsink fan on size 6 requires an external 24Vdc supply. The
reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used. connections for the heatsink fan supply must be made to the upper
terminal connector near to the W phase output on the drive. Figure 4-9
Reactor current ratings shows the position of the heatsink fan supply connections.
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows:
Figure 4-9 Location of the size 6 heatsink fan supply connections
Continuous current rating:
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive
Repetitive peak current rating:
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive
4.2.3 Input inductor calculation

To calculate the inductance required (at Y%), use the following equation:
Y V 1
L = ---------  ------  ------------
100 3 2fI
Where:
I = drive rated input current (A)
L = inductance (H)
f = supply frequency (Hz)
V = voltage between lines
4.3 Supplying the drive with DC / DC bus

paralleling
The connecting of the DC bus between several drives is typically used to:
1. Return energy from a drive which is being overhauled by the load to
a second motoring drive.
2. Allow the use of one braking resistor to dissipate regenerative
energy from several drives.
There are limitations to the combinations of drives which can be used in
this configuration.
Figure 4-10 Size 6 heatsink fan supply connections
For application data, contact the supplier of the drive. 24V heatsink fan supply
0V
Not used
65 64 63 62 61 60 Upper terminal connector
55 54 53 52 51 50 Lower terminal connector
0V
24V low voltage DC mode enable
To the heatsink fan
Pre-wired internally
The heatsink fan supply requirements are as follows:

Nominal voltage: 24Vdc
Minimum voltage: 23.5Vdc
Maximum voltage: 27Vdc
Current drawn: 3.3A
Recommended power supply: 24V, 100W, 4.5A
Recommended fuse: 4A fast blow (I2t less than 20A2s)
An external supply could be ordered as an option. Please contact
LEROY-SOMER.
4.5 Control 24Vdc supply

The 24Vdc input has three main functions.
• It can be used to supplement the drive's own internal 24V when
multiple SM-Universal Encoder Plus, SM-Encoder Output Plus, SM-
I/O Plus, or SM-I/O 32 modules are being used and the current
drawn by these modules is greater than the drive can supply. (If too
much current is drawn from the drive, the drive will initiate a 'PS.24V'
trip)
• It can be used as a back-up power supply to keep the control circuits
of the drive powered up when the line power supply is removed. This
allows any fieldbus modules, application modules, encoders or serial
communications to continue to operate.

• It can be used to commission the drive when the line power supply is 4.7 Ratings
not available, as the display operates correctly. However, the drive
will be in the UV trip state unless either line power supply or low The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
voltage DC operation is enabled, therefore diagnostics may not be Typical input current
possible. (Power down save parameters are not saved when using The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power
the 24V back-up power supply input.) flow and power loss.
The working voltage range of the 24V power supply is as follows: The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous operating voltage: 30.0 V Maximum continuous input current
Minimum continuous operating voltage: 19.2 V The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
Nominal operating voltage: 24.0 V selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
Minimum start up voltage: 21.6 V condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance.
Maximum power supply requirement at 24V: 60 W The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only
Recommended fuse: 3 A, 50 Vdc be seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases
Minimum and maximum voltage values include ripple and noise. Ripple would be significantly lower.
and noise values must not exceed 5%. The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2%
negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the supply fault
4.6 Low voltage DC power supply current given in Table 4-2.
The drive can be operated from low voltage DC supplies, nominally
24Vdc (control) and 48Vdc (power). The low voltage DC power Table 4-2 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
operating mode is designed either, to allow for motor operation in an Model Symmetrical fault level (kA)
emergency back-up situation following failure of the AC supply, for
All 100
example in elevators; or to limit the speed of a servo motor during
commissioning / start-up of equipment, for example a robot cell.
The working voltage range of the low voltage DC power supply is as
follows:
SPz
Minimum continuous operating voltage: 36V
Minimum start up voltage: 40V
Nominal continuous operating voltage: 48 to 72V
Maximum braking IGBT turn on voltage: 95.4V
Maximum over voltage trip threshold: 104.4V
Size 1
Nominal continuous operating voltage: 48V
Size 2 and 3
Size 4 (200V drives)
Size 4, 5 and 6 (400V and 690V drives)
See section 4.5 Control 24Vdc supply on page 62 for 24V back-up to
control.
NOTE
The nominal low voltage supply level is set by the user in Pr 6.46.
The default setting is 48V for all drive sizes.
The over voltage trip threshold and braking IGBT turn on voltage are
scaled from this value as follows:
Brake IGBT turn on = 1.325 x Pr 6.46 (V)
Over voltage trip = 1.45 x Pr 6.46 (V)

Table 4-3 SPz and sizes 1 to 3 input current, fuse and cable size ratings Table 4-4 SPz and sizes 1 to 3 input current, fuse and cable size
(European) ratings (USA)
Typical Fuse Cable size Fuse rating Cable size
Model Maximum Model Typical Maximum
input rating EN60204 Class CC or UL508C
continuous input continuous
current IEC gG J** <30A
input current Input Output current input
LS CT Class J** Input Output
A mm2 mm2 LS CT current
A A >30A AWG AWG
A A
A
SPz 1M/TL SP0201 3.2 (5.0)* 3.6 (5.0)* 6 0.75 0.75
SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202 4.8 (7.6)* 5.6 (7.6)* 10 1 0.75 SPz 1M/TL SP0201 3.2 (5.0)* 3.6 (5.0)* 10 16 24
SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203 6.0 (9.6)* 6.9 (9.6)* 12 1.5 0.75 SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202 4.8 (7.6)* 5.6 (7.6)* 10 16 22
SPz 2M/TL SP0204 7.9 (13.5)* 8.9 (13.5)* 16 2.5 0.75 SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203 6.0 (9.6)* 6.9 (9.6)* 16 14 20
SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205 10.6 (17.4)* 12.3 (17.4)* 20 4 0.75 SPz 2M/TL SP0204 7.9 (13.5)* 8.9 (13.5)* 20 12 18
1.5TL SP1201 7.1 9.5 10 1.5 1.0 SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205 10.6 (17.4)* 12.3 (17.4)* 20 12 18
2TL SP1202 9.2 11.3 12 1.5 1.0 1.5TL SP1201 7.1 9.5 10 14 18
2.5TL SP1203 12.5 16.4 20 4.0 1.0 2TL SP1202 9.2 11.3 15 14 16
3.5TL SP1204 15.4 19.1 20 4.0 1.5 2.5TL SP1203 12.5 16.4 20 12 14
4.5TL SP2201 13.4 18.1 20 4.0 2.5 3.5TL SP1204 15.4 19.1 20 12 14
5.5TL SP2202 18.2 22.6 25 4.0 4.0 4.5TL SP2201 13.4 18.1 20 12 14
8TL SP2203 24.2 28.3 32 6.0 6.0 5.5TL SP2202 18.2 22.6 25 10 10
11TL SP3201 35.4 43.1 50 16 16 8TL SP2203 24.2 28.3 30 8 8
16TL SP3202 46.8 54.3 63 25 25 11TL SP3201 35.4 43.1 45 6 6
1T SP0401 2.0 2.3 4 0.75 0.75 16TL SP3202 46.8 54.3 60 4 4
1.2T SP0402 2.6 2.8 4 0.75 0.75 1T SP0401 2.0 2.3 10 16 24
1.5T SP0403 3.2 3.3 6 0.75 0.75 1.2T SP0402 2.6 2.8 10 16 24
2T SP0404 4.3 4.4 6 0.75 0.75 1.5T SP0403 3.2 3.3 10 16 24
2.5T SP0405 5.6 5.7 8 0.75 0.75 2T SP0404 4.3 4.4 10 16 22
1.5T SP1401 4.1 4.8 8 1.0 1.0 2.5T SP0405 5.6 5.7 10 16 20
2T SP1402 5.1 5.8 8 1.0 1.0 1.5T SP1401 4.1 4.8 8 16 22
2.5T SP1403 6.8 7.4 8 1.0 1.0 2T SP1402 5.1 5.8 8 16 20
3.5T SP1404 9.3 10.6 12 1.5 1.0 2.5T SP1403 6.8 7.4 10 16 18
4.5T SP1405 10 11 12 1.5 1.0 3.5T SP1404 9.3 10.6 15 14 16
5.5T SP1406 12.6 13.4 16 2.5 1.5 4.5T SP1405 10 11 15 14 14
8T SP2401 15.7 17 20 4.0 2.5 5.5T SP1406 12.6 13.4 15 14 14
11T SP2402 20.2 21.4 25 4.0 4.0 8T SP2401 15.7 17 20 12 14
16T SP2403 26.6 27.6 32 6.0 6.0 11T SP2402 20.2 21.4 25 10 10
20T SP2404 26.6 27.6 32 6.0 6.0 16T SP2403 26.6 27.6 30 8 8
22T SP3401 34.2 36.2 40 10 10 20T SP2404 26.6 27.6 30 8 8
27T SP3402 40.2 42.7 50 16 16 22T SP3401 34.2 36.2 40 6 6
33T SP3403 51.3 53.5 63 25 25 27T SP3402 40.2 42.7 45 6 6
3.5TM SP3501 5.0 6.7 8 1.0 1.0 33T SP3403 51.3 53.5 60 4 4
4.5TM SP3502 6.0 8.2 10 1.0 1.0 3.5TM SP3501 5.0 6.7 10 16 18
5.5TM SP3503 7.8 11.1 12 1.5 1.0 4.5TM SP3502 6.0 8.2 10 16 16
8TM SP3504 9.9 14.4 16 2.5 1.5 5.5TM SP3503 7.8 11.1 15 14 14
11TM SP3505 13.8 18.1 20 4.0 2.5 8TM SP3504 9.9 14.4 15 14 14
16TM SP3506 18.2 22.2 25 4.0 4.0 11TM SP3505 13.8 18.1 20 12 14
22TM SP3507 22.2 26.0 32 6.0 6.0 16TM SP3506 18.2 22.2 25 10 10
22TM SP3507 22.2 26.0 30 8 8
*The value in the bracket is when the drive is used on a 1 phase supply.
** Fast acting or high speed class J fuses only.

Table 4-5 Size 4 and larger input current, fuse and cable size ratings
Fuse option 2
Fuse option 1 semiconductor fuse in series Cable size
Typical Maximum with HRC fuse or breaker
Model input input
current current IEC class North HRC Semi-
America: IEC class gG conductor EN60204 UL508C
gR
Ferraz HSJ UL class J IEC class aR
Input Output Input Output
LS CT A A A A A A
mm2 mm2 AWG AWG
22TL SP4201 62.1 68.9 100 90 90 160 25 25 3 3
27TL SP4202 72.1 78.1 100 100 100 160 35 35 3 3
33TL SP4203 94.5 99.9 125 125 125 200 70 70 1 1
40TL SP5201 116 142 200 175 160 200 95 95 2/0 2/0
50TL SP5202 137 165 250 225 200 250 120 120 4/0 4/0
40T SP4401 61.2 62.3 80 80 80 160 25 25 3 3
50T SP4402 76.3 79.6 110 110 100 200 35 35 2 2
60T SP4403 94.1 97.2 125 125 125 200 70 70 1 1
75T SP5401 126 131 200 175 160 200 95 95 2/0 2/0
100T SP5402 152 156 250 225 200 250 120 120 4/0 4/0
120T SP6401 224 241 315 300 250 315 2 x 70 2 x 70 2 x 2/0 2 x 2/0
150T SP6402 247 266 315 300 300 350 2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 4/0 2 x 4/0
22TH SP4601 23 26.5 63 60 32 125 4 4 10 10
27TH SP4602 26.1 28.8 63 60 40 125 6 6 8 8
33TH SP4603 32.9 35.1 63 60 50 125 10 10 8 8
40TH SP4604 39 41 63 60 50 125 16 16 6 6
50TH SP4605 46.2 47.9 63 60 63 125 16 16 6 6
60TH SP4606 55.2 56.9 80 60 63 125 25 25 4 4
75TH SP5601 75.5 82.6 125 100 90 160 35 35 2 2
100TH SP5602 89.1 94.8 125 100 125 160 50 50 1 1
120TH SP6601 128 138 200 200 200 200 2 x 50 2 x 50 2x1 2x1
150TH SP6602 144 156 200 200 200 200 2 x 50 2 x 50 2x1 2x1
Installation class (ref: IEC60364-5-52:2001)

Fuses
B1 - Separate cables in conduit. The AC supply to the drive must be installed with suitable
B2 - Multicore cable in conduit
protection against overload and short-circuits. Table 4-3,
C - Multicore cable in free air.
Table 4-4 and Table 4-5 show recommended fuse ratings.
WARNING Failure to observe this requirement will cause risk of fire.
NOTE
Cable sizes are from IEC60364-5-52:2001 table A.52.C with correction A fuse or other protection must be included in all live connections to the
factor for 40°C ambient of 0.87 (from table A52.14) for cable installation AC supply.
method B2 (multicore cable in conduit). An MCB (miniature circuit breaker) or MCCB (moulded-case circuit-
Cable size may be reduced if a different installation method is used, or if breaker) with type C may be used in place of fuses on sizes 1 to 3 under
the ambient temperature is lower. the following conditions:
The recommended cable sizes above are only a guide. The mounting • The fault-clearing capacity must be sufficient for the installation
and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some • For frame sizes 2 and 3, the drive must be mounted in an enclosure
cases smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger which meets the requirements for a fire enclosure
cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer See Chapter 14 UL Listing Information for UL listing requirements.
to local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.
Fuse types
NOTE The fuse voltage rating must be suitable for the drive supply voltage.
The recommended output cable sizes assume that the motor maximum Ground connections
current matches that of the drive. Where a motor of reduced rating is The drive must be connected to the system ground of the AC supply.
used the cable rating may be chosen to match that of the motor. To The ground wiring must conform to local regulations and codes of
ensure that the motor and cable are protected against overload, the practice.
drive must be programmed with the correct motor rated current.
4.7.1 Main AC supply contactor
NOTE
The recommended AC supply contactor type for SPz and sizes 1 to 6 is
UL listing is dependent on the use of the correct type of UL-listed fuse, AC1.
and applies when symmetrical short-circuit current does not exceed
100kA. See Chapter 14 UL Listing Information on page 278 for sizing
information.

4.8 Output circuit and motor protection Table 4-7 Maximum motor cable lengths (400V drives)
The output circuit has fast-acting electronic short-circuit protection which 400V Nominal AC supply voltage
limits the fault current to typically no more than five times the rated
Maximum permissible motor cable length
output current, and interrupts the current in approximately 20µs. No Model
for each of the following frequencies
additional short-circuit protection devices are required.
LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
The drive provides overload protection for the motor and its cable. For
this to be effective, Pr 0.46 Motor rated current must be set to suit the 1T SP0401
motor. 1.2T SP0402
50m
1.5T SP0403
(165ft)
2T SP0404
Pr 0.46 Motor rated current must be set correctly to avoid a
2.5T SP0405
risk of fire in the event of motor overload.
1.5T SP1401 65m (210ft)
WARNING
2T SP1402 100m (330ft)
There is also provision for the use of a motor thermistor to prevent over- 2.5T SP1403 130m (425ft)
heating of the motor, e.g. due to loss of cooling.
3.5T SP1404
4.8.1 Cable types and lengths 4.5T SP1405
Since capacitance in the motor cable causes loading on the output of the 5.5T SP1406 37m
drive, ensure the cable length does not exceed the values given in Table 50m
8T SP2401 75m (120ft)
4-6, Table 4-7 and Table 4-8. 100m (165ft)
11T SP2402 200m 150m (245ft)
Use 105 C (221 F) (UL 60/75 C temp rise) PVC-insulated cable with (330ft)
16T SP2403 (660ft) (490ft)
copper conductors having a suitable voltage rating, for the following
power connections: 20T SP2404
22T SP3401
• AC supply to external EMC filter (when used)
• AC supply (or external EMC filter) to drive 27T SP3402
• Drive to motor 33T SP3403
• Drive to braking resistor 40T SP4401
Table 4-6 Maximum motor cable lengths (200V drives) 50T SP4402
90m
60T SP4403
200V Nominal AC supply voltage 250m 185m 125m (295ft)
75T SP5401
Maximum permissible motor cable length (820ft) (607ft) (410ft)
Model 100T SP5402
for each of the following frequencies
120T SP6401
LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz 150T SP6402
SPz 1M/TL SP0201
SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202 Table 4-8 Maximum motor cable lengths (575V drives)
50m
SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203 575V Nominal AC supply voltage
(165ft)
SPz 2M/TL SP0204 Maximum permissible motor cable length for
Model
SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205 each of the following frequencies
1.5TL SP1201 65m (210ft) LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
2TL SP1202 100m (330ft) 3.5TM SP3501
2.5TL SP1203 130m (425ft) 4.5TM SP3502
37m
3.5TL SP1204 5.5TM SP3503
50m (120ft) 200m 150m 100m 75m
4.5TL SP2201 75m 8TM SP3504
100m (165ft) (660ft) (490ft) (330ft) (245ft)
5.5TL SP2202 200m 150m (245ft) 11TM SP3505
(330ft)
8TL SP2203 (660ft) (490ft) 16TM SP3506
11TL SP3201 22TM SP3507
16TL SP3202
22TL SP4201
250m 185m 125m 90m
27TL SP4202
(820ft) (607ft) (410ft) (295ft)
33TL SP4203
40TL SP5201 250m 185m 125m 90m
50TL SP5202 (820ft) (607ft) (410ft) (295ft)

Table 4-9 Maximum motor cable lengths (690V drives) For multiple motors, the precautions given in section 4.8.3 Multiple
motors should be followed.
690V Nominal AC supply voltage
For the other cases listed, it is recommended that an inverter-rated
Maximum permissible motor cable length for motor be used. This has a reinforced insulation system intended by the
Model
each of the following frequencies manufacturer for repetitive fast-rising pulsed voltage operation.
LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz Users of 575V NEMA rated motors should note that the specification for
22TH SP4601 inverter-rated motors given in NEMA MG1 section 31 is sufficient for
motoring operation but not where the motor spends significant periods
27TH SP4602
braking. In that case an insulation peak voltage rating of 2.2kV is
33TH SP4603
recommended.
40TH SP4604 90m
If it is not practical to use an inverter-rated motor, an output choke
50TH SP4605 250m 185m 125m (295ft) (inductor) should be used. The recommended type is a simple iron-cored
60TH SP4606 (820ft) (607ft) (410ft) component with a reactance of about 2%. The exact value is not critical.
75TH SP5601 This operates in conjunction with the capacitance of the motor cable to
100TH SP5602 increase the rise-time of the motor terminal voltage and prevent
120TH SP6601 excessive electrical stress.
150TH SP6602 4.8.3 Multiple motors
Open-loop only
• Cable lengths in excess of the specified values may be used only
If the drive is to control more than one motor, one of the fixed V/F modes
when special techniques are adopted; refer to the supplier of the
should be selected (Pr 5.14 = Fd or SrE). Make the motor connections
drive.
as shown in Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13. The maximum cable lengths in
• The default switching frequency is 3kHz for open-loop and closed-
Table 4-6, Table 4-7, Table 4-8 and Table 4-9 apply to the sum of the
loop vector and 6kHz for servo.
total cable lengths from the drive to each motor.
High-capacitance cables It is recommended that each motor is connected through a protection relay
The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in Table 4-6, since the drive cannot protect each motor individually. For connection, a
Table 4-7, Table 4-8 and Table 4-9 if high capacitance motor cables are sinusoidal filter or an output inductor must be connected as shown in
used. Figure 4-13, even when the cable lengths are less than the maximum
Most cables have an insulating jacket between the cores and the armor permissible. For details of inductor sizes refer to the supplier of the drive.
or shield; these cables have a low capacitance and are recommended. Figure 4-12 Preferred chain connection for multiple motors
Cables that do not have an insulating jacket tend to have high
capacitance; if a cable of this type is used, the maximum cable length is Motor protection
relay
half that quoted in the tables. (Figure 4-11 shows how to identify the two
types.)
Figure 4-11 Cable construction influencing the capacitance
Chain connection (preferred)
Normal capacitance High capacitance

Shield or armour Shield or armour close
separated from the cores to the cores
The cable used for Table 4-6, Table 4-7, Table 4-8 and Table 4-9 is
shielded and contains four cores. Typical capacitance for this type of
cable is 130pF/m (i.e. from one core to all others and the shield
connected together).
4.8.2 Motor winding voltage
The PWM output voltage can adversely affect the inter-turn insulation in
the motor. This is because of the high rate of change of voltage, in
conjunction with the impedance of the motor cable and the distributed
nature of the motor winding.
For normal operation with AC supplies up to 500Vac and a standard
motor with a good quality insulation system, there is no need for any
special precautions. In case of doubt the motor supplier should be
consulted.
Special precautions are recommended under the following conditions,
but only if the motor cable length exceeds 10m:
• AC supply voltage exceeds 500V
• DC supply voltage exceeds 670V
• Operation of 400V drive with continuous or very frequent sustained
braking
• Multiple motors connected to a single drive

Figure 4-13 Alternative connection for multiple motors 4.9 Braking

Braking occurs when the drive is decelerating the motor, or is preventing
Motor protection the motor from gaining speed due to mechanical influences. During
relay braking, energy is returned to the drive from the motor.
When the motor is being braked by the drive, the maximum regenerated
power that the drive can absorb is equal to the power dissipation
(losses) of the drive.
When the regenerated power is likely to exceed these losses, the DC
bus voltage of the drive increases. Under default conditions, the drive
brakes the motor under PI control, which extends the deceleration time
connection as necessary in order to prevent the DC bus voltage from rising above a
user defined set-point.
If the drive is expected to rapidly decelerate a load, or to hold back an
Inductor overhauling load, a braking resistor must be installed.
Table 4-10 shows the DC voltage level at which the drive turns on the
braking transistor.
Table 4-10 Braking transistor turn on voltage
Drive voltage rating DC bus voltage level
200V 390V
400V 780V
575V 930V
690V 1120V
NOTE
4.8.4 /  motor operation When a braking resistor is used, Pr 0.15 should be set to FASt ramp
The voltage rating for and  connections of the motor should always mode.
be checked before attempting to run the motor.
The default setting of the motor rated voltage parameter is the same as High temperatures
the drive rated voltage, i.e. Braking resistors can reach high temperatures. Locate
400V drive 400V rated voltage braking resistors so that damage cannot result. Use cable
200V drive 200V rated voltage having insulation capable of withstanding high temperatures.
WARNING
A typical 3 phase motor would be connected in A for 400V operation or 

for 200V operation, however, variations on this are common e.g.
4.9.1 Heatsink mounted braking resistor
690V  400V
A resistor has been especially designed to be mounted internal to the
Incorrect connection of the windings will cause severe under or over drive (SPz) or within the heatsink of the drive (sizes 1 and 2). See
fluxing of the motor, leading to a very poor output torque or motor section 3.11 Internal/heatsink mounted braking resistor on page 50 for
saturation and overheating respectively. mounting details. The design of the resistor is such that no thermal
4.8.5 Output contactor protection circuit is required, as the device will fail safely under fault
conditions. On SPz, sizes 1 and 2, the in built software overload
If the cable between the drive and the motor is to be protection is set up at default for the designated heatsink mounted
interrupted by a contactor or circuit breaker, ensure that the resistor. Table 4-11 provides the resistor data for each drive rating.
drive is disabled before the contactor or circuit breaker is
opened or closed. Severe arcing may occur if this circuit is
WARNING interrupted with the motor running at high current and low The internal braking resistor for SPz is fitted with a thermistor
speed. which must be connected to the drive whenever the internal
A contactor is sometimes required to be installed between the drive and braking resistor in installed.
motor for safety purposes. CAUTION
The recommended motor contactor is the AC3 type.

NOTE
Switching of an output contactor should only occur when the output of
the drive is disabled. The internal/heatsink mounted resistor is suitable for applications with a
low level of regen energy only. See Table 4-11.
Opening or closing of the contactor with the drive enabled will lead to:
1. OI.AC trips (which cannot be reset for 10 seconds)
2. High levels of radio frequency noise emission
3. Increased contactor wear and tear
The Drive Enable terminal (T31) when opened provides a SAFE
TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function. This can in many cases
replace output contactors.
For further information see section 4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
DISABLE) on page 89.

connection requires the cable to be armored or shielded, since it is not

Braking resistor overload protection parameter fully contained in a metal enclosure. See section 4.11.5 Compliance with
settings generic emission standards on page 77 for further details.
Failure to observe the following information may
damage the resistor. Internal connection does not require the cable to be armored or
CAUTION The drive’s software contains an overload protection shielded.
function for a braking resistor. On SPz and sizes 1 and 2 Minimum resistances and power ratings
this function is enabled at default to protect the heatsink Table 4-12 Minimum resistance values and peak power rating for
mounted resistor. Below are the parameter settings. the braking resistor at 40°C (104°F)
SPz Sizes 1 and 2 Model Minimum Instantaneous Average
Parameter 200V 400V 200V 400V resistance* power rating power for 60s
LS CT  kW kW
drive drive drive drive
Full power SPz 1M/TL SP0201 0.74
Pr 10.30 0.06 0.01 0.04 0.02
braking time SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202 1.1
Full power SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203 35 4.35 1.5
Pr 10.31 2.6 1.7 3.3
braking period SPz 2M/TL SP0204 2.2
SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205 3.0
For more information on the braking resistor software 1.5TL SP1201 1.5
overload protection, see Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 full
2TL SP1202 43 3.5 2.2
descriptions in the Advanced User Guide.
2.5TL SP1203 3.0
If the heatsink mounted braking resistor is to be used at
3.5TL SP1204 29 5.3 4.4
more than half of its average power rating then the drive's
cooling fan must be at full speed controlled by setting 4.5TL SP2201 6.0
Pr 6.45 to On (1). 5.5TL SP2202 18 8.9 8.0
8TL SP2203 8.9
Table 4-11 Heatsink mounted braking resistor data
11TL SP3201 13.1
5.0 30.3
Parameter SPz Size 1 Size 2 16TL SP3202 19.3
Part number 1299-0001-00 1220-2756-01 1220-2758-01 22TL SP4201** 22.5
DC resistance at 25 C 70 75 37.5 27TL SP4202** 5.0 30.3 27.8
Peak instantaneous power 33TL SP4203** 30.3
over 1ms at nominal 8.7kW 8kW 16kW 40TL SP5201**
3.5 53 43.5
resistance 50TL SP5202**
Average power over 60s * 50W 50W 100W 1T SP0401 0.74
Ingress Protection (IP) 1.2T SP0402 1.1
N/A IP54
rating 1.5T SP0403 105 5.79 1.5
Maximum altitude 2000m 2T SP0404 2.2
* To keep the temperature of the resistor below 70°C (158°F) in a 30°C 2.5T SP0405 3.0
(86°F) ambient, the average power rating is 50W for size 1 and 100W for 1.5T SP1401 1.5
size 2. The above parameter settings ensure this is the case. 2T SP1402 2.2
74 8.3
Size 3 and larger do not have heatsink mounted braking resistors, hence 2.5T SP1403 3.0
the default values of Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are 0 (i.e. software braking 3.5T SP1404 4.4
resistor overload protection disabled). 4.5T SP1405 6.0
58 10.6
The internal braking resistor for SPz can be used with the drive even 5.5T SP1406 8.0
though its resistance is lower than the minimum resistance values given 8T SP2401 9.6
in Table 4-12, because of the following reasons. 11T SP2402 13.1
• The braking resistor overload protection function in the drive is set 19 33.1
16T SP2403 19.3
up to limit the power dissipated in the resistor 20T SP2404 22.5
• The braking resistor is fitted with a thermistor which will trip the drive
22T SP3401 22.5
if the resistor is too hot
• The power rating of the resistor is only 50W 27T SP3402 18 35.5 27.8
33T SP3403 33.0
If an external resistor is used with the drive, its resistance must be equal
to or greater than the value given in Table 4-12. 40T SP4401** 45.0
11 55.3
50T SP4402** 53.0
4.9.2 External braking resistor 60T SP4403** 9 67.6 67.5
75T SP5401** 82.5
Overload protection 7 86.9
When an external braking resistor is used, it is essential that 100T SP5402** 86.9
an overload protection device is incorporated in the braking 120T SP6401**
5 122 122
resistor circuit; this is descr bed in Figure 4-14 on page 70. 150T SP6402**
WARNING
When a braking resistor is to be mounted outside the enclosure, ensure

that it is mounted in a ventilated metal housing that will perform the
following functions:
• Prevent inadvertent contact with the resistor
• Allow adequate ventilation for the resistor
When compliance with EMC emission standards is required, external

Model Minimum Instantaneous Average Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor
resistance* power rating power for 60s The thermal protection circuit must disconnect the AC supply from the
LS CT  kW kW drive if the resistor becomes overloaded due to a fault. Figure 4-14
shows a typical circuit arrangement.
3.5TM SP3501 4.4
Figure 4-14 Typical protection circuit for a braking resistor
4.5TM SP3502 6.0
5.5TM SP3503 8.0
Optional
8TM SP3504 18 50.7 9.6 EMC
11TM SP3505 13.1 filter
16TM SP3506 19.3
22TM SP3507 22.5
22TH SP4601** 19.3
Main contactor
27TH SP4602** 22.5 power supply
33TH SP4603** 27.8 Drive
13 95.0
40TH SP4604** 33.0 Stop
50TH SP4605** 45.0
60TH SP4606** 55.5 Start / Thermal
Reset protection
75TH SP5601** 67.5 device
10 125
100TH SP5602** 82.5 +DC
120TH SP6601** 113 BR
10 125
150TH SP6602** 125
* Resistor tolerance: ±10% Braking resistor
** The power ratings specified are for a stand-alone drive only. If the See Figure 4-2 on page 58, Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4 on page 59, and
drive is part of a common DC bus system different ratings must be used. Figure 4-5 on page 59 for the location of the +DC and braking resistor
Contact the supplier of the drive for more information. connections.
For high-inertia loads or under continuous braking, the continuous power 4.9.3 Braking resistor software overload protection
dissipated in the braking resistor may be as high as the power rating of The drive software contains an overload protection function for a braking
the drive. The total energy dissipated in the braking resistor is dependent resistor. In order to enable and set-up this function, it is necessary to
on the amount of energy to be extracted from the load. enter two values into the drive:
The instantaneous power rating refers to the short-term maximum power • Resistor short-time overload time (Pr 10.30)
dissipated during the on intervals of the pulse width modulated braking • Resistor minimum time between repeated short-time overloads
control cycle. The braking resistor must be able to withstand this (Pr 10.31)
dissipation for short intervals (milliseconds). Higher resistance values This data should be obtained from the manufacturer of the braking
require proportionately lower instantaneous power ratings. resistors.
In most applications, braking occurs only occasionally. This allows the Pr 10.39 gives an indication of braking resistor temperature based on a
continuous power rating of the braking resistor to be much lower than simple thermal model. Zero indicates the resistor is close to ambient and
the power rating of the drive. It is essential, though, that the 100% is the maximum temperature the resistor can withstand. A br.rS
instantaneous power rating and energy rating of the braking resistor are alarm is given if this parameter is above 75% and the braking IGBT is
sufficient for the most extreme braking duty that is likely to be active. An It.br trip will occur if Pr 10.39 reaches 100%, when Pr 10.37 is
encountered. set to 0 (default value) or 1.
Optimization of the braking resistor requires a careful consideration of If Pr 10.37 is equal to 2 or 3 an It.br trip will not occur when Pr 10.39
the braking duty. reaches 100%, but instead the braking IGBT will be disabled until
Select a value of resistance for the braking resistor that is not less than Pr 10.39 falls below 95%. This option is intended for applications with
the specified minimum resistance. Larger resistance values may give a parallel connected DC buses where there are several braking resistors,
cost saving, as well as a safety benefit in the event of a fault in the each of which cannot withstand full DC bus voltage continuously. With
braking system. Braking capability will then be reduced, which could this type of application it is unl kely the braking energy will be shared
cause the drive to trip during braking if the value chosen is too large. equally between the resistors because of voltage measurement
tolerances within the individual drives. Therefore with Pr 10.37 set to 2 or
3, then as soon as a resistor has reached its maximum temperature the
drive will disable the braking IGBT, and another resistor on another drive
will take up the braking energy. Once Pr 10.39 has fallen below 95% the
drive will allow the braking IGBT to operate again.
See the Advanced User Guide for more information on Pr 10.30, Pr
10.31, Pr 10.37 and Pr 10.39.
This software overload protection should be used in addition to an
external overload protection device.

4.10 Ground leakage section 4.11.5 should be followed to give reduced radio-frequency
emission.
The ground leakage current depends upon whether the internal EMC
In order to ensure the installation meets the various emission standards
filter is installed. The drive is supplied with the filter installed. Instructions
described in:
for removing the internal filter are given in Figure 4-23 Removal of
internal EMC filter (size 1 to 3) and Figure 4-24 Removal of internal EMC • The EMC data sheet available from the supplier of the drive
filter (sizes 4 to 6) on page 74. • Chapter 12 Technical Data on page 242
With internal filter installed: ...the correct external EMC filter must be used and all of the guidelines in
SPz: 12mA* AC at 400V 50Hz section 4.11.3 General requirements for EMC and section
4.11.5 Compliance with generic emission standards must be followed.
30µA DC with a 600V DC bus (10M)
Size 1 to 3: 28mA* AC at 400V 50Hz Table 4-13 Unidrive SP and EMC filter cross reference
30µA DC with a 600V DC bus (10M) Drive Reference
LS CT Schaffner Epcos
Size 4 to 6: 56mA* AC at 400V 50Hz
SPz 1M/TL to
18µA DC with a 600V DC bus (33M) SP0201 to SP0205
SPz 2.5M/TL FS23072-19-07
* Proportional to the supply voltage and frequency. (1 phase)
(1 phase)
With internal filter removed: SPz 1M/TL to
SP0201 to SP0205
<1mA SPz 2.5M/TL FS23073-17-07
(3 phase)
Note that in both cases there is an internal voltage surge protection (3 phase)
device connected to ground. Under normal circumstances this carries 1.5TL & 2TL SP1201 to SP1202 FS6008-10-07 B84143-A10-R207
neglig ble current. 2.5TL & 3.5TL SP1203 to SP1204 FS6008-16-07 B84143-A16-R207
4.5TL to 8TL SP2201 to SP2203 FS6008-32-07 B84143-A32-R207
When the internal filter is installed the leakage current is
11TL & 16TL SP3201 to SP3202 FS6008-75-07 B84143-A75-R207
high. In this case a permanent fixed ground connection must
be provided, or other suitable measures taken to prevent a 22TL to 33TL SP4201 to SP4203 FS6008-101-35 B84143-A101-R207
safety hazard occurring if the connection is lost. 40TL & 50TL SP5201 to SP5202 FS6008-164-40 B84143-A165-R207
WARNING
SPz 1T to SPz 2.5T SP0401 to SP0405 FS23074-11-07
4.10.1 Use of residual current device (RCD) 1.5T to 3.5T SP1401 to SP1404 FS6008-10-07 B84143-A10-R207
There are three common types of ELCB / RCD: 4.5T & 5.5T SP1405 to SP1406 FS6008-16-07 B84143-A16-R207
1. AC - detects AC fault currents 8T to 20T SP2401 to SP2404 FS6008-32-07 B84143-A32-R207
2. A - detects AC and pulsating DC fault currents (provided the DC 22T to 33T SP3401 to SP3403 FS6008-62-07 B84143-A75-R207
current reaches zero at least once every half cycle) 40T to 60T SP4401 to SP4403 FS6008-101-35 B84143-A101-R207
3. B - detects AC, pulsating DC and smooth DC fault currents 75T & 100T SP5401 to SP5402 FS6008-164-40 B84143-A165-R207
• Type AC should never be used with drives. 120T & 150T SP6401 to SP6402 FS6008-260-99 B84143-A260-S207
• Type A can only be used with single phase drives
3.5TM to 22TM SP3501 to SP3507 FS6008-30-07 B84143-A30-R207
• Type B must be used with three phase drives
22TH to 60TH SP4601 to SP4606 FS6008-58-53 B84143-A58-R207
75TH & 100TH SP5601 to SP5602 FS6008-95-35 B84143-A95-R207
Only type B ELCB / RCD are suitable for use with 3 phase B84143-A0160-
120TH & 150TH SP6601 to SP6602 FS6008-160-99
inverter drives. S207
WARNING
High ground leakage current
If an external EMC filter is used, a delay of at least 50ms should be When an EMC filter is used, a permanent fixed ground
incorporated to ensure spurious trips are not seen. The leakage current connection must be provided which does not pass through a
is likely to exceed the trip level if all of the phases are not energized connector or flexible power cord. This includes the internal
simultaneously. WARNING EMC filter.
4.11 EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) NOTE
The requirements for EMC are divided into three levels in the following
The installer of the drive is responsible for ensuring compliance with the
three sections:
EMC regulations that apply where the drive is to be used.
Section 4.11.3, General requirements for all applications, to ensure
reliable operation of the drive and minimise the risk of disturbing nearby 4.11.1 Grounding hardware
equipment. The immunity standards specified in section 11 will be met, The drive is supplied with a grounding bracket, and sizes 1 to 3 with a
but no specific emission standards. Note also the special requirements grounding clamp, to facilitate EMC compliance. They provide a
given in Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and connections convenient method for direct grounding of cable shields without the use
outside a building on page 79 for increased surge immunity of control of "pig-tails". Cable shields can be bared and clamped to the grounding
circuits where control wiring is extended. bracket using metal clips or clamps1 (not supplied) or cable ties. Note
Section 4.11.4, Requirements for meeting the EMC standard for that the shield must in all cases be continued through the clamp to the
power drive systems, IEC61800-3 (EN61800-3). intended terminal on the drive, in accordance with the connection details
for the specific signal.
Section 4.11.5, Requirements for meeting the generic emission
standards for the industrial environment, IEC61000-6-4, EN61000-6-4, 1 A suitable clamp is the Phoenix DIN rail mounted SK14 cable clamp
EN50081-2. (for cables with a maximum outer diameter of 14mm).
The recommendations of section 4.11.3 will usually be sufficient to avoid See Figure 4-15 for details of using the grounded metal panel on SPz.
causing disturbance to adjacent equipment of industrial quality. If
See Figure 4-16 and Figure 4-17 for details on installing the grounding
particularly sensitive equipment is to be used nearby, or in a non-
clamp.
industrial environment, then the recommendations of section 4.11.4 or

See Figure 4-18 and Figure 4-19 for details on installing the grounding Figure 4-18 Installation of grounding bracket (SPz)
bracket.
Figure 4-15 Use of the EMC bracket on SPz
Figure 4-16 Installation of grounding clamp (size 1 and 2)
Figure 4-19 Installation of grounding bracket (sizes 1 to 6)
Figure 4-17 Installation of grounding clamp (size 3)

Loosen the ground connection nuts and slide the grounding bracket in
the direction shown. Once in place, re-tighten the ground connection
nuts.
On size 1 and 2, the grounding bracket is secured using the
power ground terminal of the drive. Ensure that the supply
ground connection is secure after installing / removing the
grounding bracket. Failure to do so will result in the drive not
WARNING
being grounded.
A faston tab is located on the grounding bracket for the purpose of
connecting the drive 0V to ground should the user require to do so.
When a size 4 or 5 is through-panel mounted, the grounding link bracket
must be folded upwards. A screw can be used to secure the bracket or it
can be located under the mounting bracket to ensure that a ground
connection is made. This is required to provide a grounding point for the
grounding bracket as shown in Figure 4-20.

Figure 4-20 Size 4 and 5 grounding link bracket in its surface For 200V SPz and frame sizes 3 and above, when the drive
mount position (as supplied)
is used with ungrounded (IT) supplies the internal EMC filter
must be removed unless additional motor ground fault
protection is installed or, in the case of 200V SPz and size 3
WARNING
only, the external filter is also used.
For instructions on removal, refer to Figure 4-22, Figure 4-23
and Figure 4-24.
For details of ground fault protection contact the supplier of
the drive.
If the drive is used as a motoring drive as part of a Unidrive SP regen
system, then the internal EMC filter must be removed.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission into the line
power supply. Where the motor cable is short, it permits the
requirements of EN61800-3 to be met for the second environment - see
section 4.11.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3 (standard for Power Drive
Systems) on page 76 and section 12.1.24 Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) on page 254. For longer motor cables the filter continues to
provide a useful reduction in emission level, and when used with any
length of shielded motor cable up to the limit for the drive, it is unlikely
that nearby industrial equipment will be disturbed. It is recommended
that the filter be used in all applications unless the instructions given
above require it to be removed or the ground leakage current of 12mA
for SPz, 28mA for size 1 to 3 or 56mA for size 4 to 6 is unacceptable.
See Figure 4-22, Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24 for details of removing and
installing the internal EMC filter.
Grounding Figure 4-22 Removal of internal EMC filter and line to ground
link bracket varistors (SPz)
Figure 4-21 Size 4 and 5 grounding link bracket folded up into its
through- panel mount position
The supply must be disconnected before removing the

internal EMC filter or line to ground varistor screws.
WARNING
1. Internal EMC filter. Remove the bottom screw as shown.

2. Line to ground varistors. Remove the top screw as shown.
NOTE
The line to ground varistors should only be removed in special
circumstances.
Grounding
link bracket Figure 4-23 Removal of internal EMC filter (size 1 to 3)
1
Mounting
bracket
2
3
4.11.2 Internal EMC filter
It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in place unless
there is a specific reason for removing it.

Loosen / remove screws as shown (1) and (2). 4.11.3 General requirements for EMC
Remove filter (3), and ensure the screws are replaced and re-tightened (4). Ground (earth) connections
Figure 4-24 Removal of internal EMC filter (sizes 4 to 6) The grounding arrangements should be in accordance with Figure 4-25,
which shows a single drive on a back-plate with or without an additional
enclosure.
Figure 4-25 shows how to manage EMC when using an unshielded
1
motor cable. However a shielded cable is preferable, in which case it
should be installed as shown in section 4.11.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards on page 77.
Loosen screws (1). Remove EMC filter in the direction shown (2).
Figure 4-25 General EMC enclosure layout showing ground connections
If ground connections are
made using a separate
cable, they should run
parallel to the appropriate
power cable to minimise
emissions
Metal backplate
Optional EMC
filter
If the control circuit 0V

is to be grounded, his External
should be done at the controller
system controller only to 0V PE
avoid injecting noise
currents into the 0V circuit
3 phase AC supply ~
PE
Grounding bar
The incoming supply ground
should be connected to a
single power ground bus bar
or low impedance earth
terminal inside the cubicle. Use four core cable to
This should be used as a Metal backplate connect the motor to the drive.
common 'clean' ground for all safety bonded to The ground conductor in the
components inside the cubicle. power ground busbar motor cable must be connected
directly to the earth terminal of
the drive and motor.
It must not be connected directly
to the power earth busbar.
Optional
ground
connection

Cable layout To ensure correct transfer of data, observe the following:

Figure 4-26 indicates the clearances which should be observed around Resolver connections:
the drive and related ‘noisy’ power cables by all sensitive control signals • Use a cable with an overall shield and twisted pairs for the resolver
/ equipment. signals
Figure 4-26 Drive cable clearances • Connect the cable shield to the drive 0V connection by the shortest
Optional braking resistor and overload
poss ble link ("pigtail")
• It is generally preferable not to connect the cable shield to the
resolver. However in cases where there is an exceptional level of
common-mode noise voltage present on the resolver body, it may be
helpful to connect the shield there. If this is done then it becomes
essential to ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtails" at both
shield connections, and possibly to clamp the cable shield directly to
the resolver body and to the drive grounding bracket.
• The cable should preferably not be interrupted. If interruptions are
unavoidable, ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtail" in the
shield connections at each interruption.
Encoder connections:
• Use a cable with the correct impedance
• Use a cable with individually shielded twisted pairs
• Connect the cable shields to 0V at both the drive and the encoder,
using the shortest possible links ("pigtails")
• The cable should preferably not be interrupted. If interruptions are
unavoidable, ensure the absolute minimum length of "pigtail" in the
shield connections at each interruption. Preferably, use a connection
method which provides substantial metallic clamps for the cable
shield terminations.
Do not place sensitive The above applies where the encoder body is isolated from the motor
(unscreened) signal circuits
in a zone extending and where the encoder circuit is isolated from the encoder body. Where
300mm (12”) all around the there is no isolation between the encoder circuits and the motor body,
Drive, motor cable, input and in case of doubt, the following additional requirement must be
cable from EMC filter and
unshielded braking resistor observed. This gives the best possible noise immunity.
cable (if used)
• The shields must be directly clamped to the encoder body (no
pigtail) and to the drive grounding bracket. This may be achieved by
clamping of the individual shields or by providing an additional
overall shield which is clamped.
NOTE
The recommendations of the encoder manufacturer must also be
300mm adhered to for the encoder connections.
(12in)
NOTE
In order to guarantee maximum noise immunity for any application
double shielded cable as shown should be used.
In some cases single shielding of each pair of differential signals cables,
or a single overall shield with individual shield on the thermistor
connections is sufficient. In these cases all the shields should be
connected to ground and 0V at both ends.
If the 0V is required to be left floating a cable with individual shields and
NOTE
an overall shield must be used.
Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor
Figure 4-27 and Figure 4-28 illustrate the preferred construction of cable
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable
and the method of clamping. The outer sheath of the cable should be
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to
stripped back enough to allow the clamp to be installed. The shield must
ground close to the motor cable, to avoid this noise current spreading
not be broken or opened at this point. The clamps should be installed
through the control system.
close to the drive or feedback device, with the ground connections made
Feedback device cable shielding to a ground plate or similar metallic ground surface.
Shielding considerations are important for PWM drive installations due to Figure 4-27 Feedback cable, twisted pair
the high voltages and currents present in the output (motor) circuit with a
Cable overall shield
very wide frequency spectrum, typically from 0 to 20 MHz.
The following guidance is divided into two parts:
1. Ensuring correct transfer of data without disturbance from electrical
noise originating either within the drive or from outside. Twisted
2. Additional measures to prevent unwanted emission of radio pair Cable
cable
frequency noise. These are optional and only required where the
installation is subject to specific requirements for radio frequency
emission control.
Twisted pair shield

Figure 4-28 Feedback cable connections Table 4-14 Second environment emission compliance (SPz)
Connection
at drive Drive Motor cable length (m)
Filter Voltage
size 0 to 12 12 to 14 >14
Shield
connection 200 Unrestricted Restricted
to 0V SPz In-built
400 Unrestricted Restricted
Twisted
Table 4-15 Second environment emission compliance (size 1 to 6)
Cable pair Motor cable length (m)
shield Drive
shield Filter Voltage
size 0 to 4 4 to 10 10 to 100
In-built Any Unrestricted Restricted
1 In-built and
Any Unrestricted Restricted
ferrite ring
In-built Any Restricted
2 In-built and
Ground clamp Any Unrestricted Restricted
Cable ferrite ring
on shield
3 In-built Any Restricted
4 In-built Any Restricted
200 & 400 Unrestricted
5 In-built
690 Restricted
6 In-built Any Unrestricted
Cable Key:
Twisted
shield pair Restricted:EN 61800-3 second environment, restricted distribution
shield (Additional measures may be required to prevent
interference)
Unrestricted:EN 61800-3 second environment, unrestricted distribution
Shield
connection For longer motor cables, an external filter is required. Where a filter is
to 0V required, follow the guidelines in section 4.11.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards .
Where a filter is not required, follow the guidelines given in section
4.11.3 General requirements for EMC on page 74.
Connection
at motor The second environment typically includes an industrial low-
voltage power supply network which does not supply
To ensure suppression of radio frequency emission, buildings used for residential purposes. Operating the drive in
observe the following: this environment without an external EMC filter may cause
• Use a cable with an overall shield CAUTION interference to nearby electronic equipment whose sensitivity
• Clamp the overall shield to grounded metallic surfaces at both the
has not been appreciated. The user must take remedial
encoder and the drive, as illustrated in Figure 4-28
measures if this situation arises. If the consequences of
unexpected disturbances are severe, it is recommended that
4.11.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3 (standard for the guidelines in section 4.11.5 Compliance with generic
Power Drive Systems) emission standards be adhered to.
Meeting the requirements of this standard depends on the environment
that the drive is intended to operate in, as follows: Refer to section 12.1.24 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) on
page 254 for further information on compliance with EMC standards and
Operation in the first environment
definitions of environments.
Observe the guidelines given in section 4.11.5 Compliance with generic
emission standards on page 77. An external EMC filter will always be Detailed instructions and EMC information are given in the EMC Data
required. Sheet which is available from the supplier of the drive.
This is a product of the restricted distr bution class according

to IEC 61800-3
In a residential environment this product may cause radio
CAUTION
interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
Operation in the second environment

In all cases a shielded motor cable must be used, and an EMC filter is
required for all Unidrive SPs with a rated input current of less than 100A.
The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. In some
cases feeding the motor cables (U, V and W) once through a ferrite ring
can maintain compliance for longer cable lengths. The requirements of
operating in the second environment are met, depending on the motor
cable length for 3kHz switching frequency as stated in Table 4-14 and
Table 4-15.

4.11.5 Compliance with generic emission standards Figure 4-30 Supply and ground cable clearance (sizes 4 to 6)
The following information applies to frame SPz and size 1 to 5.
Size 6 upwards does not comply with the requirements of the generic
standards for radiated emission.
Size 6 complies with the requirements for conducted emission.
Use the recommended filter and shielded motor cable. Observe the
layout rules given in Figure 4-29. Ensure the AC supply and ground
100mm (4in)
cables are at least 100mm from the power module and motor cable.
Figure 4-29 Supply and ground cable clearance
(SPz and sizes 1 to 3) 100mm
(4in)
100mm
(4in)
100mm (4in)
100mm
(4in)
Do not modify
the filter wires

Avoid placing sensitive signal circuits in a zone 300mm (12in) all around Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal of the motor
the power module. frame using a link that is as short as possible and not exceeding 50mm
Figure 4-31 Sensitive signal circuit clearance (2in) long. A full 360° termination of the shield to the terminal housing of
the motor is beneficial.
It is unimportant for EMC purposes whether the motor cable contains an
internal (safety) ground core, or there is a separate external ground
conductor, or grounding is through the shield alone. An internal ground
core will carry a high noise current and therefore it must be terminated
as close as poss ble to the shield termination.
Figure 4-33 Grounding the motor cable shield
300mm
(12in)
Sensitive
signal
cable
Unshielded wiring to the optional braking resistor(s) may be used,

Ensure good EMC grounding. provided the wiring does not run external to the enclosure. Ensure a
Figure 4-32 Grounding the drive, motor cable shield and filter minimum spacing of 300mm (12in) from signal wiring and the AC supply
wiring to the external EMC filter. Otherwise this wiring must be shielded.
Figure 4-34 Shielding requirements of optional external braking
resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
Enclosure Enclosure
+DC BR +DC BR
Ensure direct
metal contact
at drive and OR
filter mounting
points (any
paint must be
removed).
Motor cable shield

(unbroken) electrically
connected to and held
in place by grounding
clamp.

If the control wiring is to leave the enclosure, it must be shielded and the Figure 4-36 Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the
shield(s) clamped to the drive using the grounding bracket as shown in enclosure
Figure 4-35. Remove the outer insulating cover of the cable to ensure
the shield(s) make contact with the bracket, but keep the shield(s) intact From the Drive
until as close as possible to the terminals
Alternatively, wiring may be passed through a ferrite ring.
Figure 4-35 Grounding of signal cable shields using the
grounding bracket
Back-plate
Enclosure
To he motor
Using a motor isolator / disconnect-switch

The motor cable shields should be connected by a very short conductor
having a low inductance. The use of a flat metal coupling-bar is
recommended; conventional wire is not suitable.
The shields should be bonded directly to the coupling-bar using
uninsulated metal cable-clamps. Keep the length of the exposed power
conductors to a minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and
circuits are at least 0.3m (12 in) away.
The coupling-bar may be grounded to a known low-impedance ground
nearby, for example a large metallic structure which is connected closely
to the drive ground.
Figure 4-37 Connecting the motor cable to an isolator /
disconnect switch
Isolator
4.11.6 Variations in the EMC wiring

Interruptions to the motor cable
The motor cable should ideally be a single length of shielded or armored
cable having no interruptions. In some situations it may be necessary to
interrupt the cable, as in the following examples: From the To the
• Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in the drive enclosure Drive motor
Coupling bar
• Installing a motor isolator / disconnect switch for safety when work is (If required)
done on the motor
In these cases the following guidelines should be followed. Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and
connections outside a building
Terminal block in the enclosure The input/output ports for the control circuits are designed for general
The motor cable shields should be bonded to the back-plate using use within machines and small systems without any special precautions.
uninsulated metal cable-clamps which should be positioned as close as
possible to the terminal block. Keep the length of power conductors to a These circuits meet the requirements of EN61000-6-2 (1kV surge)
minimum and ensure that all sensitive equipment and circuits are at provided the 0V connection is not grounded.
least 0.3m (12 in) away from the terminal block. In applications where they may be exposed to high-energy voltage
surges, some special measures may be required to prevent malfunction
or damage. Surges may be caused by lightning or severe power faults in
association with grounding arrangements which permit high transient
voltages between nominally grounded points. This is a particular risk
where the circuits extend outside the protection of a building.
As a general rule, if the circuits are to pass outside the building where
the drive is located, or if cable runs within a building exceed 30m, some
additional precautions are advisable. One of the following techniques
should be used:
1. Galvanic isolation, i.e. do not connect the control 0V terminal to
ground. Avoid loops in the control wiring, i.e. ensure every control
wire is accompanied by its return (0V) wire.
2. Shielded cable with additional power ground bonding. The cable
shield may be connected to ground at both ends, but in addition the
ground conductors at both ends of the cable must be bonded
together by a power ground cable (equipotential bonding cable) with

cross-sectional area of at least 10mm2, or 10 times the area of the 4.12 Serial communications connections
signal cable shield, or to suit the electrical safety requirements of the
The drive has a serial communications port (serial port) as standard
plant. This ensures that fault or surge current passes mainly through
supporting 2 wire EIA485 communications. Please see Table 4-16 for
the ground cable and not in the signal cable shield. If the building or
the connection details for the RJ45 connector.
plant has a well-designed common bonded network this precaution
is not necessary. Figure 4-40 Location of the RJ45 serial comms connector
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and digital
inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a commercially
available surge suppressor may be connected in parallel with the
input circuit as shown in Figure 4-38 and Figure 4-39.
If a digital port experiences a severe surge its protective trip may operate
1
(O.Ld1 trip code 26). For continued operation after such an event, the
trip can be reset automatically by setting Pr 10.34 to 5.
8
Figure 4-38 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs and
outputs
Signal from plant Signal to drive
30V zener diode

e.g. 2xBZW50-15
0V 0V
Figure 4-39 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs and
outputs
Signal from plant Signal to drive
Table 4-16 Connection details for RJ45 connector

Pin Function
2 x 15V zener diode
e.g. 2xBZW50-15 1 120 Termination resistor
2 RX TX
3 Isolated 0V
0V 0V 4 +24V (100mA)
5 Isolated 0V
Surge suppression devices are available as rail-mounting modules, e.g.
6 TX enable
from Phoenix Contact:
7 RX\ TX\
Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC
8 RX\ TX\ (if termination resistors are required, link to pin 1)
Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC
Shell Isolated 0V
These devices are not suitable for encoder signals or fast digital data
networks because the capacitance of the diodes adversely affects the The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications
signal. Most encoders have galvanic isolation of the signal circuit from network.
the motor frame, in which case no precautions are required. For data Minimum number of connections are 2, 3, 7 and shield. Shielded cable
networks, follow the specific recommendations for the particular must be used at all times.
network.
4.12.1 Isolation of the serial communications port
The serial PC communications port is double insulated and meets the
requirements for SELV in EN50178.
In order to meet the requirements for SELV in IEC60950 (IT

equipment) it is necessary for the control computer to be
grounded. Alternatively, when a lap-top or similar device is
used which has no provision for grounding, an isolation
WARNING device must be incorporated in the communications lead.
An isolated serial communications lead has been designed to connect

the drive to IT equipment (such as lap-top computers), and is available
from the supplier of the drive. See below for details:
Table 4-17 Isolated serial comms lead details
Reference Description
CT COMMS CABLE CT EIA232 Comms cable
USB/485 converter CT USB Comms cable
The “isolated serial communications” lead has reinforced insulation as
defined in IEC60950 for altitudes up to 3,000m.
NOTE
When using the CT EIA232 Comms cable the available baud rate is
limited to 19.2k baud.

4.12.2 Multi-drop network 4.13 Control connections

The drive can be used on a 2 wire EIA485 multi-drop network using the
drive's serial communications port when the following guidelines are 4.13.1 General
adhered to. Table 4-18 The control connections consist of:
Connections Function Qty Control parameters available
Terminal
The network should be a daisy chain arrangement and not a star, number
although short stubs to the drive are allowed. Differential analog input 1
Destination, offset, offset trim,
5,6
invert, scaling
The minimum connections are pins 2 (RX TX), 3 (isolated 0V), 7 (RX\
Single ended analog Mode, offset, scaling, invert,
TX\) and the shield. input
2
destination
7,8
Pin 4 (+24V) on each drive can be connected together but there is no Analog output 2 Source, mode, scaling, 9,10
power sharing mechanism between drives and therefore the maximum Digital input 3 Destination, invert, logic select 27, 28, 29
power available is the same as a single drive. (If pin 4 is not linked to the Input / output mode select,
other drives on the network and has an individual load then the Digital input / output 3 destination / source, invert, 24, 25, 26
maximum power can be taken from pin 4 of each drive.) logic select
Termination resistors Relay 1 Source, invert 41,42

If a drive is on the end of the network chain then pins 1 and 8 should be Drive enable (SAFE
TORQUE OFF (SECURE 1 31
linked together. This will connect an internal 120 termination resistor
DISABLE))
between RXTX and RX\TX\. (If the end unit is not a drive or the user
+10V User output 1 4
wishes to use their own termination resistor, a 120 termination resistor
+24V User output 1 Source, invert 22
should be connected between RXTX and RX\TX\ at the end unit.)
1, 3, 11, 21,
If the host is connected to a single drive then termination resistors 0V common 6
23, 30
should not be used unless the baud rate is high. +24V External input 1 2
CT Comms Cable Key:
The CT Comms Cable can be used on a multi-drop network but should
only be used occasionally for diagnostic and set up purposes. The Destination indicates the parameter which is being controlled by the
network must also be made up entirely of Unidrive SPs. parameter: terminal / function
If the CT Comms Cable is to be used, then pin 6 (TX enable) should be Source
indicates the parameter being output by the terminal
connected on all drives and pin 4 (+24V) should be linked to at least 1 parameter:
drive to supply power to the converter in the cable. Mode analog - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal,
parameter: i.e. voltage 0-10V, current 4-20mA etc.
Only one CT Comms Cable can be used on a network.
digital - indicates the mode of operation of the terminal,
i.e. positive / negative logic (the Drive Enable terminal is
fixed in positive logic), open collector.
All analog terminal functions can be programmed in menu 7.
All digital terminal functions (including the relay) can be programmed in
menu 8.
The setting of Pr 1.14 and Pr 6.04 can cause the function of digital inputs
T25 to T29 to change. For more information, please refer to section
11.21.1 Reference modes on page 233 and section 11.21.7 Start / stop
logic modes on page 238.
The control circuits are isolated from the power circuits in the
drive by basic insulation (single insulation) only. The installer
must ensure that the external control circuits are insulated
from human contact by at least one layer of insulation
WARNING (supplementary insulation) rated for use at the AC supply
voltage.
If the control circuits are to be connected to other circuits

classified as Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) (e.g. to a
personal computer), an additional isolating barrier must be
WARNING
included in order to maintain the SELV classification.
If any of the digital inputs or outputs (including the drive

enable input) are connected in parallel with an inductive load
(i.e. contactor or motor brake) then suitable suppression (i.e.
diode or varistor) should be used on the coil of the load. If no
CAUTION suppression is used then over voltage sp kes can cause
damage to the digital inputs and outputs on the drive.
Ensure the logic sense is correct for the control circuit to be

used. Incorrect logic sense could cause the motor to be
started unexpectedly.
Positive logic is the default state for Unidrive SP.
CAUTION

NOTE Figure 4-41 Default terminal functions

Any signal cables which are carried inside the motor cable (i.e. motor
thermistor, motor brake) will pick up large pulse currents via the cable
capacitance. The shield of these signal cables must be connected to
ground close to the point of exit of the motor cable, to avoid this noise
current spreading through the control system.
NOTE
Polarized signal
The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) / drive enable terminal is connectors
a positive logic input only. It is not affected by the setting of Pr 8.29
Positive logic select. 1 11
NOTE 41 42
The common 0V from analog signals should, wherever poss ble, not be
connected to the same 0V terminal as the common 0V from digital 21 31
signals. Terminals 3 and 11 should be used for connecting the 0V
common of analog signals and terminals 21, 23 and 30 for digital 0V common 1
signals. This is to prevent small voltage drops in the terminal External 24V supply 2
connections causing inaccuracies in the analog signals.
Analog frequency/speed
reference 1
0V common
3
Connections for
single-ended input 5
signal 6
0V common
Connections for
differential input signal
4
Analog
frequency/speed 7
reference 2
Analog input 3 8
Motor thermistor*
9
Speed / frequency 10
Torque (active
current)
11
0V common
0V common
21
22
0V common
23
At zero speed 24
Reset 25
Run forward 26
Run reverse 27
Analog input 1/ Analog input 1
input 2 select Analog input 2
28
Jog forward select 29

0V common
SAFE TORQUE OFF 30
(SECURE DISABLE) /
31
Drive enable**
Status relay 41
Drive OK 42
* With software V01.07.00 and later, Analog input 3 is configured as a

motor thermistor input. With software V01.06.02 and earlier, Analog
input 3 has no default function. Refer to Analog input 3 on page 83.
**The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) / Drive enable terminal
is a positive logic input only.

4.13.2 Control terminal specification

1 0V common 7 Analog input 2
Default function Frequency/speed reference
Common connection for all external
Function Bipolar single-ended analog voltage or
devices Type of input
unipolar current
Mode controlled by... Pr 7.11
2 +24V external input Operating in Voltage mode
To supply the control circuit Full scale voltage range 9.8V 3%
Function without providing a supply to the Maximum offset 30mV
power stage Absolute maximum voltage range 36V relative to 0V
Nominal voltage +24.0Vdc Input resistance >100k
Minimum continuous operating Operating in current mode
+19.2Vdc
voltage
0 to 20mA 5%, 20 to 0mA 5%,
Current ranges
Maximum continuous operating
+30.0Vdc 4 to 20mA 5%, 20 to 4mA 5%
voltage
Maximum offset 250A
Minimum start-up voltage 21.6Vdc
Absolute maximum voltage
Recommended power supply 60W 24Vdc nominal 36V max
(reverse bias)
Recommended fuse 3A, 50Vdc Absolute maximum current +70mA
Equivalent input resistance 200 at 20mA
Common to all modes
3 0V common
Resolution 10 bit + sign
Function 250s when configured as voltage input
devices with destinations as Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37,
Pr 3.22 or Pr 4.08 in closed loop vector or
Sample period servo mode. 4ms for open loop mode, all
other destinations in closed loop vector or
4 +10V user output
servo mode, or any destination when
Function Supply for external analog devices configured as a current input.
Voltage tolerance 1%
Nominal output current 10mA
8 Analog input 3
Protec ion Current limit and trip @ 30mA
V01.07.00 and later: Motor thermistor
Default function input (PTC)
V01.06.02 and earlier: Not configured
Precision reference Analog input 1
Bipolar single-ended analog voltage,
Type of input
5 Non-inverting input unipolar current or motor thermistor input
Mode controlled by... Pr 7.15
6 Inverting input Operating in Voltage mode (default)
Default function Frequency/speed reference Voltage range 9.8V 3%
Bipolar differential analog Maximum offset 30mV
Type of input (For single-ended use, connect terminal 6 Absolute maximum voltage range 36V relative to 0V
to terminal 3)
Input resistance >100k
Full scale voltage range 9.8V 1%
Operating in current mode
Absolute maximum
36V relative to 0V 0 to 20mA 5%, 20 to 0mA 5%,
voltage range Current ranges
4 to 20mA 5%, 20 to 4mA 5%
Working common mode voltage
13V relative to 0V
range Maximum offset 250A
Input resistance 100k 1% Absolute maximum voltage
36V max
(reverse bias)
Resolution 16-bit plus sign (as speed reference)
Absolute maximum current +70mA
Monotonic Yes (including 0V)
Dead band None (including 0V)
Equivalent input resistance 200 at 20mA
Jumps None (including 0V) Operating in thermistor input mode

Internal pull-up voltage <5V
Maximum offset 700V
Maximum non linearity 0.3% of input
Trip threshold resistance 3.3k 10%
Maximum gain asymmetry 0.5% Reset resistance 1.8k 10%

Input filter bandwidth single pole ~1kHz Short-circuit detection resistance 50 40%
250s with destinations as Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37 Common to all modes
or Pr 3.22 in closed loop vector or servo Resolution 10 bit + sign
Sampling period mode. 4ms for open loop mode and all
other destinations in closed loop vector or 250s when configured as voltage input
servo mode. with destinations as Pr 1.36, Pr 1.37,
Pr 3.22 or Pr 4.08 in closed loop vector or
Sample period servo mode. 4ms for open loop mode, all
other destinations in closed loop vector or
servo mode, or any destina ion when
configured as a current input.
T8 analog input 3 has a parallel connection to terminal 15 of the drive

encoder connector.

9 Analog output 1 24 Digital I/O 1
10 Analog output 2 25 Digital I/O 2

OL> Motor FREQUENCY output signal 26 Digital I/O 3
Terminal 9 default function
CL> SPEED output signal
Terminal 10 default function Motor active current Terminal 24 default function AT ZERO SPEED output
Bipolar single-ended analog voltage or Terminal 25 default function DRIVE RESET input
Type of output
unipolar single ended current Terminal 26 default function RUN FORWARD input
Mode controlled by... Pr 7.21 and Pr 7.24 Positive or negative logic digital inputs,
Operating in Voltage mode (default) Type positive or negative logic push-pull outputs
or open collector outputs
Voltage range 10V 3%
Input / output mode controlled by... Pr 8.31, Pr 8.32 and Pr 8.33
Maximum offset 200mV
Operating as an input
Maximum output current 35mA
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 8.29
Load resistance 1k min
Absolute maximum applied voltage
Protection 35mA max. Short circuit protection 30V
range
Operating in current mode Impedance 6k
0 to 20mA 5% Input thresholds 10.0V 0.8V
Current ranges
4 to 20mA 5%
Operating as an output
Maximum offset 600A
Open collector outputs selected Pr 8.30
Maximum open circuit voltage +15V
Nominal maximum output current 200mA (total including terminal 22)
Maximum load resistance 600 Maximum output current 240mA (total including terminal 22)
Common to all modes Common to all modes
Resolution 10-bit (plus sign in voltage mode) Voltage range 0V to +24V
250s when configured as a high speed 250s when configured as an input with
output with sources as Pr 4.02, Pr 4.17 in
destina ions as Pr 6.35 or Pr 6.36. 600s
Update period all modes or Pr 3.02, Pr 5.03 in closed loop Sample / Update period when configured as an input with
vector or servo mode. 4ms when
destina ion as Pr 6.29. 4ms in all other
configured as any other type of output or
cases.
with all other sources.
11 0V common 27 Digital Input 4
Common connection for all external 28 Digital Input 5

Function
devices
29 Digital Input 6
Terminal 27 default function RUN REVERSE input
21 0V common Terminal 28 default function Analog INPUT 1 / INPUT 2 select
Terminal 29 default function JOG SELECT input
Function Type Negative or positive logic digital inputs
devices
Logic mode controlled by... Pr 8.29
Voltage range 0V to +24V
22 +24V user output (selectable) Absolute maximum applied voltage
30V
range
Terminal 22 default function +24V user output
Impedance 6k
Can be switched on or off to act as a fourth
digital output (positive logic only) by setting Input thresholds 10.0V 0.8V
Programmability
the source Pr 8.28 and source invert Pr 250s with destinations as Pr 6.35 or
8.18 Sample / Update period Pr 6.36. 600s with destination as Pr 6.29.
Nominal output current 200mA (including all digital I/O) 4ms in all other cases.
Maximum output current 240mA (including all digital I/O)
Protection Current limit and trip
30 0V common
23 0V common Function
devices
Function
devices

Figure 4-43 Location of encoder connector (SPz)

Drive enable (SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE)
31
function)
Type Positive logic only digital input
Voltage range 0V to +24V
Absolute maximum applied voltage 30V
Thresholds 15 5V 2.5V 5 1
10 6
Nominal: 8ms 15 11
Response time
Maximum: 20ms
The dr ve enable terminal (T31) provides a SAFE TORQUE OFF Drive encoder connector
Female 15-way D-type
(SECURE DISABLE) function. The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE Encoder
DISABLE) function meets the requirements of EN954-1 category 3 for input
the prevention of unexpected starting of the drive. It may be used in a
safety-related application in preventing the drive from generating
torque in the motor to a high level of integrity.
Figure 4-44 Connecting the encoder ground tab to the EMC
Refer to section 4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) on page 89 bracket
for further information.
41
Relay contacts
42
Default function Drive OK indicator
Contact voltage rating 240Vac, Installation over-voltage category II
2A AC 240V
Contact maximum current rating 4A DC 30V resistive load
0.5A DC 30V inductive load (L/R = 40ms)
Contact minimum recommended
12V 100mA
rating
Contact type Normally open
Default contact condition Closed when power applied and drive OK
Update period 4ms
A fuse or other over-current protection should be installed to

the relay circuit.
WARNING
NOTE
4.14 Encoder connections The size of the connecting cable between the encoder ground tab and
4.14.1 Location of encoder connector (SPz) the EMC bracket should be equal to the input cable.
Before using the encoder connector on SPz for the first time, the break- 4.14.2 Location of encoder connector (size 1 to 6)
out need removing as shown in Figure 4-42. Figure 4-45 Location of encoder connector
Figure 4-42 Access to encoder connections
Break-outs
After removing the break-out, ensure that the ground tab is connected to 5 1
ground. This will connect 0V of the drive to ground. This is required to 10 6
15 11
enable the drive to meet IP20 when the break-out is removed.
Drive encoder connector
NOTE Female 15-way D-type
Do not remove the break-out if the encoder connection is not required.

4.14.3 Encoder types

Table 4-19 Encoder types
Setting of
Description
Pr 3.38
Ab
Quadrature incremental encoder with or without marker pulse
(0)
Fd Incremental encoder with frequency pulses and direction,
(1) with or without marker pulse
Fr Incremental encoder with forward pulses and reverse
(2) pulses, with or without marker pulse
Quadrature incremental encoder with UVW commutation
Ab.SErVO signals, with or without marker pulse
(3) Encoder with UVW commutation signals only (Pr 3.34 set
to zero)*
Fd.SErVO Incremental encoder with frequency pulses and direction
(4) with commutation signals**, with or without marker pulse
Fr.SErVO Incremental encoder with forward pulses and reverse pulses
(5) with commutation signals**, with or without marker pulse
SC
SinCos encoder without serial communications
(6)
SC.HiPEr Absolute SinCos encoder with HiperFace serial
(7) communications protocol (Stegmann)
EndAt Absolute EndAt serial communications encoder
(8) (Heidenhain)
SC.EndAt Absolute SinCos encoder with EnDat serial
(9) communications protocol (Heidenhain)
SSI
Absolute SSI only encoder
(10)
SC.SSI
Absolute SinCos encoder with SSI
(11)
* This feedback device provides very low resolution feedback and should not be used for applications requiring a high level of performance
** The U, V & W commutation signals are required with an incremental type encoder when used with a servo motor. The UVW commutation signals are
used to define the motor position during the first 120 electrical rotation after the drive is powered-up or the encoder is initialized.
4.14.4 Encoder connection details
Table 4-20 Drive encoder connector details
Setting of Pr 3.38
Terminal Ab Fd Fr Ab.SErVO Fd.SErVO Fr.SErVO SC SC.HiPEr EndAt SC.EndAt SSI SC.SSI
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
1 A F F A F F Cos Cos Cos
2 A\ F\ F\ A\ F\ F\ Cosref Cosref Cosref
3 B D R B D R Sin Sin Sin
4 B\ D\ R\ B\ D\ R\ Sinref Sinref Sinref
5 Z* Encoder input - Data (input/output)
6 Z\* Encoder input - Data\ (input/output)
Simulated encoder Simulated encoder
7 U
Aout, Fout** Aout, Fout**
8 U\
Aout\, Fout\** Aout\, Fout\**
9 V
Bout, Dout** Bout, Dout**
10 V\
Bout\, Dout\** Bout\, Dout\**
11 W Encoder input - Clock (output)
12 W\ Encoder input - Clock\ (output)
13 +V***
14 0V common
15 th****
* Marker pulse is optional be used as a thermistor input, ensure that Pr 7.15 is set to ‘th.sc’ (7),
** Simulated encoder output only available in open-loop ‘th’ (8) or ‘th.diSP’ (9).
*** The encoder supply is selectable through parameter configuration to NOTE
5Vdc, 8Vdc and 15Vdc
SSI encoders typically have maximum baud rate of 500kBaud. When a
**** Terminal 15 is a parallel connection to T8 analog input 3. If this is to SSI only encoder is used for speed feedback with a closed loop vector or

servo motor, a large speed feedback filter (Pr 3.42) is required due to the SC, SC.HiPEr, EndAt, SC.EndAt, SSI and SC.SSI encoders
time taken for the position information to be transferred from the encoder
1 Channel Cos*
into the drive. The addition of this filter means that SSI only encoders are
not suitable for speed feedback in dynamic or high-speed applications. 2 Channel Cosref*
4.14.5 Specifications
Feedback device connections 3 Channel Sin*
Ab, Fd, Fr, Ab.SErVO, Fd.SErVO and Fr.SErVO encoders
4 Channel Sinref*
1 Channel A, Frequency or Forward inputs
Type Differential voltage
2 Channel A\, Frequency\ or Forward\ inputs Maximum Signal level
1.25V peak to peak (sin with regard to
sinref and cos with regard to cosref)
3 Channel B, Direction or Reverse inputs Maximum input frequency See Table 4-21
4 Channel B\, Direction\ or Reverse\ inputs Maximum applied differential voltage

4V
and common mode voltage range
Type EIA 485 differential receivers
For the SinCos encoder to be compatible with Unidrive SP, the output
Maximum input frequency
V01.06.01 and later: 500kHz signals from the encoder must be a 1V peak to peak differential voltage
V01.06.00 and earlier: 410kHz (across Sin to Sinref and Cos to Cosref).
Line loading <2 unit loads The majority of encoders have a DC offset on all signals. Stegmann
Line termination components 120 (switchable) encoders typically have a 2.5Vdc offset. The Sinref and Cosref are a
flat DC level at 2.5Vdc and the Cos and Sin signals have a 1V peak to
Working common mode range +12V to –7V
peak waveform biased at 2.5Vdc.
25V Encoders are available which have a 1V peak to peak voltage on Sin,
relative to 0V
Sinref, Cos and Cosref. This results in a 2V peak to peak voltage seen
Absolute maximum applied differential
25V at the drive's encoder terminals. It is not recommended that encoders of
voltage
this type are used with Unidrive SP, and that the encoder feedback
signals should meet the above parameters (1V peak to peak).
5 Marker pulse channel Z Resolution: The sinewave frequency can be up to 500kHz but the
resolution is reduced at high frequency. Table 4-21 shows the number
6 Marker pulse channel Z\ of bits of interpolated information at different frequencies and with
different voltage levels at the drive encoder port. The total resolution in
7 Phase channel U bits per revolution is the ELPR plus the number of bits of interpolated
information. Although it is possible to obtain 11 bits of interpolation
8 Phase channel U\
information, the nominal design value is 10 bits.
9 Phase channel V * Not used with EndAt and SSI communications only encoders.
10 Phase channel V\ Table 4-21 Feedback resolution based on frequency and voltage level
Volt/Freq 1kHz 5kHz 50kHz 100kHz 200kHz 500kHz
11 Phase channel W
1.2 11 11 10 10 9 8
12 Phase channel W\ 1.0 11 11 10 9 9 7
Type EIA 485 differential receivers 0.8 10 10 10 9 8 7
Maximum input frequency 512kHz 0.6 10 10 9 9 8 7
32 unit loads (for terminals 5 and 6) 0.4 9 9 9 8 7 6
Line loading
1 unit load (for terminals 7 to 12)
120 (switchable for terminals 5 and 6,
Line termination components 5 Data**
always in circuit for terminals 7 to 12)
Working common mode range +12V to –7V 6 Data\**
+14V to -9V
relative to 0V 11 Clock***
voltage
+14V to -9V 12 Clock\***
Type EIA 485 differential transceivers
Maximum frequency 2MHz
32 unit loads (for terminals 5 and 6)
Line loading
1 unit load (for terminals 11 and 12)
Working common mode range +12V to –7V
14V
relative to 0V
14V
voltage
** Not used with SC encoders.

*** Not used with SC and SC.HiPEr encoders.

Frequency slaving outputs (open loop only) 4.15 Low voltage DC mode enable and
Ab, Fd, Fr, SC, SC.HiPEr, EndAt, SC.EndAt, SSI and SC.SSI
encoders heatsink fan supply connections (size
7 Frequency slaving out channel A
4 to 6)
Sizes 4 to 6 require a 24V enable signal to terminal 50 and 51 of the
8 Frequency slaving out channel A\ lower terminal connector near the W phase output, to allow the drive to
be used from a low voltage DC supply.
9 Frequency slaving out channel B
Figure 4-46 Location of the size 4 to 6 low voltage DC mode
10 Frequency slaving out channel B\ enable connections
Type EIA 485 differential transceivers

Maximum output frequency 512kHz
14V
relative to 0V
14V
voltage
Common to all Encoder types

13 Encoder supply voltage
Supply voltage 5.15V 2%, 8V 5% or 15V 5%
Maximum output current 300mA for 5V and 8V

200mA for 15V
The voltage on terminal 13 is controlled by Pr 3.36. The default for this
parameter is 5V (0) but this can be set to 8V (1) or 15V (2). Setting the
encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage
to the feedback device.
The termination resistors should be disabled if the outputs from the
encoder are higher than 5V.
14 0V common
Figure 4-47 Size 4 and 5 low voltage DC mode enable connections

15 Motor thermistor input
55 54 53 52 51 50
This terminal is connected internally to terminal 8 of the signal
connector. Connect only one of these terminals to a motor thermistor.
Analog input 3 must be in thermistor mode, Pr 7.15 = th.SC (7), th (8) or 0V
th.diSP (9). 24V low voltage DC mode enable
To the heatsink fan
Figure 4-48 Size 6 low voltage DC mode enable connections

24V heatsink fan supply
0V
Not used
65 64 63 62 61 60 Upper terminal connector
55 54 53 52 51 50 Lower terminal connector
0V
24V low voltage DC mode enable
To the heatsink fan

4.15.1 Low voltage DC mode enable connections The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function is fail-safe, so
(sizes 4 to 6) when the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) input is
disconnected the drive will not operate the motor, even if a combination
50 0V of components within the drive has failed. Most component failures are
revealed by the drive failing to operate. SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
51 24V low voltage DC mode enable DISABLE) is also independent of the drive firmware. This meets the
To allow the drive it be used from requirements of EN954-1 category 3 for the prevention of operation of
Function
low voltage DC supply the motor.1 On drives with date code P04 and later tThe SAFE TORQUE
OFF (SECURE DISABLE) input also meets the requirements of EN 81-1
Nominal voltage 24.0Vdc
clause 12.7.3 b) as part of a system for preventing unwanted operation
Minimum continuous operating of the motor in a lift (elevator).2
19.2Vdc
voltage
1 Independent approval has been given by BGIA.
Maximum continuous operating
30.0Vdc 2
voltage Independent approval of concept has been given by TÜV.
Nominal current consumption 500mA SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) can be used to eliminate
electro-mechanical contactors, including special safety contactors,
8A 600V AC fast acting class CC
Recommended fuse which would otherwise be required for safety applications.
type fuse
Note on response time of SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE),
and use with safety controllers with self-testing outputs (drives
52 with date code P04 and later).
53 SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) has been designed to have a
Heatsink fan connections response time of greater than 1ms, so that it is compat ble with safety
54
controllers whose outputs are subject to a dynamic test with a pulse
55 width not exceeding 1ms.
No user connections For applications where a fast-acting disable function is required, please
see section 11.21.10 Fast Disable on page 241
4.15.2 Heatsink fan supply connections (size 6 only) Note on the use of servo motors, other permanent-magnet motors,
60 reluctance motors and salient-pole induction motors
61 When the drive is disabled through SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
No connection DISABLE), a possible (although highly unlikely) failure mode is for two
62 power devices in the inverter circuit to conduct incorrectly.
63 This fault cannot produce a steady rotating torque in any AC motor. It
No user connections produces no torque in a conventional induction motor with a cage rotor. If
the rotor has permanent magnets and/or saliency, then a transient
alignment torque may occur. The motor may briefly try to rotate by up to
180° electrical, for a permanent magnet motor, or 90° electrical, for a
64 0V
salient pole induction motor or reluctance motor. This possible failure
65 24V heatsink fan supply mode must be allowed for in the machine design.
To provide the power supply to The design of safety-related control systems must only be
Function done by personnel with the required training and experience.
the heatsink mounted fan
Nominal voltage 24Vdc The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function will
only ensure the safety of a machine if it is correctly
Minimum continuous operating WARNING
incorporated into a complete safety system. The system
23.5V
voltage must be subject to a risk assessment to confirm that the
Maximum continuous operating residual risk of an unsafe event is at an acceptable level for
27V
voltage the application.
Current consumption 3.3A
Recommended power supply 24V, 100W, 4.5A To maintain category 3 according to EN954-1 the
2t environment limits given in section 12.1 Drive technical data
Recommended fuse 4A fast blow (I less than 20A2s) on page 242 must be adhered to.
WARNING
4.16 SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) inhibits the
DISABLE) operation of the drive, this includes inhibiting braking. If the
The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function provides a drive is required to provide both braking and SAFE
means for preventing the drive from generating torque in the motor, with TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) in the same operation
a very high level of integrity. It is suitable for incorporation into a safety WARNING (e.g. for emergency stop) then a safety timer relay or similar
system for a machine. It is also suitable for use as a conventional drive device must be used to ensure that the drive is disabled a
enable input. suitable time after braking. The braking function in the drive
The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) function makes use of is provided by an electronic circuit which is not fail-safe. If
the special property of an inverter drive with an induction motor, which is braking is a safety requirement, it must be supplemented by
that torque cannot be generated without the continuous correct active an independent fail-safe braking mechanism.
behaviour of the inverter circuit. All credible faults in the inverter power
circuit cause a loss of torque generation.

Figure 4-50 Category 3 interlock using electromechanical safety

SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) does not provide contactors
electrical isolation. The supply to the drive must be
disconnected by an approved isolation device before gaining +24V
WARNING
access to power connections. Reset Stop
Enable
The following diagrams illustrate how the SAFE TORQUE OFF K1 K1
Drive
(SECURE DISABLE) input can be used to eliminate contactors and Start
safety contactors from control systems. Please note these are provided K2 K2
for illustration only, every specific arrangement must be verified for
suitability in the proposed application.
K1
In the first example, illustrated in Figure 4-49, the SAFE TORQUE OFF Two-channel Safety
interlocks relay
(SECURE DISABLE) function is used to replace a simple power
K1 K2 K2
contactor in applications where the risk of injury from unexpected
starting is small, but it is not acceptable to rely on the complex hardware
and firmware/software used by the stop/start function within the drive. M
3~
Figure 4-49 Start / stop control EN954-1 category B - replacement

of contactor The safety function of the example circuit is to ensure that the motor
does not operate when the interlocks are not signalling a safe state. The
Using contactor safety relay is used to check the two interlock channels and detect faults
+24V in those channels. The stop/start buttons are shown for completeness as
Drive part of a typical arrangement, they do not carry out a safety function and
are not necessary for the safe operation of the circuit.
Enable
T31
Figure 4-51 Category 3 interlock using SAFE TORQUE OFF
Stop
(SECURE DISABLE) with protected wiring
K1 +24V
Start
Drive run
Reset Stop (Pr 10.02)
K1
(or at
K1 drive Drive
output) SD
~
Start
Using SECURE DISABLE Safety Protected wiring

relay (screened or
+24V segregated)
Interlocks
Drive
SD M
T31 3~
Stop
In the conventional system, a contactor failure in the unsafe direction is

detected the next time the safety relay is reset. Since the drive is not part
K1
Start of the safety system it has to be assumed that AC power is always
available to drive the motor, so two contactors in series are required in
order to prevent the first failure from causing an unsafe event (i.e. the
K1 motor driven).
M
3~ With SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) there are no single
faults in the drive which can permit the motor to be driven. Therefore it is
not necessary to have a second channel to interrupt the power
In the second example, illustrated in Figure 4-50 and Figure 4-51, a
connection, nor a fault detection circuit.
conventional high-integrity system which uses two safety contactors with
auxiliary contacts with connected movement is replaced by a single It is important to note that a single short-circuit from the Enable input
SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) system. This arrangement (SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE)) to a DC supply of
meets EN954-1 category 3. approximately +24V would cause the drive to be enabled. For this
reason, Figure 4-51 shows the wire from the Enable input to the safety
relay as "protected wiring" so that the possibility of a short circuit from
this wire to the DC supply can be excluded, as specified in ISO 13849-2.
The wiring can be protected by placing it in a segregated cable duct or
other enclosure, or by providing it with a grounded shield. The shield is
provided to avoid a hazard from an electrical fault. It may be grounded
by any convenient method, no special EMC precautions are required.
If the use of protected wiring is not acceptable, so that the possibility of
this short circuit must be allowed for, then a relay must be used to
monitor the state of the Enable input, together with a single safety
contactor to prevent operation of the motor after a fault. This is illustrated
in Figure 4-52.

NOTE
The auxiliary relay K2 must be located in the same enclosure and close
to the drive, with its coil connected as closely as possible to the drive
enable / SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) input.
Figure 4-52 Use of contactor and relay to avoid the need for
protected wiring
+24V
Reset Stop
SD
K1 Drive
Start K2
K2
K1
Two-channel Safety
interlocks relay
K1 K2
M
3~

5 Getting Started
This chapter introduces the user interfaces, menu structure and security level of the drive.
5.1 Understanding the display

There are two types of keypad available for the Unidrive SP, LED and LCD. The SM-Keypad and SPz Keypad have an LED display, and the SM-
Keypad Plus has an LCD display. The SPz Keypad can only be fitted to SPz, and the SM-Keypad can only be fitted to size 1 to 6. The SM-Keypad
Plus can either be fitted to the size 1 to 6, or it can be remotely mounted on an enclosure door.
5.1.1 SM-Keypad/SPz Keypad (LED) 5.1.2 SM-Keypad Plus (LCD)
The display consists of two horizontal rows of 7 segment LED displays. The display consists of three lines of text.
The upper display shows the drive status or the current menu and The top line shows the drive status or the current menu and parameter
parameter number being viewed. number being viewed on the left, and the parameter value or the specific
trip type on the right.
The lower display shows the parameter value or the specific trip type.
The lower two lines show the parameter name or the help text.
Figure 5-1 SM-Keypad Figure 5-2 SM-Keypad Plus
Upper display
Lower display
Mode (black) button Mode (black) button
Help button
Control buttons Control buttons
Fwd / Rev (blue) button Joypad Fwd / Rev (blue) button Joypad
Stop/reset (red) button Stop/reset (red) button
Start (green) button Start (green) button
Figure 5-3 SPz Keypad
Upper display
Lower display Navigation keys
Start (green) button Mode (black) button

Fwd / Rev (blue) button Stop/reset (red) button
NOTE The red stop button is also used to reset the drive.
The SM-Keypad/SPz Keypad and the SM-Keypad Plus can indicate when a SMARTCARD access is taking place or when the second motor map is
active (menu 21). These are indicated on the displays as follows.
SM-Keypad / SPz Keypad SM-Keypad Plus

The decimal point after the fourth digit in the The symbol ‘CC’ will appear in the lower left
SMARTCARD access taking place
upper display will flash. hand corner of the display
The decimal point after the third digit in the The symbol ‘Mot2’ will appear in the lower left
Second motor map active
upper display will flash. hand corner of the display
5.2 Keypad operation

5.2.1 Control buttons
The keypad consists of:
1. Joypad - used to navigate the parameter structure and change parameter values.
2. Mode button - used to change between the display modes – parameter view, parameter edit, status.
3. Three control buttons - used to control the drive if keypad mode is selected.
4. Help button (SM-Keypad Plus only) - displays text briefly describing the selected parameter.
The Help button toggles between other display modes and parameter help mode. The up and down functions on the joypad scroll the help text to
allow the whole string to be viewed. The right and left functions on the joypad have no function when help text is being viewed.
The display examples in this section show the SM-Keypad 7 segment LED display. The examples are the same for the SM-Keypad Plus except that
the information displayed on the lower row on the SM-Keypad is displayed on the right hand side of the top row on the SM-Keypad Plus.

Figure 5-4 Display modes
Status
Mode
(Display
not
flashing)
Timeout** Timeout** Timeout**
To enter Parameter
Mode, press key or To return to
Status Mode,
press key
Parameter When returning

Mode to Parameter
(Upper Mode use the Temporary
display Parameter
*
flashing) Mode
keys to select (Upper display
Use * keys another parameter flashing)
to select parameter for editing to change, if
required
To exit Edit Mode,

press key
To enter Edit Mode,
press key
RO R/W
parameter parameter
Edit Mode
(Character to be edited in lower line of display flashing)
Change parameter values using keys.
* can only be used to move between menus if L2 access has been enabled (Pr 0.49). Refer to section 5.9 on page 97.
**Timeout defined by Pr 11.41 (default value = 240s).
Figure 5-5 Mode examples
Parameter
Status Mode
View Mode
Healthy Status Alarm Status Trip Status
Menu 5. Parameter 5 Drive status = tripped

Pr 5.05 value Trip type (UU = undervolts)
5.3 Menu structure

Do not change parameter values without careful The drive parameter structure consists of menus and parameters.
consideration; incorrect values may cause damage or a The drive initially powers up so that only menu 0 can be viewed. The up
safety hazard. and down arrow buttons are used to navigate between parameters and
WARNING
once level 2 access (L2) has been enabled (see Pr 0.49) the left and
NOTE right buttons are used to navigate between menus. For further
When changing the values of parameters, make a note of the new information, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security on
values in case they need to be entered again. page 97.
NOTE
For new parameter-values to apply after the AC supply to the drive is
interrupted, new values must be saved. Refer to section 5.7 Saving
parameters on page 96.

Figure 5-6 Parameter navigation Figure 5-8 Menu 0 copying
Menu 2
2.21 5
Menu 0
* * 0.04 5
Menu 1
0.05 0
0.06 150
1.14 0
Menu 4
4.07 150
* can only be used to move between menus if L2 access has
been enabled (Pr 0.49). Refer to section 5.9 Parameter access
level and security on page 97.
The menus and parameters roll over in both directions.

i.e. if the last parameter is displayed, a further press will cause the
display to rollover and show the first parameter.
When changing between menus the drive remembers which parameter
was last viewed in a particular menu and thus displays that parameter.
Figure 5-7 Menu structure
Menu 21 enu 2
Menu 22 Menu 0 Menu 1 M
....XX.00....
22 29 0.50 1.50
22 28 0.49 1.49
22 27 0.48 1.48
22.26 0.47 1.47
22.25 0.46 1.46
Moves
between
parameters
22 05 0.05 1.05
22 04 0.04 1.04
22 03 0.03 1.03
22 02 0.02 1.02
22 01 0.01 1.01
Moves between Menus
5.4 Menu 0
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for
basic easy set up of the drive.
Appropriate parameters are copied from the advanced menus into menu
0 and thus exist in both locations.
For further information, refer to Chapter 6 Basic parameters on page 99.

5.5 Advanced menus 5.5.1 SM-Keypad Plus set-up menus

Table 5-2 Menu 40 parameter descriptions
The advanced menus consist of groups or parameters appropriate to a
specific function or feature of the drive. Menus 0 to 22 can be viewed on Parameter Range()
all keypads. Menus 40 and 41 are specific to the SM-Keypad Plus 40.00 Parameter 0 0 to 32767
(LCD). Menus 70 to 91 can be viewed with an SM-Keypad Plus (LCD) English (0), Custom (1),
only when an SM-Applications is installed. 40.01 Language selection French (2), German (3),
Table 5-1 Advanced menu descriptions Spanish (4), Italian (5)
40.02 Software version 999999
Menu Description LED LCD
Idle (0), Save (1),
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick 40.03 Save to flash
0   Restore (2), Default (3)
/ easy programming 40.04 LCD contrast 0 to 31
1 Frequency / speed reference   Drive and attribute database
40.05 Updated (0), Bypass (1)
2 Ramps   upload was bypassed
Slave frequency, speed feedback and speed 40.06 Browsing favourites control Normal (0), Filter (1)
3  
control 40.07 Keypad security code 0 to 999
4 Torque and current control   Disable (0), Slot1 (1), Slot2
Communication channel
5 Motor control   40.08 (2), Slot3 (3), Slave (4),
selection
6 Sequencer and clock   Direct (5)
40.09 Hardware key code 0 to 999
7 Analog I/O  
40.10 Drive node ID (Address) 0 to 255
8 Digital I/O  
40.11 Flash ROM memory size 4Mbit (0), 8Mbit (1)
Programmable logic, motorized pot and binary
9   40.19 String database version number 0 to 999999
sum
None (0), Default (1),
10 Status and trips   40.20 Screen saver strings and enable
User (2)
11 General drive set-up   40.21 Screen saver interval 0 to 600
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors   40.22 Turbo browse time interval 0 to 200ms
13 Position control  
Table 5-3 Menu 41 parameter descriptions
14 User PID controller  
15, Parameter Range()
Solutions Module set-up  
16, 17 41.00 Parameter 0 0 to 32767
18 Application menu 1   41.01
19 Application menu 2   to Browsing filter source F01 to F50 Pr 0.00 to Pr 391.51
41.50
20 Application menu 3  
41.51 Browsing favourites control Normal (0), Filter (1)
21 Second motor parameters  
22 Additional Menu 0 set-up  
40 Keypad configuration menu X 
41 User filter menu X 
70 PLC registers X 
85 Timer function parameters X 
86 Digital I/O parameters X 
88 Status parameters X 
90 General parameters X 
91 Fast access parameters X 

5.5.2 Display messages 5.6 Changing the operating mode

The following tables indicate the various possible mnemonics which can Changing the operating mode returns all parameters to their default
be displayed by the drive and their meaning. value, including the motor parameters. (Pr 0.49 Security status and
Trip types are not listed here but can be found in Chapter 6 Basic Pr 0.34 User security code are not affected by this procedure.)
parameters on page 99 if required. Procedure
Table 5-4 Alarm indications Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
required:
Lower
Description 1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 6.15 is
display
Off (0)
br.rS Braking resistor overload
2. Enter either of the following values in Pr xx.00, as appropriate:
Braking resistor I2t accumulator (Pr 10.39) in the drive has reached 1253 (EUR, 50Hz AC supply frequency)
75.0% of the value at which the drive will trip and the braking IGBT is 1254 (USA, 60Hz AC supply frequency)
active. 3. Change the setting of Pr 0.48 as follows:
Heatsink or control board or inverter IGBT over
Hot Pr 0.48 setting Operating mode
temperature alarms are active
• The drive heatsink temperature has reached a threshold and the
1 Open-loop
drive will trip ‘Oh2’ if the temperature continues to rise (see the
‘Oh2’ trip).
or 2 Closed-loop vector
• The ambient temperature around the control PCB is approaching
the over temperature threshold (see the ‘O.CtL’ trip).
3 Closed-loop Servo
OVLd Motor overload
The motor I2t accumulator in the drive has reached 75% of the value at
which the drive will be tripped and the load on the drive is >100% 4 Regen
Auto tune Autotune in progress
The autotune procedure has been initialised. 'Auto' and 'tunE' will flash The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
alternatively on the display. used.
Lt Limit switch is active 4. Either:
Indicates that a limit switch is active and that it is causing the motor to • Press the red reset button
be stopped (i.e. forward limit switch with forward reference etc.) • Toggle the reset digital input
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
PLC Onboard PLC program is running
Pr 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0).
An Onboard PLC program is installed and running. The lower display
will flash 'PLC' once every 10s. NOTE
Entering 1253 or 1254 in Pr xx.00 will only load defaults if the setting of
Pr 0.48 has been changed.
Table 5-5 Solutions Module and SMARTCARD status indications
on power-up 5.7 Saving parameters
When changing a parameter in Menu 0, the new value is saved when
Lower pressing the Mode button to return to parameter view mode from
Description
display
parameter edit mode.
boot
If parameters have been changed in the advanced menus, then the
A parameter set is being transferred from the SMARTCARD to the change will not be saved automatically. A save function must be carried
drive during power-up. For further information, please refer to section out.
9.2.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every power up (Pr 11.42 =
boot (4)) on page 141.
Procedure
Enter 1000* in Pr. xx.00
cArd
Either:
The drive is writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD during power-
• Press the red reset button
up.
• Toggle the reset digital input
For further information, please refer to section 9.2.3 Auto saving
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting
parameter changes (Pr 11.42 = Auto (3)) on page 141.
loAding
*If the drive is in the under voltage trip state or is being supplied from a
The drive is writing information to a Solutions Module.
low voltage DC supply, a value of 1001 must be entered into Pr xx.00 to
perform a save function.
5.8 Restoring parameter defaults

Restoring parameter defaults by this method saves the default values in
the drive’s memory. (Pr 0.49 and Pr 0.34 are not affected by this
procedure.)
Procedure
1. Ensure the drive is not enabled, i.e. terminal 31 is open or Pr 6.15 is
Off (0)
2. Enter 1233 (EUR 50Hz settings) or 1244 (USA 60Hz settings) in
Pr xx.00.
3. Either:
• Press the red reset button

• Toggle the reset digital input The Access Level can be changed through the keypad even if the User
• Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting Security has been set.
5.9.3 User Security
The User Security, when set, prevents write access to any of the
5.9 Parameter access level and security parameters (other than Pr. 0.49 and Pr 11.44 Access Level) in any
The parameter access level determines whether the user has access to menu.
menu 0 only or to all the advanced menus (menus 1 to 22) in addition to
User security open - All parameters: Read / Write access
menu 0.
The User Security determines whether the access to the user is read
only or read write.
Both the User Security and Parameter Access Level can operate
independently of each other as shown in the table below:
Parameter Menu 0 Advanced
User Security
Access Level status menus status
L1 Open RW Not visible
L1 Closed RO Not visible
L2 Open RW RW Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 21.00 Pr 22.00
L2 Closed RO RO Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 21.01 Pr 22.01
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 21.02 Pr 22.02
RW = Read / write access RO = Read only access Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 21.03 Pr 22.03
The default settings of the drive are Parameter Access Level L1 and ............
user Security Open, i.e. read / write access to Menu 0 with the advanced ............
menus not visible. Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 21.30 Pr 22.28
5.9.1 Access Level Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 21.31 Pr 22.29
The access level is set in Pr 0.49 and allows or prevents access to the
advanced menu parameters. User security closed - All parameters: Read Only access
(except Pr 0.49 and Pr 11.44)
L1 access selected - Menu 0 only visible
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 21.00 Pr 22.00
Pr 0.00 Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 .......... . Pr 21.01 Pr 22.01
Pr 0.01 Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 21.02 Pr 22.02
Pr 0.02 Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ..... ...... Pr 21.03 Pr 22.03
Pr 0.03 ........ ...
...... .....
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 21.30 Pr 22.28
Pr 0.49 Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 21.31 Pr 22.29
Pr 0.50
Setting User Security
Enter a value between 1 and 999 in Pr 0.34 and press the button;
L2 access selected - All parameters visible the security code has now been set to this value. In order to activate the
security, the Access level must be set to Loc in Pr 0.49. When the drive
is reset, the security code will have been activated and the drive returns
to Access Level L1. The value of Pr 0.34 will return to 0 in order to hide
the security code. At this point, the only parameter that can be changed
by the user is the Access Level Pr 0.49.
Unlocking User Security

Select a read write parameter to be edited and press the button, the
upper display will now show CodE. Use the arrow buttons to set the
security code and press the button.
Pr 0.00 Pr 1.00 ............ Pr 21.00 Pr 22.00 With the correct security code entered, the display will revert to the
Pr 0.01 Pr 1.01 ............ Pr 21.01 Pr 22.01 parameter selected in edit mode.
Pr 0.02 Pr 1.02 ............ Pr 21.02 Pr 22.02 If an incorrect security code is entered the display will revert to
Pr 0.03 Pr 1.03 ............ Pr 21.03 Pr 22.03 parameter view mode.
............
............ To lock the User Security again, set Pr 0.49 to Loc and press the
Pr 0.49 Pr 1.49 ............ Pr 21.30 Pr 22.28 reset button.
Pr 0.50 Pr 1.50 ............ Pr 21.31 Pr 22.29 Disabling User Security
Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set Pr 0.34 to
5.9.2 Changing the Access Level
0 and press the button. The User Security has now been disabled,
The Access Level is determined by the setting of Pr 0.49 as follows:
and will not have to be unlocked each time the drive is powered up to
String Value Effect allow read / write access to the parameters.
L1 0 Access to menu 0 only 5.10 Displaying parameters with non-

L2 1 Access to all menus (menu 0 to menu 22) default values only
By entering 12000 in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to new message using the new protocol. (Note: ANSI uses 7 data bits, 1
the user will be those containing a non-default value. This function does stop bit and even parity; Modbus RTU uses 8 data bits, 2 stops bits and
not require a drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this no parity.)
function, return to Pr xx.00 and enter a value of 0.
Comms value String Communications mode
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level
0 AnSI ANSI
enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security for
further information regarding access level. 1 rtU Modbus RTU protocol
Modbus RTU protocol, but with an SM-
2 Lcd
5.11 Displaying destination parameters only Keypad Plus only
By entering 12001 in Pr xx.00, the only parameters that will be visible to ANSIx3.28 protocol
the user will be destination parameters. This function does not require a Full details of the CT ANSI communications protocol are the Advanced
drive reset to become active. In order to deactivate this function, return User Guide.
to Pr xx.00 and enter a value of 0.
Modbus RTU protocol
Please note that this function can be affected by the access level Full details of the CT implementation of Modbus RTU are given in the
enabled, refer to section 5.9 Parameter access level and security for Advanced User Guide.
further information regarding access level.
Modbus RTU protocol, but with an SM-Keypad Plus only
5.12 Serial communications This setting is used for disabling communications access when the SM-
SM-Keypad Plus is used as a hardware key. See the Advanced User
5.12.1 Introduction Guide for more details.
The Unidrive SP has a standard 2-wire EIA485 interface (serial
communications interface) which enables all drive set-up, operation and 0.36 {11.25} Serial communications baud rate
monitoring to be carried out with a PC or controller if required. Therefore, RW Txt US
it is possible to control the drive entirely by serial communications
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2),
without the need for an SM-keypad or other control cabling. The drive
2400 (3), 4800 (4), 9600 (5),
supports two protocols selected by parameter configuration:  19200 (6), 38400 (7),
 19200 (6)
• Modbus RTU 57600 (8)*, 115200 (9)*
• CT ANSI
Modbus RTU has been set as the default protocol, as it is used with the * only applicable to Modbus RTU mode
PC-tools commissioning/start-up software as provided on the CD ROM. This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, via a Solutions
The serial communications port of the drive is a RJ45 socket, which is Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is changed via the comms
isolated from the power stage and the other control terminals (see interface, the response to the command uses the original baud rate. The
section 4.12 Serial communications connections on page 80 for master should wait at least 20ms before sending a new message using
connection and isolation details). the new baud rate.
The communications port applies a 2 unit load to the communications NOTE
network. When using the CT EIA232 Comms cable the available baud rate is
USB/EIA232 to EIA485 Communications limited to 19.2k baud.
An external USB/EIA232 hardware interface such as a PC cannot be
used directly with the 2-wire EIA485 interface of the drive. Therefore a 0.37 {11.23} Serial communications address
suitable converter is required. RW Txt US
Suitable USB to EIA485 and EIA232 to EIA485 isolated converters are  0 to 247  1
available from LEROY-SOMER as follows:
• CT USB Comms cable Used to define the unique address for the drive for the serial interface.
• CT EIA232 Comms cable The drive is always a slave.
When using one of the above converters or any other suitable converter Modbus RTU
with the Unidrive SP, it is recommended that no terminating resistors be When the Modbus RTU protocol is used addresses between 0 and 247
connected on the network. It may be necessary to 'link out' the are permitted. Address 0 is used to globally address all slaves, and so
terminating resistor within the converter depending on which type is this address should not be set in this parameter
used. The information on how to link out the terminating resistor will
ANSI
normally be contained in the user information supplied with the
converter. When the ANSI protocol is used the first digit is the group and the
second digit is the address within a group. The maximum permitted
group number is 9 and the maximum permitted address within a group is
5.12.2 Serial communications set-up parameters 9. Therefore, Pr 0.37 is limited to 99 in this mode. The value 00 is used
The following parameters need to be set according to the system to globally address all slaves on the system, and x0 is used to address
requirements. all slaves of group x, therefore these addresses should not be set in this
parameter.
0.35 {11.24} Serial mode
RW Txt US
AnSI (0)
 rtU (1)
 rtU (1)
This parameter defines the communications protocol used by the 485

comms port on the drive. This parameter can be changed via the drive
keypad, via a Solutions Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is
changed via the comms interface, the response to the command uses
the original protocol. The master should wait at least 20ms before send a

6 Basic parameters
Menu 0 is used to bring together various commonly used parameters for basic easy set up of the drive. All the parameters in menu 0 appear in other
menus in the drive (denoted by {…}).
Menus 11 and 22 can be used to change most of the parameters in menu 0. Menu 0 can also contain up to 59 parameters by setting up menu 22.
6.1 Single line descriptions
Range() Default()
Parameter Type
OL VT SV OL VT SV
0.00 xx.00 {x.00} 0 to 32,767 0 RW Uni
0.01 Minimum reference clamp {1.07} ±3,000.0Hz ±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RW Bi PT US
0 to EUR> 50.0 EUR> 1,500.0 US
0.02 Maximum reference clamp {1.06} SPEED_LIMIT_MAX Hz/rpm 3,000.0 RW Uni
3,000.0Hz USA> 60 0 USA> 1,800.0
{2.11} 0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000 US
0.03 Acceleration rate 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
0.04 Deceleration rate {2.21} 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), Pr (3), PAd (4),
0.05 Reference select {1.14} A1.A2 (0) RW Txt NC US
Prc (5)
0.06 Current limit {4.07} 0 to Current_limit_max % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
Ur_S (0),
Ur (1), Fd (2),
OL> Voltage mode select {5.14} Ur_Auto (3), Ur_I (4) RW Txt US
0.07 Ur_I (4),
SrE (5)
CL> Speed controller P gain {3.10} 0.0000 to 6.5535 1/rad s-1 0.0300 0.0100 RW Uni US
0.0 to 25.0% SPz to 3: 3.0
OL> Voltage boost {5.15} of motor rated Size 4 & 5: 2.0 RW Uni US
0.08 voltage Size 6: 1.0
CL> Speed controller I gain {3.11} 0.00 to 655.35 1/rad 0.10 1.00 RW Uni US
OFF (0) or On
OL> Dynamic V/F {5.13} 0 RW Bit US
0.09 (1)
CL> Speed controller D gain {3.12} 0.00000 to 0.65535 (s) 0.00000 RW Uni US
OL> Estimated motor speed {5.04} ±180,000 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
0.10
CL> Motor speed {3.02} ±Speed_max rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
OL & VT> Drive output ±Speed_freq_
{5.01} ±1250 Hz RO Bi FI NC PT
frequency max Hz
0.11 0 to 65,535
SV> Drive encoder position {3.29} 1/216ths of a RO Uni FI NC PT
revolution
0.12 Total motor current {4.01} 0 to Drive_current_max A RO Uni FI NC PT
OL & VT> Motor active
{4.02} ±Drive_current_max A RO Bi FI NC PT
0.13 current
SV> Analog input 1 offset trim {7.07} ±10.000 % 0.000 RW Bi US
0.14 Torque mode selector {4.11} 0 to 1 0 to 4 Speed control mode (0) RW Uni US
FASt (0)
FASt (0)
0.15 Ramp mode select {2.04} Std (1) Std (1) RW Txt US
Std (1)
Std.hV (2)
OL> T28 and T29 auto- OFF (0) or On
{8.39} OFF (0) RW Bit US
0.16 selection disable (1)
CL> Ramp enable {2.02} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
OL> T29 digital input Pr 0.00 to
{8.26} Pr 6.31 RW Uni DE PT US
destination Pr 21.51
0.17
CL> Current demand filter
time constant
{4.12} 0.0 to 25.0 ms 0.0 RW Uni US
0.18 Positive logic select {8.29} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit PT US
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20tr (2), 20-4tr (3),
0.19 Analog input 2 mode {7.11} VOLt (6) RW Txt US
4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6)
0.20 Analog input 2 destination {7.14} Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 1.37 RW Uni DE PT US
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20tr (2), 20-4tr (3),
0.21 Analog input 3 mode {7.15} 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6), th.SC (7), th (8) RW Txt PT US
th (8), th.diSp (9)
0.22 Bipolar reference select {1.10} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
0.23 Jog reference {1.05} 0 to 400.0 Hz 0 to 4000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Uni US
0.24 Pre-set reference 1 {1.21} ±Speed_limit_max rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
0.25 Pre-set reference 2 {1.22} ±Speed_limit_max rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
±Speed_freq_
OL> Pre-set reference 3 {1.23} 0.0 RW Bi US
0.26 max Hz/rpm
CL> Overspeed threshold {3.08} 0 to 40,000 rpm 0 RW Uni US
±Speed_freq_
OL> Pre-set reference 4 {1.24} 0.0 RW Bi US
max Hz/rpm
0.27
CL> Drive encoder lines per
{3.34} 0 to 50,000 1024 4096 RW Uni US
revolution
0.28 Keypad fwd/rev key enable {6.13} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US

Parameter Type
OL VT SV OL VT SV
SMARTCARD parameter
0.29 {11.36} 0 to 999 0 RO Uni NC PT US
data
0.30 Parameter copying {11.42} nonE (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2), AutO (3), boot (4) nonE (0) RW Txt NC *
0.31 Drive rated voltage {11.33} 200 (0), 400 (1), 575 (2), 690 (3) V RO Txt NC PT
Maximum Heavy Duty
0.32 {11.32} 0.00 to 9999.99A RO Uni NC PT
current ra ing
OL> Catch a spinning motor {6.09} 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
0.33
VT> Rated rpm autotune {5.16} 0 to 2 0 RW Uni US
0.34 User security code {11.30} 0 to 999 0 RW Uni NC PT PS
0.35 Serial comms mode {11.24} AnSI (0), rtu (1), Lcd (2) rtU (1) RW Txt US
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
0.36 Serial comms baud rate {11.25} 19200 (6) RW Txt US
57600 (8) Modbus RTU only,
115200 (9) Modbus RTU only
0.37 Serial comms address {11.23} 0 to 247 1 RW Uni US
200V drive: 75
All voltage 400V drive: 150
0.38 Current loop P gain {4.13} 0 to 30,000 RW Uni US
ratings: 20 575V drive: 180
690V drive: 215
200V drive: 1000
0 to 30,000 All voltage 400V drive: 2000
0.39 Current loop I gain {4.14} RW Uni US
ratings 40 575V drive: 2400
690V drive: 3000
0.40 Autotune {5.12} 0 to 2 0 to 4 0 to 6 0 RW Uni
Maximum switching
0.41 {5.18} 3 (0), 4 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3), 12 (4), 16 (5) kHz 3 (0) 6 (2) RW Txt RA US
frequency
0.42 No. of motor poles {5.11} 0 to 60 (Auto to 120 pole) 0 (Auto) 6 POLE (3) RW Txt US
OL & VT> Motor rated
{5.10} 0.000 to 1.000 0.850 RW Uni US
0.43 power factor
SV> Encoder phase angle {3.25} 0.0 to 359 9° 0.0 RW Uni US
200V drive: 230
400V drive: EUR> 400, USA> 460
0.44 Motor rated voltage {5.09} 0 to AC_voltage_set_max V RW Uni RA US
575V drive: 575
690V drive: 690
EUR>
0.00 to
OL & VT> Motor rated full 0 to 180,000 EUR> 1,500 1,450.00
{5.08} 40,000.00 RW Uni US
load speed (rpm) rpm USA> 1,800 USA>
0.45 rpm
1,770.00
SV> Motor thermal time
{4.15} 0.0 to 3000.0 20.0 RW Uni US
constant
0.46 Motor rated current {5.07} 0 to Rated_current_max A Drive rated current [11.32] RW Uni RA US
0 to 3,000.0 0 to 1,250.0 EUR> 50.0
0.47 Rated frequency {5.06} RW Uni US
Hz Hz USA> 60.0
OPEn LP (1), CL VECt (2),
0.48 Operating mode selector {11.31} OPEn LP (1) CL VECt (2) SErVO (3) RW Txt NC PT
SErVO (3), rEgEn (4)
0.49 Security status {11.44} L1 (0), L2 (1), Loc (2) RW Txt PT US
0.50 Software version {11.29} 1.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
0.51 Action on trip detection {10.37} 0 to 15 0 RW Uni US
* Modes 1 and 2 are not user saved, Modes 0, 3 and 4 are user saved
Key: Coding Attribute
Coding Attribute Rating dependent: this parameter is l kely to have different
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
OL Open loop
current ratings. Parameters with this attr bute will not be
CL Closed loop vector and Servo
transferred to the destination drive by SMARTCARDs when
VT Closed loop vector RA the rating of the destination drive is different from the
SV Servo source drive and the file is a parameter file. However, with
{X.XX} Copied advanced parameter software V01.09.00 and later the value will be transferred if
only the current rating is different and the file is a
RW Read/write: can be written by the user
differences from default type file.
RO Read only: can only be read by the user
Not copied: not transferred to or from SMARTCARDs
Bit 1 bit parameter: ‘On’ or ‘OFF’ on the display NC
during copying.
Bi Bipolar parameter
PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
Uni Unipolar parameter
User save: parameter saved in drive EEPROM when the
Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers. US
user initiates a parameter save.
Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for EEPROM when the under volts (UV) trip occurs. With
easy viewing. PS software version V01.08.00 and later, power-down save
Destination: This parameter selects the destination of an parameters are also saved in the drive when the user
DE
input or logic function. initiates a parameter save.


Figure 6-1 Menu 0 logic diagram
The function of the two digital inputs are controlled by the setting of Pr 0.05 (reference selector). See table below for details.
Analogue reference
Analogue Analogue
input 2 input 2
offset trim destination Any
0.13 0.20 unprotected
variable
Analogue parameter
input + Analogue
2 mode ??.?? reference 2
+
0.19 1.37 Reference
0.05
selector
??.??
OR
Bipolar
reference
select
0.24
Preset frequency
reference
Preset
0.24
frequency 1
A1.A2
Preset
0.25 A1.Pr
frequency 2
Open Loop only A2.Pr
Preset Pr
0.26
frequency 3
Preset PAd
0.27
frequency 4 Prc
Keypad reference
0.23
Jog reference
Enable forward /
0.28
reverse key Digital inputs T28 & T29
Pr 0.05 T28 T29

Precision reference A1.A2 Local/Remote Jog
A1.Pr Preset reference selectors
A2.Pr Preset reference selectors
Pr Preset reference selectors
PAd Local/Remote Jog
Prc Local/Remote Jog
Key
Input Read-write (RW)

terminals 0.XX
parameter
Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
The parameters are all shown in their default settings

RUN RUN OL> FREQUENCY

FORWARD REVERSE RESET CL> SPEED TORQUE AT ZERO SPEED
26 27 25 9 10 24
Analogue outputs Digital output
Motor control
Maximum Current
frequency/ 0.06
limit
speed clamp
0.14 Torque mode
0.02 Ramp selector
enable
OL> Catch a
Minimum 0.16 spinning motor
frequency/ 0.33 VT> Motor full
speed clamp load rated speed
autotune
0.01
CL>
0.17 Current demand
filter time
Closed loop only
constant
Motor parameters
0.42 ~ 0.47
Ramps
No. of poles
Power factor
Rated voltage
CL> Speed-loop PID gains Rated speed
Rated current
Rated frequency
0.07 Speed-loop SV> Motor thermal
proportional time constant
gain
0.03
Acceleration 0.08 Speed-loop
rate integral gain
OL> Motor-voltage control

0.04
Deceleration 0.07 L1 L2 L3 Drive
rate Voltage mode
Speed-loop selector
0.10
0.15 0.09 derivative
gain 0.08
Ramp mode
selector Estimated
Boost voltage
motor
speed +
0.09
Dynamic V/f
Motor speed select
0.10
Power stage
PWM switching +
0.41
frequency
Drive encoder Drive output
0.27 0.11
ppr frequency
Overspeed
0.26
threshold OL & VT> Total motor
Motor active current
current 0.13 0.12
_
U V W + BR
Magnetising
15 way sub-D
current
connector
Resistor
optional

6.2 Full descriptions Closed-loop

Set Pr 0.01 at the required minimum motor speed for both directions of
6.2.1 Parameter x.00 rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between Pr 0.01 and Pr 0.02.
0.00 {x.00} Parameter zero
0.02 {1.06} Maximum reference clamp
RW Uni
RW Uni US
 0 to 32,767  0 EUR> 50.0
OL  0 to 3,000.0Hz  USA> 60.0
Pr x.00 is available in all menus and has the following functions.
EUR> 1,500.0
VT
Value Action CL  SPEED_LIMIT_MAX Hz/rpm  USA> 1,800.0
Save parameters when under voltage is not active (Pr 10.16 SV 3,000.0
1000
= 0) and low voltage DC supply is not active (Pr 6.44 = 0).
(The drive has additional over-speed protection.)
1001 Save parameters under all conditions
Open-loop
1070 Reset all option modules
1233 Load standard defaults Set Pr 0.02 at the required maximum output frequency for both
directions of rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between
1244 Load US defaults
Pr 0.01 and Pr 0.02. [0.02] is a nominal value; slip compensation may
1253 Change drive mode with standard defaults cause the actual frequency to be higher.
1254 Change drive mode with US defaults Closed-loop
Change drive mode with standard defaults (excluding menus
1255 Set Pr 0.02 at the required maximum motor speed for both directions of
15 to 20)
rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between Pr 0.01 and Pr 0.02.
Change drive mode with US defaults (excluding menus 15 to
1256 For operating at high speeds see section 8.6 High speed operation on
20)
page 137.
Transfer drive parameters as difference from default to a
2001*
bootable SMARTCARD block in data block number 001 6.2.3 Ramps, speed reference selection, current
Transfer drive EEPROM data to a SMART Card block limit
3yyy*
number yyy
0.03 {2.11} Acceleration rate
Transfer drive data as difference from defaults to SMART
4yyy* RW Uni US
Card block number yyy
Transfer drive ladder program to SMART Card block number OL  0.0 to 3,200.0 s/100Hz  5.0
5yyy*
yyy VT 2.000
0.000 to 3,200.000
6yyy* Transfer SMART Card data block number yyy to the drive CL  s/1,000rpm

SV 0.200
7yyy* Erase SMART Card data block number yyy
Compare drive parameters with SMART Card data block Set Pr 0.03 at the required rate of acceleration.
8yyy*
number yyy
Note that larger values produce lower acceleration. The rate applies in
9555* Clear SMARTCARD warning suppression flag both directions of rotation.
9666* Set SMARTCARD warning suppression card
9777* Clear SMARTCARD read-only flag 0.04 {2.21} Deceleration rate
9888* Set SMARTCARD read-only flag RW Uni US
9999* Erase SMARTCARD data block 1 to 499 OL  0.0 to 3,200.0 s/100Hz  10.0
Transfer electronic nameplate parameters to/from drive from/
0.000 to 3,200.000 VT 2.000
110zy to encoder. See the Advanced User Guide for more
CL  s/1,000rpm

information on this function. SV 0.200
12000** Display non-default values only
12001** Display destination parameters only Set Pr 0.04 at the required rate of deceleration.
Note that larger values produce lower deceleration. The rate applies in
* See Chapter 9 SMARTCARD operation on page 139 for more
both directions of rotation.
information of these functions.
** These functions do not require a drive reset to become active. All
other functions require a drive reset to initiate the function.
6.2.2 Speed limits
0.01 {1.07} Minimum reference clamp
RW Bi PT US
OL  ±3,000.0Hz  0.0
CL  ±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX Hz/rpm  0.0
(When the drive is jogging, [0.01] has no effect.)

Open-loop
Set Pr 0.01 at the required minimum output frequency of the drive for
both directions of rotation. The drive speed reference is scaled between
Pr 0.01 and Pr 0.02. [0.01] is a nominal value; slip compensation may
cause the actual frequency to be higher.

0.05 {1.14} Reference selector

0.07 {3.10} Speed controller proportional gain
RW Txt NC US
RW Uni US
 0 to 5  A1.A2 (0)
VT 0.0300
0.0000 to 6.5535
CL  
Use Pr 0.05 to select the required frequency/speed reference as follows: 1/rad s-1 SV 0.0100
Setting
Software V01.10.00 and later, the defaults are as above.
Analog input 1 OR analog input 2 selectable by digital
A1.A2 0 Software V01.09.01 and earlier, the default is 0.0100 in Closed-loop
input, terminal 28
vector and servo mode.
Analog input 1 OR preset frequency/speed selectable
A1.Pr 1 Closed-loop
by digital input, terminal 28 and 29
Analog input 2 OR preset frequency/speed selectable Pr 0.07 (3.10) operates in the feed-forward path of the speed-control
A2.Pr 2
by digital input, terminal 28 and 29 loop in the drive. See Figure 11-4 on page 164 for a schematic of the
Pr 3 Pre-set frequency/speed speed controller. For information on setting up the speed controller
gains, refer to Chapter 8 Optimization on page 126.
PAd 4 Keypad reference
Prc 5 Precision reference
0.08 {5.15} Low frequency voltage boost
Setting Pr 0.05 to 1, 2 or 3 will re-configure T28 and T29. Refer to RW Uni US
Pr 8.39 (Pr 0.16 in OL) to disable this function.
0.0 to 25.0% of motor Size 1 to 3: 3.0
OL  rated voltage
 Size 4 & 5: 2.0, Size 6: 1.0
0.06 {4.07} Current Limit
Open-loop
RW Uni RA US
When 0.07 Voltage mode selector is set at Fd or SrE, set Pr 0.08 (5.15)
OL 165.0 at the required value for the motor to run reliably at low speeds.
 0 to Current_limit_max % 
CL 175.0 Excessive values of Pr 0.08 can cause the motor to be overheated.
Pr 0.06 limits the maximum output current of the drive (and hence
0.08 {3.11} Speed controller integral gain
maximum motor torque) to protect the drive and motor from overload.
RW Uni US
Set Pr 0.06 at the required maximum torque as a percentage of the rated
torque of the motor, as follows: 0.00 to 655.35 VT 0.10
CL  1/rad

TR SV 1.00
 0,06  = --------------------  100 (%)
T RATED
Software V01.10.00 and later, the defaults are as above.
Where:
Software V01.09.01 and earlier, the default is 1.00 in Closed-loop vector
TR Required maximum torque and servo modes.
TRATED Motor rated torque Closed-loop
Pr 0.08 (3.11) operates in the feed-forward path of the speed-control
Alternatively, set 0.06 at the required maximum active (torque- loop in the drive. See Figure 11-4 on page 164 for a schematic of the
producing) current as a percentage of the rated active current of the speed controller. For information on setting up the speed controller
motor, as follows: gains, refer to Chapter 8 Optimization on page 126.
I R
 0,06  = -------------------  100 (%) 0.09 {5.13} Dynamic V/F / flux optimize select
IRATED RW Bit US
Where: OL  OFF (0) or On (1)  OFF (0)
IR Required maximum active current
IRATED Motor rated active current Open-loop
Set Pr 0.09 (5.13) at 0 when the V/f characteristic applied to the motor is
to be fixed. It is then based on the rated voltage and frequency of the
6.2.4 Voltage boost, (open-loop), Speed-loop PID motor.
gains (closed-loop)
Set Pr 0.09 at 1 when reduced power dissipation is required in the motor
0.07 {5.14} Voltage mode selector when it is lightly loaded. The V/f characteristic is then variable resulting
RW Txt US in the motor voltage being proportionally reduced for lower motor
Ur_S (0), Ur (1), Fd (2), currents. Figure 6-2 shows the change in V/f slope when the motor
OL  Ur_Auto (3), Ur_I (4),  Ur_I (4) current is reduced.
SrE (5)
Open-loop
There are six voltage modes available, which fall into two categories,
vector control and fixed boost. For further details, refer to section Pr
0.07 {5.14} Voltage mode on page 127.

Figure 6-2 Fixed and variable V/f characteristics

0.12 {4.01} Total motor current
RO Uni FI NC PT
Motor  0 to Drive_current_max A 
voltage
Pr 0.12 displays the rms value of the output current of the drive in each
AC supply
voltage of the three phases. The phase currents consist of an active component
IMOTOR and a reactive component, which can form a resultant current vector as
shown in the following diagram.
Active Total current

current
Frequency
0.09 {3.12} Speed controller differential feedback gain Magnetising current

RW Uni US
The active current is the torque producing current and the reactive
CL  0.00000 to 0.65535(s)  0.00000
current is the magnetising or flux-producing current.
Closed-loop
0.13 {4.02} Motor active current
Pr 0.09 (3.12) operates in the feedback path of the speed-control loop in
the drive. See Figure 11-4 on page 164 for a schematic of the speed RO Bi FI NC PT
controller. For information on setting up the speed controller gains, refer OL
to Chapter 8 Optimization on page 126.  ±Drive_current_max A 
VT
6.2.5 Monitoring
Open-loop & closed loop vector
0.10 {5.04} Estimated motor speed
When the motor is being driven below its rated speed, the torque is
RO Bit FI NC PT proportional to [0.13].
OL  ±180,000 rpm 
0.13 {7.07} Analog input 1 offset trim
Open-loop
RW Bi US
Pr 0.10 (5.04) indicates the value of motor speed that is estimated from
the following: SV  ±10.000 %  0.000
0.12 Post-ramp frequency reference Servo

0.42 Motor - no. of poles
Pr 0.13 can be used to trim out any offset in the user signal to analog
0.10 {3.02} Motor speed input 1.
RO Bi FI NC PT 6.2.6 Jog reference, Ramp mode selector, Stop and
VT  ±Speed_max rpm  torque mode selectors
Pr 0.14 is used to select the required control mode of the drive as follows:
Closed-loop
0.14 {4.11} Torque mode selector
Pr 0.10 (3.02) indicates the value of motor speed that is obtained from
the speed feedback. RW Uni US
OL  0 to 1 
0.11 {5.01} Drive output frequency Speed control (0)
CL  0 to 4 
RO Bi FI NC PT
OL  ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz 
Setting Open-Loop Closed-Loop
VT  ±1250.0 Hz 
0 Frequency control Speed control
Open-loop & closed loop vector 1 Torque control Torque control
Pr 0.11 displays the frequency at the drive output. 2 Torque control with speed override
3 Coiler/uncoiler mode
0.11 {3.29} Drive encoder position Speed control with torque feed-
4
RO Uni FI NC PT forward
0 to 65,535
SV  
1/216ths of a revolution
Servo
Pr 0.11 displays the position of the encoder in mechanical values of 0 to
65,535. There are 65,536 units to one mechanical revolution.

0.15 {2.04} Ramp mode select Terminal 28 Terminal 29

Reference select 0.05
function function
RW Txt US
Reference selection by
FASt (0) A1.A2 (0) Local / remote selector Jog select
terminal input
OL  Std (1)  Analogue reference 1 or
Std.hV (2) Std (1) A1.Pr (1) presets selected by Preset select bit 0 Preset select bit 1
terminal input
FASt (0)
CL  Std (1)
 Analogue reference 2 or
A2.Pr (2) presets selected by Preset select bit 0 Preset select bit 1
terminal input
Pr 0.15 sets the ramp mode of the drive as shown below:
Preset reference selected
Pr (3) Preset select bit 0 Preset select bit 1
0: Fast ramp by terminal input
Fast ramp is used where the deceleration follows the programmed Keypad reference
PAd (4) Local / remote selector Jog select
deceleration rate subject to current limits. This mode must be used if a selected
braking resistor is connected to the drive. Precision reference
Prc (5) Local / remote selector Jog select
selected
1: Standard ramp
Setting Pr 0.16 to 1 disables this automatic set-up, allowing the user to
Standard ramp is used. During deceleration, if the voltage rises to the
define the function of digital inputs T28 and T29.
standard ramp level (Pr 2.08) it causes a controller to operate, the output
of which changes the demanded load current in the motor. As the
controller regulates the link voltage, the motor deceleration increases as 0.16 {2.02} Ramp enable
the speed approaches zero speed. When the motor deceleration rate RW Bit US
reaches the programmed deceleration rate the controller ceases to CL  OFF (0) or On (1)  On (1)
operate and the drive continues to decelerate at the programmed rate. If
the standard ramp voltage (Pr 2.08) is set lower than the nominal DC bus Setting Pr 0.16 to 0 allows the user to disable the ramps. This is
level the drive will not decelerate the motor, but it will coast to rest. The generally used when the drive is required to closely follow a speed
output of the ramp controller (when active) is a current demand that is fed reference which already contains acceleration and deceleration ramps.
to the frequency changing current controller (Open-loop modes) or the
torque producing current controller (Closed-loop vector or Servo modes).
The gain of these controllers can be modified with Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14. 0.17 {8.26} T29 digital input destination
RW Uni DE PT US
Controller
operational OL  Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51  Pr 6.31
DC Bus voltage Open-loop

Pr 0.17 sets the destination of digital input T29. This parameter is
normally set-up automatically according to the reference selected by
Pr 0.05. In order to manually set-up this parameter, the T28 and T29
auto-selection disable (Pr 0.16) must be set.
Motor Speed
0.17 {4.12} Current demand filter time constant
Programmed
deceleration RW Uni US
rate
CL  0.0 to 25.0 ms  0.0
Closed-loop
A first order filter, with a time constant defined by Pr 0.17, is provided on
t the current demand to reduce acoustic noise and vibration produced as
2: Standard ramp with motor voltage boost a result of position feedback quantisation noise. The filter introduces a
lag in the speed loop, and so the speed loop gains may need to be
This mode is the same as normal standard ramp mode except that the
reduced to maintain stability as the filter time constant is increased.
motor voltage is boosted by 20%. This increases the losses in the motor,
dissipating some of the mechanical energy as heat giving faster
deceleration. 0.18 {8.29} Positive logic select
RW Bit PT US
0.16 {8.39} T28 and T29 auto-selection disable
 OFF (0) or On (1)  On (1)
RW Bit US
OL  OFF (0) or On (1)  OFF (0) Pr 0.18 sets the logic polarity for digital inputs and digital outputs. This
does not affect the drive enable input or the relay output.
Open-loop
0.19 {7.11} Analog input 2 mode
When Pr 0.16 is set to 0, digital inputs T28 and T29 are set up
automatically with destinations according to the setting of the reference RW Txt US
select Pr 0.05.
 0 to 6  VOLt (6)
In modes 2 & 3 a current loop loss trip is generated if the current falls
below 3mA.
In modes 2 & 4 the analog input level goes to 0.0% if the input current
falls below 4mA.

Pr Pr 0.23 {1.05} Jog reference

Mode Comments
value string
RW Uni US
0 0-20 0 - 20mA
1 20-0 20 - 0mA
OL  0 to 400.0 Hz 
0.0
2 4-20.tr 4 - 20mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA CL  0 to 4,000.0 rpm 
3 20-4.tr 20 - 4mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA
Enter the required value of jog frequency/speed.
4 4-20 4 - 20mA with no trip on loss 0.0% if I  4mA
The frequency/speed limits affect the drive when jogging as follows:
5 20-4 20 – 4mA with no trip on loss 100% if I  4mA
6 VOLt Voltage mode Frequency-limit parameter Limit applies
Pr 0.01 Minimum reference clamp No
Pr 0.02 Maximum reference clamp Yes
0.20 {7.14} Analog input 2 destination
RW Uni DE PT US
0.24 {1.21} Preset reference 1
 Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51  Pr 1.37
RW Bi US
Pr 0.20 sets the destination of analog input 2.  ±Speed_limit_max rpm  0.0
0.21 {7.15} Analog input 3 mode

RW Txt PT US 0.25 {1.22} Preset reference 2
RW Bi US
 0 to 9  th (8)
 ±Speed_limit_max rpm  0.0
Software V01.07.00 and later, the default is th (8)
Software V01.06.02 and earlier, the default is VOLt (6)
0.26 {1.23} Preset reference 3
In modes 2 & 3 a current loop loss trip is generated if the current falls
RW Bi US
below 3mA.
In modes 2 & 4 the analog input level goes to 0.0% if the input current OL  ±Speed_freq_max Hz/rpm  0.0
falls below 4mA.
Open-loop
Pr Pr If the preset reference has been selected (see Pr 0.05), the speed at
Mode Comments which the motor runs is determined by these parameters.
value string
0 0-20 0 - 20mA
1 20-0 20 - 0mA 0.26 {3.08} Overspeed threshold
2 4-20.tr 4 - 20mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA RW Uni US
3 20-4.tr 20 - 4mA with trip on loss Trip if I < 3mA CL  0 to 40,000 rpm  0
4 4-20 4 - 20mA with no trip on loss 0.0% if I  4mA
5 20-4 20 - 4mA with no trip on loss 100% if I  4mA Closed-loop
6 VOLt Voltage mode If the speed feedback (Pr 3.02) exceeds this level in either direction, an
Th trip if R > 3K3 overspeed trip is produced. If this parameter is set to zero, the
Thermistor mode with short- overspeed threshold is automatically set to 120% x
7 th.SC Th reset if R < 1K8
circuit detection SPEED_FREQ_MAX.
ThS trip if R < 50R
Thermistor mode with no Th trip if R > 3K3
8 th 0.27 {1.24} Preset reference 4
short-circuit detection Th reset if R < 1K8
Thermistor mode with RW Bi US
9 th.diSp
display only and no trip OL  ±Speed_freq_max Hz/rpm  0.0
Open-loop
0.22 {1.10} Bipolar reference select Refer to Pr 0.24 to Pr 0.26.
RW Bit US
 OFF (0) or On (1)  OFF (0) 0.27 {3.34} Drive encoder lines per revolution
RW Uni US
Pr 0.22 determines whether the reference is uni-polar or bi-polar as
follows: VT   1024
0 to 50,000
Pr 0.22 Function SV   4096
Closed-loop
0 Unipolar speed/frequency reference
Enter in Pr 0.27 the number of lines per revolution of the drive encoder.
1 Bipolar speed/frequency reference

0.28 {6.13} Keypad fwd/rev key enable Pr 0.33 Function

RW Bit US 0 Disabled
 OFF (0) or On (1)  OFF (0) 1 Detect all frequencies
2 Detect positive frequencies only
When a keypad is installed, this parameter enables the forward/reverse
3 Detect negative frequencies only
key.
0.29 {11.36} SMARTCARD parameter data 0.33 {5.16} Rated rpm autotune
RO Uni NC PT US RW Uni US
 0 to 999  0 VT  0 to 2  0
Closed-loop vector
This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
a SMARTCARD to the drive. The motor rated full load rpm parameter (Pr 0.45) in conjunction with the
motor rated frequency parameter (Pr 0.46) defines the full load slip of the
0.30 {11.42} Parameter copying motor. The slip is used in the motor model for closed-loop vector control.
The full load slip of the motor varies with rotor resistance which can vary
RW Txt NC *
significantly with motor temperature. When Pr 0.33 is set to 1 or 2, the
 0 to 4  nonE (0) drive can automatically sense if the value of slip defined by Pr 0.45 and
Pr 0.46 has been set incorrectly or has varied with motor temperature. If
* Modes 1 and 2 are not user saved, Modes 0, 3 and 4 are user saved. the value is incorrect parameter Pr 0.45 is automatically adjusted. The
adjusted value in Pr 0.45 is not saved at power-down. If the new value is
NOTE
required at the next power-up it must be saved by the user.
If Pr 0.30 is equal to 1 or 2 this value is not transferred to the EEPROM
or the drive. If Pr 0.30 is set to a 3 or 4 the value is transferred. Automatic optimisation is only enabled when the speed is above 12.5%
of rated speed, and when the load on the motor load rises above 62.5%
Pr Pr rated load. Optimisation is disabled again if the load falls below 50% of
Comment rated load.
String value
nonE 0 Inactive For best optimisation results the correct values of stator resistance (Pr
5.17), transient inductance (Pr 5.24), stator inductance (Pr 5.25) and
rEAd 1 Read parameter set from the SMARTCARD
saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29, Pr 5.30) should be stored in the relevant
Prog 2 Programming a parameter set to the SMARTCARD parameters. These values can be obtained by the drive during an
Auto 3 Auto save autotune (see Pr 0.40 for further details).
boot 4 Boot mode Rated rpm auto-tune is not available if the drive is not using external
For further information, please refer to Chapter 9 SMARTCARD position/speed feedback.
operation on page 139. The gain of the optimiser, and hence the speed with which it converges,
can be set at a normal low level when Pr 0.33 is set to 1. If this
0.31 {11.33} Drive rated voltage parameter is set to 2 the gain is increased by a factor of 16 to give faster
RO Txt NC PT convergence.
200V (0), 400V (1), 575V (2),
 690V (3)
 0.34 {11.30} User security code
Pr 0.31 indicates the voltage rating of the drive. RW Uni NC PT PS

 0 to 999  0
0.32 {11.32} Maximum Heavy Duty current rating
RO Uni NC PT If any number other than 0 is programmed into this parameter, user
security is applied so that no parameters except parameter 0.49 can be
 0.00 to 9,999.99 A  adjusted with the keypad. When this parameter is read via a keypad it
appears as zero.
Pr 0.32 indicates the maximum continuous Heavy Duty current rating.
For further details refer to section 5.9.3 User Security on page 97.
0.33 {6.09} Catch a spinning motor
RW Uni US 0.35 {11.24} Serial comms mode
OL  0 to 3  0 RW Txt US
 AnSI (0), rtu (1), Lcd (2)  rtU (1)
Open-loop
When the drive is enabled with Pr 0.33 = 0, the output frequency starts at This parameter defines the communications protocol used by the
zero and ramps to the required reference. When the drive is enabled EIA485 comms port on the drive. This parameter can be changed via the
when Pr 0.33 has a non-zero value, the drive performs a start-up test to drive keypad, via a Solutions Module or via the comms interface itself. If
determine the motor speed and then sets the initial output frequency to it is changed via the comms interface, the response to the command
the synchronous frequency of the motor. Restrictions may be placed on uses the original protocol. The master should wait at least 20ms before
the frequencies detected by the drive as follows: send a new message using the new protocol. (Note: ANSI uses 7 data
bits, 1 stop bit and even parity; Modbus RTU uses 8 data bits, 2 stops
bits and no parity.)

Comms value String Communications mode

0.39 {4.14} Current loop I gain
0 AnSI ANSI
1 rtU Modbus RTU protocol RW Uni US
Modbus RTU protocol, but with an SM- OL   All voltage ratings: 40
2 Lcd
Keypad Plus only 200V drive: 1,000
0 to 30,000 400V drive: 2,000
ANSIx3.28 protocol CL  
Full details of the CT ANSI communications protocol are the Advanced 575V drive: 2,400
690V drive: 3,000
User Guide.
Modbus RTU protocol These parameters control the proportional and integral gains of the
Full details of the CT implementation of Modbus RTU are given in the current controller used in the open loop drive. The current controller
Advanced User Guide. either provides current limits or closed loop torque control by modifying
Modbus RTU protocol, but with an SM-Keypad Plus only the drive output frequency. The control loop is also used in its torque
This setting is used for disabling communications access when the SM- mode during line power supply loss, or when the controlled mode
Keypad Plus is used as a hardware key. standard ramp is active and the drive is decelerating, to regulate the flow
of current into the drive.
0.36 {11.25} Serial comms baud rate
RW Txt US 0.40 {5.12} Autotune
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), RW Uni
2400 (3), 4800 (4), 9600 (5), OL  0 to 2  0
 19200 (6), 38400 (7),
 19200 (6)
57600 (8)*, 115200 (9)* VT  0 to 4  0
* only applicable to Modbus RTU mode SV  0 to 6  0
This parameter can be changed via the drive keypad, via a Solutions Open-Loop
Module or via the comms interface itself. If it is changed via the comms
interface, the response to the command uses the original baud rate. The There are two autotune tests available in open loop mode, a stationary
master should wait at least 20ms before send a new message using the and a rotating test. A rotating autotune should be used whenever
new baud rate. possible, so the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by
the drive.
0.37 {11.23} Serial comms address • The stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it
is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft.
RW Uni US
• A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, before
 0 to 247  1 rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the forward direction for
several seconds. The motor must be free from load for the rotating
Used to define the unique address for the drive for the serial interface. autotune.
The drive is always a slave. To perform an autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1 for a stationary test or 2 for a
Modbus RTU rotating test, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on
When the Modbus RTU protocol is used addresses between 0 and 247 terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
are permitted. Address 0 is used to globally address all slaves, and so Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the
this address should not be set in this parameter inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
ANSI before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive
can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE
When the ANSI protocol is used the first digit is the group and the
TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) signal from terminal 31, setting the
second digit is the address within a group. The maximum permitted
drive enable parameter Pr 6.15 to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the
group number is 9 and the maximum permitted address within a group is
control word (Pr 6.42 & Pr 6.43).
9. Therefore, Pr 0.37 is limited to 99 in this mode. The value 00 is used
to globally address all slaves on the system, and x0 is used to address For further information refer to section Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune on
all slaves of group x, therefore these addresses should not be set in this page 126.
parameter. Closed-loop
There are three autotune tests available in closed loop vector mode, a
0.38 {4.13} Current loop P gain
stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A
RW Uni US stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating
OL   All voltage ratings: 20 autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual
values of the motor parameters required by the drive. An inertia
200V dr ve: 75
0 to 30,000 measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or
400V drive: 150
CL   575V drive: 180
rotating autotune.
690V drive: 215 • The stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it
is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft.
• A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, before
rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the forward direction for
approximately 30 seconds. The motor must be free from load for the
rotating autotune.
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the
load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see
Speed loop gains, below) and to provide torque feed forwards when

required during acceleration. During the inertia measurement test before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive
the motor speed changes from 1/3 to 2/3 rated speed in the forward can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE
direction several times. The motor can be loaded with a constant TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) signal from terminal 31, setting the
torque load and still give an accurate result, however, non-linear drive enable parameter Pr 6.15 to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the
loads and loads that change with speed will cause measurement control word (Pr 6.42 & Pr 6.43).
errors. Setting Pr 0.40 to 6 will cause the drive to calculate the current loop
To perform an autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1 for a stationary test, 2 for a gains based on the previously measured values of motor resistance and
rotating test, or 3 for an inertia measurement test and provide the drive inductance. The drive does apply any voltage to the motor during this
with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal test. The drive will change Pr 0.40 back to 0 as soon as the calculations
26 or 27). are complete (approximately 500ms).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the For further information refer to section Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune on
inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition page 134.
before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive
can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE 0.41 {5.18} Maximum switching frequency
TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) signal from terminal 31, setting the RW Txt RA US
drive enable parameter Pr 6.15 to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the
control word (Pr 6.42 & Pr 6.43). OL  3 (0)
3 (0), 4 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3),
Setting Pr 0.40 to 4 will cause the drive to calculate the current loop  12 (4), 16 (5) kHz
VT 3 (0)
gains based on the previously measured values of motor resistance and CL 
inductance. The drive does apply any voltage to the motor during this SV 6 (2)
test. The drive will change Pr 0.40 back to 0 as soon as the calculations
This parameter defines the required switching frequency. The drive may
are complete (approximately 500ms).
automatically reduce the actual switching frequency (without changing
For further information refer to section Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune on this parameter) if the power stage becomes too hot. A thermal model of
page 129. the IGBT junction temperature is used based on the heatsink
Servo temperature and an instantaneous temperature drop using the drive
output current and switching frequency. The estimated IGBT junction
There are five autotune tests available in servo mode, a short low speed temperature is displayed in Pr 7.34. If the temperature exceeds 145 C
test, a normal low speed test, an inertia measurement test, a stationary the switching frequency is reduced if this is possible (i.e >3kHz).
test and a minimal movement test. A normal low speed should be done Reducing the switching frequency reduces the drive losses and the
where possible as the drive measures the stator resistance and junction temperature displayed in Pr 7.34 also reduces. If the load
inductance of the motor, and from these calculates the current loop condition persists the junction temperature may continue to rise again
gains. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a above 145 C and the drive cannot reduce the switching frequency
short low speed or normal low speed autotune. further the drive will initiate an ‘O.ht1’ trip. Every second the drive will
• A short low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical revolutions attempt to restore the switching frequency to the level set in Pr 0.41.
(i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the forward direction, and The full range of switching frequencies is not available on all ratings of
measure the encoder phase angle. The motor must be free from Unidrive SP. See section 8.5 Switching frequency on page 137, for the
load for this test. maximum available switching frequency for each drive rating.
• A normal low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical
revolutions (i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the forward 6.2.7 Motor parameters
direction. This test measures the encoder phase angle and updates
0.42 {5.11} No. of motor poles
other parameters including the current loop gains. The motor must
be free from load for this test. RW Txt US
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the OL   Auto (0)
load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains and to
provide torque feed forwards when required during acceleration. 0 to 60 (Auto to 120 Pole) VT Auto (0)
During the inertia measurement test the motor speed changes from CL  
SV 6 POLE (3)
1
/3 to 2/3 rated speed in the forward direction several times. The
motor can be loaded with a constant torque load and still give an Open-loop
accurate result, however, non-linear loads and loads that change This parameter is used in the calculation of motor speed, and in applying
with speed will cause measurement errors. the correct slip compensation. When auto is selected, the number of
• The stationary test only measures the motor resistance and motor poles is automatically calculated from the rated frequency
inductance, and updates the current loop gain parameters. This test (Pr 0.47) and the rated full load rpm (Pr 0.45). The number of poles =
does not measure the encoder phase angle so this test needs to be 120 * rated frequency / rpm rounded to the nearest even number.
done in conjunction with either the short low speed or minimal
Closed-loop vector
movement tests.
• The minimal movement test will move the motor through a small This parameter must be set correctly for the vector control algorithms to
angle to measure the encoder phase angle. This test will operate operate correctly. When auto is selected, the number of motor poles is
correctly when the load is an inertia, and although a small amount of automatically calculated from the rated frequency (Pr 0.47) and the rated
cogging and stiction is acceptable, this test cannot be used for a full load rpm (Pr 0.45). The number of poles = 120 * rated frequency /
loaded motor. rpm rounded to the nearest even number.
To perform an autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1 for a short low speed test, 2 for Servo
a normal low speed test, 3 for an inertia measurement test, 4 for a This parameter must be set correctly for the vector control algorithms to
stationary test or 5 for a minimal movement test, and provide the drive operate correctly. When auto is selected the number of poles is set to 6.
with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal
26 or 27).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the
inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition

synchronous speed - slip speed). Entering the correct value into this
0.43 {5.10} Motor rated power factor parameter allows the drive to increase the output frequency as a
RW Uni US function of load in order to compensate for this speed drop.
OL   Slip compensation is disabled if Pr 0.45 is set to 0 or to synchronous
0.000 to 1.000 0.850 speed, or if Pr 5.27 is set to 0.
VT   If slip compensation is required this parameter should be set to the value
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle from the rating plate of the motor, which should give the correct rpm for a
hot machine. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust this when the
between the motor voltage and current.
drive is commissioned because the nameplate value may be inaccurate.
Open-loop Slip compensation will operate correctly both below base speed and
The power factor is used in conjunction with the motor rated current within the field weakening region. Slip compensation is normally used to
(Pr 0.46) to calculate the rated active current and magnetising current of correct for the motor speed to prevent speed variation with load. The
the motor. The rated active current is used extensively to control the rated load rpm can be set higher than synchronous speed to deliberately
drive, and the magnetising current is used in vector mode Rs introduce speed droop. This can be useful to aid load sharing with
compensation. It is important that this parameter is set up correctly. mechanically coupled motors.
This parameter is obtained by the drive during a rotational autotune. If a Closed loop vector
stationary autotune is carried out, then the nameplate value should be
entered in Pr 0.43. Rated load rpm is used with motor rated frequency to determine the full
load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
Closed-loop vector Incorrect setting of this parameter can result in the following:
If the stator inductance (Pr 5.25) contains a non-zero value, the power • Reduced efficiency of motor operation
factor used by the drive is continuously calculated and used in the vector • Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
control algorithms (this will not update Pr 0.43). • Failure to reach maximum speed
If the stator inductance is set to zero (Pr 5.25) then the power factor • Over-current trips
written in Pr 0.43 is used in conjunction with the motor rated current and • Reduced transient performance
other motor parameters to calculate the rated active and magnetising • Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes
currents which are used in the vector control algorithm. The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot machine, however,
This parameter is obtained by the drive during a rotational autotune. If a some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
stationary autotune is carried out, then the nameplate value should be nameplate value is inaccurate.
entered in Pr 0.43. The rated full load rpm can be optimised by the drive (For further
information, refer to section 8.1.3 Closed loop vector motor control on
page 131).
0.43 {3.25} Encoder phase angle
RW Uni US
0.45 {4.15} Motor thermal time constant
SV  0.0 to 359.9°  0.0 RW Uni US
The phase angle between the rotor flux in a servo motor and the SV  0 to 3000.0  20.0
encoder position is required for the motor to operate correctly. If the
phase angle is known it can be set in this parameter by the user. Servo
Alternatively the drive can automatically measure the phase angle by Pr 0.45 is the motor thermal time constant of the motor, and is used
performing a phasing test (see autotune in servo mode Pr 0.40). When (along with the motor rated current Pr 0.46, and total motor current
the test is complete the new value is written to this parameter. The Pr 0.12) in the thermal model of the motor in applying thermal protection
encoder phase angle can be modified at any time and becomes effective to the motor.
immediately. This parameter has a factory default value of 0.0, but is not Setting this parameter to 0 disables the motor thermal protection.
affected when defaults are loaded by the user.
For further details, refer to section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on
page 136.
0.44 {5.09} Motor rated voltage
RW Uni RA US
0.46 {5.07} Motor rated current
200V drive: 230
400V drive: EUR> 400 RW Uni RA US
0 to
 AC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V
 USA> 460  0 to Rated_current_max A  Drive rated current [11.32]
575V drive: 575
690V drive: 690 Enter the name-plate value for the motor rated current.
Open-loop & Closed-loop vector
0.47 {5.06} Rated frequency
Enter the value from the rating plate of the motor.
RW Uni US
0.45 {5.08} Motor rated full load speed (rpm) OL  0 to 3,000.0Hz  EUR> 50.0, USA> 60.0
RW Uni US VT  0 to 1,250.0Hz  EUR> 50.0, USA> 60.0
EUR> 1,500
OL  0 to 180,000 rpm  USA> 1,800 Open-loop & Closed-loop vector
EUR> 1,450.00 Enter the value from the rating plate of the motor.
VT  0.00 to 40,000.00 rpm  USA> 1,770.00
Open-loop
This is the speed at which the motor would rotate when supplied with its
base frequency at rated voltage, under rated load conditions (=

6.2.8 Operating-mode selection Disable phase loss trip (SPz only)

The user can disable the phase loss trip in 200V SPz drives as these are
0.48 {11.31} Operating mode selector
allowed to operate from a single phase supply. If bit 2 is set to zero the
RW Txt NC PT phase loss trip is enabled. If bit 2 is set to one the phase loss trip is
OL 1 disabled in 200V SPz drives only.
Disable braking resistor temperature monitoring failure detection
 1 to 4  VT 2
(SPz only)
SV 3 SPz drives have an internal user fit braking resistor with a thermistor to
detect overheating of the resistor. As default bit 3 of Pr 10.37 is set to
The settings for Pr 0.48 are as follows: zero, and so if the braking resistor and its thermistor is not installed the
drive will produce a trip (br.th) because the thermistor appears to be
Setting Operating mode open-circuit. This trip can be disabled so that the drive can run by setting
OPEn LP 1 Open-loop bit 3 of Pr 10.37 to one. If the resistor is installed then no trip is produced
CL VECt 2 Closed-loop vector unless the thermistor fails, and so bit 3 of Pr 10.37 can be left at zero.
This feature only applies to SPz drives.
SerVO 3 Servo
rEgEn 4 Regen
This parameter defines the drive operating mode. Pr xx.00 must be set
to 1253 (European defaults) or 1254 (USA defaults) before this
parameter can be changed. When the drive is reset to implement any
change in this parameter, the default settings of all parameters will be
set according to the drive operating mode selected and saved in
memory.
6.2.9 Status information

0.49 {11.44} Security status
RW Txt PT US
 0 to 2  0
This parameter controls access via the drive keypad as follows:

Value String Action
0 L1 Only menu 0 can be accessed
1 L2 All menus can be accessed
Lock user security when drive is reset.
2 Loc
(This parameter is set to L1 after reset.)
The keypad can adjust this parameter even when user security is set.
0.50 {11.29} Software version number

RO Uni NC PT
 1.00 to 99.99 
The parameter displays the software version of the drive.
0.51 {10.37} Action on trip detection

RW Uni US
 0 to 15  0
Each bit in this parameter has the following functions:
Bit Function
0 Stop on non-important tr ps
1 Disable braking IGBT trips
2 Disable phase loss trip (Unidrive SP SPz only)
Disable braking resistor temperature monitoring failure
3
detection. (Unidrive SPz only)
Stop on non-important trips

If bit 0 is set to zero then the drive simply trips when a non-important trip
occurs. Non-important trips are: th, ths, Old1, cL2, cL3, SCL. If bit 0 is
set to one the drive will stop before tripping when one of these trips is
initiated, except in Regen mode where the drive trips immediately.
Disable braking IGBT trips
For details of braking IGBT trip mode see Pr 10.31.

7 Running the motor Speed and position feedback

Suitable devices are:
• Incremental encoder (A, B or F, D with or without Z) with
This chapter takes the new user through all the essential steps to
commutation signals (U, V, W)
running a motor for the first time, in each of the possible operating
• Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs (F, R with or
modes.
without Z) and commutation outputs (U, V, W)
For information on tuning the drive for the best performance, see • SINCOS encoder (with Stegmann Hiperface, EnDat or SSI
Chapter 8 Optimization . communications protocols)
• EnDat absolute encoder
Ensure that no damage or safety hazard could arise from the For Solutions Module terminal information see section 11.15 Menus 15,
motor starting unexpectedly. 16 and 17: Solutions Module set-up on page 205 or the appropriate
WARNING Solutions Module option user guide.
The values of the motor parameters affect the protection of 7.2 Changing the operating mode
the motor. Changing the operating mode returns all parameters to their default
The default values in the drive should not be relied upon. value, including the motor parameters. (Pr 0.49 and Pr 0.34 are not
CAUTION
It is essential that the correct value is entered in Pr 0.46 Motor affected by this procedure.)
rated current. This affects the thermal protection of the motor.
Procedure
If the keypad mode has been used previously, ensure that Use the following procedure only if a different operating mode is
required:
the keypad reference has been set to 0 using the
1. Enter either of the following values in Pr xx.00, as appropriate:
buttons as if the drive is started using the keypad it will run to 1253 (EUR, 50Hz AC supply frequency)
CAUTION the speed defined by the keypad reference (Pr 0.35). 1254 (USA, 60Hz AC supply frequency)
2. Change the setting of Pr 0.48 as follows:
If the intended maximum speed affects the safety of the Pr 0.48 setting Operating mode
machinery, additional independent over-speed protection
must be used. 1 Open-loop
WARNING
7.1 Quick start Connections 2 Closed-loop vector

7.1.1 Basic requirements
This section shows the basic connections which must be made for the 3 Closed-loop Servo
drive to run in the required mode. For minimal parameter settings to run
in each mode please see the relevant part of section 7.3 Quick Start
commissioning/start-up on page 118. 4 Regen
Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements for each
control mode The figures in the second column apply when serial communications are
Drive control method Requirements used.
Drive Enable 3. Either:
Speed reference • Press the red reset button
Terminal mode
Run forward or run reverse • Toggle the reset digital input
command • Carry out a drive reset through serial communications by setting Pr
Keypad mode Drive Enable 10.38 to 100 (ensure that Pr. xx.00 returns to 0).
Drive Enable
Serial communications
Serial communications link
Table 7-2 Minimum control connection requirements for each

mode of operation
Operating mode Requirements
Open loop mode Induction motor
Closed loop vector - RFC mode Induction motor
Induction motor with speed
Closed loop vector mode
feedback
Permanent magnet motor with
Closed loop servo mode
speed and position feedback
Speed feedback
Suitable devices are:
• Incremental encoder (A, B or F, D with or without Z)
• Incremental encoder with forward and reverse outputs (F, R with or
without Z)
• SINCOS encoder (with, or without Stegmann Hiperface, EnDat or
SSI communications protocols)
• EnDat absolute encoder

Figure 7-1 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (SPz)
L1 L2 L3
Fuses
Braking resistor
! (optional)
2
1
2
L1 L2 L3
3 0V
+10V
4
Speed
5 reference
input
6
7
Serial 8
communications
port 9
10
11 T
Terminal Encoder connections e
1
2
A
A\
F
F\
Cos
Cos\
r
3
4
B
B\
D
D\
Sin
Sin\
21 m
5
6
Z
Z\
Data
Data\ 22 24V i
7 U Fout Aout Fout Aout
23
n
8
9
U\
V
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout
Fout\
Dout
Aout\
Bout a
10 V\ Dout\ Bout\ Dout\ Bout\ 24 l
11 W Clk
12 W\ Clk\
13 +V +V
25
14
15
0V
Th
0V
Th 26 RUN FWD M
5 1
27 RUN REV
o
10
15
6
11 28 d
29
e
Encoder connector
U V W
15 way D-type
30 K
DRIVE e
31 ENABLE y
Induction Servo motor
p
motor (permanent magnet) a
d
M
o
U V W U V W SPz Keypad d
e
Pr 0.05
E E =PAd (4)
A A
A A
B B
B B
Z Z 1
U U 1 Marker pulse optional
Open loop V V
2 Thermal overload for braking resistor
W W to protect against fire risk. This must be
wired to interrupt the AC supply in the
RFC Z Z 1 event of a fault. This is not required if the
optional internal braking resistor is used
Closed loop vector Servo

Figure 7-2 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 1 to 3)
Braking resistor Braking resistor
(optional) - Size 2 (optional) -
! and 3 only ! Size 1 only
2 2
1
DC1 = - 2
DC2 = + DC1 DC2 BR 48V + BR
3 0V
+10V
4
Speed
5 reference
input
6
7
Serial 8
communications
port 9
10
Terminal Encoder connections
1 A F Cos
11 T
2
3
A\
B
F\
D
Cos\
Sin
e
4
5
B\
Z
D\ Sin\
Data
r
6 Z\ Data\ 21 m
7 U Fout Aout Fout Aout
8 U\ Fout\ Aout\ Fout\ Aout\ 22 24V i
9
10
V
V\
Dout
Dout\
Bout
Bout\
Dout
Dout\
Bout
Bout\
23
n
11
12
W
W\
Clk
Clk\
a
13 +V +V 24 l
14 0V 0V
15 Th Th 25
5 1 26 RUN FWD M
10
15
6
11 27 RUN REV
o
Encoder connector
PE
28 d
15 way D-type
29
e
L1 L2 L3 U V W
30 K
DRIVE e
31 ENABLE y
Induction Servo motor p
motor (permanent
magnet) a
d
M
o
U V W U V W
SM-Keypad / SM-Keypad Plus.
d
Optional item, must be fitted e
for keypad mode. Pr 0.05
E E
=PAd (4)
Fuses
A A
A A
B B
B B
Z Z 1
Open loop V V
RFC Z Z 1 L1 L2 L3 event of a fault. This is not required if the

Figure 7-3 Minimum connections to get the motor running in any operating mode (size 4 to 6)
L1 L2 L3
Fuses
1
2
3 0V
L1 L2 L3 +10V
4
Speed
5 reference
input
6
7
Serial 8
communications
port 9
10
11 T
Terminal Encoder connections e
1
2
A
A\
F
F\
Cos
Cos\ r
3
4
B
B\
D
D\
Sin
Sin\ 21 m
5
6
Z
Z\
Data
Data\ 22 24V i
7
8
U
U\
Fout
Fout\
Aout
Aout\
Fout
Fout\
Aout
Aout\ 23
n
9 V Dout Bout Dout Bout a
10 V\ Dout\ Bout\ Dout\ Bout\ 24
11
12
W
W\
Clk
Clk\
l
13 +V +V 25
14 0V 0V
15 Th Th 26 RUN FWD M
5 1 27 RUN REV
o
10
15
6
11 28 d
Encoder connector 29
e
15 way D-type U V W 24V +DC
External ! 30 K
supply
Fan supply - DRIVE e
31 ENABLE y
size 6 only 2
Induction Servo motor p

motor (permanent
magnet) Braking resistor a
(optional)
d
M
o
U V W U V W
SM-Keypad / SM-Keypad Plus.
d
Optional item, must be fitted e
for keypad mode. Pr 0.05
E E
=PAd (4)
A A
A A
B B
B B
Z Z 1
Open loop V V
RFC Z Z 1 event of a fault. This is not required if the

7.3 Quick Start commissioning/start-up

7.3.1 Open loop
Action Detail
Ensure:
• The drive enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
Before power-up
• Run signal is not given
• Motor is connected
Ensure:
• Drive displays ‘inh’
Power-up the If the drive trips, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 260.
drive
SPz only: If no internal braking resistor is installed, then the drive will trip ‘br.th’. If no internal
braking resistor is required, then set Pr 0.51 to 8 to disable the trip.
Enter:
• Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz) Mot X XXXXXXXXX
Enter motor No XXXXXXXXXX kg
• Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) IP55 I.cl F C 40 s S1
nameplate details V
-
Hz min kW cos A
• Motor rated speed in Pr 0.45 (rpm) 230 50 1445 2.20 0.80 8.50
400 4.90
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or connection CN = 14.5Nm
I.E.C 3 1(87)
240 50 1445 2.20 0.76 8.50
415 4.90
CN = 14.4Nm
CTP- VEN 1PHASE 1=0, 6A P=110W R.F 32MN
Set maximum Enter: 0.02
frequency • Maximum frequency in Pr 0.02 (Hz)

t
Enter: 100Hz
Set acceleration / • Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/100Hz)

deceleration rates • Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/100Hz) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also
ensure Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.)
t
0.03 0.04
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a
standstill before an autotune is enabled. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible
so the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the
direction selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor
will coast to a stop. The enable signal must be removed before the drive can be
made to run at the required reference.
WARNING
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the
drive enable.
cos 
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not poss ble to
uncouple the load from the motor shaft. A stationary autotune measures the stator
resistance of the motor and the voltage offset in the drive. These are required for good
Autotune
performance in vector control modes. A stationary autotune does not measure the power
factor of the motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. RS
LS
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first
performs a stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction
selected. The rotating autotune measures the power factor of the motor.
To perform an autotune:
• Set Pr 0.40 = 1 for a stationary autotune or set Pr 0.40 = 2 for a rotating autotune
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display ’rdY’.
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). The lower display will flash ’Auto’ and ’tunE’
alternatively, while the drive is performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ’rdY’ or ‘inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
If the drive trips, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on page 260.
Remove the drive enable and run signal from the drive.
Enter 1000 in Pr xx.00
Save parameters
Press the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input (ensure Pr xx.00 returns to 0)
Run Drive is now ready to run

7.3.2 RFC mode

Software V01.10.00 or later should be used for RFC mode.
Induction motor
Action Detail
Ensure:
Before power-up • Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
• Motor and feedback device are connected
Ensure:
Power-up the
drive
SPz only: If no internal braking resistor is installed, then the drive will trip ‘br.th’. If no internal braking
resistor is required, then set Pr 0.51 to 8 to disable the trip.
Select RFC
mode and • Set Pr 3.24 = 1 or 3 to select RFC mode
disable encoder • Set Pr 3.40 = 0
wire-break trip
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz)
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) I 55
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
I cl C 40 s S
V Hz min kW cos A
details • Motor rated speed (base speed - slip speed) in Pr 0.45 (rpm) 230 50
400
445 2 20 0 80 8 50
CN = 4 5Nm
4 90
I E C 34 (8 )
240 50 445 2 20 0 76 8 50
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or connection C

4 5
- VEN
CN = 4 4Nm
HASE =0 4 A = 0W R
4 90
3 MN
Set maximum Enter: 0 02
speed • Maximum speed in Pr 0.02 (rpm)

t
Enter:
Set acceleration / 1000rpm
• Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm)
deceleration
• Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure
rates
Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.) 0 03 0 04
t
If catch a spinning motor mode is not required then set Pr 6.09 to 0.

If catch a spinning motor mode is required then leave Pr 6.09 at the default of 1, but depending on the size of
the motor the value in Pr 5.40 may need to be adjusted.
Select or
Pr 5.40 defines a scaling function used by the algorithm that detects the speed of the motor. The default value
deselect catch a
of Pr 5.40 is 1 which is suitable for small motors (<4kW). For larger motors the value in Pr 5.40 will need to be
spinning motor
mode increased. Approximate values of Pr 5.40 for different motor sizes are as follows, 2 for 11kW, 3 for 55kW and
5 for 150kW. If the value of Pr 5.40 is too large the motor may accelerate from standstill when the drive is
enabled. If the value of this parameter is too small the drive will detect the motor speed as zero even if the
motor is spinning.
The drive is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a standstill
before an autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas a
rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor
parameters required by the drive.
NOTE It is highly recommended that a rotating autotune is performed (Pr 0.40 set to 2).
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction cos 
selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop.
The enable signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required
reference.
WARNING The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable.
RS
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not poss ble to uncouple the load LS
LS
from the motor shaft. The stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient inductance of
Autotune the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr T saturation
Nm break-
0.38 and Pr 0.39 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so points
the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. N rpm
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs a
stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The rotating
autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and calculates the power factor.
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display ’rdY’.
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). The lower display will flash ’Auto’ and ’tunE’ alternatively,
while the drive is performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘rdY’ or ‘inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill
Save parameters

7.3.3 Closed loop vector mode

Induction motor with incremental encoder feedback
For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder will be considered here. For information on setting up one of the other supported speed
feedback devices, refer to section 7.5 Setting up a feedback device on page 122.
Action Detail
Ensure:
Before power-up • Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
• Motor and feedback device are connected
Ensure:
Power-up the
drive
SPz only: If no internal braking resistor is installed, then the drive will trip ‘br.th’. If no internal braking
resistor is required, then set Pr 0.51 to 8 to disable the trip.
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr 3.38 = Ab (0): Quadrature encoder
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 3.36 = 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2).
NOTE If output voltage from the encoder is >5V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39 to 0.
Set motor
feedback Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback
parameters device.
CAUTION
• Drive encoder Lines Per Revolution (LPR) in Pr 3.34 (set according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr. 3.39:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated frequency in Pr 0.47 (Hz)
Mot X XXXXXXXXX
nameplate • Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A) I 55
No XXXXXXXXXX kg
I cl C 40 s S
V Hz min kW cos A
details • Motor rated speed (base speed - slip speed) in Pr 0.45 (rpm) 230 50
400
445 2 20 0 80 8 50
CN = 4 5Nm
4 90
I E C 34 (8 )
240 50 445 2 20 0 76 8 50
• Motor rated voltage in Pr 0.44 (V) - check if or connection C

4 5
- VEN
CN = 4 4Nm
HASE =0 46A = 0W R
4 90
2MN
0 02
Set maximum Enter:
t
Enter:
Set acceleration / 1000rpm
• Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm)
deceleration
• Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr
rates
10.30 and Pr 10.31 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.) t
0 03 0 04
Unidrive SP is able to perform either a stationary or a rotating autotune. The motor must be at a
standstill before an autotune is enabled. A stationary autotune will give moderate performance whereas
a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor
parameters required by the drive.
A rotating autotune will cause the motor to accelerate up to 2/3 base speed in the direction
selected regardless of the reference provided. Once complete the motor will coast to a stop. The
enable signal must be removed before the drive can be made to run at the required reference.
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the drive enable. cos 
WARNING
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not poss ble to uncouple the load
from the motor shaft. The stationary autotune measures the stator resistance and transient inductance of
the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr
RS
Autotune 0.38 and Pr 0.39 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so LS
the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. LS
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is uncoupled. A rotating autotune first performs a T saturation
Nm break-
stationary autotune before rotating the motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected. The rotating points
autotune measures the stator inductance of the motor and calculates the power factor. N rpm
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The drive will display ‘rdY’
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27). The lower display will flash ‘Auto’ and ‘tunE’ alternatively, while
the drive is performing the autotune.
• Wait for the drive to display ‘rdY’ or ‘inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill
Save parameters

7.3.4 Servo
Permanent magnet motor with a speed and position feedback device
For simplicity only an incremental quadrature encoder with commutation outputs will be considered here. For information on setting up one of the
other supported speed feedback devices, refer to section 7.5 Setting up a feedback device on page 122.
Action Detail
Ensure:
• Drive Enable signal is not given (terminal 31)
Before power-
up
• Motor is connected
• Feedback device is connected
Ensure:
Power-up the
drive
SPz only: If no internal braking resistor is installed, then the drive will trip ‘br.th’. If no internal braking resistor
is required, then set Pr 0.51 to 8 to disable the trip.
Incremental encoder basic set-up
Enter:
• Drive encoder type in Pr. 3.38 = Ab.SErVO (3): Quadrature encoder with commutation outputs
• Encoder power supply in Pr. 3.36 = 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2).
NOTE If output voltage from the encoder is >5V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39 to 0.
Set motor
feedback Setting the encoder voltage supply too high for the encoder could result in damage to the feedback device.
parameters
CAUTION
• Drive encoder Pulses Per Revolution in Pr. 3.34 (set according to encoder)
• Drive encoder termination resistor setting in Pr. 3.39:
0 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
1 = A-A\, B-B\, termination resistors enabled, Z-Z\ termination resistors disabled
2 = A-A\, B-B\, Z-Z\ termination resistors enabled
Enter:
Enter motor • Motor rated current in Pr 0.46 (A)
nameplate Ensure that this equal to or less than the Heavy Duty rating of the drive otherwise It.AC trips may occur Model No 95UXXXXXXXXXXXX
Vol s 380 480
Cont 7 7Nm 4 81A ms
B ake 12Nm
24V
0 67A
details during the autotune.

Sta l 9 5Nm 5 91A ms
Speed 3000rpm Poles 6
Kt 1 6Nm/A ms
Ins C ass H
• Number of poles in Pr 0.42 Se ial No XXXXXXXXXXX
Set maximum Enter: 2

t
Set Enter:
000 pm
acceleration / • Acceleration rate in Pr 0.03 (s/1000rpm)
deceleration • Deceleration rate in Pr 0.04 (s/1000rpm) (If braking resistor installed, set Pr 0.15 = FAST. Also ensure Pr 10.30
rates and Pr 10.31 are set correctly, otherwise premature ‘It.br’ trips may be seen.) 4
t
Unidrive SP is able to perform a short low speed, a normal low speed or a minimal movement autotune. The
motor must be at a standstill before an autotune is enabled. A normal low speed autotune will measure the
encoder phase offset angle and calculate the current gains.
The short low speed and normal low speed tests will rotate the motor by up to 2 revolutions in the
direction selected, regardless of the reference provided. The minimal movement test will move the
motor through an angle defined by Pr 5.38.
WARNING
Once complete the motor will come to a standstill. The enable signal must be removed before the
drive can be made to run at the required reference.
The drive can be stopped at any time by removing the run signal or removing the Drive Enable.
The motor must not be loaded when attempting an autotune.
• The short low speed and normal low speed tests will rotate the motor by up to 2 rotations in the direction 0
selected and the drive measures the encoder phase angle and updates the value in Pr 3.25. The normal low
0
speed test also measures the stator resistance, and inductance of the motor. These are used to calculate the
Autotune current loop gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 0.38 and Pr 0.39 are updated. The short low
speed test takes approximately 2s and the normal low speed test approximately 20s to complete.
• The minimal movement autotune will move the motor through an angle defined by Pr 5.38. The motor
must not be loaded for this test although it will operate correctly when the load is an inertia.
• Set Pr 0.40 = 1 for a short low speed autotune, Pr 0.40 = 2 for a normal low speed test or Pr 0.40 = 5 for
a minimal movement autotune.
• Close the run signal (terminal 26 or 27).
• Close the Drive Enable signal (terminal 31). The lower display will flash 'Auto' and 'tunE' alternatively,
while the drive is performing the test.
• Wait for the drive to display 'rdy' or ‘inh’ and for the motor to come to a standstill.
If the drive trips it cannot be reset until the drive enable signal (terminal 31) has been removed. See Chapter
13 Diagnostics on page 260.
Remove the drive enabled and run signal from the drive.
Save Enter 1000 in Pr xx.00
parameters Press the red reset button or toggle the reset digital input (ensure Pr xx.00 returns to 0)

7.4 Quick start commissioning/start-up

(LS Soft)
LS Soft is a Windows™ based software commissioning/start-up tool for
Unidrive SP and other LEROY-SOMER products.
LS Soft can be used for commissioning/start-up and monitoring, drive
parameters can be uploaded, downloaded and compared, and simple or
custom menu listings can be created. Drive menus can be displayed in
standard list format or as live block diagrams. LS Soft is able to
communicate with a single drive or a network.
LS Soft can be found on the CD which is supplied with the drive and is
also available for download from www.leroy-somer.com.
LS Soft system requirements:
• Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Windows 95/98/98SE/ME/NT4 and
Windows 2003 server are NOT supported
• Internet Explorer V5.0 or later must be installed
• Minimum of 800x600 screen resolution with 256 colors. 1024x768 is
recommended.
• 128MB RAM
• Pentium III 500MHz or better recommended.
• Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.1 or later (for parameter help). See CD
provided
• Microsoft.Net Frameworks 2.0
• Note that you must have administrator rights to install LS Soft.
To install LS Soft from the CD, insert the CD and the auto-run facility
should start up the front-end screen from which LS Soft can be selected.
Any previous copy of LS Soft should be uninstalled before proceeding
with the installation (existing projects will not be lost).
Included with LS Soft are the user guides for the supported drive
models. When help on a particular parameter is request by the user,
LS Soft links to the parameter in the relevant advanced user guide.
7.5 Setting up a feedback device
This section shows the parameter settings which must be made to use each of the compatible encoder types with Unidrive SP. For more information
on the parameters listed here please refer to the Unidrive SP Advanced User Guide.
7.5.1 Overview
Table 7-3 Parameters required for feedback device set-up
Ab, Fd, Fr,
SC.EndAt or
Ab.SErVO, SC.HiPEr EndAt
Parameter SC.SSI SSI encoder
Fd.SErVO, Fr.SErVO, encoder encoder
encoders
or SC encoders
3.33 Drive encoder turns x x x 
3.34 Drive encoder lines per revolution  x x
3.35 Drive encoder comms resolution x x x 
3.36 Drive encoder supply voltage*     
3.37 Drive encoder comms baud rate   
3.38 Drive encoder type     
Drive encoder auto configuration enable or
3.41    
SSI binary format select
 Information required
x Parameter can be set-up automatically by the drive through auto-configuration
* Pr 3.36: If the output voltage from the encoder is >5V, then termination resistors must be disabled by setting Pr 3.39 to 0.
Table 7-3 shows a summary of the parameters required to set-up each feedback device. More detailed information follows.

7.5.2 Detailed feedback device commissioning/start-up information

Standard quadrature encoder with or without commutation signals (A, B, Z or A, B, Z, U, V, W), or
Sincos encoder without serial communications
Ab (0) for a quadrature encoder without commutation signals *
Encoder type Pr 3.38 Ab.SErVO (3) for a quadrature encoder with commutation signals
SC (6) for a Sincos encoder without serial communications *
5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Encoder power supply voltage Pr 3.36 NOTE
If output voltage from the encoder is >5V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39 to 0
Set to the number of lines or sine waves per revolution of the encoder.
Encoder number of lines per
Pr 3.34 See section 7.5.3 Restriction of encoder number of lines per revolution on page 125 for restrictions
revolution
on this parameter.
0 = A, B, Z termination resistors disabled
Encoder termination selection
Pr 3.39 1 = A, B termination resistors enabled and Z termination resistors disabled
(Ab or Ab.SErVO only)
2 = A, B, Z termination resistors enabled
0 = Error detection disable
1 = Wire break detection on A, B and Z inputs enabled
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40 2 = Phase error detection (Ab.SErVO only)
3 = Wire break detection on A, B and Z inputs and phase error detection (Ab.SErVO only)
Termination resistors must be enabled for wire break detection to operate
* These settings should only be used in closed loop vector mode, otherwise a phase offset test must be performed after every power up.
Incremental encoder with frequency and direction (F and D), or

Forward and Reverse (CW and CCW) signals, with or without commutation signals
Fd (1) for frequency and direction signals without commutation signals *
Fr (2) for forward and reverse signals without commutation signals *
Encoder type Pr 3.38
Fd.SErVO (4) for a frequency and direction encoder with commutation signals
Fr.SErVO (5) for forward and reverse signals with commutation signals
5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Encoder power supply voltage Pr 3.36 NOTE
If output voltage from the encoder is >5V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39 to 0
Set to the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder divide by 2.
Pr 3.34 See section 7.5.3 Restriction of encoder number of lines per revolution on page 125 for restrictions
revolution
on this parameter.
0 = F or CW, D or CCW, Z termination resistors disabled
Encoder termination selection Pr 3.39 1 = F or CW, D or CCW termination resistors enabled and Z termination resistors disabled
2 = For CW, D or CCW, Z termination resistors enabled
0 = Error detection disable
1 = Wire break detection on F & D or CW & CCW, and Z inputs enabled
2 = Phase error detection (Fd.SErVO and Fr.SErVO only)
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40
3 = Wire break detection on F & D or CW & CCW, and Z inputs and Phase error detection
(Fd.SErVO and Fr.SErVO only)
Termination resistors must be enabled for wire break detection to operate
* These settings should only be used in closed loop vector mode, otherwise a phase offset test must be performed after every power up.

Absolute Sincos encoder with Hiperface or EnDat serial communications, or

Absolute EnDat communications only encoder
The Unidrive SP is compat ble with the following Hiperface encoders:

SCS 60/70, SCM 60/70, SRS 50/60, SRM 50/60, SHS 170, LINCODER, SCS-KIT 101, SKS36, SKM36, SEK-53.
SC.HiPEr (7) for a Sincos encoder with Hiperface serial communications
Encoder type Pr 3.38 EndAt (8) for an EnDat communications only encoder
SC.EndAt (9) for a Sincos encoder with EnDat serial communications
Encoder power supply voltage Pr 3.36 5V (0), 8V (1) or 15V (2)
Setting this to 1 automatically sets up the following parameters:
Pr 3.33 Encoder turn bits
Encoder auto configure enable Pr 3.41 Pr 3.34 Encoder number of lines of revolution (SC.HiPEr and SC.EndAt only) *
Pr 3.35 Encoder single turn comms resolution
Alternatively these parameters can be entered manually.
Encoder comms baud rate
Pr 3.37 100 = 100k, 200 = 200k, 300 = 300k, 500 = 500k, 1000 = 1M, 1500 = 1.5M, or 2000 = 2M
(EndAt and SC.EndAt only)
0 = Error detection disabled
Encoder error detection level 1 = Wire break detection on Sin and Cos inputs
Pr 3.40
(SC.HiPEr and SC.EndAt only) 2 = Phase error detection
3 = Wire break detection on Sin and Cos inputs and phase error detection
* See section 7.5.3 Restriction of encoder number of lines per revolution on page 125 for restrictions on this parameter.
Absolute SSI communications only encoder, or

Absolute Sincos encoder with SSI
SSI (10) for a SSI communications only encoder
Encoder type Pr 3.38
SC.SSI (11) for a Sincos encoder with SSI
Set to the number of sine waves per revolution of the encoder.
Pr 3.34 See section 7.5.3 Restriction of encoder number of lines per revolution on page 125 for
revolution. (SC.SSI only)
restrictions on this parameter.
SSI binary format select Pr 3.41 OFF (0) for gray code, or On (1) for binary format SSI encoders
Encoder turn bits Pr 3.33 Set to the number of turn bits for the encoder (this is usually 12bits for a SSI encoder)
Encoder single turn comms resolution Pr 3.35 Set to the single turn comms resolution for the encoder (this is usually 13bits for a SSI encoder)
Encoder comms baud rate Pr 3.37 100 = 100k, 200 = 200k, 300 = 300k, 500 = 500k, 1000 = 1M, 1500 = 1.5M, or 2000 = 2M
0 = Error detection disabled
1 = Wire break detection on Sin and Cos inputs (SC.SSI only)
2 = Phase error detection (SC.SSI only)
3 = Wire break detection and phase error detection (SC.SSI only)
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40
4 = SSI power supply bit monitor
5 = SSI power supply bit monitor and wire break detection (SC.SSI only)
6 = SSI power supply bit monitor and phase error detection (SC.SSI only)
7 = SSI power supply bit monitor, wire break detection and phase error detection (SC.SSI only)
UVW commutation signal only encoders*

Encoder type Pr 3.38 Ab.servo
Pr 3.34 Set to zero
revolution
Encoder error detection level Pr 3.40 Set to zero to disable wire break detection
* This feedback device provides very low resolution feedback and should not be used for applications requiring a high level of performance.

7.5.3 Restriction of encoder number of lines per revolution

Although Pr 3.34 can be set to any value from 0 to 50,000 there are restrictions on the values actually used by the drive. These restrictions are
dependent on the software version as follows:
Software version V01.06.01 and later
Table 7-4 Restrictions of drive encoder lines per revolution with software version V01.06.01 and later
Position feedback device Equivalent Lines per revolution used by the drive
Ab, Fd, Fr, Ab.SErVO, Fd.SErVO,
The drive uses the value in Pr 3.34.
Fr.SerVO, SC
If Pr 3.34 1, the drive uses the value of 1.
SC.HiPEr, SC.EndAt, SC.SSI
If 1< Pr 3.34 <32,768, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34 rounded down to nearest value that is a power of 2.
(rotary encoders)
If Pr 3.34 32,768, the drive uses the value of 32,768.
SC.HiPEr, SC.EndAt, SC.SSI
The drive uses the value in Pr 3.34.
(linear encoders
Software version V01.06.00 and earlier

Table 7-5 Restrictions of drive encoder lines per revolution with software version V01.06.00 and earlier
Position feedback device Equivalent Lines per revolution used by the drive
If Pr 3.34 <2, the dr ve uses the value of 2.
Ab, Fd, Fr If 2 Pr 3.34 16,384, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34.
If Pr 3.34 >16,384, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34 rounded down to nearest value divisible by 4.
Ab.SErVO, Fd.SErVO, Fr.SErVO If 2< Pr 3.34 <16,384, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34 rounded down to nearest value that is a power of 2.
SC, SC.HiPEr, SC.EndAt, SC.SSI If 2< Pr 3.34 <32,768, the drive uses the value in Pr 3.34 rounded down to nearest value that is a power of 2.
At power-up Pr 3.48 is initially zero, but is set to one when the drive encoder and any encoders connected to any Solutions Modules have been
initialised. The drive cannot be enabled until this parameter is one.
Encoder initialisation will occur as follows:
• At drive power-up
• When requested by the user via Pr 3.47
• When trips PS.24V, Enc1 to Enc8, or Enc11 to Enc17 trips are reset
• The encoder number of lines per revolution (Pr 3.34) or the number of motor poles (Pr 5.11 and Pr 21.11) are changed (software version
V01.08.00 and later).
Initialisation causes an encoder with communications to be re-initialised and auto-configuration to be performed if selected. After initialisation
Ab.SErVO, Fd.SErVO and Fr.SErVO encoders will use the UVW commutations signals to give position feedback for the first 120° (electrical) of
rotation when the motor is restarted.

8 Optimization
This chapter takes the user through methods of optimizing the product
set-up, maximizing performance. The auto-tuning features of the drive
simplify this task.
8.1 Motor map parameters
8.1.1 Open loop motor control
Pr 0.46 {5.07} Motor rated current Defines the maximum continuous motor current
The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. (See section 8.2 Maximum motor rated current on
page 136, for information about setting this parameter higher then the maximum Heavy Duty current rating.) The motor rated current is used in the following:
• Current limits (see section 8.3 Current limits on page 136, for more information)
• Motor thermal overload protection (see section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 136, for more information)
• Vector mode voltage control (see Voltage mode Pr 0.07, later in this table)
• Slip compensation (see Slip compensation Pr 5.27, later in this table)
• Dynamic V/F control
Pr 0.44 {5.09} Motor rated voltage Defines the voltage applied to the motor at rated frequency
Pr 0.47 {5.06} Motor rated frequency Defines the frequency at which rated voltage is applied
Output voltage characteristic

Output
voltage
The motor rated voltage Pr 0.44 and the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47 Pr 0.44
are used to define the voltage to frequency characteristic applied to the

motor (see voltage mode Pr 0.07, later in this table). The motor rated
frequency is also used in conjunction with the motor rated speed to Pr 0.44 / 2
calculate the rated slip for slip compensation (see motor rated speed
Pr 0.45, later in this table).
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47 Output

frequency
Pr 0.45 {5.08} Motor rated speed Defines the full load rated speed of the motor
Pr 0.42 {5.11} Motor number of poles Defines the number of motor poles
The motor rated speed and the number of poles are used with the motor rated frequency to calculate the rated slip of induction machines in Hz.
Rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency - (Number of pole pairs x [Motor rated speed / 60]) = 0,47 –  0,42 -----------
-----------  0,45
 2 60 
If Pr 0.45 is set to 0 or to synchronous speed, slip compensation is disabled. If slip compensation is required this parameter should be set to the
nameplate value, which should give the correct rpm for a hot machine. Sometimes it will be necessary to adjust this when the drive is commissioned
because the nameplate value may be inaccurate. Slip compensation will operate correctly both below base speed and within the field-weakening
region. Slip compensation is normally used to correct for the motor speed to prevent speed variation with load. The rated load rpm can be set higher
than synchronous speed to deliberately introduce speed droop. This can be useful to aid load sharing with mechanically coupled motors.
Pr 0.42 is also used in the calculation of the motor speed display by the drive for a given output frequency. When Pr 0.42 is set to ‘Auto’, the number
of motor poles is automatically calculated from the rated frequency Pr 0.47, and the motor rated speed Pr 0.45.
Number of poles = 120 x (Motor rated frequency Pr 0.47 / Motor rated speed Pr 0.45) rounded to the nearest even number
Pr 0.43 {5.10} Motor rated power factor Defines the angle between the motor voltage and current
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. The power factor is used in conjunction
with the motor rated current Pr 0.46, to calculate the rated active current and magnetising current of the motor. The rated active current is used
extensively to control the drive, and the magnetising current is used in vector mode stator resistance compensation. It is important that this
parameter is set up correctly. The drive can measure the motor rated power factor by performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, below).
Pr 0.40 {5.12} Autotune
There are two autotune tests available in open loop mode, a stationary and a rotating test. A rotating autotune should be used whenever possible so
the measured value of power factor of the motor is used by the drive.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary test
measures the stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and voltage offset (Pr 5.23), which are required for good performance in vector control modes (see
Voltage mode Pr 0.07, later in this table). The stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the motor so the value on the motor
nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on
terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune, as above, before rotating the
motor at 2/3 base speed in the direction selected for several seconds (regardless of the speed reference). In addition to the stator resistance (Pr 5.17)
and voltage offset (Pr 5.23), the rotating autotune measures the power factor of the motor and updates Pr 0.43 with the correct value. To perform a
Rotating autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
before the drive can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE
TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) signal from terminal 31, setting the drive enable parameter Pr 6.15 to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the

Pr 0.07 {5.14} Voltage mode

There are six voltage modes available which fall into two categories, vector control and fixed boost.
Vector control
Vector control mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0Hz to motor rated frequency (Pr 0.47), and then a constant voltage
above motor rated frequency. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/50 and motor rated frequency/4, full vector based stator
resistance compensation is applied. When the drive operates between motor rated frequency/4 and motor rated frequency/2 the stator resistance
compensation is gradually reduced to zero as the frequency increases. For the vector modes to operate correctly the motor rated power factor (Pr
0.43), stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and voltage offset (Pr 5.23) are all required to be set up accurately. The drive can be made to measure these by
performing an autotune (see Pr 0.40 Autotune). The drive can also be made to measure the stator resistance and voltage offset automatically every
time the drive is enabled or the first time the drive is enabled after it is powered up, by selecting one of the vector control voltage modes.
(0) Ur_S = The stator resistance and the voltage offset are measured and the parameters for the selected motor map are over-written each
time the drive is made to run. This test can only be done with a stationary motor where the flux has decayed to zero. Therefore this mode should
only be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary each time the drive is made to run. To prevent the test from being done before the flux
has decayed there is a period of 1 second after the drive has been in the ready state during which the test is not done if the drive is made to run
again. In this case, previously measured values are used. Ur_s mode ensures that the drive compensates for any change in motor parameters
due to changes in temperature. The new values of stator resistance and voltage offset are not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(4) Ur_I = The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured when the drive is first made to run after each power-up. This test can only be
done with a stationary motor. Therefore this mode should only be used if the motor is guaranteed to be stationary the first time the drive is made
to run after each power-up. The new values of stator resistance and voltage offset are not automatically saved to the drive's EEPROM.
(1) Ur = The stator resistance and voltage offset are not measured. The user can enter the motor and cabling resistance into the stator
resistance parameter (Pr 5.17). However this will not include resistance effects within the drive inverter. Therefore if this mode is to be used, it is
best to use an autotune test initially to measure the stator resistance and voltage offset.
(3) Ur_Auto= The stator resistance and voltage offset are measured once, the first time the drive is made to run. After the test has been
completed successfully the voltage mode (Pr 0.07) is changed to Ur mode. The stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and voltage offset (Pr 5.23)
parameters are written to, and along with the voltage mode (Pr 0.07), are saved in the drive's EEPROM. If the test fails, the voltage mode will
stay set to Ur_Auto and the test will be repeated next time the drive is made to run.
Fixed boost
Neither the stator resistance nor the voltage offset are used in the control of the motor, instead a fixed characteristic with low frequency voltage
boost as defined by parameter Pr 0.08, is used. Fixed boost mode should be used when the drive is controlling multiple motors. There are two
settings of fixed boost available:
(2) Fd = This mode provides the motor with a linear voltage characteristic from 0Hz to rated frequency (Pr 0.47), and then a constant voltage
above rated frequency.
(5) SrE = This mode provides the motor with a square law voltage characteristic from 0Hz to rated frequency (Pr 0.47), and then a constant
voltage above rated frequency. This mode is suitable for variable torque applications like fans and pumps where the load is proportional to the
square of the speed of the motor shaft. This mode should not be used if a high starting torque is required.
For both these modes, at low frequencies (from 0Hz to ½ x Pr 0.47) a voltage boost is applied defined by Pr 0.08 as shown below:
Output voltage characteristic Output voltage characteristic
Output Output
voltage
(Fd) (SrE)
voltage
Pr 0.44 Pr 0.44
Pr 0.44 / 2
Voltage boost Voltage boost

Pr 0.08 Pr 0.08
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47 Output Output
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47
frequency frequency
Pr 5.27 Slip compensation

When a motor, being controlled in open loop mode, has load applied a characteristic of the motor is that the output speed droops in proportion to the
load applied as shown:
Demanded speed
Shaft speed
Load
In order to prevent the speed droop shown above slip compensation should be enabled.
To enable slip compensation Pr 5.27 must be set to a 1 (this is the default setting), and the motor rated speed must be entered in Pr 0.45 (Pr 5.08).
The motor rated speed parameter should be set to the synchronous speed of the motor minus the slip speed. This is normally displayed on the
motor nameplate, i.e. for a typical 18.5kW, 50Hz, 4 pole motor, the motor rated speed would be approximately 1465rpm. The synchronous speed for
a 50Hz, 4 pole motor is 1500rpm, so therefore the slip speed would be 35rpm.
If the synchronous speed is entered in Pr 0.45, slip compensation will be disabled. If too small a value is entered in Pr 0.45, the motor will run faster
than the demanded frequency.
The synchronous speeds for 50Hz motors with different numbers of poles are as follows:
2 pole = 3000rpm, 4 pole = 1500rpm, 6pole =1000rpm, 8 pole = 750rpm

8.1.2 RFC mode

Software V01.10.00 or later should be used for RFC mode.
Pr 0.46 {5.07} Motor rated current Defines the maximum motor continuous current
page 136, for information about setting this parameter higher than the maximum Heavy Duty current rating.) The motor rated current is used in the
following:
• Vector control algorithm
The motor rated voltage Pr 0.44 and the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47
are used to define the relationship between the voltage and frequency Output
voltage
applied to the motor, as shown.
The motor rated voltage is used by the field controller to limit the voltage Pr 0.44
applied to the motor. Normally this is set to the nameplate value. To allow
current control to be maintained, it is necessary for the drive to leave
some 'headroom' between the motor terminal voltage and the maximum
available drive output voltage. For good transient performance at high
Pr 0.44 / 2
speed, the motor rated voltage should be set below 95% of the minimum
supply voltage to the drive.
The motor rated voltage and motor rated frequency are also used during
the rotating autotune test (see Autotune Pr 0.40 later in this table) and in
the calculations required for automatic optimization of the motor rated
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47 Output
speed (see Motor rated speed optimization Pr 5.16, later in this table). frequency
Therefore, it is important that the correct value for motor rated voltage is
used.
The motor rated speed and motor rated frequency are used to determine the full load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
Incorrect setting of this parameter has the following effects:
• Reduced efficiency of motor operation
• Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
• Reduced transient performance
• Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes
The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot motor; however, some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
nameplate value is inaccurate. Either a fixed value can be entered in this parameter or an optimization system may be used to automatically adjust
this parameter (see Motor rated speed autotune Pr 5.16, later in this table).
When Pr 0.42 is set to ‘Auto’, the number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47, and the motor rated
speed Pr 0.45
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. If the stator inductance is set to zero
(Pr 5.25) then the power factor is used in conjunction with the motor rated current Pr 0.46 and other motor parameters to calculate the rated active
and magnetising currents of the motor, which are used in the vector control algorithm. If the stator inductance has a non-zero value this parameter
is not used by the drive, but is continuously written with a calculated value of power factor. The stator inductance can be measured by the drive by
performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, later in this table).


There are three autotune tests available in RFC mode, a stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A stationary autotune will
give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor parameters
required by the drive. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or rotating autotune.
NOTE
It is highly recommended that a rotating autotune is performed (Pr 0.40 set to 2).
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not poss ble to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary
autotune measures the stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and transient inductance (Pr 5.24) of the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop
gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the
motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1, and provide the
drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune before rotating the
motor at 2/3 of motor rated frequency in the direction selected for approximately 30s. During the rotating autotune the stator inductance (Pr 5.25),
and the motor saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29 and Pr 5.30) are modified by the drive. The power factor is also modified for user information only,
but is not used after this point as the stator inductance is used in the vector control algorithm instead. To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr
0.40 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• The inertia measurement test can measure the total inertia of the load and the motor. This is used to set the speed loop gains (see Speed loop
gains) and to provide torque feed-forwards when required during acceleration.
During the inertia measurement test the drive attempts to accelerate the motor in the direction selected up to 3/4 x rated load rpm and then back
to standstill. The drive uses rated torque/16, but if the motor cannot be accelerated to the required speed the drive then increases the torque
progressively to x1/8, x1/4, x1/2 and x1 rated torque. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and a tunE1 trip
is initiated. If the test is successful the acceleration and deceleration times are used to calculate the motor and load inertia which is then written
to Pr 3.18. The motor map parameters must be set up correctly including the power factor before performing an inertia measurement test.
To perform an Inertia measurement autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 3, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal
(on terminal 26 or 27).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inh bit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
Pr 0.38 {4.13} / Pr 0.39 {4.14} Current loop gains
The current loop gains proportional (Kp) and integral (Ki) gains control the response of the current loop to a change in current (torque) demand. The
default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. However, for optimal performance in dynamic applications it may be necessary to
change the gains to improve the performance. The proportional gain (Pr 4.13) is the most critical value in controlling the performance. The values
for the current loop gains can be calculated by one of the following:
• During a stationary or rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this table) the drive measures the stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and
transient inductance (Pr 5.24) of the motor and calculates the current loop gains.
• By setting Pr 0.40 to 4 the drive will calculate the current loop gains from the values of stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and transient inductance
(Pr 5.24) set in the drive.
This will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a step change of current reference. The proportional gain can be increased by a factor
of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth; however, this gives a step response with approximately 12.5% overshoot. The equation for the integral
gain gives a conservative value. In some applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the drive to dynamically follow the flux
very closely (i.e. high speed RFC induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.
Pr 3.42 Drive encoder filter
In RFC mode Pr 3.42 defines a filter on the output of the speed estimator which is used as the speed feedback. A filter with a 4ms time constant is
always present on the output of the speed estimator, but this filter may be extended as follows:
0 = 4ms, 1 = 8ms, 2 = 16ms, 3 = 32ms, 4 = 64ms, 5 = 128ms.
The output of the speed estimator can include some ripple, which increases as the drive passes into field weakening and the filter can be used to
remove this ripple. This is particularly useful when using standard ramp or spinning start with a low friction, high inertia load, and can prevent over
voltage trips when the drive has no braking resistor.
Pr 5.40 Spin start boost
If Pr 6.09 is set to enable the catch a spinning motor function in open-loop mode or RFC modes, this parameter defines a scaling function used by
the algorithm that detects the speed of the motor. It is likely that for smaller motors (~4kW) the default value of 1.0 is suitable, but for larger motors
this parameter may need to be increased. If the value of this parameter is too large the motor may accelerate from standstill when the drive is
enabled. If the value of this parameter is too small the drive will detect the motor speed as zero even if the motor is spinning.

Speed loop gains (Pr 0.07 {3.10}, Pr 0.08 {3.11}, Pr 0.09 {3.12})
The speed loop gains control the response of the speed controller to a change in speed demand. The speed controller includes proportional (Kp)
and integral (Ki) feed forward terms, and a differential (Kd) feedback term. The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set may be selected for
use by the speed controller with Pr 3.16. If Pr 3.16 = 0, gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 (Pr 0.07 to Pr 0.09) are used, and if Pr 3.16 = 1, gains Kp2, Ki2 and
Kd2 (Pr 3.13 to Pr 3.15) are used. Pr 3.16 may be changed when the drive is enabled or disabled. If the load is predominantly a constant inertia and
constant torque, the drive can calculate the required Kp and Ki gains to give a required compliance angle or bandwidth dependant on the setting of
Pr 3.17.
Proportional gain (Kp), Pr 0.07 {3.10} and Pr 3.13
If the proportional gain has a value and the integral gain is set to zero the controller will only have a proportional term, and there must be a speed
error to produce a torque reference. Therefore as the motor load increases there will be a difference between the reference and actual speeds. This
effect, called regulation, depends on the level of the proportional gain, the higher the gain the smaller the speed error for a given load. If the
proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by speed feedback quantization becomes unacceptable, or the stability limit is
reached.
Integral gain (Ki), Pr 0.08 {3.11} and Pr 3.14
The integral gain is provided to prevent speed regulation. The error is accumulated over a period of time and used to produce the necessary torque
demand without any speed error. Increasing the integral gain reduces the time taken for the speed to reach the correct level and increases the
stiffness of the system, i.e. it reduces the positional displacement produced by applying a load torque to the motor. Unfortunately increasing the
integral gain also reduces the system damping giving overshoot after a transient. For a given integral gain the damping can be improved by
increasing the proportional gain. A compromise must be reached where the system response, stiffness and damping are all adequate for the
application. For RFC mode, it is unlikely that the integral gain can be increased much above 0.50.
Differential gain (Kd), Pr 0.09 {3.12} and Pr 3.15
The differential gain is provided in the feedback of the speed controller to give additional damping. The differential term is implemented in a way that
does not introduce excessive noise normally associated with this type of function. Increasing the differential term reduces the overshoot produced
by under-damping, however, for most applications the proportional and integral gains alone are sufficient.
There are three methods of tuning the speed loop gains dependant on the setting of Pr 3.17:
1. Pr 3.17 = 0, User set-up.
This involves the connecting of an oscilloscope to analog output 1 to
monitor the speed feedback.
Give the drive a step change in speed reference and monitor the
response of the drive on the oscilloscope.
The proportional gain (Kp) should be set up initially. The value
should be increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and Speed demand
then reduced slightly.
The integral gain (Ki) should then be increased up to the point where
the speed becomes unstable and then reduced slightly.
It may now be possible to increase the proportional gain to a higher
value and the process should be repeated until the system response Insufficient proportional
matches the ideal response as shown. gain [0.07]
The diagram shows the effect of incorrect P and I gain settings as
well as the ideal response.
2. Pr 3.17 = 1, Bandwidth set-up
If bandwidth based set-up is required, the drive can calculate Kp and
Excessive proportional
Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly: gain [0.07]
Pr 3.20 - Required bandwidth,
Pr 3.21 - Required damping factor,
Pr 3.18 - Motor and load inertia. The drive can be made to
measure the motor and load inertia by performing an inertia
Excessive integral gain
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this [0.08]
table).
3. Pr 3.17 = 2, Compliance angle set-up
If compliance angle based set-up is required, the drive can calculate
Kp and Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
Ideal response
Pr 3.19 - Required compliance angle,
Pr 3.18 - Motor and load inertia The drive can be made to
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this
table).

8.1.3 Closed loop vector motor control

page 136, for information about setting this parameter higher than the maximum Heavy Duty current rating.) The motor rated current is used in the
following:
• Vector control algorithm
The motor rated voltage Pr 0.44 and the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47
are used to define the relationship between the voltage and frequency Output
voltage
applied to the motor, as shown.
The motor rated voltage is used by the field controller to limit the voltage Pr 0.44
applied to the motor. Normally this is set to the nameplate value. To allow
current control to be maintained, it is necessary for the drive to leave
some 'headroom' between the motor terminal voltage and the maximum
available drive output voltage. For good transient performance at high
Pr 0.44 / 2
speed, the motor rated voltage should be set below 95% of the minimum
supply voltage to the drive.
The motor rated voltage and motor rated frequency are also used during
the rotating autotune test (see Autotune Pr 0.40 later in this table) and in
the calculations required for automatic optimization of the motor rated
Pr 0.47 / 2 Pr 0.47 Output
speed (see Motor rated speed optimization Pr 5.16, later in this table). frequency
Therefore, it is important that the correct value for motor rated voltage is
used.
The motor rated speed and motor rated frequency are used to determine the full load slip of the motor which is used by the vector control algorithm.
Incorrect setting of this parameter has the following effects:
• Reduced efficiency of motor operation
• Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor
• Reduced transient performance
• Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control modes
The nameplate value is normally the value for a hot motor; however, some adjustment may be required when the drive is commissioned if the
nameplate value is inaccurate. Either a fixed value can be entered in this parameter or an optimization system may be used to automatically adjust
this parameter (see Motor rated speed autotune Pr 5.16, later in this table).
When Pr 0.42 is set to ‘Auto’, the number of motor poles is automatically calculated from the motor rated frequency Pr 0.47, and the motor rated
speed Pr 0.45
The power factor is the true power factor of the motor, i.e. the angle between the motor voltage and current. If the stator inductance is set to zero (Pr
5.25) then the power factor is used in conjunction with the motor rated current Pr 0.46 and other motor parameters to calculate the rated active and
magnetising currents of the motor, which are used in the vector control algorithm. If the stator inductance has a non-zero value this parameter is not
used by the drive, but is continuously written with a calculated value of power factor. The stator inductance can be measured by the drive by
performing a rotating autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, later in this table).


There are three autotune tests available in closed loop vector mode, a stationary test, a rotating test and an inertia measurement test. A stationary
autotune will give moderate performance whereas a rotating autotune will give improved performance as it measures the actual values of the motor
parameters required by the drive. An inertia measurement test should be performed separately to a stationary or rotating autotune.
• A stationary autotune can be used when the motor is loaded and it is not possible to remove the load from the motor shaft. The stationary
autotune measures the stator resistance (Pr 5.17) and transient inductance (Pr 5.24) of the motor. These are used to calculate the current loop
gains, and at the end of the test the values in Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14 are updated. A stationary autotune does not measure the power factor of the
motor so the value on the motor nameplate must be entered into Pr 0.43. To perform a Stationary autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1, and provide the
drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• A rotating autotune should only be used if the motor is unloaded. A rotating autotune first performs a stationary autotune before rotating the
motor at 2/3 of motor rated frequency in the direction selected for approximately 30s. During the rotating autotune the stator inductance (Pr 5.25),
and the motor saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29 and Pr 5.30) are modified by the drive. The power factor is also modified for user information only,
but is not used after this point as the stator inductance is used in the vector control algorithm instead. To perform a Rotating autotune, set Pr
0.40 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
During the inertia measurement test the drive attempts to accelerate the motor in the direction selected up to 3/4 x rated load rpm and then back
to standstill. The drive uses rated torque/16, but if the motor cannot be accelerated to the required speed the drive then increases the torque
progressively to x1/8, x1/4, x1/2 and x1 rated torque. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and a tunE1 trip
is initiated. If the test is successful the acceleration and deceleration times are used to calculate the motor and load inertia which is then written
to Pr 3.18. The motor map parameters must be set up correctly including the power factor before performing an inertia measurement test.
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inhibit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition
Pr 5.16 Motor rated speed autotune
The motor rated speed parameter (Pr 0.45) in conjunction with the motor rated frequency parameter (Pr 0.47) defines the full load slip of the motor.
The slip is used in the motor model for closed-loop vector control. The full load slip of the motor varies with rotor resistance which can vary
significantly with motor temperature. When Pr 5.16 is set to 1 or 2 the drive can automatically sense if the value of slip defined by Pr 0.47 and
Pr 0.45 has been set incorrectly or if it has varied with motor temperature. If the value is incorrect Pr 0.45 is automatically adjusted. Pr 0.45 is not
saved at power-down, and so when the drive is powered-down and up again it will return to the last saved value. If the new value is required at the
next power-up it must be saved by the user. Automatic optimization is only enabled when the speed is above rated speed/8, and when the load on
the motor load rises above 5/8 rated load. Optimization is disabled again if the load falls below 1/2 rated load. For best optimization results the correct
values of stator resistance (Pr 5.17), transient inductance (Pr 5.24), stator inductance (Pr 5.25) and saturation breakpoints (Pr 5.29, Pr 5.30) should
be stored in the relevant parameters (all these can be measured by the drive by performing a rotating autotune). Motor rated speed autotune is not
available if the drive is not using external position/speed feedback.
The gain of the optimizer, and hence the speed with which it converges, can be set at a normal low level when Pr 5.16 is set to 1. If this parameter
is set to 2, the gain is increased by a factor of 16 to give faster convergence.
Pr 0.38 {4.13} / Pr 0.39 {4.14} Current loop gains
very closely (i.e. high speed closed-loop induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.

Pr 3.17.
proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by speed feedback quantization becomes unacceptable, or the closed-loop stability
limit is reached.
application.
1. Pr 3.17 = 0, User set-up.
should be increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and Speed demand
value and the process should be repeated until the system response Insufficient proportional
matches the ideal response as shown. gain [0.07]
Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly: gain [0.07]
Pr 3.20 - Required bandwidth,
Excessive integral gain
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this [0.08]
table).
Ideal response
Pr 3.19 - Required compliance angle,
table).

8.1.4 Servo motor control

The motor rated current parameter must be set to the maximum continuous current of the motor. The motor rated current is used in the following:
The motor number of poles parameter defines the number of electrical revolutions in one whole mechanical revolution of the motor. This parameter
must be set correctly for the control algorithms to operate correctly. When Pr 0.42 is set to "Auto" the number of poles is 6.
There are five autotune tests available in servo mode, a short low speed test, a normal low speed test, an inertia measurement test, a stationary test
to set up current controller gains and a minimal movement phasing test. A normal low speed should be done where poss ble as the drive measures
the stator resistance and inductance of the motor, and from these calculates the current loop gains. An inertia measurement test should be
performed separately to a short low speed or normal low speed autotune.
• A short low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical revolutions (i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the direction selected. The drive
applies rated current to the motor during the test and measures the encoder phase angle (Pr 3.25). The phase angle measurement is taken when
the motor has stopped at the end of the test, therefore there must be no load on the motor when it is at rest for the correct angle to be measured.
This test takes approximately 2 seconds to complete and can only be used where the rotor settles to a stable position in a short time. To perform a
short low speed autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 1, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• A normal low speed test will rotate the motor by 2 electrical revolutions (i.e. up to 2 mechanical revolutions) in the direction selected. The drive applies
rated current to the motor during the test and measures the encoder phase angle (Pr 3.25). The phase angle measurement is taken when the motor
has stopped at the end of the test, therefore there must be no load on the motor when it is at rest for the correct angle to be measured. The motor
resistance (Pr 5.17) and inductance (Pr 5.24) are then measured, and the values are used to set up the current loop gains (Pr 0.38 {4.13} and Pr 0.39
{4.14}). The whole test takes approximately 20 seconds and can be used with motors that take time to settle after the rotor has moved. During the
motor inductance measurement the drive applies current pulses to the motor that produces flux that opposes the flux produced by the magnets. The
maximum current applied is a quarter of rated current (Pr 0.46). This current is unl kely to affect the motor magnets, however, if this level of current
could permanently de-magnetise the magnets the rated current should be set to a lower level for the tests to avoid this. To perform a normal low
speed autotune, set Pr 0.40 to 2, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
0
During the inertia measurement test the drive attempts to accelerate the motor in the direction selected up to 3/4 x rated load rpm and then back to
standstill. The drive uses rated torque/16, but if the motor cannot be accelerated to the required speed the drive then increases the torque progressively
to x1/8, x1/4, x1/2 and x1 rated torque. If the required speed is not achieved on the final attempt the test is aborted and a tunE1 trip is initiated. If the test
is successful the acceleration and deceleration times are used to calculate the motor and load inertia which is then written to Pr 3.18. The value of the
value of motor torque per amp in Pr 5.32 and the motor rated speed in Pr 5.08 must be set up correctly before performing an inertia measurement test.
• The stationary test to set up current controller gains measures the stator resistance and the transient inductance of the motor, calculates the
current loop gains and updates the current loop gain parameters. This test does not measure the encoder phase angle. This test should only be
performed when the correct phasing angle has been set in Pr 0.43. If the phasing angle is not correct the motor may move and the results may
be incorrect. To perform a stationary test to set up current controller gains, set Pr 0.40 to 4, and provide the drive with both an enable signal (on
terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
• A minimal movement phasing test can measure the encoder phase offset by moving the motor through a small angle. Short current pulses are
applied to the motor to produce a small movement and then to move the motor back to the original position. The size and length of the pulses
are gradually increased (up to a maximum of motor rated current) until the movement is approximately at the level defined by Pr 5.38 electrical
degrees. The resulting movements are used to estimate the phase angle. To perform a minimal movement phasing test, set Pr 0.40 to 5, and
provide the drive with both an enable signal (on terminal 31) and a run signal (on terminal 26 or 27).
Following the completion of an autotune test the drive will go into the inh bit state. The drive must be placed into a controlled disable condition before the drive
can be made to run at the required reference. The drive can be put in to a controlled disable condition by removing the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
DISABLE) signal from terminal 31, setting the drive enable parameter Pr 6.15 to OFF (0) or disabling the drive via the control word (Pr 6.42 & Pr 6.43).
Current loop gains (Pr 0.38 {4.13} / Pr 0.39 {4.14})
very closely (i.e. high speed closed-loop induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a significantly higher value.

Pr 3.17.
proportional gain is too high either the acoustic noise produced by speed feedback quantization becomes unacceptable, or the closed-loop stability
limit is reached.
application.
1. Pr 3.17 = 0, User set-up.
should be increased up to the point where the speed overshoots and
Speed demand
value and the process should be repeated until the system response
matches the ideal response as shown. Insufficient proportional
gain [0.07]
Ki if the following parameters are set up correctly:
Pr 3.20 - Required bandwidth, gain [0.07]
Pr 5.32 - Motor torque per amp (Kt).
measurement autotune (see Autotune Pr 0.40, earlier in this Excessive integral gain
table). [0.08]
Pr 3.19 - Required compliance angle, Ideal response
Pr 5.32 - Motor torque per amp (Kt).
table).

8.2 Maximum motor rated current Figure 8-1 Motor thermal protection (Heavy Duty)
The maximum motor rated current allowed by the drive is greater than
1.05
the maximum Heavy Duty current rating in Pr 11.32. The ratio between 1.00
the Normal Duty rating and the Heavy Duty rating (Pr 11.32) varies
between drive sizes. The values for the Normal and Heavy Duty rating 0.70 Pr 4.25 = 0
can be found in section 2.1 Ratings on page 7. Pr 4.25 = 1
K
If the motor rated current (Pr 0.46) is set above the maximum Heavy
Duty current rating (Pr 11.32), the current limits and the motor thermal
protection scheme are modified (see section 8.3 Current limits and
section 8.4 Motor thermal protection , for more information).
0.00
8.3 Current limits
50% of base Base speed/
The default settings for the current limit parameters for SPz and sizes 1 speed/frequency frequency
to 5 are:
• 165% x motor rated current for open loop mode If Pr 4.25 is 0 the characteristic is for a motor which can operate at rated
• 175% x motor rated current for closed loop vector and servo modes current over the whole speed range. Induction motors with this type of
(except SP2403 which is 150.1% for open loop, 175% for closed loop characteristic normally have forced cooling. If Pr 4.25 is 1 the
vector and 161.2% for servo). characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect of motor
The default settings for the current limit parameters for Unidrive SP size fan reduces with reduced motor speed below 50% of base speed/
6 are: frequency. The maximum value for K is 1.05, so that above the knee of
the characteristics the motor can operate continuously up to 105%
• 138.1% x motor rated current for open loop mode
current.
• 165.7% x motor rated current for closed loop vector mode
• 150% x motor rated current for servo mode Figure 8-2 Motor thermal protection (Normal Duty)
There are three parameters which control the current limits:
• Motoring current limit: power flowing from the drive to the motor 1.00 1.01
• Regen current limit: power flowing from the motor to the drive
• Symmetrical current limit: current limit for both motoring and regen 0.70 Pr 4.25 = 0
operation Pr 4.25 = 1
K
The lowest of either the motoring and regen current limit, or the
symmetrical current limit applies.
The maximum setting of these parameters depends on the values of
motor rated current, drive rated current and the power factor.
0.00
Increasing the motor rated current (Pr 0.46/5.07) above the Heavy Duty
rating (default value), will automatically reduce the current limits in 15% of 50% of Base speed/
Pr 4.05 to Pr 4.07. If the motor rated current is then set to or below the base speed/ base speed/ frequency
Heavy Duty rating, the current limits will be left at their reduced values. frequency frequency
The drive can be oversized to permit a higher current limit setting to Both settings of Pr 4.25 are intended for motors where the cooling effect
provide higher accelerating torque as required up to a maximum of of the motor fan reduces with reduced motor speed, but with different
1000%. speeds below which the cooling effect is reduced. If Pr 4.25 is 0 the
characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect reduces
8.4 Motor thermal protection with motor speed below 15% of base speed/frequency. If Pr 4.25 is 1 the
The drive models the temperature of the motor using the motor rated characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect reduces
current (Pr 5.07), the thermal time constant (Pr 4.15), whether low speed with motor speed below 50% of base speed/frequency. The maximum
thermal protection mode has been enabled (Pr 4.25) and the actual value for K is 1.01, so that above the knee of the characteristics the
current flowing at any point in time. Pr 4.19 gives the estimated motor motor can operate continuously up to 101% current.
temperature as a percentage of maximum temperature. When the estimated temperature in Pr 4.19 reaches 100% the drive
The temperature of the motor (Pr 4.19) as a percentage of maximum takes some action depending on the setting of Pr 4.16. If Pr 4.16 is 0, the
temperature, with a constant current magnitude of I, constant value of K drive trips when Pr 4.19 reaches 100%. If Pr 4.16 is 1, the current limit is
and constant value of Motor rated current (Pr 5.07) after time t is given reduced to (K - 0.05) x 100% when Pr 4.19 reaches 100%. The current
by: limit is set back to the user defined level when Pr 4.19 falls below 95%.
The thermal model temperature accumulator is reset to zero at power-up
Percentage motor temperature (Pr 4.19) = [I2 / (K x Motor rated
and accumulates the temperature of the motor while the drive remains
current)2] (1 - e-t/) x 100% powered-up. If the rated current defined by Pr 5.07 is altered, the
This assumes that the maximum allowed motor temperature is produced accumulator is reset to zero.
by K x Motor rated current and that  is the thermal time constant of the The default setting of the thermal time constant (Pr 4.15) is 89s for an
point in the motor that reaches its maximum allowed temperature first.  induction motor (open loop and closed loop vector), which is equivalent
is defined by Pr 4.15. If Pr 4.15 has a value between 0.0 and 1.0 the to an overload of 150% for 60s from cold. The default value for a servo
thermal time constant is taken as 1.0. motor is 20s, which is equivalent to an overload of 175% for 9s from
The value of K is defined as shown in Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2. cold.
For both Heavy and Normal duty ratings, Pr 4.25 can be used to select The time for the drive to trip from cold with constant motor current is
two alternative protection characteristics. given by:
Ttrip = -(Pr 4.15) x ln(1 - (K x Pr 5.07 / Pr 4.01)2)

Alternatively the thermal time constant can be calculated from the trip 8.6 High speed operation
time with a given current from:
8.6.1 Encoder feedback limits
Pr 4.15 = -Ttrip / ln(1 - (K / Overload)2) The maximum encoder frequency should be prevented from exceeding
The maximum value for the thermal time constant can be increased up 500kHz (or 410kHz for software V01.06.00 and earlier). In closed loop and
to a maximum value of 3000s to allow an increased overload if the motor servo modes the maximum speed that can be entered in to the speed
thermal characteristics permit. reference clamps (Pr 1.06 and Pr 1.07) can be limited by the drive. This is
For applications using Unimotors the thermal time constants can be defined by the following (subject to an absolute maximum of 40,000rpm):
found in the Unimotor manual. 500kHz x 60
Maximum speed limit (rpm) =
ELPR
8.5 Switching frequency 3.0 x 107
The default switching frequency is 3kHz (6kHz in Servo mode), however =
ELPR
this can be increased up to a maximum of 16kHz by Pr 5.18 (dependent
on drive size). The available switching frequencies are shown below. Where:
ELPR is the equivalent encoder lines per revolution and is the
Table 8-1 Available switching frequencies
number of lines that would be produced by a quadrature encoder.
Drive • Quadrature encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution
Model 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
size • F and D encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution / 2
0 All       • SINCOS encoder ELPR = number of sine waves per revolution
1 All       This maximum speed limit is defined by the device selected with the
2 All       speed feedback selector (Pr 3.26), and the ELPR set for the position
11TL & 16TL      feedback device. In closed-loop vector mode it is possible to disable this
limit via Pr 3.24, so that the drive can be switched between operation
22T & 27T      
3 with and without feedback when the speed becomes too high for the
33T      feedback device. The maximum speed limit is defined as above when
3,5TM to 22TM     Pr 3.24 = 0 or 1, and is 40,000rpm when Pr 3.24 = 2 or 3.
4 All     8.6.2 Field weakening (constant power) operation
5 All     (Open loop and closed loop vector mode only)
6 All    The drive can be used to run an induction machine above synchronous
If switching frequency is increased from 3kHz the following apply: speed into the constant power region. The speed continues to increase
and the available shaft torque reduces. The characteristics below show
1. Increased heat loss in the drive, which means that derating to the
the torque and output voltage characteristics as the speed is increased
output current must be applied.
above the rated value.
See the derating tables for switching frequency and ambient
temperature in section 12.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating Figure 8-3 Torque and rated voltage against speed
for switching frequency and temperature) .
2. Reduced heating of the motor - due to improved output waveform
quality. Torque
3. Reduced acoustic noise generated by the motor.
4. Increased sample rate on the speed and current controllers. A trade
off must be made between motor heating, drive heating and the
demands of the application with respect to the sample time required.
Table 8-2 Sample rates for various control tasks at each
Speed
switching frequency
Closed loop Rated
3, 6, 12 4, 8, 16
Open loop vector and voltage
kHz kHz
Servo
3kHz = 167s
Current
Level 1 6kHz = 83s 125s Peak limit
controllers
12kHz = 83s
Current limit Speed controller Rated speed Speed
Level 2 250s
and ramps and ramps
Care must be taken to ensure the torque available above base speed is
Level 3 1ms Voltage controller
sufficient for the application to run satisfactorily.
Level 4 4ms Time critical user interface
The saturation breakpoint parameters (Pr 5.29 and Pr 5.30) found during
Background Non-time critical user interface the autotune in closed loop vector mode ensure the magnetising current
is reduced in the correct proportion for the specific motor. (In open loop
mode the magnetising current is not actively controlled.)
8.6.3 Servo high speed operation
High speed servo mode is enabled by setting Pr 5.22 =1. Care must be
taken when using this mode with servo motors to avoid damaging the
drive. The voltage produced by the servo motor magnets is proportional
to speed. For high speed operation the drive must apply currents to the
motor to counter-act the flux produced by the magnets. It is poss ble to
operate the motor at very high speeds that would give a very high motor
terminal voltage, but this voltage is prevented by the action of the drive.

If however, the drive is disabled (or tripped) when the motor voltages
would be higher than the rating of the drive without the currents to
counter-act the flux from the magnets, it is poss ble to damage the drive.
If high speed mode is enabled the motor speed must be limited to the
levels given in the table below unless an additional hardware protection
system is used to limit the voltages applied to the drive output terminals
to a safe level.
Drive Maximum safe line to line

Maximum motor speed
voltage voltage at the motor
(rpm)
rating terminals (V rms)
200 400 x 1000 / (Ke x 2) 400 / 2
400 800 x 1000 / (Ke x 2) 800 / 2
575 955 x 1000 / (Ke x 2) 955 / 2
690 1145 x 1000 / (Ke x 2) 1145 / 2
Ke is the ratio between r.m.s. line to line voltage produced by the motor
and the speed in V/1000rpm. Care must also be taken not to de-
magnetize the motor. The motor manufacturer should always be
consulted before using this mode.
8.6.4 Switching frequency
With a default switching frequency of 3 kHz the maximum output
frequency should be limited to 250 Hz. Ideally a minimum ratio of 12:1
should be maintained between the output frequency and the switching
frequency. This ensures the number of switchings per cycle is sufficient
to ensure the output waveform quality is maintained at a minimum level.
If this is not poss ble, quasi-square switching should be enabled (Pr 5.20
=1). The output waveform will be quasi square above base speed
ensuring a symmetrical output waveform, which results in a better quality
output than would otherwise result.
8.6.5 Maximum speed / frequency
In open loop mode the maximum frequency is 3,000 Hz.
In closed loop vector mode the maximum output frequency is 600 Hz.
In servo mode the maximum output frequency is 1250Hz, however the
speed is limited by the voltage constant (Ke) of the motor. Ke is a
specific constant for the servo motor being used. It can normally be
found on the motor data sheet in V/krpm (volts per 1,000rpm).
8.6.6 Quasi-Square wave (open-loop only)
The maximum output voltage level of the drive is normally limited to an
equivalent of the drive input voltage minus voltage drops within the drive
(the drive will also retain a few percent of the voltage in order to maintain
current control). If the motor rated voltage is set at the same level as the
supply voltage, some pulse deletion will occur as the drive output voltage
approaches the rated voltage level. If Pr 5.20 (Quasi-square wave
enable) is set to 1 the modulator will allow over modulation, so that as
the output frequency increases beyond the rated frequency the voltage
continues to increase above the rated voltage. The modulation depth will
increase beyond unity; first producing trapezoidal and then quasi-square
waveforms.
This can be used for example:
• To obtain high output frequencies with a low switching frequency
which would not be possible with space vector modulation limited to
unity modulation depth,
or
• In order to maintain a higher output voltage with a low supply
voltage.
The disadvantage is that the machine current will be distorted as the
modulation depth increases above unity, and will contain a significant
amount of low order odd harmonics of the fundamental output frequency.
The additional low order harmonics cause increased losses and heating
in the motor.

9 SMARTCARD operation
9.1 Introduction
This is a standard feature that enables simple configuration of
parameters in a variety of ways. The SMARTCARD can be used for:
• Parameter copying between drives
• Saving whole drive parameter sets
• Saving ‘differences from default‘ parameter sets
• Storing Onboard PLC programs
• Automatically saving all user parameter changes for maintenance purposes
• Loading complete motor map parameters
SPz
When inserting the SMARTCARD, always ensure that ST SPz arrow
points upwards.
Size 1 to 6
The SMARTCARD is located at the top of the module under the drive
display (if installed) on the left-hand side. Ensure the SMARTCARD is
inserted with the SP1-9 arrow pointing upwards.
The drive only communicates with the SMARTCARD when commanded
to read or write, meaning the card may be "hot swapped".
Encoder phase angle (servo mode only)

With drive software version V01.08.00 onwards, the encoder
phase angles in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 are copied to the
SMARTCARD when using any of the SMARTCARD transfer
WARNING
methods.
With drive software version V01.05.00 to V01.07.01, the
encoder phase angles in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 are only copied
to the SMARTCARD when using either Pr 0.30 set to Prog (2)
or Pr xx.00 set to 3yyy.
This is useful when the SMARTCARD is used to back-up the
parameter set of a drive but caution should be used if the
SMARTCARD is used to transfer parameter sets between drives.
Unless the encoder phase angle of the servo motor connected
to the destination drive is known to be the same as the servo
motor connected to the source drive, an autotune should be
performed or the encoder phase angle should be entered
manually into Pr 3.25 (or Pr 21.20). If the encoder phase angle
is incorrect the drive may lose control of the motor resulting in
an O.SPd or Enc10 trip when the drive is enabled.
With drive software version V01.04.00 and earlier, or when
using software version V01.05.00 to V01.07.01 and Pr xx.00
set to 4yyy is used, then the encoder phase angles in Pr 3.25
and Pr 21.20 are not copied to the SMARTCARD. Therefore,
Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 in the destination would not be changed
during a transfer of this data block from the SMARTCARD.
Figure 9-1 Installation of the SMARTCARD

Installing the SMARTCARD SMARTCARD installed
A

Easy saving and reading

Figure 9-2 Basic SMARTCARD operation
Drive reads all Programs all drive

parameters from parameters to the
the SMARTCARD SMARTCARD
NOTE
Overwrites any
data already in
data block 1
Pr 0.30 = rEAd + Pr 0.30 = Prog +
Boot Drive boots from the
Drive automatically SMARTCARD on
writes to the power up and
SMARTCARD automatically writes
when a parameter Auto to the SMARTCARD
save is performed Save when a parameter
Auto Save save is performed
Pr 0.30 = Auto + Pr 0.30 = boot +

The SMARTCARD has 999 individual data block locations. Each 9.2 Transferring data
individual location from 1 to 499 can be used to store data until the
capacity of the SMARTCARD is used. With software V01.07.00 and later Data transfer, erasing and protecting the information is performed by
the drive can support SMARTCARDs with a capacity of between 4kB entering a code in Pr xx.00 and then resetting the drive as shown in
and 512kB. With software V01.06.02 and earlier the drive can support Table 9-2.
SMARTCARDs with a capacity of 4kB. Table 9-2 SMARTCARD codes
The data block locations of the SMARTCARD are arranged to have the Code Action
following usage:
Transfer drive parameters as difference from defaults to a
Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data blocks 2001
bootable SMARTCARD block in data block number 001
Data Block Type Example Use 3yyy Transfer drive parameters to a SMARTCARD block number yyy
1 to 499 Read / Write Application set ups Transfer drive data as difference from defaults to SMARTCARD
4yyy
block number yyy
500 to 999 Read Only Macros
Transfer drive Onboard PLC program to SMARTCARD block
5yyy
‘Differences from default‘ parameter sets will be much smaller than number yyy
whole parameter sets and thus take up a lot less memory as most 6yyy Transfer SMARTCARD data block yyy to the drive
applications only require a few parameters to be changed from the 7yyy Erase SMARTCARD data block yyy
default setting. 8yyy Compare drive parameters with block yyy
The whole card may be protected from writing or erasing by setting the Clear SMARTCARD warning suppression flag (V01.07.00 and
read-only flag as detailed section 9.2.9 9888 / 9777 - Setting and 9555
later)
clearing the SMARTCARD read only flag on page 142.
Set SMARTCARD warning suppression flag (V01.07.00 and
9666
Data transfer to or from the SMARTCARD is indicated by one the later)
following: 9777 Clear SMARTCARD read-only flag
• SM-Keypad/SPz Keypad: The decimal point after the fourth digit in 9888 Set SMARTCARD read-only flag
the upper display will flash. 9999 Erase SMARTCARD
• SM-Keypad Plus: The symbol 'CC' will appear in the lower left hand
corner of the display Where yyy indicates the block number 001 to 999. See Table 9-1 for
restrictions on block numbers.
The card should not be removed during data transfer, as the drive will
produce a trip. If this occurs then either the transfer should be NOTE
reattempted or in the case of a card to drive transfer, default parameters If the read only flag is set then only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective.
should be loaded.
9.2.1 Writing to the SMARTCARD
3yyy - Transfer data to the SMARTCARD
The data block contains the complete parameter data from the drive, i.e.
all user save (US) parameters except parameters with the NC coding bit
set. Power-down save (PS) parameters are not transferred to the
SMARTCARD.
With software V01.06.02 and earlier, a save must have been performed
on the drive to transfer the parameters from the drive RAM to the
EEPROM before the transfer to the SMARTCARD is carried out.

4yyy - Write default differences to a SMARTCARD Pr 5.10, Pr 21.10 Rated power factor
The data block only contains the parameter differences from the last Pr 5.17, Pr 21.12 Stator resistance
time default settings were loaded. Pr 5.18 Switching frequency
Six bytes are required for each parameter difference. The data density is Pr 5.23, Pr 21.13 Voltage offset
not as high as when using the 3yyy transfer method as described in the Pr 5.24, Pr 21.14 Transient inductance
previous section, but in most cases the number of differences from Pr 5.25, Pr 21.24 Stator inductance
default is small and the data blocks are therefore smaller. This method Pr 6.06 DC injection braking current
can be used for creating drive macros. Power-down save (PS) Pr 6.48 Line power supply loss ride through detection level
parameters are not transferred to the SMARTCARD. Reading a parameter set from the SMARTCARD (Pr 11.42 =
The data block format is different depending on the software version. rEAd (1))
Setting Pr 11.42 to rEAd (1) and resetting the drive will transfer the
The data block holds the following parameters:
parameters from the card into the drive parameter set and the drive
Software V01.06.02 and earlier EEPROM, i.e. this is equivalent to writing 6001 to Pr xx.00. All
All user save (US) parameters, except those with the NC (Not copied) SMARTCARD trips apply. Once the parameters are successfully copied
coding bit set or those that do not have a default value, can be this parameter is automatically reset to nonE (0). Parameters are saved
transferred to the SMARTCARD. to the drive EEPROM after this action is complete.
Software V01.07.xx
NOTE
All user save (US) parameters, except those with the NC (Not copied)
coding bit set or those that do not have a default value, can be This operation is only performed if data block 1 on the card is a full
transferred to the SMARTCARD. In addition to these parameters all parameter set (3yyy transfer) and not a default difference file (4yyy
menu 20 parameters (except Pr 20.00), can be transferred to the transfer). If block 1 does not exist a 'C.dAt' trip occurs.
SMARTCARD even though they are not user save parameters and have 9.2.3 Auto saving parameter changes (Pr 11.42 =
the NC coding bit set. Auto (3))
Software V01.08.00 onwards This setting causes the drive to automatically save any changes made to
All user save (US) parameters including those that do not have a default menu 0 parameters on the drive to the SMARTCARD. The latest menu 0
value (i.e. Pr 3.25 or Pr 21.20 Encoder phase angle), but not including parameter set in the drive is therefore always backed up on the
those with the NC (Not copied) coding bit set can be transferred to the SMARTCARD. Changing Pr 11.42 to Auto (3) and resetting the drive will
SMARTCARD. In addition to these parameters all menu 20 parameters immediately save the complete parameter set from the drive to the card,
(except Pr 20.00), can be transferred to the SMARTCARD even though i.e. all user save (US) parameters except parameters with the NC coding
they are not user save parameters and have the NC coding bit set. bit set. Once the whole parameter set is stored only the individual
modified menu 0 parameter setting is updated.
It is possible to transfer parameters between drives with each of the
different formats, however, the data block compare function does not Advanced parameter changes are only saved to the card when Pr xx.00
work with data produced by different formats. is set to a 1000 and the drive reset.
Writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD (Pr 11.42 = Prog All SMARTCARD trips apply, except ‘C.Chg’. If the data block already
(2)) contains information it is automatically overwritten.
Setting Pr 11.42 to Prog (2) and resetting the drive will save the If the card is removed when Pr 11.42 is set to 3 Pr 11.42 is then
parameters to the SMARTCARD, i.e. this is equivalent to writing 3001 to automatically set to nonE (0).
Pr xx.00. All SMARTCARD trips apply except 'C.Chg'. If the data block When a new SMARTCARD is installed Pr 11.42 must be set back to
already exists it is automatically overwritten. When the action is Auto (3) by the user and the drive reset so the complete parameter set is
complete this parameter is automatically reset to nonE (0). rewritten to the new SMARTCARD if auto mode is still required.
9.2.2 Reading from the SMARTCARD When Pr 11.42 is set to Auto (3) and the parameters in the drive are
6yyy - Read default differences from a SMARTCARD saved, the SMARTCARD is also updated, therefore the SMARTCARD
When the data is transferred back to a drive, using 6yyy in Pr xx.00, it is becomes a copy of the drives stored configuration.
transferred to the drive RAM and the drive EEPROM. A parameter save At power up, if Pr 11.42 is set to Auto (3), the drive will save the
is not required to retain the data after power-down. Set up data for any complete parameter set to the SMARTCARD. The drive will display
Solutions Modules installed are stored on the card and are transferred to ‘cArd’ during this operation. This is done to ensure that if a user puts a
the destination drive. If the Solutions Modules are different between the new SMARTCARD in during power down the new SMARTCARD will
source and destination drive, the menus for the slots where the have the correct data.
Solutions Module categories are different are not updated from the card
NOTE
and will contain their default values after the copying action. The drive
will produce a 'C.Optn' trip if the Solutions Modules installed to the When Pr 11.42 is set to Auto (3) the setting of Pr 11.42 itself is saved to
source and destination drive are different or are in different slots. If the the drive EEPROM but NOT to the SMARTCARD.
data is being transferred to a drive of a different voltage or current rating 9.2.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every
a 'C.rtg' trip will occur. power up (Pr 11.42 = boot (4))
The following drive rating dependant parameters (RA coding bit set) will When Pr 11.42 is set to boot (4) the drive operates the same as Auto
not be transferred to the destination drive by a SMARTCARD when the mode except when the drive is powered-up. The parameters on the
rating of the destination drive is different from the source drive and the SMARTCARD will be automatically transferred to the drive at power up if
file is a parameter file (i.e. created using the 3yyy transfer method). the following are true:
However, with software V01.09.00 and later drive rating dependent • A card is inserted in the drive
parameters will be transferred if only the current rating is different and • Parameter data block 1 exists on the card
the file is a differences from default type file (i.e. created using the 4yyy • The data in block 1 is type 1 to 5 (as defined in Pr 11.38)
transfer method). If drive rating dependant parameters are not • Pr 11.42 on the card set to boot (4)
transferred to the destination drive they will contain their default values. The drive will display 'boot' during this operation. If the drive mode is
Pr 2.08 Standard ramp voltage different from that on the card, the drive gives a 'C.Typ'. trip and the data
Pr 4.05 to Pr 4.07 and Pr 21.27 to Pr 21.29 Current limits is not transferred.
Pr 4.24, User current maximum scaling If 'boot' mode is stored on the copying SMARTCARD this makes the
Pr 5.07, Pr 21.07 Motor rated current copying SMARTCARD the master device. This provides a very fast and
Pr 5.09, Pr 21.09 Motor rated voltage efficient way of re-programming a number of drives.

If data block 1 contains a bootable parameter set and data block 2 The header information for each data block which has been used can be
contains an Onboard PLC program (type 17 as defined in Pr 11.38), then viewed in Pr 11.38 to Pr 11.40 by increasing or decreasing the data
if the drive software version is V01.07.00 and later, the onboard PLC block number set in Pr 11.37.
program will be transferred to the drive at power up along with the Software V01.07.00 and later
parameter set in data block 1. If Pr 11.37 is set to 1000 the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the
NOTE number of 16 byte pages left on the card.
‘Boot’ mode is saved to the card, but when the card is read, the value of If Pr 11.37 is set to 1001 the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the
Pr 11.42 is not transferred to the drive. total capacity of the card in 16 byte pages. Therefore, for a 4kB card this
parameter would show 254.
9.2.5 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every
power up (Pr xx.00 = 2001), software V01.08.00 If Pr 11.37 is set to 1002 the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the
and later state of the read-only (bit 0) and warning suppression flags (bit 1).
It is poss ble to create a difference from default bootable file by setting Software version V01.11.00 and later: If Pr 11.37 is set to 1003, the
Pr xx.00 to 2001 and resetting the drive. This type of file causes the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the product identifier (255 =
drive to behave in the same way at power-up as a file created with boot Unidrive SP, 2 = Digitax ST).
mode set up with Pr 11.42. The difference from the default file is that it If there is no data on the card Pr 11.37 can only have values of 0 or 1000
has the added advantage of including menu 20 parameters. to 1003.
Setting Pr xx.00 to 2001 will overwrite data block 1 on the card if it Software V01.06.02 and earlier
already exists. If Pr 11.37 is set to 1000 the checksum parameter (Pr 11.40) shows the
If a data block 2 exists and contains an Onboard PLC program (type 17 number of bytes left on the card. If there is no data on the card Pr 11.37
as defined in Pr 11.38), this will also be loaded after the parameters have can only have values of 0 or 1000.
been transferred The version number is intended to be used when data blocks are used
A bootable difference from default file can only be created in one operation as drive macros. If a version number is to be stored with a data block,
and parameters cannot be added as they are saved via menu 0. Pr 11.39 should be set to the required version number before the data is
transferred. Each time Pr 11.37 is changed by the user the drive puts the
9.2.6 8yyy - Comparing the drive full parameter set
version number of the currently viewed data block in Pr 11.39.
with the SMARTCARD values
Setting 8yyy in Pr xx.00, will compare the SMARTCARD file with the If the destination drive has a different drive mode to the parameters on
data in the drive. If the compare is successful Pr xx.00 is simply set to 0. the card, the drive mode will be changed by the action of transferring
If the compare fails a ‘C.cpr’ trip is initiated. parameters from the card to the drive.
9.2.7 7yyy / 9999 - Erasing data from the The actions of erasing a card, erasing a file, changing a menu 0
SMARTCARD parameter, or inserting a new card will effectively set Pr 11.37 to 0 or the
Data can be erased from the SMARTCARD either one block at a time or lowest file number in the card.
all blocks in one go. 9.4 SMARTCARD parameters
• Setting 7yyy in Pr xx.00 will erase SMARTCARD data block yyy.
Table 9-3 Key to parameter table coding
• Setting 9999 in Pr xx.00 will erase all SMARTCARD data blocks
RW Read / Write RO Read only Uni Unipolar
9.2.8 9666 / 9555 - Setting and clearing the Bi Bi-polar Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string
SMARTCARD warning suppression flag
FI Filtered DE Destina ion NC Not copied
(V01.07.00 and later)
RA Rating dependent PT Protected US User save
If the Solutions Modules installed to the source and destination drive are
PS Power down save
different or are in different slots the drive will produce a 'C.Optn' trip. If
the data is being transferred to a drive of a different voltage or current
rating a 'C.rtg' trip will occur. It is possible to suppress these trips by 11.36 {0.29} SMARTCARD parameter data previously loaded
setting the warning suppression flag. If this flag is set the drive will not
RO Uni NC PT US
trip if the Solutions Module(s) or drive ratings are different between the
source and destination drives. The Solutions Module or rating  0 to 999  0
dependent parameters will not be transferred.
This parameter shows the number of the data block last transferred from
• Setting 9666 in Pr xx.00 will set the warning suppression flag
a SMARTCARD to the drive.
• Setting 9555 in Pr xx.00 will clear the warning suppression flag
9.2.9 9888 / 9777 - Setting and clearing the 11.37 SMARTCARD data number
SMARTCARD read only flag RW Uni NC
The SMART CARD may be protected from writing or erasing by setting
the read only flag. If an attempt is made to write or erase a data block  0 to 1003  0
when the read only flag is set, a 'C.rdo' trip is initiated. When the read
This parameter should have the data block number entered for which the
only flag is set only codes 6yyy or 9777 are effective.
user would like information displayed in Pr 11.38, Pr 11.39 and Pr 11.40.
• Setting 9888 in Pr xx.00 will set the read only flag
• Setting 9777 in Pr xx.00 will clear the read only flag.
9.3 Data block header information
Each data block stored on a SMARTCARD has header information
detailing the following:
• A number which identifies the block (Pr 11.37)
• The type of data stored in the block (Pr 11.38)
• The drive mode if the data is parameter data (Pr 11.38)
• The version number (Pr 11.39)
• The checksum (Pr 11.40)
• The read-only flag
• The warning suppression flag (V01.07.00 and later)

11.38 SMARTCARD data type/mode

RO Txt NC PT
 0 to 18 
Gives the type/mode of the data block selected with Pr 11.37:
Pr 11.38 String Type/mode Data stored

Value when Pr 11.37 = 0, 1000 to
0 FrEE
1003
1 Reserved
2 3OpEn.LP Open-loop mode parameters
3 3CL.VECt Closed-loop vector mode parameters
4 3SErVO Servo mode parameters Data from
5 3rEgEn Regen mode parameters EEPROM
5 Reserved
6 to 8 3Un Unused
9 Reserved
10 4OpEn.LP Open-loop mode parameters
11 4CL.VECt Closed-loop vector mode parameters Defaults last
12 4SErVO Servo mode parameters loaded and
13 4rEgEn Regen mode parameters differences
14 to 16 4Un Unused
17 LAddEr Onboard PLC program
18 Option A Solutions Module file
11.39 SMARTCARD data version

RW Uni NC
 0 to 9,999  0
Gives the version number of the data block selected in Pr 11.37.
11.40 SMARTCARD data checksum

R0 Uni NC PT
 0 to 65,335 
Gives the checksum of the data block selected in Pr 11.37.
11.42 {0.30} Parameter copying

RW Txt NC US*
 0 to 4  nonE (0)
NOTE
If Pr 11.42 is equal to 1 or 2, this value is not transferred to the drive or
saved to the EEPROM. If Pr 11.42 is set to a 3 or 4 the value is
transferred.
nonE (0) = Inactive
rEAd (1) = Read parameter set from the SMARTCARD
Prog (2) = Programming a parameter set to the SMARTCARD
Auto (3) = Auto save
boot (4) = Boot mode

9.5 SMARTCARD trips

After an attempt to read, write or erase data to or from a SMARTCARD a trip may occur if there has been a problem with the command. The following
trips indicate various problems as detailed in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4 Trip conditions

Trip Diagnosis
C.Acc SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD Read / Write fail
Check SMARTCARD is installed / located correctly
185 Ensure SMARTCARD is not writing data to data location 500 to 999
Replace SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD trip: The menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the SMARTCARD because the necessary file has
C.boot
not been created on the SMARTCARD
A write to a menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad with Pr 11.42 set to auto(3) or boot(4), but the necessary file on the
SMARTCARD has not been created
177
Ensure that Pr 11.42 is correctly set and reset the drive to create the necessary file on the SMARTCARD
Re-attempt the parameter write to the menu 0 parameter
C.bUSY SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD can not perform the required function as it is being accessed by a Solutions Module
178 Wait for the Solutions Module to finish accessing the SMARTCARD and then re-attempt the required function
C.Chg SMARTCARD trip: Data location already contains data
Erase data in data location
179
Write data to an alternative data location
C.Cpr SMARTCARD trip: The values stored in the drive and the values in the data block on the SMARTCARD are different
188 Press the red reset button
C.dat SMARTCARD trip: Data location specified does not contain any data
183 Ensure data block number is correct
C.Err SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD data is corrupted
Ensure the card is located correctly
182 Erase data and retry
Replace SMARTCARD
C.Full SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD full
184 Delete a data block or use a different SMARTCARD
C.Optn SMARTCARD trip: Solutions Modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
Ensure correct Solutions Modules are installed
180 Ensure Solutions Modules are in the same Solutions Module slot
Press the red reset button
C.Prod SMARTCARD trip: The data blocks on the SMARTCARD are not compatible with this product
175 Erase all data on the SMARTCARD by setting Pr xx.00 to 9999 and pressing the red reset button
Replace SMARTCARD
C.rdo SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD has the Read only bit set
Enter 9777 in Pr xx.00 to allow SMARTCARD Read / Write access
181
Ensure the drive is not writing to data locations 500 to 999 on the card

Table 9-4 Trip conditions

Trip Diagnosis
C.rtg SMARTCARD trip: The voltage and/or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
Drive rating dependent parameters (parameters with the RA coding) are likely to have different values and ranges with drives of
different voltage and current ratings. Parameters with this attr bute will not be transferred to the destination drive by SMARTCARDs
when the rating of the destination drive is different from the source drive and the file is a parameter file. However, with software
V01.09.00 and later drive rating dependent parameters will be transferred if only the current rating is different and the file is a
Drive rating parameters are:
Parameter Function
2.08 Standard ramp voltage
4.05/6/7, 21.27/8/9 Current limits
4.24 User current maximum scaling
186
5.07, 21.07 Motor rated current
5.09, 21.09 Motor rated voltage
5.10, 21.10 Rated power factor
5.17, 21.12 Stator resistance
5.18 Switching frequency
5.23, 21.13 Voltage offset
5.24, 21.14 Transient inductance
5.25, 21.24 Stator inductance
6.06 DC injection braking current
6.48 Line power supply loss ride through detection level
The above parameters will be set to their default values.
C.Typ SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD parameter set not compatible with drive

Ensure destination drive type is the same as the source parameter file drive type
Table 9-5 SMARTCARD status indications
Lower display Description Lower display Description

boot A parameter set is being transferred from the cArd The drive is writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD to the drive during power-up. For further during power-up.
information, please refer to section 9.2.4 Booting up For further information, please refer to section
from the SMARTCARD on every power up (Pr 11.42 = 9.2.3 Auto saving parameter changes (Pr 11.42 = Auto
boot (4)) . (3)) .

10 Onboard PLC not be used for time-critical applications. For time-critical

applications Unidrive SP and an SM-Applications Plus, SM-
Applications or SM-Applications Lite should be used.
10.1 Onboard PLC and SYPTLite • The program runs at a low priority. The drive provides a single
The drive has the ability to store and execute a 4KB Onboard PLC background task in which to run a ladder diagram. The drive is
ladder logic program without the need for additional hardware in the form prioritised to perform its major functions first, e.g. motor control, and
of a Solutions Module. will use any remaining processing time to execute the ladder
diagram as a background activity. As the drive's processor becomes
The ladder logic program is written using SYPTLite, a Windows™ based
more heavily loaded, less time is spent executing the program.
ladder diagram editor allowing the development of programs for
execution in Unidrive SP or SM-Applications Lite. Figure 10-1 Onboard PLC program scheduling
SYPTLite is designed to be easy to use and to make program
development as simple as possible. The features provided are a sub-set Major drive
of those in the SYPT program editor. SYPTLite programs are developed functions
using ladder logic, a graphical language widely used to program PLCs
User
(IEC61131-3). SYPTLite allows the user to "draw" a ladder diagram program
representing a program.
SYPTLite provides a complete environment for the development of
0 64 128
ladder diagrams. Ladder diagrams can be created, compiled into user Time
programs and downloaded to a Unidrive SP or SM-Applications Lite for (milliseconds)
execution, via the RJ45 serial communications port on the front of the
The user program is scheduled for a short period approximately once
drive. The run-time operation of the compiled ladder diagram on the
every 64ms. The time for which the program is scheduled will vary
target can also be monitored using SYPTLite and facilities are provided
between 0.2ms and 2ms depending on the loading of the drive's
to interact with the program on the target by setting new values for target
processor.
parameters.
When scheduled, several scans of the user program may be performed.
SYPTLite is available on the CD which is supplied with the drive.
Some scans may execute in microseconds. However, when the main
10.2 Benefits drive functions are scheduled there will be a pause in the execution of
the program causing some scans to take many milliseconds. SYPTLite
The combination of the Onboard PLC and SYPTLite, means that the displays the average execution time calculated over the last 10 scans of
drive can replace nano and some micro PLCs in many applications. The the user program.
Onboard PLC programs can consist of up to a maximum of 50 ladder
logic rungs (up to 7 function blocks and 10 contacts per rung). The
Onboard PLC program can also be transferred to and from a
SMARTCARD for backup or quick commissioning/start-up
In addition to the basic ladder symbols, SYPTLite contains a sub-set of
the function from the full version of SYPT. These include,
• Arithmetic blocks
• Comparison blocks
• Timers
• Counters
• Multiplexers
• Latches
• Bit manipulation
Typical applications for the Onboard PLC include,
• Ancillary pumps
• Fans and control valves
• Interlocking logic
• Sequences routines
• Custom control words.
10.3 Limitations
Compared with the Applications Modules (SM-Applications, SM-
Applications Lite and SM-Applications Plus) when programmed with
SYPT, the Onboard PLC program has the following limitations:
• The maximum program size is 4032 bytes including header and
optional source code.
• The drive is rated for 100 program downloads. This limitation is
imposed by the flash memory used to store the program within the
drive.
• The user cannot create user variables. The user is only able to
manipulate the drive parameter set.
• The program cannot be downloaded or monitored over CTNet. The
program is only accessible via the drives RJ45 serial
communications port.
• There are no real-time tasks, i.e. the scheduling rate of the program
cannot be guaranteed. Applications Modules tasks such as Clock,
Event, Pos0 or Speed are not available. The Onboard PLC should

The Onboard PLC and SYPTLite form the first level of functionality in a
range of programmable options for Unidrive SP.
Figure 10-2FUNCTIONALITY Programming options for Unidrive SP
Level 4
SM-Applications or
SM-Applications
Plus with SYPT
software
Level 3
SM-Applications Lite with
SYPT software
Level 2
SM-Applications Lite with
SYPTLite software
Level 1
Onboard PLC with SYPTLite software
CAPABILITY
SYPTLite can be used with either the Onboard PLC in the Unidrive SP 10.5 Onboard PLC parameters
or with SM-Applications Lite to create ladder logic programs.
The following parameters are associated with the Onboard PLC
SYPT can be used with any of the Applications Modules to create fully
program.
flexible programs using ladder logic, function blocks or DPL script.
10.4 Getting started 11.47 Drive Onboard PLC program enable

SYPTLite can be found on the CD which is supplied with the drive. RW Uni US
SYPTLite system requirements  0 to 2  2
• Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Windows 95/98/98SE/Me/NT4 are not
supported This parameter is used to start and stop the drive Onboard PLC program.
• Pentium III 500MHz or better recommended
Value Description
• 128MB RAM
• Minimum of 800x600 screen resolution. 1024x768 is recommended 0 Halt the drive Onboard PLC program.
• Adobe Acrobat 5.10 or later (for viewing User Guides) Run the drive Onboard PLC program (if installed). Any out-of-
• Microsoft Internet Explorer V5.0 or later range parameter writes attempted will be clipped to the
1
• RS232 to RS485, RJ45 communications lead to connect the PC to maximum / minimum values valid for that parameter before
the drive being written.
• Administrator rights are required to install the software Run the drive Onboard PLC program (if installed). Any out-of-
2
range parameter writes attempted will cause a ‘UP ovr’ trip.
To install SYPTLite, insert the CD and the auto-run facility should start
up the front-end screen, from which SYPTLite can be selected.
See the SYPTLite help file for more information regarding using 11.48 Drive Onboard PLC program status
SYPTLite, creating ladder diagrams and the available function blocks. RO Bi NC PT
 -128 to +127 
The drive Onboard PLC program status parameter indicates to the user
the actual state of the drive Onboard PLC program.

Value Description 10.6 Onboard PLC trips

Onboard PLC program caused a dr ve trip due to an error The following trips are associated with the Onboard PLC program.
-n condition while running rung n. Note that the rung number is
shown on the display as a negative number. Trip Diagnosis
0 Onboard PLC program is not installed. Onboard PLC program: Cannot access Onboard
UP ACC
1 Onboard PLC program is installed but stopped. PLC program file on drive
2 Onboard PLC program is installed and running. Disable drive - write access is not allowed when the
When an Onboard PLC program is installed and running, the lower drive is enabled.
98
display of the drive flashes ‘PLC’ once every 10s. Another source is already accessing Onboard PLC
program - retry once the other action is complete.
UP div0 Onboard PLC program attempted divide by zero
11.49 Drive Onboard PLC programming events
90 Check program
RO Uni NC PT PS
Onboard PLC program variables and function
 0 to 65,535  UP OFL block calls using more than the allowed RAM
space (stack overflow)
The drive Onboard PLC programming events parameter holds the
number of times an Onboard PLC program download has taken place 95 Check program
and is 0 on dispatch from the factory. The drive is rated for one hundred
Onboard PLC program attempted out of range
ladder program downloads. This parameter is not altered when defaults UP ovr
parameter write
are loaded.
94 Check program
11.50 Drive Onboard PLC program average scan time Onboard PLC program attempted access to a non-
UP PAr
existent parameter
RO Uni NC PT
91 Check program
 0 to 65,535 ms 
Onboard PLC program attempted write to a read-
UP ro
This parameter is updated once per second or once per Onboard PLC only parameter
program scan whichever is the longest. If more than one program scan 92 Check program
occurs within the one second update period the parameter shows the
average scan time. If the program scan time is longer than one second Onboard PLC program attempted read of a write-
UP So
the parameter shows the time for the last program scan. only parameter
93 Check program
11.51 Drive Onboard PLC program first run UP udF Onboard PLC program undefined trip
RO Bit NC PT 97 Check program
 OFF (0) or On (1)  UP uSEr Onboard PLC program requested a trip
The Drive Onboard PLC program first run parameter is set for the 96 Check program
duration of program scan from the stopped state. This enables the user
to perform any required initialisation every time the program is run. This
parameter is set every time the program is stopped. 10.7 Onboard PLC and the SMARTCARD
The Onboard PLC program in a drive may be transferred from the drive
to a SMARTCARD and vice versa.
• To transfer an Onboard PLC program from the drive to a
SMARTCARD, set Pr xx.00 to 5yyy and reset the drive
• To transfer an Onboard PLC program from the SMARTCARD to a
drive, set Pr xx.00 to 6yyy and reset the drive.
(Where yyy is the data block location, see Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data
blocks on page 140 for restrictions on block numbers).
If an attempt is made to transfer an Onboard PLC program from a drive
to the SMARTCARD when the drive contains no program, the block is
still created on the SMARTCARD but it will contain no data. If this data
block is then transferred to a drive, the destination drive will then have
no Onboard PLC program.
The smallest SMARTCARD compatible with Unidrive SP has a capacity
of 4064 bytes and each block can be up to 4064 bytes in size. The
maximum size of a user program is 4032 bytes so it is guaranteed that
any Onboard PLC program downloaded to a Unidrive SP will fit on to an
empty SMARTCARD. A SMARTCARD can contain a number of
Onboard PLC programs until the capacity of the card is used.

11 Advanced parameters Table 11-2 Key to parameter table coding
Coding Attribute
This is a quick reference to all parameters in the drive showing units,
RW Read/write: can be written by the user
ranges limits etc, with block diagrams to illustrate their function. Full
descriptions of the parameters can be found in the Advanced User RO Read only: can only be read by the user
Guide on the supplied CD ROM. Bit 1 bit parameter. ‘On’ or ‘OFF’ on the display
Bi Bipolar parameter
These advanced parameters are listed for reference Uni Unipolar parameter
purposes only. The lists in this chapter do not include Txt Text: the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers.
sufficient information for adjusting these parameters.
Filtered: some parameters which can have rapidly changing
Incorrect adjustment can affect the safety of the system, and
WARNING FI values are filtered when displayed on the drive keypad for
damage the drive and or external equipment. Before easy viewing.
attempting to adjust any of these parameters, refer to the
Destination: This parameter selects the destination of an
Advanced User Guide. DE
input or logic function.
Table 11-1 Menu descriptions Rating dependent: this parameter is l kely to have different
values and ranges with drives of different voltage and
Menu current ratings. Parameters with this attribute will not be
Description
number transferred to the destination drive by SMARTCARDs when
Commonly used basic set up parameters for quick / easy RA the rating of the destination drive is different from the
0 source drive and the file is a parameter file. However, with
programming
software V01.09.00 and later the value will be transferred if
1 Frequency / speed reference
only the current rating is different and the file is a
2 Ramps differences from default type file.
3 Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control Not copied: not transferred to or from SMARTCARDs
4 Torque and current control NC
during copying.
5 Motor control PT Protected: cannot be used as a destination.
6 Sequencer and clock User save: parameter saved in drive EEPROM when the
US
7 Analog I/O user initiates a parameter save.
8 Digital I/O Power-down save: parameter automatically saved in drive
9 Programmable logic, motorized pot and binary sum EEPROM when the under volts (UV) trip occurs. With
PS software version V01.08.00 and later, power-down save
10 Status and trips
parameters are also saved in the drive when the user
11 General drive set-up initiates a parameter save.
12 Threshold detectors and variable selectors
13 Position control
14 User PID controller
18 Application menu 1
21 Second motor parameters
22 Additional Menu 0 set-up
Operation mode abbreviations:

OL> Open loop
CL> Closed loop (which incorporates closed loop vector and
servo mode)
VT> Closed loop vector mode
SV> Servo
Default abbreviations:
EUR> European default value (50Hz AC supply frequency)
USA> USA default value (60Hz AC supply frequency)
NOTE
Parameter numbers shown in brackets {...} are the equivalent Menu 0
parameters. Some Menu 0 parameters appear twice since their function
depends on the operating mode.
The Range - CL column applies to both Closed-loop Vector and Closed-
loop Servo. For some parameters, this column applies only to one of
these modes; this is indicated accordingly in the Default columns.
In some cases, the function or range of a parameter is affected by the
setting of another parameter; the information in the lists relates to the
default condition of such parameters.

Table 11-3 Feature look-up table
Feature Related parameters (Pr)

Acceleration rates 2.10 2.11 to 2.19 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.02
Analog speed reference 1 1.36 7.10 7.01 7.07 7.08 7.09 7.25 7.26 7.30
Analog speed reference 2 1.37 7.14 1.41 7.02 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.28 7.31
Analog I/O Menu 7
Analog input 1 7.01 7.07 7.08 7.09 7.10 7.25 7.26 7.30
Analog input 2 7.02 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.28 7.31
Analog input 3 7.03 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18 7.29 7.32
Analog output 1 7.19 7.20 7.21 7.33
Analog output 2 7.22 7.23 7.24
Application menu Menu 18 Menu 19 Menu 20
At speed indicator bit 3.06 3.07 3.09 10.06 10.05 10.07
Auto reset 10.34 10.35 10.36 10.01
Autotune 5.12 5.16 5.17 5.23 5.24 5.25 5.10 5.29 5.30
Binary sum 9.29 9.30 9.31 9.32 9.33 9.34
Bipolar speed 1.10
Brake control 12.40 to 12.49
Braking 10.11 10.10 10.30 10.31 6.01 2.04 2.02 10.12 10.39 10.40
Catch a spinning motor 6.09 5.40
Coast to stop 6.01
Comms 11.23 to 11.26
Copying 11.42 11.36 to 11.40
Cost - per kWh electricity 6.16 6.17 6.24 6.25 6.26 6.40
Current controller 4.13 4.14
Current feedback 4.01 4.02 4.17 4.04 4.12 4.20 4.23 4.24 4.26 10.08 10.09 10.17
Current limits 4.05 4.06 4.07 4.18 4.15 4.19 4.16 5.07 5.10 10.08 10.09 10.17
DC bus voltage 5.05 2.08
DC injection braking 6.06 6.07 6.01
Deceleration rates 2.20 2.21 to 2.29 2.04 2.35 to 2.37 2.02 2.08 6.01 10.30 10.31 10.39
Defaults 11.43 11.46
Digital I/O Menu 8
Digital I/O read word 8.20
Digital I/O T24 8.01 8.11 8.21 8.31
Digital I/O T25 8.02 8.12 8.22 8.32
Digital I/O T26 8.03 8.13 8.23 8.33
Digital input T27 8.04 8.14 8.24
Digital input T28 8.05 8.15 8.25 8.39
Digital input T29 8.06 8.16 8.26 8.39
Digital lock 13.10 13.01 to 13.09 13.11 13.12 13.16 3.22 3.23 13.19 to 13.23
Digital output T22 8.08 8.18 8.28
Direction 10.13 6.30 6.31 1.03 10.14 2.01 3.02 8.03 8.04 10.40
Display timeout 11.41
Drive active 10.02 10.40
Drive derivative 11.28
Drive OK 10.01 8.27 8.07 8.17 10.36 10.40
Dynamic performance 5.26
Dynamic V/F 5.13
Electronic nameplate 3.49
Enable 6.15 8.09 8.10
Encoder reference 3.43 3.44 3.45 3.46
Encoder set up 3.33 3.34 to 3.42 3.47 3.48
External trip 10.32 8.10 8.07
Fan speed 6.45
Fast disable 6.29
Field weakening - induction motor 5.29 5.30 1.06 5.28
Field weakening - servo 5.22 1.06 5.09
Filter change 6.19 6.18
Frequency reference selection 1.14 1.15
Frequency slaving 3.01 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18
Hard speed reference 3.22 3.23
Heavy duty rating 5.07 11.32
High stability space vector
5.19
modulation
I/O sequencer 6.04 6.30 6.31 6.32 6.33 6.34 6.42 6.43 6.41


Inertia compensation 2.38 5.12 4.22 3.18
Jog reference 1.05 2.19 2.29
Ke 5.33
Keypad reference 1.17 1.14 1.43 1.51 6.12 6.13
Kt 5.32
Limit switches 6.35 6.36
Line power supply loss 6.03 10.15 10.16 5.05
Local position reference 13.20 to 13.23
Logic function 1 9.01 9.04 9.05 9.06 9.07 9.08 9.09 9.10
Logic function 2 9.02 9.14 9.15 9.16 9.17 9.18 9.19 9.20
Low voltage supply 6.44 6.46
Marker pulse 3.32 3.31
Maximum speed 1.06
Menu 0 set up 11.01 to 11.22 Menu 22
Minimum speed 1.07 10.04
Modules - number of 11.35
Motor map 5.06 5.07 5.08 5.09 5.10 5.11
Motor map 2 Menu 21 11.45
Motorized potentiometer 9.21 9.22 9.23 9.24 9.25 9.26 9.27 9.28
Offset speed reference 1.04 1.38 1.09
Onboard PLC 11.47 to 11.51
Open collector digital outputs 8.30
Open loop vector mode 5.14 5.17 5.23
Operating mode 0.48 11.31 3.24 5.14
Orientation 13.10 13.13 to 13.15
Output 5.01 5.02 5.03 5.04
Overspeed threshold 3.08
Phase angle 3.25 5.12
PID controller Menu 14
Position feedback - drive 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.50
Positive logic 8.29
Power up parameter 11.22 11.21
Precision reference 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.44
Preset speeds 1.15 1.21 to 1.28 1.16 1.14 1.42 1.45 to 1.48 1.50
Programmable logic Menu 9
Quasi square operation 5.20
Ramp (accel / decel) mode 2.04 2.08 6.01 2.02 2.03 10.30 10.31 10.39
Rated speed autotune 5.16 5.08
Regenerating 10.10 10.11 10.30 10.31 6.01 2.04 2.02 10.12 10.39 10.40
Relative jog 13.17 to 13.19
Relay output 8.07 8.17 8.27
Reset 10.33 8.02 8.22 10.34 10.35 10.36 10.01
RFC mode (encoder less CLV
3.24 3.42 4.12 5.40
mode)
S ramp 2.06 2.07
Sample rates 5.18
SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
8.09 8.10
DISABLE) input
Security code 11.30 11.44
Serial comms 11.23 to 11.26
Skip speeds 1.29 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.33 1.34 1.35
Slip compensation 5.27 5.08
SMARTCARD 11.36 to 11.40 11.42
Software version 11.29 11.34
Speed controller 3.10 to 3.17 3.19 3.20 3.21
Speed feedback 3.02 3.03 3.04
Speed feedback - drive 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29 3.30 3.31 3.42
Speed reference selection 1.14 1.15 1.49 1.50 1.01
Status word 10.40
Supply 6.44 5.05 6.46
Switching frequency 5.18 5.35 7.34 7.35
Thermal protection - drive 5.18 5.35 7.04 7.05 7.06 7.32 7.35 10.18
Thermal protection - motor 4.15 5.07 4.19 4.16 4.25 7.15
Thermistor input 7.15 7.03
Threshold detector 1 12.01 12.03 to 12.07


Threshold detector 2 12.02 12.23 to 12.27
Time - filter change 6.19 6.18
Time - powered up log 6.20 6.21 6.28
Time - run log 6.22 6.23 6.28
Torque 4.03 4.26 5.32
Torque mode 4.08 4.11 4.09 4.10
Trip detection 10.37 10.38 10.20 to 10.29
Trip log 10.20 to 10.29 10.41 to 10.51 6.28
Under voltage 5.05 10.16 10.15
V/F mode 5.15 5.14
Variable selector 1 12.08 to 12.15
Variable selector 2 12.28 to 12.35
Velocity feed forward 1.39 1.40
Voltage controller 5.31
Voltage mode 5.14 5.17 5.23 5.15
Voltage rating 11.33 5.09 5.05
Voltage supply 6.44 6.46 5.05
Warning 10.19 10.12 10.17 10.18 10.40
Zero speed indicator bit 3.05 10.03

Parameter ranges and variable maximums:

The two values provided define the minimum and maximum values for
the given parameter. In some cases the parameter range is variable and
dependant on either:
• other parameters
• the drive rating
• drive mode
• or a combination of these
The values given in Table 11-4 are the variable maximums used in the
drive.
Table 11-4 Definition of parameter ranges & variable maximums
Maximum Definition
SPEED_FREQ_MAX Maximum speed (closed-loop mode) reference or frequency (open-loop mode) reference
[Open-loop 3000.0Hz, If Pr 1.08 = 0: SPEED_FREQ_MAX = Pr 1.06
Closed-loop vector and Servo If Pr 1.08 = 1: SPEED_FREQ_MAX is Pr 1.06 or – Pr 1.07 whichever is the largest
40000.0rpm] (If the second motor map is selected Pr 21.01 is used instead of Pr 1.06 and Pr 21.02 instead of Pr 1.07)
Maximum applied to speed reference limits
A maximum limit may be applied to the speed reference to prevent the nominal encoder frequency from
exceeding 500kHz (410kHz for software version V01.06.00 and earlier). The maximum is defined by
SPEED_LIMIT_MAX (in rpm) = 500kHz x 60 / ELPR = 3.0 x 107 / ELPR subject to an absolute maximum of
40,000 rpm.
ELPR is equivalent encoder lines per revolution and is the number of lines that would be produced by a
SPEED_LIMIT_MAX quadrature encoder.
[40000.0rpm] Quadrature encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution
F and D encoder ELPR = number of lines per revolution / 2
Resolver ELPR = resolution / 4
SINCOS encoder ELPR = number of sine waves per revolution
Serial comms encoder ELPR = resolution / 4
This maximum is defined by the device selected with the speed feedback selector (Pr 3.26) and the ELPR set
for the position feedback device.
In closed-loop vector RFC mode SPEED_LIMIT_MAX = 40,000rpm.
Maximum speed
SPEED_MAX This maximum is used for some speed related parameters in menu 3. To allow headroom for overshoot etc. the
[40000.0rpm] maximum speed is twice the maximum speed reference.
SPEED_MAX = 2 x SPEED_FREQ_MAX
Maximum motor rated current (Maximum Normal Duty current rating)
RATED_CURRENT_MAX = 1.36 x KC.
RATED_CURRENT_MAX
The motor rated current can be increased above KC up to a level not exceeding 1.36 x KC). (Maximum motor
[9999.99A]
rated current is the maximum normal duty current rating.)
The actual level varies from one drive size to another, refer to Table 11-5.
Maximum drive current
DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX
The maximum drive current is the current at the over current trip level and is given by:
[9999.99A]
DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX = KC / 0.45
Maximum output voltage set-point
AC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX Defines the maximum motor voltage that can be selected.
[690V] 200V drives: 240V, 400V drives: 480V
575V drives: 575V, 690V drives: 690V
Maximum AC output voltage
This maximum has been chosen to allow for maximum AC voltage that can be produced by the drive including
AC_VOLTAGE_MAX
quasi-square wave operation as follows:
[930V]
AC_VOLTAGE_MAX = 0.78 x DC_VOLTAGE_MAX
200V drives: 325V, 400V drives: 650V, 575V drives: 780V, 690V drives: 930V
Maximum DC voltage set-point
DC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX
200V rating drive: 0 to 400V, 400V rating drive: 0 to 800V
[1150V]
575V rating drive: 0 to 955V, 690V rating drive: 0 to 1150V
Maximum DC bus voltage
DC_VOLTAGE_MAX
The maximum measurable DC bus voltage.
[1190V]
200V drives: 415V, 400V drives: 830V, 575V drives: 990V, 690V drives: 1190V

Maximum Definition
Maximum current limit settings for motor map 1
This maximum current limit setting is the maximum applied to the current limit parameters in motor map 1.
Open Loop
Maximum
current limit
=  Maximum current
Motor rated current
] 2
+ PF2 - 1 ] x 100%
PF
Where:
The Maximum current is either (1.5 x KC) when the motor rated current set in Pr 5.07 is less than or equal to the
maximum Heavy Duty current rating given by Pr 11.32, otherwise it is (1.1 x Normal Duty rating).
Motor rated current is given by Pr 5.07
PF is motor rated power factor given by Pr 5.10
Closed Loop vector
Maximum
current limit
=  Maximum current
Motor rated current
] 2
+ cos(1)2 - 1 ] x 100%
MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX
cos(1)
[1000.0%]
Where:
1 = cos-1(PF) - 2. This is measured by the drive during an autotune. See Menu 4 in the Advanced User
Guide for more information regarding 2.
PF is motor rated power factor given by Pr 5.10
Servo
Maximum
current limit
=  Maximum current
Motor rated current ] x 100%
Where:
Maximum current limit settings for motor map 2
MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX This maximum current limit setting is the maximum applied to the current limit parameters in motor map 2.
[1000.0%] The formulae for MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX are the same for MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX
except that Pr 5.07 is replaced with Pr 21.07 and Pr 5.10 is replaced with Pr 21.10.
Maximum torque producing current
TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX This is used as a maximum for torque and torque producing current parameters. It is
[1000.0%] MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX or MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX depending on which motor map is
currently active.
Current parameter limit selected by the user
The user can select a maximum for Pr 4.08 (torque reference) and Pr 4.20 (percentage load) to give suitable
USER_CURRENT_MAX
scaling for analog I/O with Pr 4.24. This maximum is subject to a limit of MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX. or
[1000.0%]
MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX depending on which motor map is currently active.
USER_CURRENT_MAX = Pr 4.24
Maximum power in kW
The maximum power has been chosen to allow for the maximum power that can be output by the drive with
POWER_MAX
maximum AC output voltage, maximum controlled current and unity power factor. Therefore:
[9999.99kW]
Software V01.07.01 and earlier: POWER_MAX = 3 x AC_VOLTAGE_MAX x RATED_CURRENT x 1.75
Software V01.08.00 and later: POWER_MAX = 3 x AC_VOLTAGE_MAX x DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX
The values given in square brackets indicate the absolute maximum value allowed for the variable maximum.

Table 11-5 Maximum motor rated current

Maximum Heavy Duty Maximum Normal Duty
Model KC current rating (Pr 11.32) current rating
A A
SP0201 2.2 2.2 2.2
SP0202 3.1 3.1 3.1
SP0203 4.0 4.0 4.0
SP0204 5.7 5.7 5.7
SP0205 7.5 7.5 7.5
SP1201 4.3 4.3 5.2
SP1202 5.8 5.8 6.8
SP1203 7.5 7.5 9.6
SP1204 10.6 10.6 11
SP2201 12.6 12.6 15.5
SP2202 17.0 17.0 22.0
SP2203 25.0 25.0 28.0
SP3201 31.0 31.0 42.0
SP3202 42.0 42.0 54.0
SP4201 56.0 56.0 68.0
SP4202 68.0 68.0 80.0
SP4203 80.0 80.0 104.0
SP5201 105.0 105.0 130.0
SP5202 130.0 130.0 154.0
SP0401 1.3 1.3 1.3
SP0402 1.7 1.7 1.7
SP0403 2.1 2.1 2.1
SP0404 3.0 3.0 3.0
SP0405 4.2 4.2 4.2
SP1401 2.1 2.1 2.8
SP1402 3.0 3.0 3.8
SP1403 4.2 4.2 5.0
SP1404 5.8 5.8 6.9
SP1405 7.6 7.6 8.8
SP1406 9.5 9.5 11.0
SP2401 13.0 13.0 15.3
SP2402 16.5 16.5 21.0
SP2403 23.0 25.0 29.0
SP2404 29.0 29.0 29.0
SP3401 32.0 32.0 35.0
SP3402 40.0 40.0 43.0
SP3403 46.0 46.0 56.0
SP4401 60.0 60.0 68.0
SP4402 74.0 74.0 83.0
SP4403 96.0 96.0 104.0
SP5401 124.0 124.0 138.0
SP5402 156.0 156.0 168.0
SP6401 154.2 180.0 205.0
SP6402 180.0 210.0 236.0
SP3501 4.1 4.1 5.4
SP3502 5.4 5.4 6.1
SP3503 6.1 6.1 8.4
SP3504 9.5 9.5 11.0
SP3505 12.0 12.0 16.0
SP3506 18.0 18.0 22.0
SP3507 22.0 22.0 27.0
SP4601 19.0 19.0 22.0
SP4602 22.0 22.0 27.0
SP4603 27.0 27.0 36.0
SP4604 36.0 36.0 43.0
SP4605 43.0 43.0 52.0
SP4606 52.0 52.0 62.0
SP5601 63.0 63.0 84.0
SP5602 85.0 85.0 99.0
SP6601 85.7 100.0 125.0
SP6602 107.1 125.0 144.0

11.1 Menu 1: Frequency / speed reference

LOCAL/REMOTE
Analog reference
Analog input 1
Analog Menu 8
reference 1
1.36
Analog reference 2
Menu 7 1.41 select
1.37
Analog input 2 Analog

reference 2
1.42 Preset reference

select
Preset reference
Preset reference 1.43 Keypad reference
1.15 select
selector*
Preset reference select bits 1 ~ 3
1.44 Precision reference

1.47 1.46 select
1.45
Reference
selector* 1.14
Reference selected
indicator
1.49
1.21 ~ 1.28
Preset +
references
1 to 8
+
Scan timer
1.38 1.01
Preset Reference
reference Pr 1.50 set to percentage Level of
selected 1.50
greater than 1 trim reference
1.16 indicator selected
Preset 1.04
reference
scan time Reference
offset
1.48 Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Reference being used
1 1 Analog reference 1 1.09
Preset reference 1 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50
Scan-timer reset 2 1 Analog reference 2 Reference
2 >1 Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 offset mode
Keypad reference Power-up keypad 3 x Preset reference defined by Pr 1.50 select
1.51 control mode 4 x Keypad reference
reference 5 x Precision reference
1.17
Keypad
Reference
Precision reference
Precision-reference
update disable Key
1.20
terminals 0.XX
parameter
Precision
reference
1.18 Memory terminals parameter
1.19
Precision The parameters are all shown in their default settings
reference trim
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.1 Reference modes on page 233

JOG RUN FORWARD RUN REVERSE
Menu 8
Menu 6
Sequencer
Sequencer (Menu 6)
Jog selected 1.13 Reference in skip
indicator freq./speed band
indicator
Menu 13
Bipolar Position control Reference
reference 1.10 1.35
1.11 enabled
select indicator
Pre-ramp
reference
Feed-forward Pre-filter
selected 1.06 1.02 reference 1.03
indicator Maximum
Reverse freq /speed
selected 1.12 1.40 "clamp"
indicator
1.07
Menu 2
Minimum
Negative freq /speed
minimum "clamp"
speed (Maximum
select reverse
1.08 freq /speed)
[1.06]
[1.07]
[1.07]
[1.06]
x(-1)
1.29 1.31 1.33

1.39 [1.06]
Skip freq./ Skip freq./ Skip freq /
speed 1 speed 2 speed 3
Velocity
1.05 feed-forward
reference [1.06] 1.30 1.32 1.34
Jog
Skip freq / Skip freq./ Skip freq /
reference
speed band speed band speed band
1 2 3
[1.06]
[1.07]

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
Frequency / speed reference
1.01 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC PT
selected
1.02 Pre-skip filter reference ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.03 Pre-ramp reference ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.04 Reference offset ±3,000.0Hz ±40,000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.05 Jog reference {0.23} 0 to 400.0 Hz 0 to 4,000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Uni US
SPEED_LIMIT_MAX EUR> 50.0 EUR> 1,500.0
1.06 Maximum reference clamp {0.02} 0 to 3,000.0 Hz 3,000.0 RW Uni US
rpm USA> 60.0 USA> 1,800.0
±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX
1.07 Minimum reference clamp {0.01} ±3,000.0 Hz 0.0 RW Bi PT US
rpm
Negative minimum reference
1.08 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
clamp enable
1.09 Reference offset select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
1.10 Bipolar reference enable {0.22} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
1.11 Reference enabled indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.12 Reverse selected indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.13 Jog selected indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), Pr (3), PAd (4),
1.14 Reference selector {0.05} A1.A2 (0) RW Txt US
Prc (5)
1.15 Preset reference selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
Preset reference selector
1.16 0 to 400.0s 10.0 RW Uni US
timer
Keypad control mode
1.17 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RO Bi NC PT PS
reference
1.18 Precision reference coarse ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.19 Precision reference fine 0.000 to 0.099 Hz 0.000 to 0.099 rpm 0.000 RW Uni US
Precision reference update
1.20 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
disable
1.21 Preset reference 1 {0.24} ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.25 Preset reference 5 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm 0.0 RW Bi US
1.29 Skip reference 1 0.0 to 3,000.0 Hz 0 to 40,000 rpm 0.0 0 RW Uni US
1.30 Skip reference band 1 0.0 to 25.0 Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.5 5 RW Uni US
1.32 Skip reference band 2 0.0 to 25.0 Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.5 5 RW Uni US
1.34 Skip reference band 3 0.0 to 25.0Hz 0 to 250 rpm 0.5 5 RW Uni US
1.35 Reference in rejection zone OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.36 Analog reference 1 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC
1.37 Analog reference 2 ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC
1.38 Percentage trim ±100 00% 0.00 RW Bi NC
1.39 Velocity feed-forward ±3,000.0 Hz ±40,000.0 rpm RO Bi NC PT
1.40 Velocity feed-forward select OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
1.41 Analog reference 2 select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.42 Preset reference select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.43 Keypad reference select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.44 Precision reference select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.45 Preset reference 1 select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.48 Reference timer reset flag OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
1.49 Reference selected indicator 1 to 5 RO Uni NC PT
Preset reference selected
1.50 1 to 8 RO Uni NC PT
indicator
Power-up keyboard control
1.51 rESEt (0), LASt (1), PrS1 (2) rESEt (0) RW Txt US
mode reference
RW Read / Write RO Read only Uni Unipolar Bi Bi-polar Bit Bit parameter Txt Text string
FI Filtered DE Destination NC Not copied RA Rating dependent PT Protected US User save PS Power down save


11.2 Menu 2: Ramps

Acceleration rate select bits

Key
2.34 2.33 2.32 Input Read-write (RW)

terminals 0.XX
parameter
0 0 0 Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
0 0 1
0 1 0
The parameters are all shown at their default settings
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
Acceleration
1 1 0 rate selector
1 1 1
2.10
Acceleration rates 1 ~ 8
2.11 Acceleration rate 1
Preset reference 1.50

selected indicator
Jog acceleration
1 2.19
rate
2
3
4 Jog selected
1.13
indicator
5
6
7 Reverse Forward
8 accel. rate accel. rate
N N
t t
Acceleration
Ramp control
2.03 Ramp hold
Pre-ramp speed Ramp mode

reference 1.03 2.04
select*
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.2 Braking Modes on page 234.
**For more information, refer to section 11.21.3 S ramps on page 234.

Deceleration rate select bits
2.37 2.36 2.35
Deceleration
rate selector
2.20
Preset reference
1.50
selected indicator
2.29 Jog deceleration

rate
1.13 Jog selected

indicator
Forward Reverse
Decel. rate Decel. rate
N N
Current control
t t Menu 4
(Open-loop only) Ramp enable
2.02 (Closed- loop only)
Deceleration
_ Ramps always enabled Post-ramp
Ramp control in Open-loop reference
+
2.06 S-Ramp enable**
2.01
S-Ramp acceleration
2.07
limit
2.08 Standard ramp voltage*
d/dt 2.38
Inertia compensation
torque
(Closed-loop only)

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
2.01 Post ramp reference ±SPEED_FREQ_MAX Hz/rpm RO Bi NC PT
2.02 Ramp enable {0.16} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
2.03 Ramp hold OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
FASt (0)
FASt (0)
2.04 Ramp mode select {0.15} Std (1) Std (1) RW Txt US
Std (1)
Std.hV (2)
2.06 S ramp enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
0.0 to 300.0 0.000 to 100.000
2.07 S ramp acceleration limit 3.1 1.500 0.030 RW Uni US
s2/100Hz s2/1000rpm
200V drive: 375
400V drive: EUR> 750
2.08 Standard ramp voltage 0 to DC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V USA> 775 RW Uni RA US
575V drive: 895
690V drive: 1075
2.10 Acceleration rate selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.11 Acceleration rate 1 {0.03} 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.12 Acceleration rate 2 5.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.19 Jog accelera ion rate 0.2 0.000 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
2.20 Deceleration rate selector 0 to 9 0 RW Uni US
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.21 Deceleration rate 1 {0.04} 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.22 Deceleration rate 2 10.0 2.000 0.200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
0.0 to 3,200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
2.29 Jog deceleration rate 0.2 0.000 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1,000rpm
2.32 Acceleration select bit 0 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
2.35 Deceleration select bit 0 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
2.38 Inertia compensation torque ± 1,000.0 % RO Bi NC PT

11.3 Menu 3: Frequency slaving, speed feedback and speed control

Figure 11-3 Menu 3 Open-loop logic diagram
Drive encoder
reference
destination Any
unprotected
3.46 variable
Drive encoder Drive encoder parameter
speed reference Drive encoder
reference scaling ??.??
Maximum drive
3.27 3.43 encoder 3.45 3.44
15 way sub-D reference
connector ??.??
Drive
3.42 encoder Frequency
filter slaving enable
3.13
Drive encoder
A 1 3.34 lines per
Final speed
A revolution Slaving ratio
2 3.14 demand
Encoder Drive encoder 1 numerator
B 3 3.38
type 2048
B 4 3.15
Slaving ratio 3.01
Termination denominator
3.39
resistors
Slip
compensation
Menu 5 Motor
Post ramp frequency
reference
+
5.01
+
Menu 2 2.01
15 way sub-D
Select x2048 connector
output
3.17
Enable
3.16 frequency 7 F (A)
slaving 8 F (A)
output 9 D (B)
x 2048 10 D (B)
Select
3.18 F and D
output
Zero speed At zero speed Bipolar reference

threshold indicator select
3.05 + 1.10
10.03
Minimum
speed
1.07 +0.5Hz + 10.04
At or below min.
speed indicator
+
Overspeed trip
1.06 +20% (O.SPd)
Max.
frequency
At speed
lower limit Below at-speed
window indicator
3.06 + Key
Pre ramp
10.05
reference At speed
indicator X Input
X 0.XX Read-write (RW)
1.03 terminals parameter
+
NOR 10.06
X Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)
X
terminals parameter
3.09
+
10.07
Absolute at-speed 3.07 Above at-speed The parameters are all shown at their default settings
detect mode window indicator
At speed
upper limit

Figure 11-4 Menu 3 Closed loop logic diagram
Hard speed
reference 3.22
Hard speed
reference
selector
3.23
Reference
enabled
indicator
1.11
Post-ramp Final speed
reference + reference
2.01
+ 3.01
15 way sub-D
connector Drive encoder
Drive encoder speed feedback
ENCODER INTERFACE
filter
Drive encoder
3.38 type 3.42 3.27
Speed feedback
Drive encoder lines selector
A 3.34 per revolution
1 3.26
A Drive encoder
Encoder 2 3.39 termination disable
B Feedback from the
3 Drive encoder
B option modules set-up
4 3.36 supply voltage** in Menus 15, 16 and 17 Closed-loop
Z Encoder phase
5 vector mode
Z 3.25 angle*
6 Speed feedback
U from option 3.24
7 15.03
U DRIVE ENCODER POSITION module in slot 1
8
V 9 Position feedback
3.50 lock
V 10 Speed feedback
W from option 16.03
11 Drive encoder
W 3.28 module in slot 2
12 revolution counter
Speed feedback
Drive encoder from option 17.03
3.29 position module in slot 3
Drive encoder Drive

3.30 fine position encoder
filter
RFC sensorless
speed feedback 3.42
calculator
Maximum drive Drive encoder

3.43 encoder reference
destination 3.46
reference (rpm)
Any unprotected
variable parameter
Drive encoder
reference scaling ??.??
Drive
encoder 3.45 3.44
reference
??.??
NOTE **If output voltage from the encoder is >5V, then the termination resistors must be disabled Pr 3.39 to 0.

Speed controller
gain select
3.16
Speed loop gains

Speed
3.10 (Kp1) controller
Speed
error output
3.11 (Ki1)
+ 3.03
+ 3.04 Menu 4
_ _ 3.13 (Kp2)
3.14 (Ki2)
(Kd1) (Kd2)
Speed controller
differential 3.12 3.15
feedback gains
Zero speed At zero speed Bipolar reference

threshold indicator select
Speed feedback
3.05 + 1.10
10.03
_
3.02 At or below min.
Minimum speed indicator
speed
1.07 +5min-1 + 10.04
_
+
Max reference clamp Overspeed trip
1.06 +20%
_ (O.SPd)
Overspeed threshold
3.08
3.08 >0
Below at-speed
At speed window indicator
Pre ramp lower limit 3.06 +
10.05
reference _ At speed
_ indicator
1.03
+
NOR 10.06
+
3.09 10.07
3.07
_ Above at-speed
Absolute at-speed
detect mode window indicator
At speed
upper limit Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
OL> Frequency slaving demand ±1,000.0 Hz RO Bi FI NC PT
3.01
CL> Final speed reference ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.02 Speed feedback {0.10} ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.03 Speed error ±SPEED_MAX rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
±Torque_prod_
3.04 Speed controller output RO Bi FI NC PT
current_max %
3.05 Zero speed threshold 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 0 to 200 rpm 1.0 5 RW Uni US
3.06 At speed lower limit 0.0 to 3,000.0 Hz 0 to 40,000 rpm 1.0 5 RW Uni US
3.07 At speed upper limit 0.0 to 3,000.0 Hz 0 to 40,000 rpm 1.0 5 RW Uni US
3.08 Overspeed threshold {0.26} 0 to 40,000 rpm 0 RW Uni US
3.09 Absolute ‘at speed’ detect OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
0.0000 to 6.5535
3.10 Speed controller proportional gain (Kp1) {0.07} 0.0300 0.0100 RW Uni US
1/rad s-1
3.11 Speed controller integral gain (Ki1) {0.08} -1 0.10 1.00 RW Uni US
0.00 to 655 35 s/rad s
Speed controller differential feedback gain 0.00000 to 0.65535
3.12 {0.09} 0.00000 RW Uni US
(Kd1) s-1/rad s-1
OL> Enable frequency slaving OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.13 CL> Speed controller proportional gain 0.0000 to 6.5535
0.0300 0.0100 RW Uni US
(Kp2) 1/rad s-1
OL> Slaving ratio numerator 0.000 to 1.000 1.000 RW Uni US
3.14
CL> Speed controller integral gain (Ki2) 0.00 to 655.35 1/rad 0.10 1.00 RW Uni US
OL> Slaving ratio denominator 0.001 to 1.000 1.000 RW Uni US
3.15 CL> Speed controller differential feedback
0.00000 to 0.65535 s 0.00000 RW Uni US
gain (Kd2)
OL> Enable frequency slaving output OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.16
CL> Speed controller gain select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
OL> Select x2048 output OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
3.17
CL> Speed controller set-up method 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
OL> Select F and D frequency slaving
OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
output
3.18 0.000100.00000 to
CL> Motor and load inertia 90.00000 0.00000 RW Uni US
kg m2
3.19 Compliance angle 0.0 to 359.9 4.0 RW Uni US
3.20 Bandwidth 0 to 255 Hz 10 RW Uni US
3.21 Damping factor 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Uni US
±SPEED_FREQ_
3.22 Hard speed reference 0.0 RW Bi US
MAX rpm
3.23 Hard speed reference selector OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
3.24 Closed-loop vector mode VT> 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
3.25 Encoder phase angle* {0.43} SV> 0.0 to 359.9 0.0 RW Uni US
drv (0), SLot1 (1),
3.26 Speed feedback selector drv (0) RW Txt US
SLot2 (2), SLot3 (3)
3.27 Drive encoder speed feedback ±40,000.0 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
3.28 Drive encoder revolution counter 0 to 65,535 revolutions RO Uni FI NC PT
3.29 Drive encoder position {0.11} 0 to 65,535 1/216ths of a revolution RO Uni FI NC PT
3.30 Drive encoder fine position 0 to 65,535 1/232nds of a revolution RO Uni FI NC PT
Drive encoder marker position reset
disable
3.32 Drive encoder marker flag OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
Drive encoder turn bits / Linear encoder
3.33 0 to 255 16 RW Uni US
comms to sine wave ratio
3.34 Drive encoder lines per revolution {0.27} 0 to 50,000 1024 4096 RW Uni US
Drive encoder single turn comms bits /
3.35 0 to 32 bits 0 RW Uni US
Linear encoder comms bits / Marker mode
3.36 Drive encoder supply voltage** 5V (0), 8V (1), 15V (2) 5V (0) RW Txt US
100 (0), 200 (1), 300 (2), 400 (3), 500 (4),
3.37 Drive encoder comms baud rate 300 (2) RW Txt US
1000 (5), 1500 (6), 2000 (7) kBaud
Ab (0), Fd (1), Fr (2), Ab.SErvo (3),
Fd.SErvo (4), Fr.SErvo (5), SC (6), Ab.SErvo
3.38 Drive encoder type Ab (0) RW Txt US
SC.Hiper (7), EndAt (8), SC.EndAt (9), (3)
SSI (10), SC.SSI (11)
Drive encoder termination select / Rotary
3.39 encoder select / Comms only encoder 0 to 2 1 RW Uni US
mode
Bit 0 (LSB) = Wire break detect
Bit 1 = Phase error detect
3.40 Drive encoder error detection level 0 1 RW Uni US
Bit 2 (MSB) = SSI power supply bit monitor
Value is binary sum

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
Drive encoder auto-configuration / SSI
binary format select
3.42 Drive encoder filter 0 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 4 (3), 8 (4), 16 (5) ms 0 RW Txt US
3.43 Maximum drive encoder reference 0 to 40,000 rpm 1500 3000 RW Uni US
3.44 Drive encoder reference scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1 000 RW Uni US
3.45 Drive encoder reference ±100.0% RO Bi FI NC PT
3.46 Drive encoder reference destination Pr 0.00 to 21.50 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
3.47 Re-initialise position feedback OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
3.48 Position feedback initialised OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
Full motor object electronic nameplate
transfer
3.50 Position feedback lock OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
*Encoder phase angle (servo mode only)

With drive software version V01.08.00 onwards, the encoder
phase angles in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 are copied to the
SMARTCARD when using any of the SMARTCARD transfer
WARNING
methods.
With drive software version V01.05.00 to V01.07.01, the
encoder phase angles in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 are only copied
to the SMARTCARD when using either Pr 0.30 set to Prog (2)
or Pr xx.00 set to 3yyy.
This is useful when the SMARTCARD is used to back-up the
parameter set of a drive but caution should be used if the
SMARTCARD is used to transfer parameter sets between drives.
Unless the encoder phase angle of the servo motor connected
to the destination drive is known to be the same as the servo
motor connected to the source drive, an autotune should be
performed or the encoder phase angle should be entered
manually into Pr 3.25 (or Pr 21.20). If the encoder phase angle
is incorrect the drive may lose control of the motor resulting in
an O.SPd or Enc10 trip when the drive is enabled.
With drive software version V01.04.00 and earlier, or when
using software version V01.05.00 to V01.07.01 and Pr xx.00
set to 4yyy is used, then the encoder phase angles in Pr 3.25
and Pr 21.20 are not copied to the SMARTCARD. Therefore,
Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 in the destination would not be changed
during a transfer of this data block from the SMARTCARD.
NOTE
**If output voltage from the encoder is >5V, then the termination resistors
must be disabled Pr 3.39 to 0.

11.4 Menu 4: Torque and current control

Figure 11-5 Menu 4 Open loop logic diagram
Menu 2 ramp Torque mode
Pre ramp controller selector*
reference
4.11 Post ramp Motor
+
1.03 reference frequency
+ 2.01 Motor map 5.01
10.09
Current
limit
active Current loop
4.13 P gain
4.14 I gain
Active
current Current
magnitude
_
4.02
4.01
4.20
+
4.02 - Active
Motor Motor current
frequency rated (Amp)
frequency
4.20 - Percentage 4.17 Magnetising
5.01 5.06
torque current
Percentage
Torque current current
demand demand
Torque + Torque to +
4.08 4.03 current 4.04
reference*
conversion _
+
Torque
reference
4.10
offset
enable
4.09
Torque reference
offset
Current limits Over-riding

Drive rated current limit Motor thermal Motor protection Low speed
4.05 Motoring
continuous 11.32 time constant mode protection mode
current 4.18
Regenerating 4.15 4.16 4.25
Motor rated
5.07
current Symmetrical
Overload detection
10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17
At 100% Current limit Braking energy Motor Motor current

load active overload overload overload alarm
indicator indicator indicator accumulator indicator
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter
For more information, refer to section 11.21.4 Torque modes on page 235.

Figure 11-6 Menu 4 Closed-loop vector logic diagram
Inertia
compensation
torque
2.38
Speed Motor
Current Current
feedback Inertia Motor rated
demand demand
3.02 rated power Speed
4.22 compensation
current factor
filter 1 filter 2
enable controller
5.07 5.10 gain 4.12 4.23
Torque mode select
Speed loop 4.11
output selector* 3.16
+
Final + +
speed 3.01 3.04 0 Torque Current controller
demand demand
1 Current loop
+ 4.13 P gain
2 4.03 4.04
+ Current loop
3 4.14 I gain
Current Filter
4 demand
Speed +
Pre
ramp 1.03 over ride
reference level
Coiler/uncoiler
speed
Zero over ride Active
speed 3.05 level current Current
threshold (Amp) magnitude
Torque +
reference 4.08
4.02 4.01
+
Torque
reference
4.10
offset
enable
4.09 Magnetising
4.17
Torque reference current
offset User current max scaling 4.24
Current limits Over riding Motor thermal Motor protection Low speed
Drive rated current limit
4.05 Motoring time constant mode protection mode
continuous 11.32
current 4.18 4.15 4.16 4.25
4.06 Regenerating
Motor rated
5.07
current 4.07 Symmetrical
Overload detection
Key
X Input Read write (RW) 10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17

X terminals 0.XX
parameter
X Output 0.XX Read only (RO) load active overload overload overload alarm
X
terminals parameter indicator indicator indicator accumulator indicator
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.4 Torque modes on page 235.

Figure 11-7 Menu 4 Servo logic diagram
Inertia
compensation
torque
Current Current
2.38 demand demand
Speed
filter 1 filter 2
feedback
Inertia 4.12 4.23
3.02 4.22 compensation
enable
Speed controller
gain select
Speed loop Torque mode
4.1 1 3.16
output selector
+
Final + +
speed 3.01 3.04 0 Torque Current Current controller
demand demand demand
1 Current loop
+ 4.13 P gain
2 4.03 4.04
+ + Current loop
3 4.14 I gain
4 Filter
Speed +
Pre-
ramp 1.03 over-ride
reference level
Coiler/uncoiler
speed
Zero over-ride
speed 3.05 level
threshold User current
Percentage max scaling Motor active
load current
Torque + 4.20 4.24 4.02
reference* 4.08
+
Torque
reference
4.10
offset
enable
4.09
Torque reference
offset
Current limits Over-riding Motor thermal Motor protection Low speed

Drive rated current limit
4.05 Motoring time constant mode protection mode
continuous 11.32
current 4.18 4.15 4.16 4.25
4.06 Regenerating
Motor rated
5.07
current 4.07 Symmetrical
Overload detection
Key
X Input Read-write (RW) 10.08 10.09 10.39 4.19 10.17

X terminals 0.XX
parameter
X Output 0.XX Read-only (RO) load active overload overload overload alarm
X
terminals parameter indicator indicator indicator accumulator indicator
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.4 Torque modes on page 235.

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
4.01 Current magnitude {0.12} 0 to DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A RO Uni FI NC PT
4.02 Active current {0.13} ±DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A RO Bi FI NC PT
4.03 Torque demand ±TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % RO Bi FI NC PT
4.04 Current demand ±TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % RO Bi FI NC PT
4.05 Motoring current limit 0 to MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0* 175.0** RW Uni RA US
4.06 Regen current limit 0 to MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0* 175.0** RW Uni RA US
4.07 Symmetrical current limit {0.06} 0 to MOTOR1_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0* 175.0** RW Uni RA US
4.08 Torque reference ±USER_CURRENT_MAX % 0.00 RW Bi US
4.09 Torque offset ±USER_CURRENT_MAX % 0.0 RW Bi US
4.10 Torque offset select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
4.11 Torque mode selector {0.14} 0 to 1 0 to 4 0 RW Uni US
4.12 Current demand filter 1 {0.17} 0.0 to 25 0 ms 00 RW Uni US
200V drive: 75
400V drive: 150
4.13 Current controller Kp gain {0.38} 0 to 30,000 20 RW Uni US
575V drive: 180
690V drive: 215
200V drive: 1000
400V drive: 2000
4.14 Current controller Ki gain {0.39} 0 to 30,000 40 RW Uni US
575V drive: 2400
690V drive: 3000
4.15 Thermal time constant {0.45} 0.0 to 3000 0 89.0 89.0 20.0 RW Uni US
4.16 Thermal protection mode 0 to 1 0 RW Bit US
4.17 Reactive current ±DRIVE_CURRENT_MAX A RO Bi FI NC PT
4.18 Overriding current limit ±TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % RO Uni NC PT
4.19 Overload accumulator 0 to 100.0 % RO Uni NC PT
4.20 Percentage load ±USER_CURRENT_MAX % RO Bi FI NC PT
4.22 Inertia compensation enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
4.23 Current demand filter 2 0.0 to 25 0 ms 00 RW Uni US
User current maximum
4.24 0.0 to TORQUE_PROD_CURRENT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
scaling
Low speed thermal protection
mode
±USER_CURRENT_
4.26 Percentage torque RO Bi FI NC PT
MAX %
* For size 6 the default is 138.1%

**For size 6 the default is 165.7% in closed loop mode and 150.0% in
servo mode.

11.5 Menu 5: Motor control

L1 L2 L3
Voltage
5.14 mode
Autotune
5.12 DC Bus
voltage
Dynamic V/f
5.13 select
Frequency 5.05
slaving Motormap 5.15 Voltage boost
Slave frequency enable
Motor rated
demand 5.06 Stator
3.13 frequency 5.17
resistance
Motor rated Motor
3.01 5.07 current 5.23 Voltage offset voltage
Motor rated Transient
5.08 full load RPM 5.24
inductance 5.02 Volt
Motor rated
5.09 voltage
Post ramp Motor rated
reference 5.10 power factor
+ Motor number 5.01 Hertz
2.01 5.11 of poles Motor
frequency
PWM
+ 5.18 switching
Slip frequency
compensation 5.04 High stability
enable Estimated 5.19 space vector
Total motor motor speed modula ion
5.27 power (kW)
5.03 3xVxI
Quasi square
5.20
wave enable
Disable auto
switching
5.35 frequency
Slip change
compensation Voltage
5.31 controller
Motor gain
Motor ac ive current
current magnitude
4.02
4.01
4.20
Percentage
active current
Key 4.17
Motor magne ising
current
terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter


Figure 11-9 Menu 5 Closed-loop logic diagram
5.01
Flux Calculator
Motor rated
5.07 current
Motor number
5.11 of poles
5.17 Motor stator
resistance
5.24 Motor transient
inductance
Closed-Loop Vector
Position Motor rated
5.06 frequency Flux angle Reference
feedback

Speed
3.02 Motor full load frame
feedback 5.08 rated speed transformation
Motor rated
5.09 voltage
Motor rated
5.10 power factor
5.25 Motor stator
inductance
Motor saturation
5.29 break-point 1
Motor saturation
5.30 break-point 2
Servo
Encoder phase
3.25 angle
Current Flux
references magnitude
Current control
Menu 4
Speed-loop
controller 3.04 Current limits
output Overload detec ion
Current loop gains
Current demand filter
Torque reference
Current
feedback
5.12 Auto-tune
5.15 Low frequency voltage boost
5.26 High dynamic performance enable
5.31 Voltage controller gain

Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

DC bus
voltage
5.05
Voltage reference
Modulator U
Maximum switching
5.18 frequency V
Disable auto W
5.35 switching
frequencychange
Flux Controller
Motor rated
5.09 voltage
Field gain
5.21 reduction
Output
Closed-Loop Vector 5.02
voltage
Dynamic V/f / Output
5.13 flux optimisa ion power
enable
Motor full load
5.16 rated speed Power calculation (V x 1) 5.03
optimiser enable
Servo
High speed
5.22 servo mode Motor
enable Motor active current
current magnitude
4.02 4.01
4.17
Motor magnetising
current

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
±SPEED_FREQ_
5.01 Output frequency {0.11} ±1,250.0 Hz RO Bi FI NC PT
MAX Hz
5.02 Output voltage 0 to AC_voltage_max V RO Uni FI NC PT
5.03 Output power ±Power_max kW RO Bi FI NC PT
5.04 Motor rpm {0.10} ±180,000 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
5.05 D.C bus voltage 0 to +DC_voltage_max V RO Uni FI NC PT
5.06 Rated frequency {0.47} 0 to 3,000 Hz VT> 0 to 1,250.0 Hz EUR> 50.0, USA> 60.0 RW Uni US
5.07 Motor rated current {0.46} 0 to Rated_current_max A Drive rated current [11.32] RW Uni RA US
EUR> 1,500 EUR> 1,450.00
5.08 Rated load rpm / rated speed {0.45} 0 to 180,000 rpm 0.00 to 40,000.00 rpm 3,000.00 RW Uni US
USA> 1,800 USA> 1,770 00
200V drive: 230
400V drive: EUR> 400, USA> 460
5.09 Rated voltage {0.44} 0 to AC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V RW Uni RA US
575V drive: 575
690V drive: 690
5.10 Rated power factor {0.43} OL & VT> 0.000 to 1.000 0.850 RW Uni RA US
5.11 Number of motor poles {0.42} Auto to 120 Pole (0 to 60) Auto (0) 6 POLE (3) RW Txt US
VT> 0 to 4
5.12 Autotune {0.40} 0 to 2 0 RW Uni NC
SV> 0 to 6
Dynamic V/F / flux optimise
5.13 {0.09} OFF (0) or On (1) VT> OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
select
Ur_S (0), Ur (1),
Voltage mode select {0.07} Fd (2), Ur_Auto (3), Ur_I (4) RW Txt US
5.14 Ur_I (4), SrE (5)
SV> nonE (0),
Action on enable nonE(0) RW Txt US
Ph EnL (1), Ph Init (2)
SPz to 3: 3.0
5.15 Low frequency voltage boost {0.08} 0.0 to 25.0 % of motor rated voltage Size 4 & 5: 2 0 RW Uni US
Size 6: 1.0
5.16 Rated rpm autotune {0.33} VT> 0 to 2 0 RW Uni US
SPz: 0.000 to 65.000 x 10 
5.17 Stator resistance Size 1 to 5: 0.000 to 65.000  0.0 RW Uni RA US
Size 6: 0.000 to 65.000 x 10 m
Maximum switching
5.18 {0.41} 3 (0), 4 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3), 12 (4), 16 (5) kHz 3 (0) 6 (2) RW Txt RA US
frequency
High stability space vector
modulation
5.20 Quasi-square enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
5.21 Field gain reduction OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
5.22 High speed servo mode enable SV> OFF (0) or On (1) 0 RW Bit US
5.23 Voltage offset 0 0 to 25.0 V 0.0 RW Uni RA US
5.24 Transient inductance (Ls) 0.000 to 500.000 mH 0.000 RW Uni RA US
5.25 Stator inductance (Ls) VT> 0.00 to 5,000.00 mH 0.00 RW Uni RA US
High dynamic performance
enable
5.27 Enable slip compensation OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
Field weakening
5.28 VT> OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
compensation disable
VT> 0 to 100% of rated
5.29 Motor saturation breakpoint 1 50 RW Uni US
flux
VT> 0 to 100% of rated
5.30 Motor saturation breakpoint 2 75 RW Uni US
flux
5.31 Voltage controller gain 0 to 30 1 RW Uni US
VT> 0.00 to 500.00
RO Uni US
N m A-1
5.32 Motor torque per amp, Kt
SV> 0 00 to 500.00
1.60 RW Uni US
N m A-1
5.33 Motor volts per 1,000 rpm, Ke SV> 0 to 10,000 V 98 RW Uni US
Disable auto switching
frequency change
5.36 Motor pole pitch 0 to 655.35 mm 0.00 RW Uni US
3 (0), 4 (1), 6 (2), 8 (3), 12 (4), 16 (5), 6 rEd (6),
5.37 Actual switching frequency RO Txt NC PT
12 rEd (7)
5.38 Minimal movement phasing test angle SV> 0.0 to 25.5 5.0 RW Uni US
Minimal movement phasing
5.39 SV> 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
test pulse length
5.40 Spin start boost 0.0 to 10.0 VT> 0.0 to 10.0 1.0 RW Uni US

11.6 Menu 6: Sequencer and clock

Control word
6.43
enable
Stop / Start Control word

select*** 6.42 Sequencer
6.04
Drive enable
Stop mode
6.15 6.01
selector*
Run forward Mains loss
6.03
T25 digital I/O 2 6.30 mode**
Jog forward Hold zero

6.08
speed enable*
6.31
Catch a
6.09
Run reverse spinning motor****
T26 digital I/O 3 6.32 Enable sequencer
6.40
latching***
Forward / Reverse
Menu 8 6.33
1.11 Reference
Run enabled indicator
T27 digital input 4
6.34
Jog reverse
6.37
Not stop 1.12 Reverse selected
indicator
6.39
Hardware
enable 6.29
1.13 Jog selected
indicator
Limit switch 1 6.35
Limit switch 2 6.36
Logic RUN
1
Inverter enable
STOP/ RESET
RESET
FWD/REV Closed loop only

Menu 2
Logic 1 Ramp enable
Open loop only Menu 3
0 1 Hard speed
1.49 Pr 1.49 = 4 Injection reference enable
6.06
braking level*
Reference 6.07 Injection
selected braking time*
indicator 6.12
Keypad STOP
key enable
6.13 Clock control

Keypad FWD/REV
key enable Electricity cost 6.24
6.16 Power meter
per kWh
6.25
Power-up 6.20
time 6.21 Power consumption
6.17
meter reset
6.18 Time interval between

filter changes 6.26 Running cost
Run-time 6.22
6.23
6.19 Filter change
required/done
6.27 Time before filter
Total motor 6.28 Select clock for trip change due
5.03 log time stamp
power
DC bus voltage 5.05
Drive power supply monitor 6.44 Active supply

Low voltage supply
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
COASt (0), rP (1),
COASt (0), rP (1),
6.01 Stop mode rP.dcl (2), dcl (3),
no.rP (2)
rP (1) no.rP (2) RW Txt US
td.dcl (4), diSAbLE (5)
6.03 Line power supply loss mode diS (0), StoP (1), ridE.th (2) diS (0) RW Txt US
6.04 Start / stop logic select 0 to 4 4 RW Uni US
6.06 Injection braking level 0 to 150.0% 100.0% RW Uni RA US
6.07 Injection braking time 0.0 to 25.0s 1.0 RW Uni US
6.08 Hold zero speed OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) On (1) RW Bit US
6.09 Catch a spinning motor {0.33} 0 to 3 0 to 1 0 1 RW Uni US
6.12 Enable stop key OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.13 Enable forward / reverse key {0.28} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.15 Drive enable OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
6.16 Electricity cost per kWh 0 0 to 600.0 currency units per kWh 0 RW Uni US
6.17 Reset energy meter OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.18 Time between filter changes 0 to 30,000 hrs 0 RW Uni US
Filter change required /
6.19 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit PT
change done
6.20 Powered-up ime: years.days 0 to 9.364 years days RW Uni NC PT
Powered-up time:
6.21 0 to 23.59 hours.minutes RW Uni NC PT
hours.minutes
6.22 Run time: years.days 0 to 9.364 years.days RO Uni NC PT PS
6.23 Run time: hours.minutes 0 to 23.59 hours.minutes RO Uni NC PT PS
6.24 Energy meter: MWh ±999.9 MWh RO Bi NC PT PS
6.25 Energy meter: kWh ±99.99 kWh RO Bi NC PT PS
6.26 Running cost ±32,000 RO Bi NC PT
6.27 Time before filter change due 0 to 30,000 hrs RO Uni NC PT PS
Select clock for trip log time
sampling
6.29 Hardware enable OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
6.30 Sequencing bit: Run forward OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.31 Sequencing bit: Jog forward OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.32 Sequencing bit: Run reverse OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
Sequencing bit: Forward /
reverse
6.34 Sequencing bit: Run OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.35 Forward limit switch OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.36 Reverse limit switch OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.37 Sequencing bit: Jog reverse OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.39 Sequencing bit: Not stop OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
6.40 Enable sequencer latching OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.41 Drive event flags 0 to 65,535 0 RW Uni NC
6.42 Control word 0 to 32,767 0 RW Uni NC
6.43 Control word enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
6.44 Active supply OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
Force cooling fan to run at full
speed*****
Size 1: 48V
6.46 Nominal low voltage supply Size 2, 3 and 200V size 4: 48V to 72V 48 RW Uni PT US
400V size 4 to 6: 48V to 96V
Disable line power supply /
6.47 phase loss detection from OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
input rectifier
Line powersupply loss ride 200V drive: 205, 400V drive: 410,
6.48 0 to DC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V RW Uni RA US
through detec ion level 575V drive: 540, 690V drive: 540
Disable multi-module drive
module number storing on trip
6.50 Drive comms state drv (0), SLot 1(1), SLot 2 (2), SLot 3 (3) RO Txt NC PT
6.51 External rectifier not active OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.5 Stop modes on page 236. motor on page 239.
**For more information, refer to section 11.21.6 Line power supply loss *****The drive thermal model system normally controls the fan speed,
modes on page 237. however the fan can be forced to operate at full speed if this parameter
***For more information, refer to section 11.21.7 Start / stop logic is set to 1. When this is set to 1 the fan remains at full speed until 10s
modes on page 238. after this parameter is set to zero. Note that the fan willl only run at full
speed if the drive is not in a UU condition.
****For more information, refer to section 11.21.8 Catch a spinning

11.7 Menu 7: Analog I/O

Analog
input 1 Analog input 1
Analog input Analog input destination
1 offset trim 1 offset parameter Any
7.01 unprotected
Analog input 1 7.07 7.30 7.10
variable
parameter
+ + Analog
??.?? ref. 1
+ + 7.08
V/f
1.36
Analog
7.26 input 1 x(-1) ??.??
scaling
V/f sample
7.09 Analog
time
input 1 invert
7.25
Analog input 2
Calibrate current loop loss Analog
analog input 1 input 2 Analog input 2
full scale Analog input destination
7.28 2 offset parameter
7.02 Any
7.14 unprotected
7.31
Analog input 2 variable
parameter
+ Analog
??.?? ref. 2
7.11 + 7.12
A/D
1.37
mode selector input 2 x(-1) ??.??
scaling
7.13 Analog
input 2 invert
Analog input 3
Analog
current loop loss Analog input 3
input 3
Analog input destination
7.29 3 offset parameter
7.03 Any
7.18 unprotected
7.3
7.32
Analog input 3 variable
parameter
+ ??.??
7.15 + 7.16
A/D
mode selector input 3 x(-1) ??.??
Analog Analog output 1 scaling
7.17 Analog
output 1 control source parameter input 3 invert
7.33 7.19
Any variable Analog output 1
Motor parameter
frequency ??.??
OL> 5.01
7.20 7.21
CL> 3.02
??.?? Analog Analog
Speed
output 1 output 1
feedback
scaling mode
selector
Analog output 2
source parameter Key
Any 7.22
variable Input Read-write (RW)
Analog output 2 0.XX
Motor parameter terminals parameter
active ??.??
current Read-only (RO)
Output 0.XX
4.02 7.23 7.24 terminals parameter
??.?? Analog Analog
output 2 output 2
scaling mode The parameters are all shown at their default settings
selector

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
7.01 T5/6 analog input 1 level ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
7.02 T7 analog input 2 level ±100.0 % RO Bi NC PT
7.03 T8 analog input 3 level ±100.0 % RO Bi NC PT
7.04 Power circuit temperature 1 -128 to 127 C RO Bi NC PT
7.06 Control board temperature -128 to 127 C RO Bi NC PT
7.07 T5/6 analog input 1 offset trim {0.13} ±10.000 % 0.000 RW Bi US
7.08 T5/6 analog input 1 scaling 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.09 T5/6 analog input 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
T5/6 analog input 1
7.10 Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 1.36 RW Uni DE PT US
destination
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2), 20-4.tr (3),
7.11 T7 analog input 2 mode {0.19} VOLt (6) RW Txt US
4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6)
7.12 T7 analog input 2 scaling 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.13 T7 analog input 2 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
7.14 T7 analog input 2 destination {0.20} Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 1.37 RW Uni DE PT US
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2), 20-4.tr (3),
7.15 T8 analog input 3 mode {0.21} 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), VOLt (6), th.SC (7), th (8) RW Txt US
th (8), th.diSP (9)
7.16 T8 analog input 3 scaling 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.17 T8 analog input 3 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
7.18 T8 analog input 3 destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
7.19 T9 analog output 1 source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 5.01 Pr 3.02 RW Uni PT US
7.20 T9 analog output 1 scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.21 T9 analog output 1 mode VOLt (0), 0-20 (1), 4-20 (2), H.SPd (3) VOLt (0) RW Txt US
7.22 T10 analog output 2 source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 4.02 RW Uni PT US
7.23 T10 analog output 2 scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
7.24 T10 analog output 2 mode VOLt (0), 0-20 (1), 4-20 (2), H.SPd (3) VOLt (0) RW Txt US
Calibrate T5/6 analog input 1
full scale
T5/6 analog input 1 sample
7.26 0 to 8.0 ms 4.0 RW Uni US
time
T7 analog input 2 current loop
7.28 OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
loss
T8 analog input 3 current loop
loss
7.30 T5/6 analog input 1 offset ±100.00 % 0.00 RW Bi US
7.31 T7 analog input 2 offset ±100.0 % 0.0 RW Bi US
7.32 T8 analog input 3 offset ±100.0 % 0.0 RW Bi US
7.33 T9 analog output 1 control Fr (0), Ld (1), AdV (2) AdV (2) RW Txt US
7.34 IGBT junction temperature ±200 C RO Bi NC PT
Drive thermal protection
7.35 0 to 100.0 % RO Uni NC PT
accumulator


11.8 Menu 8: Digital I/O

T24 digital
I/O 1 state At zero
T24 output ??.?? speed
select
8.01 8.31 10.03
x(-1) ??.??
Any bit
T24 digital I/O 1 T24 digital parameter
8.21
I/O 1 source/
destination
8.29 8.30
8.11 T24 digital
I/O polarity Open collector Any
I/O 1 invert
select output unprotected
bit parameter
??.??
x(-1) ??.??
Any bit
T25 digital parameter
I/O 2 state T25 output
select ??.??
8.02 8.32
x(-1) ??.??
T25 digital I/O 2 T25 digital

Start/stop 6.04 8.22 I/O 2 source/
logic select destination
8.29 8.30
T25 digital Any
I/O polarity Open collector 8.12 unprotected
I/O 2 invert
select output bit
parameter
??.?? Drive reset

10.33
x(-1) ??.??
Any bit
I/O 3 state T26 output
??.??
select
8.03 8.33
x(-1) ??.??
T26 digital I/O 3 T26 digital

Start/stop 6.04 8.23 I/O 3 source/
8.29 logic select destination
8.30
T26 digital Any
I/O polarity Open collector 8.13
I/O 3 invert unprotected
select output bit
parameter
??.?? Run forward
6.30
x(-1) ??.??
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.1 Reference modes on page 233.

T27 digital Stop/start T27 digital input 4

T27 digital input 4 invert logic select destination
input 4 state
8.04 8.14 6.04 8.24 Any
unprotected
bit
T27 digital input 4 parameter
??.?? Run reverse
27 8.29
6.32
I.O polarity
x(-1) ??.??
select
8.39 T28 & T29 digital

input auto-selection
Reference disable*
selector*
1.14 T28 digital
T28 digital input 5
T28 digital input 5 invert destination Any
input 5 state unprotected
8.05 8.15 8.25 bit
Analogue input 1 /
??.?? input 2 select
28 8.29
1.41
I.O polarity
x(-1) ??.??
select
T29 digital
T29 digital input 6
T29 digital input 6 invert destination
input 6 state
8.06 8.16 8.26 Any
unprotected
bit
??.?? Jog forward
29 8.29
6.31
I.O polarity x(-1)
select ??.??
T22 24V output T22 24V output source

T22 24V source invert
output 8.28 Any
state 8.08 8.18 unprotected
bit
parameter
T22 24V output ??.??
0.00
22
x(-1) ??.??
Drive enable
Drive enable mode select
indicator 8.09 8.10
Key
Drive enable
External trip
X Input Read-write (RW)
x(-1) 10.32
X terminals 0.XX
parameter
31
Drive enable
X
terminals parameter
Relay source Relay
invert source
8.17 8.27 This logic diagram applies only when all
parameters are at their default settings
Any bit
parameter
Relay Drive
state ??.?? Healthy
10.01
41 8.07
x(-1) ??.??
42
0V

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
8.01 T24 digital I/O 1 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
8.04 T27 digital input 4 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
8.07 Relay state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
8.08 T22 24V output state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
8.09 Drive enable indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
8.10 Drive enable mode select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.11 T24 digital I/O 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.14 T27 digital input 4 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.17 Relay source invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.18 T22 24V output source invert OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
8.20 Digital I/O read word 0 to 511 RO Uni NC PT
T24 digital I/O 1 source/
destination
destination
destination
8.24 T27 digital input 4 destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 6.32 RW Uni DE PT US
8.25 T28 digital input 5 destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 1.41 RW Uni DE PT US
8.26 T29 digital input 6 destination {0.17} Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 6.31 RW Uni DE PT US
8.27 Relay source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 10.01 RW Uni PT US
8.28 T22 24V output source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
8.29 Positive logic select {0.18} OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit PT US
8.30 Open collector output OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.31 T24 digital I/O 1 output select OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
8.32 T25 digital I/O 2 output select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
8.33 T26 digital I/O 3 output select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
T28 & T29 digital input auto-
8.39 {0.16} OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
selection disable

11.9 Menu 9: Programmable logic, motorized pot, binary sum and timers
Figure 11-13 Menu 9 logic diagram: Programmable logic
Any bit Func ion-1

parameter 9.05
input-1 invert Function-1
??.?? output Function-1
indicator destination
Function-1 parameter
output invert 9.01 9.10
??.?? x(-1) Any
9.08 unprotected
bit
parameter
9.04 Function-1 input-1
source parameter ??.??
9.09
Any bit Func ion-1
parameter 9.07 x(-1) Function-1
input-2 invert ??.??
delay
??.??
??.?? x(-1)

source parameter
Any bit Func ion-2

parameter 9.15
input-1 invert Function-2
??.?? output Function-2
indicator destination
Function-2 parameter
output invert 9.02 9.20
??.?? x(-1) Any
9.18 unprotected
bit
parameter
source parameter ??.??
9.19
Any bit Func ion-2
parameter 9.17 x(-1) Function-2
input-2 invert ??.??
delay
??.??
??.?? x(-1)

source parameter
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Figure 11-14 Menu 9 logic diagram: Motorized pot and binary sum
Motorized
pot. bipolar Motorized pot. Motorized pot.
Motorized output indicator destination
select
pot. rate parameter
9.22
9.23 9.03 9.25
Motorized pot. Any
up unprotected
variable
9.26 parameter
??.??
M 9.24
Motorized pot. ??.??
output scale
9.27 Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
Motorized pot.
down
9.28 9.21 Motorized pot.

mode
Motorized pot.
reset to zero
Binary-sum
logic output Binary-sum
Binary-sum value logic destination
offset parameter
9.34 9.32 9.33
9.29
Any
unprotected
Binary-sum bit
logic ones (LSB) parameter
+ ??.??

+
9.30
??.??
Binary-sum
logic twos Function disabled if set
to a non valid destination
9.31
Key
Binary-sum
logic fours (MSB)
terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
9.01 Logic function 1 output OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
9.02 Logic function 2 output OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
9.03 Motorized pot output ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT PS
9.04 Logic function 1 source 1 Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
Logic function 1 source 1
invert
invert
9.08 Logic function 1 output invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
9.09 Logic function 1 delay ±25.0 s 0.0 RW Bi US
9.10 Logic function 1 destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
invert
invert
9.18 Logic function 2 output invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
9.19 Logic function 2 delay ±25.0 s 0.0 RW Bi US
9.20 Logic function 2 destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
9.21 Motorized pot mode 0 to 3 2 RW Uni US
9.22 Motorized pot bipolar select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
9.23 Motorized pot rate 0 to 250 s 20 RW Uni US
9.24 Motorized pot scale factor 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
9.25 Motorized pot destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
9.26 Motorized pot up OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
9.27 Motorized pot down OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
9.28 Motorized pot reset OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
9.29 Binary sum ones input OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
9.30 Binary sum twos input OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
9.31 Binary sum fours input OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
9.32 Binary sum output 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT
9.33 Binary sum destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
9.34 Binary sum offset 0 to 248 0 RW Uni US

11.10 Menu 10: Status and trips

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
10.01 Drive OK OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.02 Drive active OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.03 Zero speed OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
Running at or below minimum
speed
10.05 Below set speed OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.06 At speed OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.07 Above set speed OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.08 Load reached OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.09 Drive output is at current limit OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.10 Regenerating OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.11 Braking IGBT active OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.12 Braking resistor alarm OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.13 Direction commanded OFF (0) or On (1) [0 = FWD, 1 = REV] RO Bit NC PT
10.14 Direction running OFF (0) or On (1) [0 = FWD, 1 = REV] RO Bit NC PT
10.15 Line powersupply loss OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.16 Under voltage active OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.17 Overload alarm OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.18 Drive over temperature alarm OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.19 Drive warning OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
10.20 Trip 0 0 to 232* RO Txt NC PT PS
10.30 Full power braking time 0.00 to 400.00 s See Table 11-6 RW Uni US
10.31 Full power braking period 0.0 to 1500.0 s See Table 11-6 RW Uni US
10.32 External trip OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
10.33 Drive reset OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
10.34 No. of auto-reset attempts 0 to 5 0 RW Uni US
10.35 Auto-reset delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 RW Uni US
Hold drive OK until last
attempt
10.37 Action on trip detection 0 to 15 0 RW Uni US
10.38 User trip 0 to 255 0 RW Uni NC
Braking energy overload
10.39 0.0 to 100.0 % RO Uni NC PT
accumulator
10.40 Status word 0 to 32,767 RO Uni NC PT
10.41 Trip 0 time: years.days 0.000 to 9.365 years.days RO Uni NC PT PS
Module number for trip 0, or, Trip 0
10.42 00.00 to 23.59 hours.minutes RO Uni NC PT PS
time: hours.minutes
10.43 Module number for trip 1, or, Trip 1 time 0 to 600.00 hours.minutes RO Uni NC PT PS
*The value given for the range is that obtained via serial communication. Table 11-6 Defaults for Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31
For the text string displayed on the drive, see Chapter 13 Diagnostics on Drive rating Pr 10.30 Pr 10.31
page 260. 200V, SPz 0.06 2.6
400V, SPz 0.01 1.7
200V, size 1 & 2 0.09 3.3
400V, size 1 & 2 0.02 3.3
All other ratings and frame sizes 0.00

11.11 Menu 11: General drive set-up

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
11.01 Parameter 0.11 set up Pr 1.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 5.01 Pr 3.29 RW Uni PT US
11.02 Parameter 0.12 set up Pr 1.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 4.01 RW Uni PT US
11.21 Parameter 0.30 scaling 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 RW Uni US
11.22 Parameter displayed at power-up Pr 0.00 to 00.59 Pr 0.10 RW Uni PT US
11.23 Serial address {0.37} 0 to 247 1 RW Uni US
11.24 Serial mode {0.35} AnSI (0), rtU (1), Lcd (2) rtU (1) RW Txt PT US
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
11.25 Baud rate {0.36} 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 19200 (6) RW Txt US
57600 (8)*, 115200 (9)* *Modbus RTU only
11.26 Minimum comms transmit delay 0 to 250ms 2 RW Uni US
11.28 Drive derivative 0 to 16 RO Uni NC PT
11.29 Software version {0.50} 1.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
11.30 User security code {0.34} 0 to 999 0 RW Uni NC PT PS
OPEn LP (1), CL VECt (2),
11.31 User drive mode {0.48} OPEn LP (1) CL VECt (2) SErVO (3) RW Txt NC PT
SErVO (3), rEGEn (4)
Maximum Heavy Duty current
11.32 {0.32} 0.00 to 9999.99A RO Uni NC PT
rating
11.33 Drive voltage rating {0.31} 200 (0), 400 (1), 575 (2), 690 (3) RO Txt NC PT
11.34 Software sub-version 0 to 99 RO Uni NC PT
11.35 Number of modules 0 to 10 0 RW Uni PT US
SMARTCARD parameter
11.36 {0.29} 0 to 999 0 RO Uni NC PT US
data previously loaded
11.37 SMARTCARD data number 0 to 1003 0 RW Uni NC
11.38 SMARTCARD data type / mode 0 to 18 RO Txt NC PT
11.39 SMARTCARD data version 0 to 9,999 0 RW Uni NC
11.40 SMARTCARD data checksum 0 to 65,335 RO Uni NC PT
11.41 Status mode timeout 0 to 250s 240 RW Uni US
nonE (0), rEAd (1), Prog (2), AutO (3),
11.42 Parameter copying {0.30} nonE (0) RW Txt NC *
boot (4)
11.43 Load defaults nonE (0), Eur (1), USA (2) nonE (0) RW Txt NC
11.44 Security status {0.49} L1 (0), L2 (1), Loc (2) RW Txt PT US
11.45 Select motor 2 parameters OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
11.46 Defaults previously loaded 0 to 2000 RO Uni NC PT US
Halt program (0)
11.47 Drive Onboard PLC program enable Run program: out of range = clip (1) Run program: out of range = trip (2) RW Uni US
Run program: out of range = trip (2)
11.48 Drive Onboard PLC program status -128 to +127 RO Bi NC PT
Drive Onboard PLC programming
11.49 0 to 65,535 RO Uni NC PT PS
events
Drive Onboard PLC program average
11.50 0 to 65,535 ms RO Uni NC PT
scan time
11.51 Drive Onboard PLC program first run OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
* Modes 1 and 2 are not user saved, Modes 0, 3 and 4 are user saved

11.12 Menu 12: Threshold detectors, variable selectors and brake control function
Threshold Threshold Threshold
Detector 1 Threshold Detector 1 Detector 1
Detector 1 output indicator output
threshold level destination
parameter Any
Any variable 12.04 12.01 unprotected
Threshold 12.07
parameter Detector 1 bit parameter
??.?? ??.??
??.?? x(-1) ??.??
12.03 12.05 12.06

Detector 1 Detector 1 Detector 1
input source hysteresis output invert

Detector 2 Threshold Detector 2 Detector 2
Detector 2 output indicator output
threshold level destination
parameter Any
Any variable 12.24 12.02 unprotected
Threshold 12.27
parameter Detector 2 bit parameter
??.?? ??.??
??.?? x(-1) ??.??
12.23 12.25 12.26 All parameters are shown

Threshold Threshold Threshold at their default setting
Detector 2 Detector 2 Detector 2
input source hysteresis output invert
Key
Hysteresis
Input Read-write (RW) Threshold
terminals 0.XX
parameter level
t
terminals parameter
Threshold
output
t

Figure 11-16 Menu 12 logic diagram (continued)

Variable Selector 1
Any variable Variable
parameter selector 1 Variable
Variable selector 1 output selector 1
??.?? input 1 scaling indicator output Any
12.13 destina ion unprotected
variable
12.12 12.11
??.?? parameter
Variable selector 1 ??.??
Variable selector 1 12.10
12.08 mode
input 1 source
Any variable Variable selector 1
12.15 ??.??
parameter control
Variable selector 1
??.?? input 2 scaling
12.14
??.??
Variable selector 1
12.09
input 2 source
Variable Selector 2
Any variable Variable
parameter selector 2 Variable
Variable selector 2 output selector 2
??.?? input 1 scaling Any
indicator output
destina ion unprotected
12.33
variable
12.32 12.31 parameter
??.??
Variable selector 2 ??.??
Variable selector 2 12.30
12.28 mode
input 1 source
Any variable Variable selector 2
12.35 ??.??
parameter control
Variable selector 2
??.?? input 2 scaling
12.34
??.??
Variable selector 2
12.29
input 2 source
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

The control terminal relay can be selected as an output to release a brake. If a drive is set up in this manner and a drive replacement takes
place, prior to programming the drive on initial power up, the brake may be released.
When drive terminals are programmed to non default settings the result of incorrect or delayed programming must be considered. The use of
WARNING
a Smartcard in boot mode or an SM-Applications module can ensure drive parameters are immediately programmed to avoid this situation.
Figure 11-17 Open-loop brake function
Key
Current
magnitude
X terminals 0.XX
4.01 + parameter
Drive
active
X
terminals parameter
10.02
Upper current
threshold
12.42
Post-brake
release
12.43 delay
Lower current 12.47
threshold
Ramp
hold
Output 2.03
frequency
5.01 +
2
12.40
i o 3
LAT Brake
Brake
controller 12.41 release
r enable 12.46
Brake release
frequency Pre-brake
release
12.44 T25 digital
8.12 delay
I/O 2 invert
Relay source
8.17
invert
Brake apply T25 digital I/O 2
frequency 8.22
source / destination
12.45 + input output
8.27 Relay source i o
T25 digital I/O 12 LAT
8.32 reset
output select r
Reference
on
If the reset input is 1, the output is 0.
1.11 If the reset input is 0, the output
latches at 1 if the input is 1.
Figure 11-18 Open-loop brake sequence
Pr 12.44 Brake release frequency Pr 12.45 Brake apply frequency
Pr 5.01 Output frequency
Pr 12.42 Upper current threshold

Pr 4.01 Current magnitude
Pr 10.02 Drive active
Pr 1.11 Reference on
Pr 12.40 Brake release
Pr 2.03 Ramp hold
1 2 3 4 5 6
Pr 12.46 Pr 12.47
1. Wait for upper current threshold and brake release frequency
2. Pre-brake release delay
3. Post-brake release delay
4. Wait for brake apply frequency
5. Wait for zero frequency
6. 1s delay as phase 2 of stopping sequence (Pr 6.01=1,2 or 3)

WARNING
Figure 11-19 Closed-loop brake function
Enable position Position
controller during control
13.10
brake release mode
( = 1)
Drive active 12.49
Motor flux +
7/8 x Rated flux _ 10.02
Post-brake
release delay 12.47 Ramp
2.03
Current hold
magnitude
i o
_
4.01 LAT
+ r
1
Brake
12.43 12.40
10.02 Brake apply release
Lower current 1 12.48
delay
threshold
Drive active Brake
Closed-loop Hold zero
controller 12.41 6.08
Reference vector = 0 speed
on enable
Servo = 1
1.11 T25 digital

OR 8.12
/O 2 invert
Brake apply Relay source
8.17
Speed speed delay 12.46 invert
feedback T25 digital /O 2
8.22
source / destination
3.02 + 8.27 Relay source
_
T25 digital /O 2
8.32
output select
Brake apply
speed
input output
Key i o
12.45
LAT
Input reset
0.XX Read-write (RW) r
terminals parameter
Output 0.XX Read-only (RO) If the reset input is 1, the output is 0.

terminals parameter If the reset input is 0, the output latches
at 1 if the input is 1.
Figure 11-20 Closed-loop brake sequence
Pr 12.45 Brake apply speed

Pr 5.01 Output frequency
Pr 4.01 Current magnitude
Pr 10.02 Drive active
Pr 1.11 Reference on
Pr 12.40 Brake release
Pr 2.03 Ramp hold

Pr 13.10 Position control mode
Pr 6.08 Hold zero speed
1 2 3 4 5
Pr 12.47 Pr 12.46 Pr 12.48

1. Wait for motor fluxed (closed-loop vector only)
2. Post-brake release delay
3. Wait for speed threshold
4. Wait for brake apply speed delay
5. Brake apply delay

WARNING
Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
12.01 Threshold detector 1 output OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
12.02 Threshold detector 2 output OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
12.03 Threshold detector 1 source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.04 Threshold detector 1 level 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 RW Uni US
Threshold detector 1
12.05 0.00 to 25.00 % 0.00 RW Uni US
hysteresis
Threshold detector 1 output
invert
destination
12.08 Variable selector 1 source 1 Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
Select input 1 (0), select input 2 (1), add (2),
subtract (3), multiply (4), divide (5),
12.10 Variable selector 1 mode time constant (6), linear ramp (7), modulus (8), Select input 1 (0) RW Uni US
powers (9), sectional control (10),
external rectifier monitor (11)
Variable selector 1
destination
12.12 Variable selector 1 output ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
Variable selector 1 source 1
12.13 ±4.000 1.000 RW Bi US
scaling
12.14 ±4.000 1.000 RW Bi US
scaling
12.15 Variable selector 1 control 0.00 to 100.00 s 0.00 RW Uni US
12.23 Threshold detector 2 source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
12.24 Threshold detector 2 level 0.00 to 100.00 % 0.00 RW Uni US
12.25 0.00 to 25.00 % 0.00 RW Uni US
hysteresis
Threshold detector 2 output
invert
destination
Select input 1 (0), select input 2 (1), add (2),
subtract (3), multiply (4), divide (5),
12.30 Variable selector 2 mode time constant (6), linear ramp (7), modulus (8), Select input 1 (0) RW Uni US
powers (9), sectional control (10),
external rectifier monitor (11)
Variable selector 2
destination
12.32 Variable selector 2 output ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
12.33 ±4.000 1.000 RW Bi US
scaling
12.34 ±4.000 1.000 RW Bi US
scaling
12.35 Variable selector 2 control 0.00 to 100.00 s 0.00 RW Uni US
12.40 Brake release indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
12.41 Brake controller enable dis (0), rEL (1), d IO (2), USEr (3) dis (0) RW Txt US
12.42 Upper current hreshold 0 to 200 % 50 RW Uni US
12.43 Lower current hreshold 0 to 200 % 10 RW Uni US
12.44 Brake release frequency 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 1.0 RW Uni US
12.45 Brake apply frequency / speed 0.0 to 20.0 Hz 0 to 200 rpm 2.0 5 RW Bit US
OL> Pre-brake release delay
12.46 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 RW Uni US
CL> Brake apply speed delay
12.47 Post brake release delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 RW Uni US
12.48 Brake apply delay 0.0 to 25.0 s 1.0 RW Uni US
Enable position controller
12.49
during brake release
OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US


11.13 Menu 13: Position control

Relative Relative
jog reverse jog enable
13.19 13.18
Relative
jog reference
Position control reference position
13.17 0
1
1
Revolution Position
Position x(-1)
counter fine 0
Drive Position
Encoder 3.28 3.29 3.30 controller
reference 13.04 Position
source reference
invert
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06 13.06
0
1 D Position Ratio +
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2 0
3 1
13.07
13.08
+
ò +
x(-1)
4
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06
Position
error reset 13.16
Local 13.20 13.21 13.22 0

reference
ò
1
Ignore local
13.24
reference turns
Local
13.23 reference
disable
Position control feedback position
Revolution Position Position

Position
counter fine controller
feedback
Drive source
Encoder 3.28 3.29 3.30
13.05
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06

0
1 D Position
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2
3
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.9 Position modes on page 240.

Frequency/speed
reference Pre-ramp Post-ramp
selected reference reference
1.01 0
Menu 2
1.03 Ramp Control 2.01
1
Velocity Velocity feed

feed- 1.39 1.40 -forward
forward select
Position
controller
mode*
13.10 13.10 = 1or 2
Position loop
disabled 0
1 +
2
Position
Position loop error
controller
P gain
13.01 13.02 13.03 13.09
Revolution Position Fine

Position
13.12
Position
controller
speed clamp
Key

X terminals 0.XX
parameter

X
terminals parameter
This logic diagram applies only when all


Figure 11-22 Menu 13 Closed-loop logic diagram
Relative Relative
jog reverse jog enable
13.19 13.18
Relative
jog reference
Position control reference position
13.17 0
1
1
Revolution Position
Position x( 1)
counter fine 0
Drive Position
Encoder 3.28 3.29 3.30 controller
reference 13.04 Position
source reference
invert
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06 13.06
0
1 D Position Ratio +
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2 0
3 1
13.07
13.08
+
ò +
x( 1)
4
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06
Position
error reset 13.16
Local 13.20 13.21 13.22 0

reference
ò
1
Ignore local
13.24
reference turns
Local
13.23 reference
disable
Position control feedback position
Revolution Position Position

Position
counter fine controller
feedback
Drive source
Encoder 3.28 3.29 3.30
13.05
Slot 1 15.04 15.05 15.06

0
1 D Position
Slot 2 16.04 16.05 16.06 2
3 +
Limited to
±1/2 rev
Slot 3 17.04 17.05 17.06
Orientation
position 13.13
reference
*For more information, refer to section 11.21.9 Position modes on page 240.

Pre-ramp Post-ramp
Frequency/speed reference reference Final speed
reference 1.01 0 reference
selected Menu 2 +
1.03 2.01 3.01
Ramp Control
1
+
Velocity
feed- 1.39
forward Velocity feed
1.40 -forward
select
Position Hard speed
controller reference
mode* selector
13.10 = 13.10 = 13.10 =
13.10 3.23
5 or 6 1 or 3 1 to 6
1 0
Position loop
disabled 0
1
2 0
3
1 1
4
1 5
6
0
Hard speed
reference 3.22
Hold zero
6.08
speed
Position
0 Position loop error
controller
1 P gain
1 13.01 13.02 13.03 13.09
0
Revolution Position Fine
Position
13.12
Position
Position loop controller
enabled* speed clamp
Orientation
acceptance
window
13.14
Key
Orientation
X terminals 0.XX
parameter
Orientation X Output 0.XX Read-only (RO)

position X
13.15 terminals parameter
complete
This logic diagram applies only when all
* The position controller is disabled and the error integrator is also reset
under the following conditions:
1. If the drive is disabled (i.e. inhibited, ready or tripped)
2. If the position controller mode (Pr 13.10) is changed. The position
controller is disabled transiently to reset the error integrator.
3. The absolute mode parameter (Pr 13.11) is changed. The position
controller is disabled transiently to reset the error integrator.
4. One of the position sources is invalid.
5. The position feedback initialised parameter (Pr 3.48) is zero.

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
13.01 Revolutions error -32,768 to +32,767 RO Bi NC PT
13.02 Position error -32,768 to +32,767 RO Uni NC PT
13.03 Fine position error -32,768 to +32,767 RO Uni NC PT
drv (0), Slot1 (1), Slot2 (2), Slot3 (3),
13.04 Position controller reference source drv (0) RW Uni US
LocAL (4)
13.05 Position controller feedback source drv (0), Slot1 (1), Slot2 (2), Slot3 (3) drv (0) RW Uni US
13.06 Position reference invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
13.07 Ratio numerator 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
13.08 Ratio denominator 0.000 to 1.000 1.000 RW Uni US
13.09 Position controller P gain 0.00 to 100.00 rad s-1/rad 25.00 RW Uni US
Position controller
disabled (0)
Rigid position control -
Position controller feed fwd (1)
disabled (0) Rigid position control (2)
Rigid position control - Non-rigid position
13.10 Position controller mode Position controller disabled (0) RW Uni US
feed fwd (1) control - feed fwd (3)
Rigid position control Non-rigid position
(2) control (4)
Orientation on stop (5)
Orientation on stop and
when drive enabled (6)
13.11 Absolute mode enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
13.12 Position controller speed clamp 0 to 250 rpm 150 RW Uni US
13.13 Orientation position reference 0 to 65,535 0 RW Uni US
13.14 Orientation acceptance window 0 to 4,096 256 RW Uni US
13.15 Orientation position complete OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
13.16 Position error reset OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.17 Relative jog reference 0.0 to 4,000.0 rpm 0.0 RW Uni NC
13.18 Relative jog enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.19 Relative jog reverse OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.20 Local reference turns 0 to 65,535 0 RW Uni NC
13.21 Local reference position 0 to 65,535 0 RW Uni NC
13.22 Local reference fine position 0 to 65,535 0 RW Uni NC
13.23 Local reference disable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
13.24 Ignore local reference turns OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US


11.14 Menu 14: User PID controller

Figure 11-23 Menu 14 Logic diagram
Main reference
source parameter
14.02
Any variable
parameter PID Main
reference
??.??
14.19
??.??
PID reference
source parameter PID reference
14.03 source invert
Any variable 14.05

parameter PID
reference PID
??.?? PID reference error
14.20 slew-rate limit
+
14.07 14.22
??.??
x(-1) _
PID feedback
source parameter PID feedback
14.04 source invert
Any variable 14.06

parameter PID
feedback
??.??
14.21
??.??
x(-1)
PID
enable
14.08
Drive normal
indicator
10.01 &
Logic 1
Any bit
parameter
??.??
??.??
Source
14.09
not used
Optional PID
enable source
parameter

PID output
14.13
high limit
PID hold PID output
integrator enable PID output
14.14 destination
low limit
14.17 parameter*
14.10
PID symmetrical 14.16 Any
PID proportional 14.18 unprotected
gain limits enable
variable
14.11 PID controller parameter
output PID output
scale factor
+ ??.??
PID integral
gain +
14.01 14.15
14.12
??.??
PID derivative
gain
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
14.01 PID control output ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
14.02 PID main reference source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.03 PID reference source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.04 PID feedback source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.05 PID reference source invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.06 PID feedback source invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.07 PID reference slew-rate limit 0.0 to 3,200.0 s 0.0 RW Uni US
14.08 PID enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.09 PID optional enable source Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
14.10 PID proportional gain 0.000 to 4 000 1.000 RW Uni US
14.11 PID integral gain 0.000 to 4 000 0.500 RW Uni US
14.12 PID deriva ive gain 0.000 to 4.000 0.000 RW Uni US
14.13 PID upper limit 0.00 to 100.00 % 100.00 RW Uni US
14.14 PID lower limit ±100.00 % -100.00 RW Bi US
14.15 PID output scaling factor 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
14.16 PID output destination Pr 0.00 to 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
14.17 PID hold integrator enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
14.18 PID symmetrical limits enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
14.19 PID main reference ±100 00 % RO Bi NC PT
14.20 PID reference ±100 00 % RO Bi NC PT
14.21 PID feedback ±100.00 % RO Bi NC PT
14.22 PID error ±100 00 % RO Bi NC PT

11.15 Menus 15, 16 and 17: Solutions Module set-up

Figure 11-24 Location of Solutions Module slots and their corresponding menu numbers (SPz)
Solutions Module
slot 2 (Menu 16)
Solutions Module
slot 1 (Menu 15)
Figure 11-25 Location of Solutions Module slots and their corresponding menu numbers (size 1 to 6)
Solutions Module
slot 1 (Menu 15)
Solutions Module
slot 2 (Menu 16)
Solutions Module
slot 3 (Menu 17)
NOTE
SPz has two Solution Module slots, and sizes 1 to 6 have three Solution Module slots.

11.15.1 Parameters common to all categories

Parameter Range() Default() Type
x.01 Solutions Module ID 0 to 599 RO Uni PT US
Solutions Module software
x.02 0.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
version
x.50 Solutions Module error status 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT
x.51 0 to 99 RO Uni NC PT
sub-version
The Solutions Module ID indicates the type of module that is installed in
the corresponding slot.
Solutions
Module Category
Module ID
0 No module installed
101 SM-Resolver
102 SM-Universal Encoder Plus
Feedback
SM-Encoder Plus /
104
SM-Encoder Output Plus
201 SM-I/O Plus
203 SM-I/O Timer Automation (I/O
207 SM-I/O Lite Expansion)
208 SM-I/O 32
301 SM-Applications
302 SM-Applications Lite Automation
304 SM-Applications Plus (Applications)
305 SM-Applications Lite V2
401 SM-LON
403 SM-PROFIBUS-DP
404 SM-INTERBUS
407 SM-DeviceNet
Fieldbus
408 SM-CANopen
409 SM-SERCOS
410 SM-Ethernet
421 SM-EtherCAT

Most Solutions Modules contain software. The software version of the
module can be checked by looking at Pr x.02 and Pr x.51.
The software version takes the form of zz.yy.xx, where Pr x.02 displays
zz.yy and Pr x.51 displays xx. I.e. for software version 01.01.00, Pr x.02
would display 1.01 and Pr x.51 would display 0
The SM-Resolver, SM-Encoder Plus, SM-Encoder Output Plus and SM-
I/O Plus modules do not contain any software, so Pr x.02 and Pr x.51
either show 0 (software V01.07.01 and earlier) or the parameters do not
appear (software V01.08.00 and later).


11.15.2 Feedback module category

Figure 11-26 SM-Universal Encoder Plus logic diagram
Reference / feedback encoder input
Encoder setup
ncremental
Non marker position information
SC EnDAt
xx SErVO
SC Hiper
encoder
encoder
encoder
encoder
Comms
SC SS
SC
Parameter Position Revolution Fine
feedback counter Position position
Error
detection initialised
Solutions x.29 x.30 x.31
Module x.17 x.09 Encoder turns / Linear encoder ü ü ü ü ü ü
comms to sinewave ratio x.45
15-way x.10 Equivalent lines per rev ü ü ü ü ü
D-type Single turn comms resolution /
x.11 ü ü ü ü ü
.. .. .. .. .. Linear encoder comms bits
SK1 ..... x.13 Encoder supply voltage ü ü ü ü ü ü Marker position information
x.14 Encoder comms baud rate ü ü
x.15 Encoder type ü ü ü ü ü ü Revolution Fine
Comms encoder mode / counter Position position
x.16 ü ü ü ü
Rotary select / Terminations
x.16 x.18 Auto-config / SSI format # # # x.32 x.33 x.34
x.44 Disable encoder position check ü ü ü ü ü
Termination x.45 Position feedback initialised X X X X X X
disable x.46 Lines per revolution divider # # # # #
Key:
ü - Information required from user x.07
# - Configuration dependant / User selectable
X - Parameter can be set-up by the user or the drive automatically Marker Encoder type Marker
flag x.08 position
Pr x.15 = 0 to 12
disable
Marker
input
Solutions
Module
15 way Encoder
D type SK1
Term Ab Fd Fr Ab.SErVO Fd.SErVO Fr.SErVO SC SC.HIPEr EndAt SC.EndAt SSI SC.SSI SC.SErVO
(0) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
.. .. .. .. .. 1 A F F A F F Cos Cos Cos
SK1
..... 2 A\ F\ F\ A\ F\ F\ Cosref Cosref Cosref
3 B D R B D R Sin Sin Sin
4 B\ D\ R\ B\ D\ R\ Sinref Sinref Sinref
5 Z Encoder input - Data (input/output)
6 Z\ Encoder input - Data\ (input/output)
7 Aout, Fout, Data SSI (output) U Simulated encoder: Aout, Fout, Data SSI (output) U 7
8 Aout\, Fout\, Data\ SSI (output) U\ Simulated encoder: Aout\, Fout\, Data\ SSI (output) U\ 8
9 Bout, Dout,Clock\ SSI (input) V Simulated encoder: Bout, Dout,Clock\ SSI (input) V 9
10 Bout\, Dout\, Clock SSI (input) V\ Simulated encoder: Bout\, Dout\, Clock SSI (input) V\ 10
11 W Encoder input - Clock (output) W
12 W\ Encoder input - Clock\ (output) W\
13 +V
14 0V common
15 th
Hard wired connections inside the module
Solutions
Module Freeze inputs / Encoder outputs
Freeze input
terminal PL2 Term Freeze RS485 Freeze +24V mode selection
block Ab output Fd output SSI output Marker output
input input x.38
1 Freeze
2 0V common
A F Data 24V
3
4 A\ F\ Data\
PL2
5 B D Clock\ (input) RS485
6 B\ D\ Clock (input)
7 0V common Drive /slot
8 Freeze Z bus input
9 Freeze\ Z\

Speed feedback
selector
3.26
Speed feedback
selector
Motor map 2
21.21
Feedback Speed
+ filter 16ms
x.19 internal x.03
_ filter
x.49
Lock position Feedback
feedback reference
Feedback destination
reference/ x.23
motor
Revolution Fine Maximum thermistor Feedback
counter Position position feedback resistance reference
reference (rpm) scaling xx.xx
x.04 x.05 x.06 x.20 x.21 x.22
xx.xx
Positional information
Encoder Simulated encoder

simulation
mode
x.28 SSI output
x.47
turns
SSI
SSI output only
x.48 comms Simulation
resolution encoder
source
Ab
Fd
Simulated
Numerator
SSI.Gray encoder
xx.xx
resolution x.25
SSI.Bin Ab, Fd
x.27
Ab L only
x.26 xx.xx
Fd.L
Denominator
H.drv .. .. .. .. ..
.....
H int
Drive or
Solutions
Module
Freeze
input mode
selection Freeze input
x.38
SM-Applications
SM-Encoder Plus
Drive / Slot Main drive
24V input 485 input Pass freeze
bus input
to drive and
Marker output other slots
Yes x.40
Yes
Marker
Yes Freeze
Yes flag
Freeze x.35 Freeze revolution counter
x.39 x.36 Freeze position
Yes Yes
x.37 Freeze fine position
x(-1)
Yes
Yes
x.41
Freeze
invert

SM-Universal Encoder Plus parameters

x.01 Solutions Module ID 0 to 599 102 RO Uni PT US
x.02 Solutions Module software version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
x.03 Speed ±40,000.0 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
x.04 Revolution counter 0 to 65,535 revolutions RO Uni FI NC PT
x.05 Position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolu ion) RO Uni FI NC PT
x.06 Fine position 0 to 65,535 (1/232nds of a revolu ion) RO Uni FI NC PT
x.07 Marker position reset disable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.08 Marker flag OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
Encoder turns/ linear encoder comms
x.09 0 to 16 bits 16 RW Uni US
to sine wave ratio
x.10 Equivalent lines per revolution 0 to 50,000 4096 RW Uni US
Single turn comms bits/ linear encoder
x.11 0 to 32 bits 0 RW Uni US
comms bits
x.12 Motor thermistor check enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.13 Encoder supply voltage 5V (0), 8V (1), 15V (2) 5V (0) RW Uni US
100 (0), 200 (1), 300 (2), 400 (3), 500 (4),
x.14 Encoder comms baud rate 300 (2) RW Txt US
1,000 (5), 1,500 (6), 2,000 (7)
Ab (0), Fd (1), Fr (2), Ab.SErVO (3),
Fd.SErVO (4), Fr.SErVO (5), SC (6),
x.15 Encoder type Ab (0) RW Uni US
SC.HiPEr (7), EndAt (8), SC.EndAt (9),
SSI (10), SC.SSI (11), SC.UVW (12)
Rotary encoder select/ comms only
x.16 0 to 2 1 RW Uni US
encoder mode/ terminations
x.17 Error detection level 0 to 7 1 RW Uni US
Auto configuration/ SSI binary format
x.18 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
select
x.19 Feedback filter 0 to 5 (0 to 16 ms) 0 RW Uni US
x.20 Maximum feedback reference 0.0 to 40,000.0 rpm 1500.0 RW Uni US
Feedback reference/ motor thermistor
x.21 ±100 0 % RO Bi NC PT
resistance
x.22 Feedback reference scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
x.23 Feedback reference destina ion Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0 00 RW Uni DE PT US
x.24 Encoder simulation source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
x.25 Encoder simulation ratio numerator 0.0000 to 3.0000 0.2500 RW Uni US
x.26 Encoder simulation ratio denominator 0.0000 to 3.0000 1.0000 RW Uni US
x.27 Encoder simulation resolution select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
Ab (0), Fd (1), SSI.Gray (2), SSI.Bin (3),
x.28 Encoder simulation mode Ab (0) RW Txt US
Ab.L (4), Fd.L (5), H-drv (6), H-int (7)
x.29 Non-marker reset revolution counter 0 to 65,535 revolutions RO Uni NC PT
x.30 Non-marker reset position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolu ion) RO Uni NC PT
x.31 Non-marker reset fine position 32 RO Uni NC PT
0 to 65,535 (1/2 nds of a revolu ion)
x.32 Marker revolution counter 0 to 65,535 revolutions RO Uni NC PT
x.33 Marker position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolu ion) RO Uni NC PT
x.34 Marker fine position 0 to 65,535 (1/232nds of a revolu ion) RO Uni NC PT
x.35 Freeze revolution counter 0 to 65,535 revolutions RO Uni NC PT
x.36 Freeze position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolu ion) RO Uni NC PT
x.37 Freeze fine position 0 to 65,535 (1/232nds of a revolu ion) RO Uni NC PT
Bit 0 (LSB) = 24V input
x.38 Freeze input mode selection Bit 1 = EIA485 input 1 RW Uni US
Bit 2 (MSB) = From another Solutions Module
x.39 Freeze flag OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
x.40 Pass freeze to drive and other slots OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC US
x.41 Freeze invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
Encoder comms transmit register/ Sin
x.42 0 to 65,535 0 RW Uni NC
signal value
Encoder comms receive register/ Cos
x.43 0 to 65,535 0 RW Uni NC
signal value
x.44 Disable encoder position check OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
x.45 Position feedback initialised OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
x.46 Lines per revolution divider 1 to 1024 1 RW Uni US
x.47 SSI output turns 0 to 16 bits 16 RW Uni US
x.48 SSI output comms resolution 0 to 32 bits 0 RW Uni US
x.49 Lock position feedback OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit
x.50 Solutions Module error status* 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT
x.51 Solutions Module software sub-version 0 to 99 RO Uni NC PT
*See trip SLX.Er, Feedback module category on page 269.


Figure 11-27 SM-Resolver logic diagram
Term Resolver connections Equivalent

9 SIN LOW x.10 lines per
10 SIN HIGH revolution
11 COS LOW
12 COS HIGH Resolver
x.13
13 REF HIGH (excitation) excitation
14 REF LOW (excitation) Resolver
15 0V x.15
poles
16 0V
17 0V
x.17
Error detection
level
Freeze positional
information
Freeze input Freeze
Freeze
flag x.35 revolution
SM-Applications
counter
SM-Universal x.39
Encoder Plus Freeze
x.36 position

Key
Revolution
counter Position Input Read-write (RW)
terminals 0.XX
parameter
x.04 x.05
Resolver terminals parameter
selected as
drive feedback
Lock position (Pr 3.26) The parameters are all shown at their default settings
feedback
x.49
Speed
Feedback feedback
filter
x.19 x.03
Revolution
counter Position
x.29 x.30
Encoder
simulation
Non marker reset source
positional information
Position Ra io x.24
numerator
Resolver Simulated encoder
x.05 x.25 Term
source output connections
1 A
2 A\
3 0V
Encoder 4 B
3.29
source 5 B\
6 0V
7 Z
8 Z\
x.xx
SM-Resolver parameters

x.03 Speed ±40,000.0 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
x.05 Position 0 to 65,535 1/216ths of a revolution RO Uni FI NC PT
x.10 Equivalent lines per revolution 0 to 50,000 4096 RW Uni US
x.13 Resolver excitation 3:1 (0), 2:1 (1 or 2) 3:1 (0) RW Uni US
2 pole (0), 4 pole (1), 6 pole (2),
x.15 Resolver poles 2 pole (0) RW Uni US
8 pole (3 to 12)
Bit 0 (LSB) = Wire break detect
x.17 Error detection level Bit 1 = Not used 1 RW Uni US
Bit 2 (MSB) = Not used
x.19 Feedback filter 0 (0), 1 (1), 2 (2), 4 (3), 8 (4), 16 (5) ms 0 RW Txt US
x.24 Encoder simulation source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
x.25 Encoder simulation ratio numerator 0.0000 to 3.0000 0.25 RW Uni US
x.30 Non-marker reset position 0 to 65,535 1/216ths of a revolution RO Uni NC PT
x.36 Freeze posi ion 0 to 65,535 1/216ths of a revolution RO Uni NC PT
x.45 Position feedback initialised OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
x.49 Lock position feedback OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
*See trip SLX.Er, Feedback module category on page 269.

Figure 11-28 SM-Encoder Plus logic diagram
Position Revolution
feedback counter Position
initialised
Term Encoder x.29 x.30
connections
x.45
1 A Equivalent
2 A\ x.10 lines per +
3 B revolution
4 B\
PL1 5 Z x.16 Encoder Marker position information _
6 Z\ termination
7 0V Encoder Revolution
x.15 counter Position
8 Not used type
x.32 x.33
Marker x.08 x.07

input
Marker Marker
flag position
disable
Freeze positional
information
Freeze input Freeze
Freeze
flag x.35 revolution
SM-Applications
counter
SM-Universal x.39
Freeze
Encoder Plus x.36 position

Feedback Speed
filter
x.19 x.03
x.49
Lock position
feedback
Revolution
counter Posi ion
x.04 x.05
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Figure 11-29 SM-Encoder Output Plus logic diagram
Position Revolution
Solutions feedback counter Position
Module initialised
terminal Term Encoder x.29 x.30
block connections
x.45
1 A Equivalent
2 A\ x.10 lines per
3 B
+
revolution
4 B\
PL1 5 Z x.16 Encoder Marker position information _
6 Z\ termination
7 0V Encoder Revolution
x.15 counter Position
8 +V type
x.32 x.33
x.13
Encoder supply
voltage
Marker x.08 x.07
input
Marker Marker
flag position
disable
Freeze positional
information
Freeze input
Freeze
SM-Applications x.35 revolution
x.39 counter
SM-Universal
Encoder Plus Freeze Freeze
x.36 position
flag
Encoder Encoder
simulation simulation
source mode
Position
Encoder
Module encoder simulation
port x.05 ratio numerator Ab
Fd
Drive encoder Fr
port 3.29
Ab.L
Drive encoder Fd.L

position

Feedback Speed
filter
x.19 x.03
x.49
Lock position
feedback
Revolution
counter Position
x.04 x.05
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter
Solutions
Module
terminal
Ab Fd Fr Ab.L Fd.L PL2 term
block
0V 1
0V 2
A F F A F 3
A\ F\ F\ A\ F\ 4
R\
PL2
B D B D 5
B\ D\ R\ B\ D\ 6
0V 7
Z 8
Z\ 9

SM-Encoder Plus / SM-Encoder Output Plus parameters

x.03 Speed feedback ±40,000.0 rpm RO Bi FI NC PT
x.05 Position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolution) RO Uni FI NC PT
x.07 Marker position reset disable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.08 Marker flag OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
x.10 Equivalent lines per revolu ion 0 to 50,000 4,096 RW Uni US
x.13* Encoder supply voltage 0: 5V, 1: 8V, 2: 15V 0 RW Uni US
x.15 Encoder type Ab (0), Fd (1), Fr (2 to 12) Ab (0) RW Uni US
x.16 Encoder termination 0 to 2 1 RW Bit US
x.19 Feedback filter 0 to 5 (0 to 16 ms) 0 RW Uni US
x.24* Encoder simulation source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 0.00 RW Uni PT US
x.25* Encoder simulation ratio numerator 0.0000 to 3.0000 0.2500 RW Uni US
0: Ab, 1: Fd, 2: Fr, 3: Ab wi h marker lock,
x.28* Encoder simulation mode 0 RW Uni US
4 to 7: Fd with marker lock
x.30 Non-marker reset position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolution) RO Uni NC PT
x.32 Marker revolution counter 0 to 65,535 revolutions RO Uni NC PT
x.33 Marker position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolution) RO Uni NC PT
x.36 Freeze position 0 to 65,535 (1/216ths of a revolution) RO Uni NC PT
x.45 Position feedback ini ialised OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
x.49 Lock position feedback OFF (0) or On (1) RW Bit
x.50 Solutions Module error status** 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT
*Pr x.13, Pr x.24, Pr x.25 and Pr x.28 are only used when operating with a SM-Encoder Output Plus module. These parameters are not used when
operating with a SM-Encoder Plus module
**See trip SLX.Er, Feedback module category on page 269.

11.15.3 Automation module category

Figure 11-30 SM-I/O Plus analog logic diagram
T9 Analog
input 1 T9 Analog
input 1
destina ion Any
X.40 unprotected
X.43
variable
T9 Analog input 1 parameter
??.??
X.41
T9 Analog
input 1 x(-1) ??.??
scaling
X.42
T9 Analog
input 1 invert
T10 Analog
input 2 T10 Analog
input 2
destination Any
X.44 unprotected
X.47
variable
T10 Analog input 2 parameter
??.??
X.45
T10 Analog
input 2 x(-1) ??.??
scaling
X.46
T10 Analog
input 2 invert
T12 Analog
output 1
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

Figure 11-31 SM-I/O Plus digital logic diagram 1
T2 digital
I/O 1 state T2 output ??.??
select
X.09 X.31
x(-1) ??.??
Any bit
T2 digital I/O 1 T2 digital I/O parameter
X.21
1 destination
/ source
X.11 T2 digital
I/O 1 invert Any
unprotected
Positive bit parameter
X.29
logic select
??.??
x(-1) ??.??
Any bit
select
X.10 X.32
x(-1) ??.??
T3 digital I/O 2 T3 digital I/O

X.22
2 destination
/ source
T3 digital Any
X.12 unprotected
I/O 2 invert
bit
Positive parameter
X.29
logic select
??.??
x(-1)
??.??
Any bit
select
X.03 X.33
x(-1) ??.??
T4 digital I/O 3
T4 digital I/O X.23
3 destination
/ source
T4 digital Any
X.13
I/O 3 invert unprotected
bit
Positive X.29 parameter
logic select
??.??
Key
x(-1)
??.??
terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter
The parameters are all shown at their default setting

Figure 11-32 SM-I/O Plus digital logic diagram 2
T6 digital input 4
state indicator T6 digital T6 digital input 4
input 4 invert destination
X.04 X.14 X.24 Any
unprotected
bit
??.??
X.29
Positive
logic select x(-1) ??.??
T7 digital input 5
X.05 X.15 X.25 Any
unprotected
bit
??.??
X.29
Positive
T8 digital input 6
X.06 X.16 X.26 Any
unprotected
bit
??.??
X.29
Positive
X.17
Relay 1
Key
Input
terminals
Output
terminals
Read-write
0.XX (RW)
Relay 2 parameter
Read-only
0.XX (RO)
parameter
The parameters are all shown

at their default setting

SM-I/O Plus parameters

x.03 T4 digital I/O 3 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
x.04 T6 digital input 4 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
x.07 Relay 1 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
x.08 Relay 2 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
x.11 T2 digital I/O 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.14 T6 digital input 4 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.17 Relay 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.18 Relay 2 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.20 Digital I/O read word 0 to 511 RO Uni NC PT
x.21 Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
destina ion
destina ion
destina ion
x.24 T6 digital input 4 destination Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
x.27 Relay 1 source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
x.28 Relay 2 source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
x.29 Input polarity select OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) (positive logic) RW Bit PT US
x.31 T2 digital I/O 1 output select OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.40 Analog input 1 ±100.0% RO Bi NC PT
x.41 Analog input 1 scaling 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
x.42 Analog input 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.43 Analog input 1 destination Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
x.44 Analog input 2 ±100.0% RO Bi NC PT
x.45 Analog input 2 scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
x.46 Analog input 2 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.47 Analog input 2 destination Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
x.48 Analog output 1 source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
x.49 Analog output 1 scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US
*See trip SLX.Er, Automation (I/O Expansion) module category on page 271.

Figure 11-33 SM-I/O Lite & SM-I/O Timer digital I/O logic diagram
Destination
Invert
x.24
T5 digital input 1 x.14
State
0.00
Any
5 x.04 unprotected
parameter
21.51
Destination
Invert
x.25
State
0.00
Any
6 x.05 unprotected
parameter
21.51
Destination
Invert
x.26
State
0.00
Any
7 x.06 unprotected
parameter
21.51
Relay
source
x.27 Invert
x.17
0.00 State
Default
source
Pr 0.00 x.07 21
21.51
22
23
0V
Key

X terminals 0.XX
parameter

X
terminals parameter

Figure 11-34 SM-I/O Lite & SM-I/O Timer analog I/O logic diagram
Destination
Invert
x.43
T2 Analog Input 1 x.42
Level
Mode Scaling 0.00
x.38 x.40 x.41 Default
destination
Current Pr 0.00
x(-1) 21.51
mode and
protection
x.03
200R
Current loop
0V loss indicator
Source
x.48
T3 Analog Output 1
0.00 Scaling Voltage

Default or current
source x.49
Pr 0.00 x.39 Mode
21.51
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter
Figure 11-35 SM-I/O Timer real time clock logic diagram

Real time
clock update
mode
x.30
Minutes/seconds
Real time
clock daylight x.34
saving mode Days/hours
x.19 x.35
User Mon h/date
Real time
clock normal x.36
opera ion Years
Real time
clock x.37
Real time
clock
+1 hour
Key

terminals 0.XX
parameter

terminals parameter

SM-I/O Timer & SM-I/O Lite parameters
SM-I/O
Lite Timer
SM-I/O Timer: 203
x.01 Solutions Module ID 0 to 599 RO Uni PT US  
SM-I/O Lite: 207
x.02 Solutions Module software version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT  
x.03 Current loop loss indicator OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT  
x.04 T5 digital input 1 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT  
x.07 Relay 1 state OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT  
x.14 T5 digital input 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US  
x.17 Relay 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US  
x.19 Real time clock daylight saving mode OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US 
x.20 Digital I/O read word 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT  
x.24 T5 digital input 1 des ination Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US  
x.27 Relay 1 source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US  
x.30 Real time clock update mode 0 to 2 0 RW Uni NC 
x.34 Real time clock time: minutes.seconds 0.00 to 59.59 RW Uni NC PT 
x.35 Real time clock ime: days.hours 1.00 to 7.23 RW Uni NC PT 
x.36 Real time clock time: months.days 0.00 to 12.31 RW Uni NC PT 
x.37 Real time clock ime: years 2000 to 2099 RW Uni NC PT 
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20.tr (2),
x.38 Analog input 1 mode 20-4.tr (3), 4-20 (4), 20-4 (5), 0-20 (0) RW Txt US  
VOLt(6)
0-20 (0), 20-0 (1), 4-20 (2), 20-4 (3),
x.39 Analog output mode 0-20 (0) RW Txt US  
VOLt (4)
x.40 Analog input 1 ±100.0% RO Bi NC PT  
x.41 Analog input 1 scaling 0 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US  
x.42 Analog input 1 invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US  
x.43 Analog input 1 destination Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US  
x.48 Analog output 1 source Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US  
x.49 Analog output 1 scaling 0.000 to 4.000 1.000 RW Uni US  
x.50 Solutions Module error status* 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT  
x.51 Solutions Module software sub-version 0 to 99 RO Uni NC PT  

Figure 11-36 SM-I/O 32 logic diagram

I/O state Output
select Source/
X.0y** X.3y* destination
X.2y
x(-1)
Any unprotected
parameter
??.??
X.1y /O invert
??.??
Key
Input x(-1)
X.XX Read-write (RW)
terminals parameter
Output X.XX Read-only (RO)

terminals parameter
The parameters are all shown at their default setting
SM-I/O 32 parameters
x.01 Solutions Module ID code 0 to 599 208 RO Uni PT US
x.02 Solutions Module main software version 0.00 to 99.99 99.00 RO Uni NC PT
x.03 Digital I/O 3 state OFF(0) or On(1) OFF (0) RO Bit NC PT
x.11 Digital I/O 1 invert OFF(0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.20 Digital I/O read word 0 to 255 0 RO Uni NC PT
x.21 Digital I/O 1 source/destination Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
x.29 Digital I/O 4 output select OFF(0) or On(1) On(1) RW Bit PT US
x.31 Digital I/O 1 output select OFF(0) or On(1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.43 First update method direction register Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
x.47 Fast update method read register Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni DE PT US
x.48 Fast update method write register Pr 0.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US
x.50 Solu ions Module error status* 0 to 255 RO Uni NC PT

Applications module parameters

x.01 Solutions Module ID 0 to 599 RO Uni PT US
x.02 Solutions Module software version 0.00 to 99.99 RO Uni NC PT
x.03 DPL program status None (0), Stop (1), Run (2), Trip (3) RO Txt NC PT
x.04 Available system resource 0 to 100 RO Uni NC PT
x.05 RS485 address 0 to 255 11 RW Uni US
x.06 RS485 mode 0 to 255 1 RW Uni US
300 (0), 600 (1), 1200 (2), 2400 (3), 4800 (4),
x.07 RS485 baud rate 9600 (5), 19200 (6), 38400 (7), 57600 (8), 4800 (4) RW Txt US
115200 (9) baud
x.08 RS485 Turnaround delay 0 to 255 ms 2 RW Uni US
x.09 RS485 Tx enable delay 0 to 1 ms 0 RW Uni US
x.10 DPL Print Rou ing SYPT: OFF (0), RS485: On (1) SYPT: OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.11 Clock task scheduling (ms) 0 to 200 10 RW Uni US
dISAbLEd (0), 0.25 ms (1), 0.5 ms (2), 1 ms (3),
x.12 POS task scheduling rate dISAbLEd (0) RW Txt US
2 ms (4), 4 ms (5), 8 ms (6)
x.13 Enable autorun OFF (0) or On (1) On (1) RW Bit US
x.14 Global run time trip enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.15 Disable reset on trip cleared OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.16 Encoder data update rate 0 to 3 0 RW Uni US
x.17 Enable parameter over range trips OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.18 Watchdog enable OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.19 Save request OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit NC
x.20 Enable power down save OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
Enable menu 20 save and
x.21 OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
restore
x.22 CTNet Token Ring ID 0 to 255 0 RW Uni US
x.23 CTNet node address 0 to 255 0 RW Uni US
x.24 CTNet baud rate 5.000 (0), 2.500 (1), 1.250 (2), 0.625 (3) 2.500 (1) RW Txt US
x.25 CTNet sync setup 0,000 to 9,999 0,000 RW Uni US
CTNet easy mode - first cyclic
x.26 0 to 25,503 0 RW Uni US
parameter destination node
CTNet easy mode - first cyclic source
x.27 0 to 9,999 0 RW Uni US
parameter
CTNet easy mode - second cyclic
x.28 0 to 25,503 0 RW Uni US
CTNet easy mode - second cyclic
x.29 0 to 9,999 0 RW Uni US
source parameter
CTNet easy mode - third cyclic
x.30 0 to 25,503 0 RW Uni US
CTNet easy mode - third cyclic source
x.31 0 to 9,999 0 RW Uni US
parameter
CTNet easy mode set-up - Transfer
x.32 0 to 9,999 0 RW Uni US
slot 1 destination parameter
x.33 0 to 9,999 0 RW Uni US
x.34 0 to 9,999 0 RW Uni US
Disabled (0), Event (1), Event1 (2), Event2 (3),
x.35 CTNet sync event task ID Disabled (0) RW Txt US
Event3 (4)
x.36 CTNet diagnos ic parameter -3 to +32,767 RO Uni NC PT
x.37 Reject download if drive enabled OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.38 APC run-time trip OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.39 Inter-module synchronisation status 0 to 3 0 RO Uni NC
x.41 Indexer control 0 to 255 0 RW Uni NC
x.42 Pass freeze through drive OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.43 Freeze invert OFF (0) or On (1) OFF (0) RW Bit US
x.44 Task priority level 0 to 255 0 RW Uni US
x.45 User set-up parameter 1 0 to 65535 RO Uni NC
x.46 User set-up parameter 2 -32,768 to +32,767 RO Uni NC
x.47 User set-up parameter 3 0 to 255 RO Uni NC
x.48 DPL line number in error 0 to 2,147,483,647 0 RO Uni NC PT
x.49 User program ID -32,768 to +32,767 0 RO Bi NC PT
*See trip SLX.Er, Automation (Applications) module category on page 270.

11.15.4 Fieldbus module category

Fieldbus module parameters
For information regarding fieldbus module parameters, refer to the
appropriate Solutions Module User Guide.

11.16 Menu 18: Application menu 1

Application menu 1 power-down
18.01 -32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi NC PS
saved integer
18.02 to
Application menu 1 read-only integer -32,768 to +32,767 0 RO Bi NC
18.10
18.11 to
Application menu 1 read-write integer -32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi US
18.30
18.31 to 0
Application menu 1 read-write bit OFF (0) or On (1) RW Bit US
18.50

Application menu 2 power-down
19.01 -32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi NC PS
saved integer
19.02 to
Application menu 2 read-only integer -32,768 to +32,767 0 RO Bi NC
19.10
19.11 to
Application menu 2 read-write integer -32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi US
19.30
19.31 to
Application menu 2 read-write bit OFF (0) or On (1) 0 RW Bit US
19.50

20.01 to
Application menu 3 read-write integer -32,768 to +32,767 0 RW Bi NC
20.20
20.21 to Application menu 3 read-write long
20.40 integer -231 to 231-1 0 RW Bi NC
With software V01.07.00 and later, all menu 20 parameters are transferred to the SMARTCARD when a 4yyy transfer is performed. See section
9.2.1 Writing to the SMARTCARD on page 140 for more information.

11.19 Menu 21: Second motor parameters

Parameter Type
OL CL OL VT SV
EUR> 50.0 EUR> 1,500 0
21.01 Maximum reference clamp {0.02}* 0 to 3,000.0 Hz SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm 3,000.0 RW Uni US
USA> 60.0 USA> 1,800.0
21.02 Minimum reference clamp {0.01}* ±3,000 0 Hz ±SPEED_LIMIT_MAX rpm 0.0 RW Bi PT US
21.03 Reference selector {0.05}* A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (1), A2.Pr (2), Pr (3), PAd (4), Prc (5) A1.A2 (0) RW Txt US
0 0 to 3,200 0 0.000 to 3,200.000
21.04 Acceleration rate {0.03}* 5.0 2.000 0 200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1000rpm
0.0 to 3200.0 0.000 to 3,200.000
21.05 Deceleration rate {0.04}* 10.0 2.000 0 200 RW Uni US
s/100Hz s/1000rpm
EUR> 50
21.06 Rated frequency {0.47}* 0 to 3000.0 Hz VT> 0 to 1250.0Hz RW Uni US
USA> 60
21.07 Rated current {0.46}* 0 to RATED_CURRENT_MAX A Drive rated current (Pr 11.32) RW Uni RA US
EUR> 1,500 EUR> 1,450.00
21.08 Rated load rpm {0.45}* 0 to 180,000 rpm 0 00 to 40,000.00 rpm 3,000.00 RW Uni US
USA> 1,800 USA> 1,770.00
200V rating drive: 230V
400V rating drive: EUR> 400V, USA> 460V
21.09 Rated voltage {0.44}* 0 to AC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V RW Uni RA US
21.10 Rated power factor {0.43}* 0 000 to 1.000 VT> 0.000 to 1.000 0.85 RW Uni RA US
21.11 Number of motor poles {0.42}* Auto to 120 pole (0 to 60) Auto (0) 6 POLE (3) RW Txt US
Size 1 to 5: 0.000 to 65.000 
21.12 Stator resistance 0.0 RW Uni RA US
Size 6: 0.000 to 65.000 x 10 m
21.13 Voltage offset 0.0 to 25.0 V 0.0 RW Uni RA US
21.14 Transient inductance (Ls) 0.000 to 500.000mH 0.000 RW Uni RA US
21.15 Motor 2 active OFF (0) or On (1) RO Bit NC PT
21.16 Thermal time constant {0.45}* 0.0 to 3000.0 89.0 20.0 RW Uni US
21.17 Speed controller Kp gain {0.07}* 0.000 to 6.5535 rad s-1 0.0300 0.0100 RW Uni US
21.18 Speed controller Ki gain {0.08}* 0.00 to 655.35 s/rad s-1 0.10 1.00 RW Uni US
0.00000 to 0.65535
21.19 Speed controller Kd gain {0.09}* 0.00000 RW Uni US
s-1/rad s-1
21.20 Encoder phase angle {0.43}* 0.0 to 359.9 electrical 0.0 RW Uni US
drv (0), SLot1 (1),
21.21 Speed feedback selector drv (0) RW Txt US
SLot2 (2), SLot3 (3)
200V: 75, 400V: 150,
21.22 Current controller Kp gain {0.38}* 0 to 30,000 20 RW Uni US
575V: 180, 690V: 215
200V: 1,000, 400V: 2,000,
21.23 Current controller Ki gain {0.39}* 0 to 30,000 40 RW Uni US
575V: 2,400, 690V: 3,000
21.24 Stator inductance (Ls) VT> 0 00 to 5,000.00 mH 0.00 RW Uni RA US
21.25 Motor saturation breakpoint 1 VT> 0 to 100% of rated flux 50 RW Uni US
21.26 Motor saturation breakpoint 2 VT> 0 to 100% of rated flux 75 RW Uni US
21.27 Motoring current limit 0 to MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
21.28 Regen current limit 0 to MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
21.29 Symmetrical current limit {0.06}* 0 to MOTOR2_CURRENT_LIMIT_MAX % 165.0 175.0 RW Uni RA US
21.30 Motor volts per 1,000 rpm, Ke SV> 0 to 10,000 V 98 RW Uni US
21.31 Motor pole pitch 0.00 to 655.35 mm 0 00 RW Uni US
* The menu 0 references are only valid when the second motor map parameters have been made active by setting Pr 11.45 to 1. (The second motor
map only becomes effective when the output stage of the drive is not enabled, i.e. inh, rdY, or trip states.)
When the second motor map parameters are active, the symbol ‘Mot2’ will appear in the lower left hand corner of the LCD display or the decimal point
that is second from the right on the first row of the LED display is lit.

Encoder phase angle (servo mode only)

With drive software version V01.08.00 onwards, the encoder phase angles in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 are copied to the SMARTCARD when using
any of the SMARTCARD transfer methods.
With drive software version V01.05.00 to V01.07.01, the encoder phase angles in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 are only copied to the SMARTCARD
WARNING
when using either Pr 0.30 set to Prog (2) or Pr xx.00 set to 3yyy.
This is useful when the SMARTCARD is used to back-up the parameter set of a drive but caution should be used if the SMARTCARD is used to
transfer parameter sets between drives.
Unless the encoder phase angle of the servo motor connected to the destination drive is known to be the same as the servo motor connected
to the source drive, an autotune should be performed or the encoder phase angle should be entered manually into Pr 3.25 (or Pr 21.20). If the
encoder phase angle is incorrect the drive may lose control of the motor resulting in an O.SPd or Enc10 trip when the drive is enabled.
With drive software version V01.04.00 and earlier, or when using software version V01.05.00 to V01.07.01 and Pr xx.00 set to 4yyy is used,
then the encoder phase angles in Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 are not copied to the SMARTCARD. Therefore, Pr 3.25 and Pr 21.20 in the destination
would not be changed during a transfer of this data block from the SMARTCARD.

11.20 Menu 22: Additional Menu 0 set-up

Default()
Parameter Range() Type
OL VT SV
22.01 Parameter 0.31 set-up Pr 1.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 11.33 RW Uni PT US
22.03 Parameter 0.33 set-up Pr 1.00 to Pr 21.51 Pr 6.09 Pr 5.16 Pr 0.00 RW Uni PT US

11.21 Advanced features 11.21.1 Reference modes

This section gives information on some of the advanced functions of the 1.14 Reference selector
drive. For additional information see the Advanced User Guide.
RW Txt NC US
Reference modes Pr 1.14, Pr 1.15 and Pr 8.39 A1.A2 (0), A1.Pr (2), A2.Pr (2),
 Pr (3), PAd (4), Prc (5)
 A1.A2 (0)
Braking modes Pr 2.04 and Pr 2.08
S ramps Pr 2.06 and Pr 2.07
Torque modes Pr 4.08 and Pr 4.11 1.15 Preset reference selector
Stop modes Pr 6.01, Pr 6.06, Pr 6.07 and Pr 6.08 RW Uni NC US
Main loss modes Pr 6.03, Pr 6.48, Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14  0 to 9  0
Start/stop logic modes Pr 6.04 and Pr 6.40
Catch a spinning motor Pr 6.09 and Pr 5.40
8.39 T28 and T29 auto-selection disable
Position loop modes Pr 13.10
RW Bit US
Fast disable Pr 6.29
 OFF (0) or On (1)  OFF (0)
If Pr 8.39 is set to OFF (0), then the setting of Pr 1.14 automatically

changes the operation of digital inputs T28 and T29 by configuring the
destination parameters Pr 8.25 and Pr 8.26. To allow Pr 8.25 and Pr 8.26
to be changed manually by the user, the automatic set-up must be
disabled by setting Pr 8.39 to 1.
If Pr 8.39 is 0 and Pr 1.14 is changed, then a drive reset is required
before the function of terminal T28 or T29 will become active.
Table 11-7 Active reference
Digital Input T28 Digital Input T29

Pr 1.14 Pr 1.15 Pr 1.49 Pr 1.50 Active Reference
State Function State Function
0 1 1 Analog input 1
0 or 1 Local Remote
2 to 8 No function 1 or 2 2 to 8 Preset reference 2 to 8
A1.A2 (0) Jog forward**
Local Remote
9* 1 2 1 Analog input 2
No function 1 or 2 2 to 8 Preset reference 2 to 8
0 1 Analog input 1
0
1 2 Preset reference 2
0 Preset select bit 0 Preset select bit 1
1
A1.Pr (1) 1
1 1 Analog input 1
2 to 8 2 to 8 Preset reference 2 to 8
No function No function
1 Analog input 1
9*
2 to 8 Preset reference 2 to 8
0 1 Analog input 2
0
1
A2.Pr (2) 2
1 1 Analog input 2
1 Analog input 2
9*
2 to 8 Preset reference 2 to 8
0
Pr (3) 1 3
9* 1 to 8 Preset reference 1 to 8
PAd (4) No function No function 4 Keypad reference
Prc (5) No function No function 5 Precision reference
* Setting Pr 1.15 to 9 enables the Preset reference scan timer. With the ** Jog forward can only be selected when the drive is in either the ready
scan timer enabled analog 1 and preset references 2 to 8 are selected (rdy), inhibit (inh) or trip states.
automatically in turn. Pr 1.16 defines the time between each change.

Preset references
Preset references 1 to 8 are contained in Pr 1.21 to Pr 1.28. Controller
operational
Keypad reference
If Keypad reference is selected the drive sequencer is controlled directly
DC Bus voltage
by the keypad keys and the keypad reference parameter (Pr 1.17) is
selected. The sequencing bits, Pr 6.30 to Pr 6.34, and Pr 6.37 have no
effect and jog is disabled.
Precision reference
If Precision reference is selected the speed reference is given Pr 1.18
Motor Speed
and Pr 1.19.
Programmed
deceleration
rate
11.21.2 Braking Modes
2.04 Ramp mode select
RW Txt US
t
FASt (0), Std (1),
OL
 Std.hV (2)  Std (1) 2: Standard ramp with motor voltage boost
CL FASt (0), Std (1) This mode is the same as normal standard ramp mode except that the
motor voltage is boosted by 20%. This increases the losses in the motor
This parameter does not affect the acceleration ramp, as the ramp giving faster deceleration.
output always rises at the programmed acceleration rate subject to the
current limits. It is possible in under some unusual circumstances in
open-loop mode (i.e. highly inductive supply) for the motor to reach a low 2.08 Standard ramp voltage
speed in standard ramp mode, but not completely stop. It is also RW Uni RA US
possible if the drive attempts to stop the motor with an overhauling load 200V drive: 375
in any mode that the motor will not stop when standard ramp mode or 400V drive: EUR> 750
fast ramp mode is used. If the drive is in the deceleration state the rate of 0 to
 DC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V
 USA> 775
fall of the frequency or speed is monitored. If this does not fall for 10 575V drive: 895
seconds the drive forces the frequency or the speed reference to zero. 690V drive: 1075
This only applies when the drive is in the deceleration state and not
when the reference is simply set to zero. This voltage is used as the control level for standard ramp mode. If this
parameter is set too low the machine will coast to rest, and if it is set too
0: Fast ramp
high and no braking resistor is used the drive may give an over-volt ‘OV’
Fast ramp is used where the deceleration follows the programmed trip. The minimum level should be greater than the voltage produced on
deceleration rate subject to current limits. the DC Bus by the highest supply voltage. Normally the DC Bus voltage
1: Standard ramp will be approximately the rms supply line voltage x 2.
Standard ramp is used. During deceleration, if the voltage rises to the Care should be taken in the setting of this parameter. It is
standard ramp level (Pr 2.08) it causes a controller to operate, the output recommended that the setting should be at least 50V higher
of which changes the demanded load current in the motor. As the than the maximum expected level of the DC Bus voltage. If
controller regulates the link voltage, the motor deceleration increases as this is not done, the motor may fail to decelerate on a STOP
the speed approaches zero speed. When the motor deceleration rate WARNING command.
reaches the programmed deceleration rate the controller ceases to
operate and the drive continues to decelerate at the programmed rate. If
the standard ramp voltage (Pr 2.08) is set lower than the nominal DC 11.21.3 S ramps
Bus level the drive will not decelerate the motor, but it will coast to rest.
2.06 S ramp enable
The output of the ramp controller (when active) is a current demand that
is fed to the frequency changing current controller (Open-loop modes) or RW Bit US
the torque producing current controller (Closed-loop vector or Servo  OFF (0) or On (1)  OFF (0)
modes). The gain of these controllers can be modified with Pr 4.13 and
Pr 4.14. Setting this parameter enables the S ramp function. S ramp is disabled
during deceleration using standard ramp. When the motor is accelerated
again after decelerating in standard ramp the acceleration ramp used by
the S ramp function is reset to zero.
2.07 S ramp acceleration limit

RW Uni US
0.0 to 300.0
OL 3.1
s2/100Hz
VT   1.500
0.000 to 100.000
2
SV s /1000rpm 0.030
This parameter defines the maximum rate of change of acceleration/

deceleration. The default values have been chosen such that for the
default ramps and maximum speed, the curved parts of the S will be
25% of the original ramp if S ramp is enabled.

1: Torque control
Demanded Speed The torque demand is given by the sum of the torque reference and
Acceleration
Actual Speed the torque offset, if enabled. The speed is not limited in any way,
however, the drive will trip at the overspeed threshold if runaway
occurs.
2: Torque control with speed override
The output of the speed loop defines the torque demand, but is
Programmed limited between 0 and the resultant torque reference (Pr 4.08 and
ramp rate
Pr 4.09 (if enabled)). The effect is to produce an operating area as
S ramp shown below if the final speed demand and the resultant torque
acceleration reference are both positive. The speed controller will try and
ramp
accelerate the machine to the final speed demand level with a
torque demand defined by the resultant torque reference. However,
T/2 T/2 T/2 T/2 t
the speed cannot exceed the reference because the required torque
T T
would be negative, and so it would be clamped to zero.
Since the ramp rate is defined in s/100Hz or s/1000rpm and the S ramp Current
parameter is defined in s2/100Hz or s2/1000rpm, the time T for the
'curved' part of the S can be determined from:
Pr 4.08 +
T = S ramp rate of change / Ramp rate Pr 4.09 (if enabled)
Enabling S ramp increases the total ramp time by the period T since an
additional T/2 is added to each end of the ramp in producing the S.
Speed
11.21.4 Torque modes Pr 3.01
4.08 Torque reference
RW Bi US Depending on the sign of the final speed demand and the resultant
torque the four areas of operation shown below are poss ble.
 ±USER_CURRENT_MAX %  0.00
+ final speed demand - final speed demand
Parameter for main torque reference. The normal update rate for the + resultant torque + resultant torque
torque reference is 4ms. However if analog inputs 2 or 3 on the drive are
used as the source of the reference, the drive is in closed-loop vector or
servo mode and the analog inputs are in voltage mode with zero offset,
the sample time is reduced to 250s.
4.11 Torque mode selector

RW Uni US
OL 0 to 1
  0 + final speed demand - final speed demand
CL 0 to 4 -resultant torque - resultant torque
Open loop
If this parameter is 0 normal frequency control is used. If this parameter This mode of operation can be used where torque control is required, but
is set to 1 the current demand is connected to the current PI controller the maximum speed must be limited by the drive.
giving closed loop torque/current demand as shown below. The current 3: Coiler/uncoiler mode
error is passed through proportional and integral terms to give a Positive final speed demand:
frequency reference which is limited to the range: -SPEED_FREQ_MAX A positive resultant torque will give torque control with a positive
to +SPEED_FREQ_MAX. speed limit defined by the final speed demand. A negative resultant
torque will give torque control with a negative speed limit of -5rpm.
Current Frequency Negative final speed demand:
demand + reference A negative resultant torque will give torque control with a negative
P Pr 4.13
I Pr 4.14 speed limit defined by the final speed demand. A positive resultant
torque will give torque control with a positive speed limit of +5rpm.
-
Example of coiler operation:
Active
This is an example of a coiler operating in the positive direction. The final
current
speed demand is set to a positive value just above the coiler reference
speed. If the resultant torque demand is positive the coiler operates with
Closed loop vector and Servo a limited speed, so that if the material breaks the speed does not exceed
When this parameter is set to 1, 2 or 3 the ramps are not active while the a level just above the reference. It is also poss ble to decelerate the
drive is in the run state. When the drive is taken out of the run state, but coiler with a negative resultant torque demand. The coiler will decelerate
not disabled, the appropriate stopping mode is used. It is recommended down to -5rpm until a stop is applied. The operating area is shown in the
that coast stopping or stopping without ramps are used. However, if following diagram.
ramp stop mode is used the ramp output is pre-loaded with the actual
speed at the changeover point to avoid unwanted jumps in the speed
reference.
0: Speed control mode
The torque demand is equal to the speed loop output.

Stopping
Area for coiler operation, speed Phase 1 Phase 2 Comments
limited to ref and positve torque Mode
Final speed 0: Coast Inverter Drive cannot Delay in phase 2 allows

Torque
demand disabled be re-enabled rotor flux to decay
for 1s
1: Ramp Ramp down Wait for 1s with
Speed to zero inverter
frequency enabled
-5rpm
2: Ramp Ramp down Inject DC at
followed to zero level specified
Area for decelerating the coiler, reverse by DC frequency by Pr 6.06 for
speed limited and negative torque injection time defined by
Pr 6.07
Example of uncoiler operation:
3: DC Low Inject DC at The drive automatically
This is an example for an uncoiler operating in the positive direction. The
injection frequency level specified senses low speed and
final speed demand should be set to a level just above the maximum
with zero current by Pr 6.06 for therefore it adjusts the
normal speed. When the resultant torque demand is negative the
speed injection time defined by injection time to suit the
uncoiler will apply tension and try and rotate at 5rpm in reverse, and so
detection with Pr 6.07 application. If the injection
take up any slack. The uncoiler can operate at any positive speed
detection of current level is too small
applying tension. If it is necessary to accelerate the uncoiler a positive
low speed the drive will not sense
resultant torque demand is used. The speed will be limited to the final
before next low speed (normally a
speed demand. The operating area is the same as that for the coiler and
phase minimum of 50-60% is
is shown below:
required).
Area for accelerating 4: Timed Inject DC at
uncoiler: positive torque, DC level
limited speed injection specified by
Torque Speed reference braking Pr 6.06 for
stop time
specified by
Pr 6.07
Speed 5: Disable Inverter Allows the drive to be
disabled immediately disabled and
then re-enabled again
immediately if required.
-5rpm Area for normal uncoiler
Once modes 3 or 4 have begun the drive must go through the ready
operation: negative torque,
limited to low speed in reverse state before being restarted either by stopping, tripping or being
disabled.
4: Speed control with torque feed-forward If this parameter is set to DISABLE (5), the disable stopping mode is
The drive operates under speed control, but a torque value may be used when the run command is removed. This mode will allow the drive
added to the output of the speed controller. This can be used to improve to be started immediately by re-applying the run command. However, if
the regulation of systems where the speed loop gains need to be low for the drive is disabled by removing the drive enable (i.e. via the Enable
stability. SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) input or Pr 6.15 Drive
enable) then the drive cannot be re-enabled for 1s.
Closed loop vector and Servo
11.21.5 Stop modes Only one stopping phases exists and the ready state is entered as soon
6.01 Stop mode as the single stopping action is complete.
RW Txt US Stopping Mode Action

COASt (0), rP (1), rP.dcl 0: Coast Inhibits the inverter
OL (2), dcl (3), td.dcl (4),
rP (1) 1: Ramp Stop with ramp
diSAbLE (5)
  2: No ramp Stop with no ramp
VT COASt (0), rP (1), The motor can be stopped with position orientation after stopping. This
SV no.rP (2) no.rP (2) mode is selected with the position controller mode parameter (Pr 13.10).
When this mode is selected Pr 6.01 has no effect.
Open-loop
Stopping is in two distinct phases: decelerating to stop, and stopped.
6.06 Injection braking level
RW Uni RA US
OL  0.0 to 150.0 %  100.0
Defines the current level used during DC injection braking as a

percentage of motor rated current as defined by Pr 5.07.

6.07 Injection braking time Voltage level 200V drive 400V drive 575V drive 690V drive
RW Uni US Vuu 175 330 435
OL  0.0 to 25.0 s  1.0 Vml1 205* 410* 540*
Defines the time of injection braking during phase 1 with stopping modes Vml2 Vml1 - 10V Vml1 - 20V Vml1 - 25V
3 and 4, and during phase 2 with stopping mode 2 (see Pr 6.01).
Vml3 Vml1 + 10V Vml1 + 15V Vml1 + 50V
Vuu Restart 215 425 590
6.08 Hold zero speed
* Vml1 is defined by Pr 6.48. The values in the table above are the
RW Bit US
default values.
OL
OFF (0)
VT  OFF (0) or On (1)  6.48 Line power supply loss ride through detection level
SV On (1) RW Uni RA US
200V drive: 205
When this bit is set the drive remains active even when the run 0 to 400V drive: 410
command has been removed and the motor has reached standstill. The  DC_VOLTAGE_SET_MAX V
 575V drive: 540
drive goes to the 'StoP' state instead of the 'rdy' state. 690V drive: 540
The line power supply loss detection level can be adjusted using this
11.21.6 Line power supply loss modes parameter. If the value is reduced below the default value, the default
value is used by the drive. If the level is set too high, so that the line
6.03 Line power supply loss mode
power supply loss detection becomes active under normal operating
RW Txt US conditions, the motor will coast to a stop.
 diS (0), StoP (1), ridE.th (2)  diS (0)
4.13 Current loop P gain
0: diS RW Uni US
There is no line power supply loss detection and the drive operates
normally only as long as the DC bus voltage remains within specification
OL   All voltage ratings: 20
(i.e. >Vuu). Once the voltage falls below Vuu an under-voltage ‘UV’ trip 200V drive: 75
0 to 30,000 400V drive: 150
occurs. This will reset itself if the voltage rises above Vuu Restart, as CL   575V drive: 180
stated in the table below.
690V drive: 215
1: StoP - Open-loop
The action taken by the drive is the same as for ride through mode,
except the ramp down rate is at least as fast as the deceleration ramp 4.14 Current loop I gain
setting and the drive will continue to decelerate and stop even if the line
power supply is re-applied. If normal or timed injection braking is RW Uni US
selected the drive will use ramp mode to stop on loss of the supply. If OL   All voltage ratings: 40
ramp stop followed by injection braking is selected, the drive will ramp to
200V drive: 1,000
a stop and then attempt to apply dc injection. At this point, unless the line 0 to 30,000 400V drive: 2,000
power supply has been restored, the drive is likely to initiate a trip. CL   575V drive: 2,400
1: StoP - Closed-loop vector or Servo 690V drive: 3,000
The speed reference is set to zero and the ramps are disabled allowing
the drive to decelerate the motor to a stop under current limit. If the Line Open-loop
power supply is re-applied while the motor is stopping any run signal is These parameters control the proportional and integral gains of the
ignored until the motor has stopped. If the current limit value is set very current controller used in the open loop drive. As already mentioned the
low level the drive may trip UV before the motor has stopped. current controller either provides current limits or closed loop torque
control by modifying the drive output frequency. The control loop is also
2: ridE.th used in its torque mode during line power supply loss, or when the
The drive detects line power supply loss when the DC Bus voltage falls controlled mode standard ramp is active and the drive is decelerating, to
below Vml1. The drive then enters a mode where a closed-loop regulate the flow of current into the drive. Although the default settings
controller attempts to hold the DC Bus level at Vml1. This causes the have been chosen to give suitable gains for less demanding applications
motor to decelerate at a rate that increases as the speed falls. If the line it may be necessary for the user to adjust the performance of the
power supply is re-applied it will force the DC Bus voltage above the controller. The following is a guide to setting the gains for different
detection threshold Vml3 and the drive will continue to operate normally. applications.
The output of the line power supply loss controller is a current demand Current limit operation:
that is fed into the current control system and therefore the gain Pr 4.13 The current limits will normally operate with an integral term only,
and Pr 4.14 must be set up for optimum control. See parameters Pr 4.13 particularly below the point where field weakening begins. The
and Pr 4.14 for set-up details. proportional term is inherent in the loop. The integral term must be
The following table shows the voltage levels used by drives with each increased enough to counter the effect of the ramp which is still
voltage rating. active even in current limit. For example, if the drive is operating at
constant frequency and is overloaded the current limit system will try
to reduce the output frequency to reduce the load. At the same time
the ramp will try to increase the frequency back up to the demand
level. If the integral gain is increased too far the first signs of
instability will occur when operating around the point where field

weakening begins. These oscillations can be reduced by increasing is carried out. If Ls cannot be measured it can be calculated from
the proportional gain. A system has been included to prevent the steady state per-phase equivalent circuit of the motor as follows:
regulation because of the opposite actions of the ramps and the 2
 Lm 
current limit. This can reduce the actual level that the current limit L s = L s –  ---------
-
becomes active by 12.5%. This still allows the current to increase up  Lr 
to the current limit set by the user. However the current limit flag Ifs is the peak full scale current feedback = KC x 2 / 0.45. Where KC
(Pr 10.09) could become active up to 12.5% below the current limit is defined in Table 11-5.
depending on the ramp rate used.
Vfs is the maximum DC Bus voltage.
Torque control:
Again the controller will normally operate with an integral term only, Therefore:
particularly below the point where field weakening begins. The first Pr 4.13 = Kp = (L / 167s) x (KC x 2 / 0.45 / Vfs) x (256 / 5)
signs of instability will appear around base speed, and can be = K x L x KC
reduced by increasing the proportional gain. The controller can be Where:
less stable in torque control mode rather than when it is used for K = [2 / (0.45 x Vfs x 167s)] x (256 / 5)
current limiting. This is because load helps to stabilise the controller,
Drive voltage rating Vfs K
and under torque control the drive may operate with light load.
Under current limit the drive is often under heavy load unless the 200V 415V 2322
current limits are set at a low level. 400V 830V 1161
Line power supply loss and controlled standard ramp: 575V 990V 973
The DC bus voltage controller becomes active if line power supply 690V 1190V 809
loss detection is enabled and the drive supply is lost or controlled
This set-up will give a step response with minimum overshoot after a
standard ramp is being used and the machine is regenerating. The
step change of current reference. The approximate performance of the
DC bus controller attempts to hold the DC bus voltage at a fixed
current controllers will be as given below. The proportional gain can be
level by controlling the flow of current from the drive inverter into its
increased by a factor of 1.5 giving a similar increase in bandwidth,
DC bus capacitors. The output of the DC bus controller is a current
however, this gives at step response with approximately 12.5%
demand which is fed into the current PI controller as shown in the
overshoot.
following diagram.
Current Switching Current control Gain Phase

demand frequency sample time bandwidth delay
DC Bus
P Pr 4.13
voltage
I Pr 4.14
kHz s Hz s
controller
Frequency 3 167 TBA 1160
reference
DC Bus 4 125 TBA 875
capacitor
6 83 TBA 581
Ac ive current 8 125 TBA 625
12 83 TBA 415
Although it is not usually necessary the DC bus voltage controller 16 125 TBA 625
can be adjusted with Pr 5.31. However, it may often be necessary to The integral gain (Pr 4.14) is less critical and should be set so that
adjust the current controller gains to obtain the required
Pr 4.14 = Ki = Kp x 256 x T / m
performance. If the gains are not suitable it is best to set up the drive
in torque control first. Set the gains to a value that does not cause Where:
instability around the point at which field weakening occurs. Then m is the motor time constant (L / R).
revert back to open loop speed control in standard ramp mode. To R is the per phase stator resistance of the motor (i.e. half the
test the controller the supply should be removed while the motor is resistance measured between two phases).
running. It is l kely that the gains can be increased further if required
Therefore
because the DC bus voltage controller has a stabilising effect,
Pr 4.14 = Ki = (K x L x KC) x 256 x 167s x R / L
provided that the drive is not required to operate in torque control
mode. = 0.0427 x K x R x KC
Closed-loop vector and Servo The above equation gives a conservative value of integral gain. In some
The Kp and Ki gains are used in the voltage based current controller. applications where it is necessary for the reference frame used by the
The default values give satisfactory operation with most motors. drive to dynamically follow the flux very closely (i.e. high speed closed-
However it may be necessary to change the gains to improve the loop induction motor applications) the integral gain may need to have a
performance. The proportional gain (Pr 4.13) is the most critical value in significantly higher value.
controlling the performance. Either the value can be set by auto-tuning
(see Pr 5.12) or it can be set by the user so that 11.21.7 Start / stop logic modes
Pr 4.13 = Kp = (L / T) x (Ifs / Vfs) x (256 / 5)
6.04 Start / stop logic select
Where: RW Uni US
T is the sample time of the current controllers. The drive
compensates for any change of sample time, and so it should be  0 to 4  0
assumed that the sample time is equivalent to the lowest sample
rate of 167s. This parameter is provided to allow the user to select several predefined
L is the motor inductance. For a servo motor this is half the phase to digital input routing macros to control the sequencer. When a value
phase inductance that is normally specified by the manufacturer. For between 0 and 3 is selected the drive processor continuously updates
an induction motor this is the per phase transient inductance (Ls). the destination parameters for digital I/O T25, T26 and T27, and the
enable sequencer latching bit (Pr 6.40). When a value of 4 is selected
This is the inductance value stored in Pr 5.24 after the autotune test
the destination parameters for these digital I/O and Pr 6.40 can be
modified by the user.

If Pr 6.04 is changed then a drive reset is required before the function of used, a digital input must be used as a run permit or not stop input. The
T25, T26 or T27 will become active. digital input should write to Pr 6.39. The run permit or not stop input must
be made active to allow the drive to run. Making the run permit or not
Pr 6.04 T25 (Pr 8.22) T26 (Pr 8.23) T27 (Pr 8.24) Pr 6.40 stop input inactive resets the latch and stops the drive.
0
Pr 6.29 Pr 6.30 Pr 6.32 0 11.21.8 Catch a spinning motor
(Fast Disable) (Run Forward) (Run Reverse) (Non Latching)
Pr 6.39 Pr 6.30 Pr 6.32 1 6.09 Catch a spinning motor
1
(Run Permit) (Run Forward) (Run Reverse) (Latching) RW Uni US
Pr 6.29 Pr 6.34 Pr 6.33 0 OL 0 to 3 0
2
(Fast Disable) (Run) (Fwd/Rev) (Non Latching)  
Pr 6.39 Pr 6.34 Pr 6.33 1 CL 0 to 1 1
3
(Run Permit) (Run) (Fwd/Rev) (Latching)
Open-loop
User User User User
4 When the drive is enabled with this parameter at zero, the output
programmable programmable programmable programmable
frequency starts at zero and ramps to the required reference. When the
If Pr 6.04 has been set to a value of 0 to 3, then setting Pr 6.04 to 4 does drive is enabled with this parameter at a non-zero value, the drive
not automatically reconfigure terminals T25, T26 and T27 to their default performs a start-up test to determine the motor speed and then sets the
functions. To return terminals T25, T26 and T27 to their default initial output frequency to the synchronous frequency of the motor.
functions, one of the following operations should be performed.
The test is not carried out and the motor frequency starts at zero if one of
• Drive defaults should be restored. See section 5.8 Restoring the following is true.
parameter defaults on page 96 for details.
• Manually set Pr 6.04 to 4, Pr 6.40 to 0, Pr 8.22 to 10.33, Pr 8.23 to • The run command is given when the drive is in the stop state
• The drive is first enabled after power-up with Ur_I voltage mode
6.30, and Pr 8.24 to 6.32.
(Pr 5.14 = Ur_I).
Figure 11-37 Digital input connections when Pr 6.04 is set to 0 to 3
• The run command is given with Ur_S voltage mode (Pr 5.14 =
Pr 6.04 is set to 0 Pr 6.04 is set to 1 Ur_S).
With default parameters the length of the test is approximately 250ms,
21 21 however, if the motor has a long rotor time constant (usually large
+24V 22 +24V 22 motors) it may be necessary to extend the test time. The drive will do this
23 23 automatically if the motor parameters including the rated load rpm are
24 24 set up correctly for the motor.
25 Run Permit 25 For the test to operate correctly it is important that the stator resistance
Run Fwd 26 Run Fwd 26
(Pr 5.17 or Pr 21.12) is set up correctly. This applies even if fixed boost
(Pr 5.14 = Fd) or square law (Pr 5.14 = SrE) voltage mode is being used.
Run Rev 27 Run Rev 27
The test uses the rated magnetising current of the motor during the test,
28 28 therefore the rated current (Pr 5.07, Pr 21.07 and Pr 5.10, Pr 21.10) and
29 29 power factor should be set to values close to those of the motor,
30 30 although these parameters are not as critical as the stator resistance.
For larger motors it may be necessary to increase Pr 5.40 Spin start
31 31
boost from its default value of 1.0 for the drive to successfully detect the
motor speed.
Pr 6.04 is set to 2 Pr 6.04 is set to 3 It should be noted that a stationary lightly loaded motor with low inertia
might move slightly during the test. The direction of the movement is
21 21 undefined. Restrictions may be placed on the direction of this movement
22 22 and on the frequencies detected by the drive as follows:
+24V +24V
23 23 Pr 6.09 Function
24 24 0 Disabled
25 Run Permit 25 1 Detect all frequencies
Run 26 Run 26 2 Detect positive frequencies only
Fwd/Rev 27 Fwd/Rev 27 3 Detect negative frequencies only
28 28
29 29 Closed-loop vector and Servo
30 30
When the drive is enabled with this bit at zero, the post ramp reference
31 31 (Pr 2.01) starts at zero and ramps to the required reference. When the
drive is enabled with this bit at one, the post ramp reference is set to the
Key
motor speed.
Continuous contact
When closed-loop vector mode is used without position feedback, and
Momentary contact
catch a spinning motor is not required, this parameter should be set to
zero as this avoids unwanted movement of the motor shaft when zero
speed is required. When closed-loop vector mode without position
6.40 Enable sequencer latching feedback is used with larger motors it may be necessary to increase
Pr 5.40 Spin start boost from its default value of 1.0 for the drive to
RW Bit US
successfully detect the motor speed.
 OFF (0) or On (1)  OFF (0)
This parameter enables sequencer latching. When sequencer latching is

Non-rigid position control

In non-rigid position control the position loop is only active when the 'At
5.40 Spin start boost
Speed' condition is met (see Pr 3.06). This allows slippage to occur while
RW Uni US the speed error is high.
OL
 0.0 to 10.0  1.0 Speed
VT
Reference
If Pr 6.09 is set to enable the catch a spinning motor function in open-
loop mode or closed-loop vector mode without position feedback,
(Pr 3.24 = 1 or 3) this parameter defines a scaling function used by the
algorithm that detects the speed of the motor. It is likely that for smaller Actual
motors the default value of 1.0 is suitable, but for larger motors this
parameter may need to be increased. If the value of this parameter is too
large the motor may accelerate from standstill when the drive is enabled.
If the value of this parameter is too small the drive will detect the motor
speed as zero even if the motor is spinning.
Velocity feed forward

11.21.9 Position modes
The position controller can generate a velocity feed forwards value from
13.10 Position controller mode the speed of the reference encoder. The feed-forwards value is passed
to menu, and so ramps may be included if required. Because the
RW Uni US position controller only has a proportional gain, it is necessary to use
OL 0 to 2 velocity feed-forwards to prevent a constant position error that would be
  0 proportional to the speed of the reference position.
CL 0 to 6
If for any reason the user wishes to provide the velocity feed forward
This parameter is used to set the position controller mode as shown in from a source other than the reference position, the feed forward system
the table below. can be made inactive, i.e. Pr 13.10 = 2 or 4. The external feed forward
can be provided via Menu 1 from any of the frequency/speed references.
Parameter Feed forward However, if the feed forward level is not correct a constant position error
Mode will exist.
value active
0 Position controller disabled Relative jogging
If relative jogging is enabled the feedback position can be made to move
1 Rigid position control  relative the reference position at the speed defined by Pr 13.17.
2 Rigid position control
Orientation
3 Non-rigid position control  If Pr 13.10 is 5 the drive orientates the motor following a stop command.
4 Non-rigid position control If hold zero speed is enabled (Pr 6.08 = 1) the drive remains in position
5 Orientation on stop control when orientation is complete and hold the orientation position. If
hold zero speed is not enabled the drive is disabled when orientation is
Orientation on stop and when
6 complete.
drive enabled
If Pr 13.10 is 6 the drive orientates the motor following a stop command
Rigid position control and whenever the drive is enabled provided that hold zero speed is
In rigid position control the position error is always accumulated. This enabled (Pr 6.08 = 1). This ensures that the spindle is always in the
means that, if for example, the slave shaft is slowed down due to same position following the drive being enabled.
excessive load, the target position will eventually be recovered by When orientating from a stop command the drive goes through the
running at a higher speed when the load is removed. following sequence:
1. The motor is decelerated or accelerated to the speed limit
programmed in Pr 13.12, using ramps if these are enabled, in the
Speed Actual direction the motor was previously running.
2. When the ramp output reaches the speed set in Pr 13.12, ramps are
disabled and the motor continues to rotate until the position is found
Reference to be close to the target position (i.e. within 1/32 of a revolution). At
this point the speed demand is set to 0 and the position loop is
closed.
3. When the position is within the window defined by Pr 13.14, the
orientation complete indication is given in Pr 13.15.
The stop mode selected by Pr 6.01 has no effect if orientation is
enabled.
Equal Areas

11.21.10 Fast Disable

Software V01.10.00 and later
6.29 Hardware enable
RO Bit NC PT
 OFF (0) or On (1) 
This bit is a duplicate of Pr 8.09 and reflects the state of the enable input.
With software V01.10.00 and later, if the destination of one of the drive
digital I/O (Pr 8.21 to Pr 8.26) is set to Pr 6.29 and the I/O is set as an
input, the state of the input does not affect the value of this parameter as
it is protected, however, it does provide a fast disable function.
The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) input to the drive (T31)
disables the drive in hardware by removing the gate drive signals from
the inverter IGBT's and also disables the drive via the software system.
When the drive is disabled by de-activating the SAFE TORQUE OFF
(SECURE DISABLE) input (T31) there can be a delay of up to 20ms
(typically 8ms) before the drive is disabled. However, if a digital I/O is set
up to provide the fast disable function it is possible to disable the drive
within 600s of de-activating the input. To do this an enable signal
should be given to both the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE)
input (T31) and to the digital I/O selected for the fast disable function.
The state of the digital I/O including the effect of its associated invert
parameter is ANDed with the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE)
(T31) to enable the drive
If the safety function of the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE

DISABLE) input is required then there must not be a direct
connection between the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
DISABLE) input (T31) and any other digital I/O on the drive.
WARNING
If the safety function of the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE
DISABLE) input and the fast disable function is required then
the drive should be given two separate independent enable
signals. A safety related enable from a safe source
connected to the SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE)
input on the drive. A second enable connected to the digital
I/O on the drive selected for the fast disable function. The
circuit must be arranged so that a fault which causes the fast
input to be forced high cannot cause the SAFE TORQUE
OFF (SECURE DISABLE) input to be forced high, including
the case where a component such as a blocking diode has
failed.

12 Technical Data
12.1 Drive technical data
12.1.1 Power and current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and temperature)
For a full explanation of ‘Normal Duty’ and ‘Heavy Duty’ refer to section 2.1 Ratings on page 7.
Table 12-1 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40°C (104°F) ambient
Normal Duty Heavy Duty
Model Maximum permissible continuous output Maximum permissible continuous output
Nominal Nominal
current (A) for the following switching current (A) for the following switching
rating rating
frequencies frequencies
LS CT kW hp 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz kW hp 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
SPz 1M/TL SP0201* 0.37 0.5 2.2 0.37 0.5 2.2
SPz 1 2M/TL SP0202* 0.55 0.75 3.1 0.55 0.75 3.1
SPz 1 5M/TL SP0203* 0.75 1.0 4.0 0.75 1.0 4.0
SPz 2M/TL SP0204* 1.1 1.5 5.7 1.1 1.5 5.7
SPz 2 5M/TL SP0205* 1.5 2.0 7.5 1.5 2.0 7.5
SP 1.5TL SP1201 1.1 1.5 5.2 0.75 1.0 4.3
SP 2TL SP1202 1.5 2.0 6.8 1.1 1.5 5.8
SP 2.5TL SP1203 2.2 3.0 9.6 1.5 2.0 7.5
SP 3.5TL SP1204 3.0 3.0 11.0 2.2 3.0 10.6
SP 4.5TL SP2201 4.0 5.0 15 5 3.0 3.0 12.6
SP 5.5TL SP2202 5.5 7.5 22 0 4.0 5.0 17.0
SP 8TL SP2203 7.5 10 28.0 27.9 24.8 21.8 5.5 7.5 25.0 24.2 22.5 19.6 17.2
SP11TL SP3201 11 15 42.0 7.5 10 31.0
SP 16TL SP3202 15 20 54.0 48.5 11 15 42.0 41.3
SP 22TL SP4201 18.5 25 68.0 15 20 56.0
SP 27TL SP4202 22 30 80.0 18.5 25 68.0
SP 33TL SP4203 30 40 104 22 30 80.0
SP 40TL SP5201 37 50 130 30 40 105
SP 50TL SP5202 45 60 154 143.2 37 50 130 121.7 102.1
SPz 1T SP0401* 0.37 0.5 1.3 0.37 0.5 1.3
SPz 1.2T SP0402* 0.55 0.75 1.7 0.55 0.75 1.7
SPz 1.5T SP0403* 0.75 1.0 2.1 0.75 1.0 2.1
SPz 2T SP0404* 1.1 1.5 3.0 2.53 1.1 1.5 3.0 2.53
SPz 2.5T SP0405* 1.5 2.0 4.2 3.57 2.53 1.5 2.0 4.2 3.57 2.53
SP 1.5T SP1401 1.1 1.5 2.8 0.75 1.0 2.1
SP 2T SP1402 1.5 2.0 3.8 1.1 2.0 3.0
SP 2.5T SP1403 2.2 3.0 5.0 1.5 3.0 4.2
SP 3.5T SP1404 3.0 5.0 6.9 5.9 2.2 3.0 5.8 5.4 4.3
SP 4.5T SP1405 4.0 5.0 8.8 7.4 5.7 3.0 5.0 7.6 5.6 4.4
SP 5.5T SP1406 5.5 7.5 11.0 10.0 7.4 5.7 4.0 5.0 95 9.2 7.7 5.6 4.4
SP 8T SP2401 7.5 10 15.3 12.7 10.1 5.5 10 13.0 12.6 9.6 7.6
SP 11T SP2402 11 15 21.0 19.5 16.7 12.7 10.0 7.5 10 16.5 14.9 12.6 9.6 7.6
SP 16T SP2403 15 20 29.0 27.2 23.2 20.0 15.0 11.8 11 20 25.0 23.7 19.9 16.9 12.8 10.1
SP 20T SP2404* 15 20 29.0 26.6 22.5 16.5 12.5 15 20 29.0 25.8 20.5 16.8 12.1 7.9
SP 22T SP3401 18.5 25 35.0 30.3 22.4 17.4 15 25 32.0 30.3 25.3 18.6 14.5
SP 27T SP3402 22 30 43.0 39.5 32.8 24.0 18.5 18.5 30 40.0 33.8 28.1 20.5 15.7
SP 33T SP3403 30 40 56.0 48.7 39.5 32.8 24.0 22 30 46.0 41.8 33.8 28.1 20.5
SP 40T SP4401 37 50 68.0 62.0 30 50 60.0 51.9 42.4
SP 50T SP4402 45 60 83.0 74.0 63.0 37 60 74.0 65.0 51.9 42.4
SP 60T SP4403 55 75 104 95.1 78.8 45 75 96.0 83.6 66.6 55.2
SP 75T SP5401 75 100 138 118 97.1 55 100 124 106.5 82.4 67.0
SP 100T SP5402 90 125 168 158 129 107 75 125 156 137 109 91.0
SP 120T SP6401 110 150 205 164.1 90 150 180 174.4 134.5
SP 150T SP6402 132 200 236 210.4 157.7 110 150 210 174.8 129.7
SP 3.5TM SP3501 3.0 3.0 5.4 2.2 2.0 4.1
SP 4.5TM SP3502 4.0 5.0 6.1 3.0 3.0 5.4
SP 5.5TM SP3503 5.5 7.5 8.4 4.0 5.0 6.1
SP 8TM SP3504 7.5 10 11.0 5.5 7.5 9.5
SP 11TM SP3505 11 15 16.0 7.5 10 12.0
SP 16TM SP3506 15 20 22.0 21.6 18.2 11 15 18.0 15.5
SP 22TM SP3507 18.5 25 27.0 26.0 21.6 18.1 15 20 22.0 18.4 15.5
SP 22TH SP4601 18.5 25 22.0 15 20 19.0
SP 27TH SP4602 22 30 27.0 18.5 25 22.0
SP 33TH SP4603 30 40 36.0 33.9 22 30 27.0
SP 40TH SP4604 37 50 43.0 41.3 33.7 30 40 36.0 33.9
SP 50TH SP4605 45 60 52.0 51.9 41.2 33.7 37 50 43.0 41.3 33.7
SP 60TH SP4606 55 75 62.0 61.3 48.4 39.6 45 60 52.0 44.7 36.5
SP 75TH SP5601 75 100 84 69 54 55 75 63 52 41
SP 100TH SP5602 90 125 99 91 69 54 75 100 85 69 52 41
SP 120TH SP6601 110 150 125 100 74 90 125 100 74
SP 150TH SP6602 132 175 144 100 74 110 150 125 100 74
NOTE For the definition of ambient temperature, see section 3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient temperature on page 39.

*See SPz and SP2404 power and current ratings on page 243.
Table 12-2 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 40°C (104°F) ambient with IP54 insert and standard fan installed
Model Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for the Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for the
following switching frequencies following switching frequencies
LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
SP 1.5TL SP1201 5.2 4.3
SP 2TL SP1202 6.8 5.8
SP 2.5TL SP1203 9.6 9.3 8.2 7.3 7.5 7.3
SP 3.5TL SP1204 11.0 10.6 9.7 9.0 7.7 6.6 10.6 10.5 9.7 9.0 7.7 6.6
SP 4.5TL SP2201 15.5 12.6
SP 5.5TL SP2202 22.0 20.7 18.0 15.7 17.0 15.5
SP 8TL SP2203 24.5 23.7 22.0 20.5 17.9 15.6 24.2 23.4 21.8 20.3 17.7 15.5
SP 1.5T SP1401 2.8 2.1
SP 2T SP1402 3.8 2.9 3.0 2.9
SP 2.5T SP1403 5.0 3.9 2.9 4.2 3.9 2.9
SP 3.5T SP1404 6.9 6.5 5.4 3.9 2.9 5.8 5.4 3.9 2.9
SP 4.5T SP1405 8.3 7.3 5.8 4.7 3.2 2.3 7.6 7.3 5.8 4.7 3.2 2.3
SP 5.5T SP1406 8.3 7.3 5.8 4.7 3.2 2.3 8.2 7.3 5.8 4.7 3.2 2.3
SP 8T SP2401 15.3 13.3 10.1 7.9 13.0 12.6 9.4 7.3
SP 11T SP2402 20.1 18.4 15.6 13.4 10.1 7.9 16.5 14.9 12.3 9.3 7.2
SP 16T SP2403 21.7 19.7 16.4 13.9 10.2 7.7 21.6 19.6 16.4 13.8 10.2 7.7
SP 20T SP2404* 20.1 17.7 14.0 11.2 7.3 4.6 20.1 17.7 14.0 11.2 7.3 4.6
NOTE
For the definition of ambient temperature, see section 3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient temperature on page 39.
SPz and SP2404 power and current ratings

All drive models are dual rated except for SPz and model SP2404 which only have a Heavy Duty rating. However, if the current limits in 4.05 to
Pr 4.07 are set to a maximum of 110% and the switching frequency is greater than 3kHz, then the drive can be used at a maximum continuous current
higher than the Heavy Duty rating. See the Normal Duty ratings in Table 12-1, Table 12-2 and Table 12-3. Normal Duty ratings exist for the SPz and
SP2404 above 3kHz when the overload is reduced from the default value 165% in open loop or 175% in closed loop, to 110%.
If the current limits in Pr 4.05 to Pr 4.07 are set higher than 110% then the Heavy Duty current ratings are applicable.

Table 12-3 Maximum permissible continuous output current @ 50°C (122°F) ambient
Model Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for the Maximum permissible continuous output current (A) for the
following switching frequencies following switching frequencies
SPz 1M/TL SP0201* 2.2 2.2
SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202* 3.1 3.1
SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203* 4.0 4.0
SPz 2M/TL SP0204* 5.7 5.7
SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205* 7.5 6.6 75 6.6
SP 1.5TL SP1201 5.2 4.3
SP 2TL SP1202 6.8 5.8
SP 2.5TL SP1203 9.6 9.0 7.5
SP 3.5TL SP1204 11.0 10.9 9.5 8.3 10.6 9.5 8.3
SP 4.5TL SP2201 15.5 13.5 11.5 12.6 11.4
SP 5.5TL SP2202 19.7 18 9 17.3 15.9 13.5 11.5 17.0 15.7 13.4 11.4
SP 8TL SP2203 19.5 18.6 17.2 15.8 13.4 11.5 19.2 18.4 17.0 15.7 13.3 11.4
SP11TL SP3201 42.0 38.2 31.0
SP 16TL SP3202 54.0 52.8 47.0 38.2 42.0 37.2
SP 22TL SP4201 68.0 56.0
SP 27TL SP4202 80.0 68.0
SP 33TL SP4203 87.4 80.0
SP 40TL SP5201 130 0 105.0 96.1
SP 50TL SP5202 143.0 129.2 130.0 110.1 92.3
SPz 1T SP0401* 1.3 13 1.28
SPz 1.2T SP0402* 1.7 1.7 1.61
SPz 1.5T SP0403* 2.1 2.1 1.91
SPz 2T SP0404* 3.0 2.08 30 2.08
SPz 2.5T SP0405* 4.2 3.02 2.08 4.2 3.02 2.08
SP 1.5T SP1401 2.8 2.1
SP 2T SP1402 3.8 3.0
SP 2.5T SP1403 5.0 3.9 42 3.8
SP 3.5T SP1404 6.9 5.1 3.9 5.8 4.8 3.7
SP 4.5T SP1405 8.8 7.3 6.0 4.2 3.1 7.6 72 6.0 4.2 3.1
SP 5.5T SP1406 10.1 90 7.3 6.0 4.2 3.1 9.5 9.0 72 6.0 4.2 3.1
SP 8T SP2401 15.3 14.2 11 8 10.0 7.3 5.5 13.0 11.7 9.9 7.3 5.5
SP 11T SP2402 15.7 14.2 11 8 10.0 7.3 5.5 15.5 14.1 11.7 9.9 7.3 5.5
SP 16T SP2403 16.8 15.0 12.2 10.1 7.1 16.7 15.0 12.2 10.1 7.1 5.1
SP 20T SP2404* 22.3 19.8 15.8 12.8 8.6 5.9 22.3 19.8 14.0 11 2 7.3 4.6
SP 22T SP3401 35.0 31.0 25.8 18.7 14.2 32.0 27.4 22.8 16.7 12.9
SP 27T SP3402 43.0 39.5 31.6 26.0 18.5 13.8 40.0 37.9 30.1 25.0 17.6 12.5
SP 33T SP3403 44.5 39.5 31.6 26.0 18.5 42.8 37.9 30.0 24.7 18.1
SP 40T SP4401 68.0 66.8 54.9 60.0 46.7 38.3
SP 50T SP4402 83.0 81.6 66.8 54.9 68.2 60.0 46.7 38.3
SP 60T SP4403 86.5 86.2 71.3 59.3 86.5 74.7 60.1 49.8
SP 75T SP5401 138 105.9 87.4 112.7 96.4 74.5 59.9
SP 100T SP5402 141 140 112 92 140 123 99.0 82.0
SP 120T SP6401 191.5 190.1 147.6 180 157.9 121.5
SP 150T SP6402 198.4 180.6 138.1 190 157.9 116.2
SP 3.5TM SP3501 5.4 4.1
SP 4.5TM SP3502 6.1 5.4
SP 5.5TM SP3503 8.4 6.1
SP 8TM SP3504 11.0 9.5
SP 11TM SP3505 16.0 14.7 12.0
SP 16TM SP3506 22.0 17.8 14.7 18.0 16.8 13.9
SP 22TM SP3507 24.6 22.0 17.8 14.7 22.0 20.4 16.7 13.9
SP 22TH SP4601 22.0 19.0
SP 27TH SP4602 27 0 24.7 22.0
SP 33TH SP4603 36.0 30.7 24.7 27.0
SP 40TH SP4604 43.0 39.6 30.7 24.7 36.0 30.7 24.7
SP 50TH SP4605 45.6 39.5 30.7 24.7 43.0 39.6 30.7 24.7
SP 60TH SP4606 51.9 44.9 34.7 27.7 51.9 44.9 34.7 27.7
SP 75TH SP5601 83 69 51 40 63 47 38
SP 100TH SP5602 83 69 51 40 75 62 45 36
SP 120TH SP6601 98 81 59 98 81 59
SP 150TH SP6602 98 81 59 98 81 59
NOTE
For the definition of ambient temperature, see section 3.7 Enclosure design and drive ambient temperature on page 39.
*See SPz and SP2404 power and current ratings on page 243.

12.1.2 Power dissipation

Table 12-4 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient
Drive losses (W) taking into consideration any current derating for the given conditions
Model
Nominal Nominal
rating 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz rating 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
LS CT kW hp kW hp
SPz 1M/TL SP0201 0.37 0.5 60 70 0.37 0.5 60 70
SPz 1 2M/TL SP0202 0.55 0.75 60 70 80 0.55 0.75 60 70 80
SPz 1 5M/TL SP0203 0.75 1.0 70 80 90 0.75 1.0 70 80 90
SPz 2M/TL SP0204 1.1 1.5 90 100 110 1.1 1.5 90 100 110
SPz 2 5M/TL SP0205 1.5 2.0 100 110 120 130 1.5 2.0 100 110 120 130
SP 1.5TL SP1201 1.1 1.5 73 75 78 82 89 96 0.75 1 67 69 72 75 81 87
SP 2TL SP1202 1.5 2.0 85 87 91 96 104 113 1.1 1.5 78 80 83 87 95 102
SP 2.5TL SP1203 2.2 3.0 107 110 116 121 132 144 1.5 2.0 91 93 98 102 111 121
SP 3.5TL SP1204 3.0 3.0 118 122 129 137 153 169 2.2 3.0 115 118 126 134 149 164
SP 4.5TL SP2201 4.0 5.0 155 161 173 186 210 235 3.0 3.0 133 139 150 160 182 203
SP 5.5TL SP2202 5.5 7.5 210 218 234 250 282 314 4.0 5.0 170 176 190 203 229 256
SP 8TL SP2203 7.5 10 272 282 302 320 315 5.5 7.5 245 254 263 261 259 258
SP11TL SP3201 11 15 331 347 380 412 477 7.5 10 260 272 297 321 370
SP 16TL SP3202 15 20 431 451 492 532 551 11 15 349 365 398 430 486
SP 22TL SP4201 18.5 25 517 541 589 637 15 20 428 448 488 528
SP 27TL SP4202 22 30 611 639 694 750 18.5 25 517 541 589 637
SP 33TL SP4203 30 40 810 845 916 987 22 30 611 639 694 750
SP 40TL SP5201 37 50 1250 1340 1540 1730 30 40 1000 1080 1240 1400
SP 50TL SP5202 45 60 1500 1620 1840 1910 37 50 1250 1340 1440 1360
SPz 1T SP0401 0.37 0.5 50 60 70 0.37 0.5 50 60 70
SPz 1.2T SP0402 0.55 0.75 50 60 70 80 0.55 0.75 50 60 70 80
SPz 1.5T SP0403 0.75 1.0 60 70 80 90 0.75 1.0 60 70 80 90
SPz 2T SP0404 1.1 1.5 70 80 90 110 120 1.1 1.5 70 80 90 110 120
SPz 2.5T SP0405 1.5 2.0 80 90 100 110 120 1.5 2.0 80 90 100 110 120
SP 1 5T SP1401 1.1 1.5 66 69 77 85 101 116 0.75 1.0 60 64 70 77 91 104
SP 2T SP1402 1.5 2.0 74 78 88 97 116 135 1.1 2.0 67 71 79 88 104 120
SP 2 5T SP1403 2.2 3.0 84 90 101 112 135 157 1.5 3.0 77 82 92 102 122 142
SP 3 5T SP1404 3.0 5.0 102 109 123 137 166 174 2.2 3.0 92 98 110 123 141 144
SP 4 5T SP1405 4.0 5.0 123 134 157 179 196 197 3.0 5.0 112 122 141 161 163 165
SP 5 5T SP1406 5.5 7.5 146 160 187 198 196 197 4.0 5.0 131 143 163 165
SP 8T SP2401 7.5 10 186 202 234 266 283 282 5.5 10 164 178 206 229 231
SP 11T SP2402 11 15 248 269 291 286 283 281 7.5 10 201 218 230 229 231
SP 16T SP2403 15 20 313 320 315 316 11 20 272 282 279 278 279 282
SP 20T SP2404 15 20 311 343 376 15 20 311 308 301 299 302 284
SP 22T SP3401 18.5 25 384 420 490 489 471 462 15 25 356 388 431 418 406 402
SP 27T SP3402 22 30 461 503 541 521 500 491 18.5 30 433 473 470 455 441 435
SP 33T SP3403 30 40 583 563 535 517 498 22 30 500 494 470 455 441
SP 40T SP4401 37 50 714 781 914 956 30 50 629 689 704 674
SP 50T SP4402 45 60 882 961 995 970 37 60 780 745 704 674
SP 60T SP4403 55 75 1070 1158 1217 1144 45 75 976 920 854 821
SP 75T SP5401 75 100 1471 1618 1640 1560 55 100 1311 1236 1150 1112
SP 100T SP5402 90 125 1830 1881 1781 1717 75 125 1681 1600 1508 1464
SP 120T SP6401 110 150 2058 2259 2153 90 150 1817 1935 1772
SP 150T SP6402 132 200 2477 2455 2255 110 150 2192 2042 1888
SP 3.5TM SP3501 3.0 3.0 127 141 168 196 2.2 2.0 112 124 148 172
SP 4.5TM SP3502 4.0 5.0 135 150 180 209 3.0 3.0 127 141 168 196
SP 5.5TM SP3503 5.5 7.5 163 181 218 254 4.0 5.0 135 150 180 209
SP 8TM SP3504 7.5 10 197 219 263 306 5.5 7.5 178 198 237 276
SP 11TM SP3505 11 15 267 296 354 412 7.5 10 212 235 281 328
SP 16TM SP3506 15 20 362 399 475 471 11 15 300 332 396 405
SP 22TM SP3507 18.5 25 448 486 477 471 15 20 365 403 406 405
SP 22TH SP4601 18.5 25 409 470 590 711 15 20 360 413 519 625
SP 27TH SP4602 22 30 496 568 712 857 18.5 25 409 470 590 711
SP 33TH SP4603 30 40 660 754 941 1063 22 30 496 568 712 857
SP 40TH SP4604 37 50 798 908 1083 1058 30 40 660 754 941 1063
SP 50TH SP4605 45 60 985 1115 1080 1058 37 50 798 908 1083 1058
SP 60TH SP4606 55 75 1060 1179 1130 1105 45 60 873 987 1042 1023
SP 75TH SP5601 75 100 1818 2129 2258 2203 55 75 1345 1585 1763 1757
SP 100TH SP5602 90 125 2176 2320 2215 2189 75 100 1792 1744 1714 1706
SP 120TH SP6601 110 150 2573 2512 2438 90 125 2573 2512 2438
SP 150TH SP6602 132 175 3106 2512 2438 110 150 3106 2512 2438

Table 12-5 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient with IP54 insert and standard fan installed
Model
SP 1.5TL SP1201 73 75 78 82 89 96 67 69 72 75 81 87
SP 2TL SP1202 85 87 91 96 104 113 78 80 83 87 95 102
SP 2.5TL SP1203 107 110 116 118 91 93 98 102 111 118
SP 3.5TL SP1204 118 115 118
SP 4.5TL SP2201 155 161 173 186 210 235 133 139 150 160 182 203
SP 5.5TL SP2202 210 218 234 237 170 176 190 203 229 237
SP 8TL SP2203 237 237
SP 1.5T SP1401 66 69 77 85 101 116 60 64 70 77 91 104
SP 2T SP1402 74 78 88 97 116 118 67 71 79 88 104 118
SP 2.5T SP1403 84 90 101 112 118 77 82 92 102 118
SP 3.5T SP1404 102 109 118 92 98 110 118
SP 4.5T SP1405 118 112 118
SP 5.5T SP1406 118 118
SP 8T SP2401 186 202 234 237 164 178 206 229 226
SP 11T SP2402 237 201 218 230 224 223
SP 16T SP2403 237 237
SP 20T SP2404 225 220 225 220

Table 12-6 Losses @ 50°C (122°F) ambient

Model
SPz 1M/TL SP0201 60 70 60 70
SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202 60 70 80 60 70 80
SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203 70 80 90 70 80 90
SPz 2M/TL SP0204 90 100 110 90 100 110
SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205 100 110 120 100 110 120
SP 1.5TL SP1201 73 75 78 82 89 96 67 69 72 75 81 87
SP 2TL SP1202 85 87 91 96 104 113 78 80 83 87 95 102
SP 2.5TL SP1203 107 110 116 121 132 137 91 93 98 102 111 121
SP 3.5TL SP1204 118 122 129 137 115 118 126 134 137
SP 4.5TL SP2201 155 161 173 186 190 133 139 150 160 182 190
SP 5.5TL SP2202 190 170 176 190
SP 8TL SP2203 190 190
SP11TL SP3201 331 347 380 412 436 260 272 297 321 370
SP 16TL SP3202 431 451 480 463 439 349 365 398 430 439
SP 22TL SP4201 517 541 589 637 428 448 488 528
SP 27TL SP4202 611 639 694 750 517 541 589 637
SP 33TL SP4203 671 701 761 821 611 639 694 750
SP 40TL SP5201 1250 1340 1540 1730 1000 1080 1240 1290
SP 50TL SP5202 1380 1490 1700 1720 1250 1340 1300 1240
SPz 1T SP0401 50 60 70 50 60 70
SPz 1.2T SP0402 50 60 70 80 50 60 70 80
SPz 1.5T SP0403 60 70 80 90 60 70 80
SPz 2T SP0404 70 80 90 110 70 80 90 110
SPz 2.5T SP0405 80 90 100 110 80 90 100 110
SP 1.5T SP1401 66 69 97 85 101 116 60 64 70 77 91 104
SP 2T SP1402 74 78 88 97 116 135 67 71 79 88 104 120
SP 2.5T SP1403 84 90 101 112 135 137 77 82 92 102 122 135
SP 3.5T SP1404 102 109 123 137 92 98 110 123 132
SP 4.5T SP1405 123 134 137 112 122 137
SP 5.5T SP1406 137 131 137
SP 8T SP2401 186 190 164 178 190
SP 11T SP2402 190 190
SP 16T SP2403 190 190
SP 20T SP2404 245 245 229
SP 22T SP3401 384 420 437 423 407 396 356 388 393 382 372 369
SP 27T SP3402 461 462 439 424 406 396 433 448 423 412 392 372
SP 33T SP3403 470 456 436 422 405 464 448 422 408 400
SP 40T SP4401 714 781 898 852 629 689 638 617
SP 50T SP4402 882 944 898 852 716 689 638 617
SP 60T SP4403 877 949 912 875 876 820 775 750
SP 75T SP5401 1471 1616 1462 1411 1186 1118 1047 1009
SP 100T SP5402 1500 1644 1543 1480 1500 1434 1366 1333
SP 120T SP6401 1942 2118 1939 1817 1747 1610
SP 150T SP6402 2068 2108 1997 1979 1851 1715
SP 3.5TM SP3501 127 141 168 196 112 124 148 172
SP 4.5TM SP3502 135 150 180 209 127 141 168 196
SP 5.5TM SP3503 163 181 218 254 135 150 180 209
SP 8TM SP3504 197 219 263 306 178 198 237 276
SP 11TM SP3505 267 296 354 383 212 235 281 328
SP 16TM SP3506 362 399 390 384 300 332 372 369
SP 22TM SP3507 405 399 390 384 365 374 369
SP 22TH SP4601 409 470 590 711 360 413 519 625
SP 27TH SP4602 496 568 712 789 409 470 590 711
SP 33TH SP4603 660 754 805 789 496 568 712 789
SP 40TH SP4604 798 831 805 789 660 754 805 789
SP 50TH SP4605 850 831 805 789 798 831 805 789
SP 60TH SP4606 871 848 816 797 871 848 816 797
SP 75TH SP5601 1785 1743 1689 1657 1345 1585 1763 1757
SP 100TH SP5602 1785 1743 1689 1657 1609 1557 1502 1504
SP 120TH SP6601 2084 2036 1978 2084 2036 1978
SP 150TH SP6602 2084 2036 1978 2084 2036 1978

Table 12-7 Power losses from the front of the drive when through- When required each drive must have its own reactor(s). Three individual
panel mounted reactors or a single three-phase reactor should be used.
Frame size Power loss Reactor current ratings
The current rating of the line reactors should be as follows:
1 50W
Continuous current rating:
2 75W
Not less than the continuous input current rating of the drive
3 100W
Repetitive peak current rating:
4 204W
Not less than twice the continuous input current rating of the drive
5 347W
6 480W 12.1.5 Motor requirements
No. of phases: 3
12.1.3 Supply requirements
Maximum voltage:
Voltage: Unidrive SP (200V): 240V
SPX2XX (M/TL)200V to 240V ±10% Unidrive SP (400V): 480V
SPX4XX (T) 380V to 480V ±10% Unidrive SP (575V): 575V
SPX5XX (TM) 500V to 575V ±10% Unidrive SP (690V): 690V
SPX6XX (TH) 500V to 690V ±10%
Number of phases: 3*
12.1.6 Temperature, humidity and cooling method
Ambient temperature operating range:
* 200V SPz drives can also be used on a single phase supply. 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F).
Maximum supply imbalance: 2% negative phase sequence (equivalent Output current derating must be applied at ambient temperatures
to 3% voltage imbalance between phases). >40°C (104°F).
Frequency range: 48 to 65 Hz Minimum temperature at power-up:
-15°C (5°F), the supply must be cycled when the drive has warmed
For UL compliance only, the maximum supply symmetrical fault current up to 0°C (32°F).
must be limited to 100kA
Cooling method: Forced convection
Size 6 heatsink fan supply requirements
Maximum humidity: 95% non-condensing at 40°C (104°F)
Nominal voltage: 24V
Minimum voltage: 23.5V 12.1.7 Storage
Maximum voltage: 27V -40oC (-40oF) to +50oC (122oF) for long term storage, or to +70°C
Current drawn: 3.3A (158°F) for short term storage.
Recommended power supply: 24V, 100W, 4.5A
12.1.8 Altitude
Recommended fuse: 4A fast blow (I2t less than 20A2s)
Altitude range: 0 to 3,000m (9,900 ft), subject to the following conditions:
1,000m to 3,000m (3,300 ft to 9,900 ft) above sea level: de-rate the
12.1.4 Line reactors maximum output current from the specified figure by 1% per 100m
Input line reactors reduce the risk of damage to the drive resulting from (330 ft) above 1,000m (3,300 ft)
poor phase balance or severe disturbances on the supply network.
For example at 3,000m (9,900ft) the output current of the drive would
Where line reactors are to be used, reactance values of approximately have to be de-rated by 20%.
2% are recommended. Higher values may be used if necessary, but may
result in a loss of drive output (reduced torque at high speed) because of 12.1.9 IP / UL Rating
the voltage drop. The Unidrive SP is rated to IP20 pollution degree 2 (dry, non-conductive
contamination only) (NEMA 1). However, it is possible to configure the
For all drive ratings, 2% line reactors permit drives to be used with a drive to achieve IP54 rating (NEMA 12) at the rear of the heatsink for
supply unbalance of up to 3.5% negative phase sequence (equivalent to through-panel mounting (some current derating is required).
5% voltage imbalance between phases).
In order to achieve the high IP rating at the rear of the heatsink with
Severe disturbances may be caused by the following factors, for example: Unidrive SP size 1 and 2, it is necessary to seal a heatsink vent by fitting
• Power factor correction equipment connected close to the drive. the IP54 insert as shown in Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5 on page 24. For
• Large DC drives having no or inadequate line reactors connected to increased fan life time in a dirty environment the heatsink fan must be
the supply. replaced with an IP54 rated fan on size 1 to 4. Sizes 5 and 6 are installed
• Across the line (DOL) started motor(s) connected to the supply such with IP54 heatsink fans as standard. Contact the supplier of the drive for
that when any of these motors are started, the voltage dip exceeds details. Fitting of the IP54 insert and/or IP54 rated fan on sizes 1 and 2
20% requires output current derating to be applied, see section 12.1.1 Power
Such disturbances may cause excessive peak currents to flow in the and current ratings (Derating for switching frequency and
input power circuit of the drive. This may cause nuisance tripping, or in temperature) on page 242 for further details.
extreme cases, failure of the drive. The IP rating of a product is a measure of protection against ingress and
Drives of low power rating may also be suscept ble to disturbance when contact to foreign bodies and water. It is stated as IP XX, where the two digits
connected to supplies with a high rated capacity. (XX) indicate the degree of protection provided as shown in Table 12-8.
Line reactors are particularly recommended for use with the following
drive models when one of the above factors exists, or when the supply
capacity exceeds 175kVA:
SPz 1M/TL to 2.5M/TL
SPz 1T to 2.5T
1.5TL to 3.5TL
1.5T to 2T
Model sizes 4.5T to 60TH have an internal DC choke and 40TL to 150TH
have internal AC line chokes, so they do not require AC line reactors
except for cases of excessive phase unbalance or extreme supply
conditions.

Table 12-8 IP Rating degrees of protection Sinusoidal Vibration Test

Testing in each of three mutually perpendicular axes in turn.
First digit Second digit Referenced standard: IEC 60068-2-6: Test Fc:
Protection against contact and Protection against ingress of water Frequency range: 5 to 500 Hz
ingress of foreign bodies Severity: 3.5 mm peak displacement from 5 to 9 Hz
0 No protection 0 No protection 10 m/s² peak acceleration from 9 to 200 Hz
Protection against large 15 m/s² peak acceleration from 200 to 500 Hz
foreign bodies  > 50mm Protection against vertically Sweep rate: 1 octave/minute
1 1
(large area contact with the falling drops of water Duration: 15 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.
hand)
12.1.13 Starts per hour
Protection against medium
Protection against spraywater By electronic control: unlimited
2 size foreign bodies  > 12mm 2
(up to 15° from the vertical) By interrupting the AC supply: 20 (equally spaced)
(finger)
Protection against small 12.1.14 Start up time
Protection against spraywater
3 foreign bodies  > 2.5mm 3 This is the time taken from the moment of applying power to the drive, to
(up to 60 from the vertical)
(tools, wires) the drive being ready to run the motor:
Protection against granular
Protection against splashwater SPz and sizes 1 to 6: 4s
4 foreign bodies  > 1mm (tools, 4
(from all directions) 12.1.15 Output frequency / speed range
wires)
Protection against dust Protection against heavy Open-loop frequency range: 0 to 3,000Hz
5 deposit, complete protection 5 splash water (from all Closed-loop speed range: 0 to 40,000rpm
against accidental contact. directions, at high pressure)
Closed-loop frequency range: 0 to 1,250Hz*
Protection against dust
Protection against deckwater *(Limit to ~600Hz for good performance)
6 ingress, complete protection 6
(e.g. in heavy seas)
against accidental contact. 12.1.16 Accuracy and resolution
7 - 7 Protection against immersion Speed:
8 - 8 Protection against submersion The absolute frequency and speed accuracy depends on the accuracy
of the crystal used with the drive microprocessor. The accuracy of the
Table 12-9 UL enclosure ratings crystal is 100ppm, and so the absolute frequency/speed accuracy is
UL rating Description 100ppm (0.01%) of the reference, when a preset speed is used. If an
analog input is used the absolute accuracy is further limited by the
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily absolute accuracy of the analog input.
Type 1 to provide a degree of protection against limited
amounts of falling dirt. The following data applies to the drive only; it does not include the
performance of the source of the control signals.
Enclosures are intended for indoor use, primarily
Type 12 to provide a degree of protection against dust, Open loop resolution:
falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids. Preset frequency reference: 0.1Hz
Precision frequency reference: 0.001Hz
12.1.10 Corrosive gasses Closed loop resolution
Concentrations of corrosive gases must not exceed the levels given in: Preset speed reference: 0.1rpm
• Table A2 of EN 50178 Precision speed reference: 0.001rpm
• Class 3C2 of IEC 60721-3-3 Analog input 1: 16bit plus sign
This corresponds to the levels typical of urban areas with industrial Analog input 2: 10bit plus sign
activities and/or heavy traffic, but not in the immediate neighbourhood of Current:
industrial sources with chemical emissions. The resolution of the current feedback is 10bit plus sign. The typical
12.1.11 RoHS compliance accuracy of the current feedback is 2%.
Unidrive SP SPz meets EU directive 2002-95-EC for RoHS compliance. 12.1.17 Acoustic noise
12.1.12 Vibration The heatsink fan generates the majority of the acoustic noise produced by
Maximum recommended continuous vibration level 0.14 g r.m.s. broad- the drive. The heatsink fan on SPz and sizes 1 and 2 is a dual speed fan
band 5 to 200 Hz. and on size 3 to 6 it is a variable speed fan. The drive controls the speed
at which the fan runs based on the temperature of the heatsink and the
NOTE drive's thermal model system. On size 4 to 6 the minimum speed of the
This is the limit for broad-band (random) vibration. Narrow-band heatsink fan is 0 rpm. The size 3 to 6 is also installed with a variable
vibration at this level which coincides with a structural resonance could speed fan to ventilate the capacitor bank.
result in premature failure. Table 12-10 gives the acoustic noise produced by the drive for the
Bump Test heatsink fan running at the maximum and minimum speeds.
Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-29: Test Eb:
Severity: 18g (size 1 to 3), 6ms, half sine
10g (size 4 to 6), 6ms, half sine
No. of Bumps: 600 (100 in each direction of each axis)
Random Vibration Test
Referenced standard:IEC 60068-2-64: Test Fh:
Severity: 1.0 m²/s³ (0.01 g²/Hz) ASD from 5 to 20 Hz
-3 dB/octave from 20 to 200 Hz
Duration: 30 minutes in each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes.

Table 12-10 Acoustic noise data The value stated for the maximum continuous input current would only
be seen in one of the input phases. The current in the other two phases
< Date code M38  Date code M38
would be significantly lower.
Size Max speed Min speed Max speed Min speed
The values of maximum input current are stated for a supply with a 2%
dBA dBA dBA dBA
negative phase-sequence imbalance and rated at the maximum supply
SPz 65 53 fault current given in Table 12-13.
1 48 41 48 28
Table 12-13 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum input currents
2 54 45 54 35
3 56 43 56 43 Model Symmetrical fault level (kA)
4 53 All 100
5 72
6 72
12.1.18 Overall dimensions

H Height including surface mounting brackets
W Width
D Projection forward of panel when surface mounted
F Projection forward of panel when through-panel mounted
R Projection rear of panel when through-panel mounted
Table 12-11 Overall drive dimensions
Dimension
Size
H W D F R
322mm 62mm 226mm
SPz
(12.677in) (2.441in) (8.898in)
386mm 100mm
1
(15.197in) (3.937in) 219mm 139mm 80mm
155mm (8.622in) (5.472in) (3.150in)
2
389mm (6.102in)
(15.315in) 250mm 260mm 140mm 120mm
3
(9.843in) (10.236in) (5.512in) (4.724in)
547mm
4
(21.528in)
858mm 310mm 298mm 200mm 98mm
5
(33.752in) (12.205in) (11.732in) (7.874in) (3.858in)
1169mm
6
(46.016in)
12.1.19 Weights
Table 12-12 Overall drive weights
Size Model kg lb
SPz All 2.1 4.6
1.5TL to 3.5TL, 1.5T to 3.5T 5 11.0
1
4.5T & 5.5T 5.8 12.8
2 All 7 15.4
3 All 15 33.1
4 All 30 66.1
5 All 55 121.3
6 All 75 165.3
12.1.20 Input current, fuse and cable size ratings

The input current is affected by the supply voltage and impedance.
Typical input current
The values of typical input current are given to aid calculations for power
flow and power loss.
The values of typical input current are stated for a balanced supply.
Maximum continuous input current
The values of maximum continuous input current are given to aid the
selection of cables and fuses. These values are stated for the worst case
condition with the unusual combination of stiff supply with bad balance.

Table 12-14 SPz and size 1 to 3 input current, fuse and cable size ratings
European cable size EN60204 USA cable size UL508C
Typical Maximum Fuse rating
Model input continuous Fuse rating Class CC or J**
current input current Input Output Input Output
IEC gG <30A Class J
>30A
LS CT A A A mm2 mm2 A AWG AWG
SPz 1M/TL SP0201 3.2 (5.0)* 3.6 (5.0)* 6 0.75 0.75 10 16 24
SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202 4.8 (7.6)* 5.6 (7.6)* 10 1 0.75 10 16 22
SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203 6.0 (9.6)* 6.9 (9.6)* 12 1.5 0.75 16 14 20
SPz 2M/TL SP0204 7.9 (13.5)* 8.9 (13.5)* 16 2.5 0.75 20 12 18
SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205 10.6 (17.4)* 12.3 (17.4)* 20 4 0.75 20 12 18
SP 1.5TL SP1201 7.1 9.5 10 1.5 1.0 10 14 18
SP 2TL SP1202 9.2 11.3 12 1.5 1.0 15 14 16
SP 2.5TL SP1203 12.5 16.4 20 4.0 1.0 20 12 14
SP 3.5TL SP1204 15.4 19.1 20 4.0 1.5 20 12 14
SP 4.5TL SP2201 13.4 18.1 20 4.0 2.5 20 12 14
SP 5.5TL SP2202 18.2 22.6 25 4.0 4.0 25 10 10
SP 8TL SP2203 24.2 28.3 32 6.0 6.0 30 8 8
SP11TL SP3201 35.4 43.1 50 16 16 45 6 6
SP 16TL SP3202 46.8 54.3 63 25 25 60 4 4
SPz 1T SP0401 2.0 2.3 4 0.75 0.75 10 16 24
SPz 1.2T SP0402 2.6 2.8 4 0.75 0.75 10 16 24
SPz 1.5T SP0403 3.2 3.3 6 0.75 0.75 10 16 24
SPz 2T SP0404 4.3 4.4 6 0.75 0.75 10 16 22
SPz 2.5T SP0405 5.6 5.7 8 0.75 0.75 10 16 20
SP 1.5T SP1401 4.1 4.8 8 1.0 1.0 8 16 22
SP 2T SP1402 5.1 5.8 8 1.0 1.0 8 16 20
SP 2.5T SP1403 6.8 7.4 8 1.0 1.0 10 16 18
SP 3.5T SP1404 9.3 10.6 12 1.5 1.0 15 14 16
SP 4.5T SP1405 10 11 12 1.5 1.0 15 14 14
SP 5.5T SP1406 12.6 13.4 16 2.5 1.5 15 14 14
SP 8T SP2401 15.7 17 20 4.0 2.5 20 12 14
SP 11T SP2402 20.2 21.4 25 4.0 4.0 25 10 10
SP 16T SP2403 26.6 27.6 32 6.0 6.0 30 8 8
SP 20T SP2404 26.6 27.6 32 6.0 6.0 30 8 8
SP 22T SP3401 34.2 36.2 40 10 10 40 6 6
SP 27T SP3402 40.2 42.7 50 16 16 45 6 6
SP 33T SP3403 51.3 53.5 63 25 25 60 4 4
SP 3.5TM SP3501 5.0 6.7 8 1.0 1.0 10 16 18
SP 4.5TM SP3502 6.0 8.2 10 1.0 1.0 10 16 16
SP 5.5TM SP3503 7.8 11.1 12 1.5 1.0 15 14 14
SP 8TM SP3504 9.9 14.4 16 2.5 1.5 15 14 14
SP 11TM SP3505 13.8 18.1 20 4.0 2.5 20 12 14
SP 16TM SP3506 18.2 22.2 25 4.0 4.0 25 10 10
SP 22TM SP3507 22.2 26.0 32 6.0 6.0 30 8.0 8.0
**Fast acting or high speed class J fuses only.
NOTE
Cable sizes are from IEC60364-5-52:2001 table A.52.C with correction
factor for 40°C ambient of 0.87 (from table A52.14) for cable installation
method B2 (multicore cable in conduit).
Cable size may be reduced if a different installation method is used, or if
the ambient temperature is lower.
The recommended cable sizes above are only a guide. The mounting
and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some
cases smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger
cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer
to local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables.

Table 12-15 Size 4 and larger input current, fuse and cable size ratings
Fuse option 2
Fuse option 1 semiconductor fuse in series Cable size
Typical Maximum with HRC fuse or breaker
Model input input
current current North HRC Semi-
IEC class
America: IEC class gG conductor EN60204 UL508C
gR
Ferraz HSJ UL class J IEC class aR
Input Output Input Output
LS CT A A A A A A
mm2 mm2 AWG AWG
SP 22TL SP4201 62.1 68.9 100 90 90 160 25 25 3 3
SP 27TL SP4202 72.1 78.1 100 100 100 160 35 35 3 3
SP 33TL SP4203 94.5 99.9 125 125 125 200 70 70 1 1
SP 40TL SP5201 116 142 200 175 160 200 95 95 2/0 2/0
SP 50TL SP5202 137 165 250 225 200 250 120 120 4/0 4/0
SP 40T SP4401 61.2 62.3 80 80 80 160 25 25 3 3
SP 50T SP4402 76.3 79.6 110 110 100 200 35 35 2 2
SP 60T SP4403 94.1 97.2 125 125 125 200 70 70 1 1
SP 75T SP5401 126 131 200 175 160 200 95 95 2/0 2/0
SP 100T SP5402 152 156 250 225 200 250 120 120 4/0 4/0
SP 120T SP6401 224 241 315 300 250 315 2 x 70 2 x 70 2 x 2/0 2 x 2/0
SP 150T SP6402 247 266 315 300 300 350 2 x 120 2 x 120 2 x 4/0 2 x 4/0
SP 22TH SP4601 23 26.5 63 60 32 125 4 4 10 10
SP 27TH SP4602 26.1 28.8 63 60 40 125 6 6 8 8
SP 33TH SP4603 32.9 35.1 63 60 50 125 10 10 8 8
SP 40TH SP4604 39 41 63 60 50 125 16 16 6 6
SP 50TH SP4605 46.2 47.9 63 60 63 125 16 16 6 6
SP 60TH SP4606 55.2 56.9 80 60 63 125 25 25 4 4
SP 75TH SP5601 75.5 82.6 125 100 90 160 35 35 2 2
SP 100TH SP5602 89.1 94.8 125 100 125 160 50 50 1 1
SP 120TH SP6601 128 138 200 200 200 200 2 x 50 2 x 50 2x1 2x1
SP 150TH SP6602 144 156 200 200 200 200 2 x 50 2 x 50 2x1 2x1
NOTE 12.1.21 Maximum motor cable lengths

Cable sizes are from IEC60364-5-52:2001 table A.52.C with correction Table 12-16 Maximum motor cable lengths (200V drives)
factor for 40°C ambient of 0.87 (from table A52.14) for cable installation
method B2 (multicore cable in conduit). 200V Nominal AC supply voltage
Cable size may be reduced if a different installation method is used, or if Maximum permissible motor cable length for
Model
the ambient temperature is lower. each of the following frequencies
The recommended cable sizes above are only a guide. The mounting LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
and grouping of cables affects their current-carrying capacity, in some SPz 1M/TL SP0201
cases smaller cables may be acceptable but in other cases a larger
cable is required to avoid excessive temperature or voltage drop. Refer SPz 1.2M/TL SP0202
50m
to local wiring regulations for the correct size of cables. SPz 1.5M/TL SP0203
(165ft)
SPz 2M/TL SP0204
Inrush current
The drive will have an inrush current during power-up, the peak inrush is SPz 2.5M/TL SP0205
limited to the value shown below: SP 1.5TL SP1201 65m (210ft)
SPz 1M/TL to 2.5M/TL 18 A peak SP 2TL SP1202 100m (330ft)
SPz 1T to 2.5T 35 A peak SP 2.5TL SP1203 130m (425ft)
1.5TL to 3.5TL 18 A peak 37m
SP 3.5TL SP1204
1.5T to 5.5T 35 A peak 50m (120ft)
SP 4.5TL SP2201 75m
4.5TL to 8TL 12 A peak 100m (165ft)
8T to 20T 24 A peak
SP 5.5TL SP2202 200m 150m (330ft) (245ft)
11TL to 16TL 8 A peak SP 8TL SP2203 (660ft) (490ft)
22T to 33T 14 A peak SP11TL SP3201
3.5TM to 22TM 18 A peak SP 16TL SP3202
For sizes 4 to 6, the inrush current is limited by a controlled rectifier to SP 22TL SP4201
below the rated current of the drive. 250m 185m 125m 90m
SP 27TL SP4202
(820ft) (607ft) (410ft) (295ft)
NOTE SP 33TL SP4203
The inrush current for all drives after a brown-out can be larger than the SP 40TL SP5201 250m 185m 125m 90m
power-up inrush. SP 50TL SP5202 (820ft) (607ft) (410ft) (295ft)

Table 12-17 Maximum motor cable lengths (400V drives) Table 12-19 Maximum motor cable lengths (690V drives)
400V Nominal AC supply voltage 690V Nominal AC supply voltage
Maximum permissible motor cable length for Maximum permissible motor cable length for
Model Model
each of the following frequencies each of the following frequencies
LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
SPz 1T SP0401 SP 22TH SP4601
SPz 1.2T SP0402 SP 27TH SP4602
50m
SPz 1.5T SP0403 SP 33TH SP4603
(165ft)
SPz 2T SP0404 SP 40TH SP4604 90m
SPz 2.5T SP0405 SP 50TH SP4605 250m 185m 125m (295ft)
SP 1.5T SP1401 65m (210ft) SP 60TH SP4606 (820ft) (607ft) (410ft)
SP 2T SP1402 100m (330ft) SP 75TH SP5601
SP 2.5T SP1403 130m (425ft) SP 100TH SP5602
SP 3.5T SP1404 SP 120TH SP6601
SP 4.5T SP1405 SP 150TH SP6602
SP 5.5T SP1406 37m • Cable lengths in excess of the specified values may be used only
50m (120ft)
SP 8T SP2401 75m when special techniques are adopted; refer to the supplier of the
100m (245ft) (165ft)
SP 11T SP2402 200m 150m drive.
(330ft)
SP 16T SP2403 (660ft) (490ft) • The default switching frequency is 3kHz for Open-loop and Closed-
loop vector, and 6kHz for Servo.
SP 20T SP2404
The maximum cable length is reduced from that shown in Table 12-16
SP 22T SP3401
and Table 12-17 if high capacitance motor cables are used. For further
SP 27T SP3402 information, refer to section High-capacitance cables on page 67.
SP 33T SP3403
SP 40T SP4401 12.1.22 Braking resistor values
SP 50T SP4402 Table 12-20 Minimum resistance values and peak power rating for
90m the braking resistor at 40°C (104°F)
SP 60T SP4403
250m 185m 125m (295ft)
SP 75T SP5401 Model Minimum Instantaneous
(820ft) (607ft) (410ft)
SP 100T SP5402 resistance* power rating
LS CT  kW
SP 120T SP6401
SP 150T SP6402 SPz 1M/TL to 2.5M/TL SP0201 to SP0205 35 4.35
1.5TL to 2.5TL SP1201 to SP1203 43 3.5
Table 12-18 Maximum motor cable lengths (575V drives)
3.5TL SP1204 29 5.3
575V Nominal AC supply voltage
4.5TL to 8TL SP2201 to SP2203 18 8.9
Maximum permissible motor cable length for
Model 11TL & 16TL SP3201 & SP3202 5 30.3
each of the following frequencies
22TL to 33TL SP4201 to SP4203 5 30.3
LS CT 3kHz 4kHz 6kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz
75T & 100T SP5201 & SP5202 3.5 53
SP 3.5TM SP3501
1T to 2.5T SP0401 to SP0405 105 5.79
SP 4.5TM SP3502
1.5T to 3.5T SP1401 to SP1404 74 8.3
SP 5.5TM SP3503
200m 150m 100m 75m 4.5T & 5.5T SP1405 & SP1406 58 10.6
SP 8TM SP3504
(660ft) (490ft) (330ft) (245ft)
SP 11TM SP3505 8T to 20T SP2401 to SP2404 19 33.1
SP 16TM SP3506 22T to 33T SP3401 to SP3403 18 35.5
SP 22TM SP3507 40T & 50T SP4401 & SP4402 11 55.3
60T SP4403 9 67.6
75T & 100T SP5401 & SP5402 7 86.9
120T & 150T SP6401 & SP6402 5 122
3.5TM to 22TM SP3501 to SP3507 18 50.7
22TH to 60TH SP4601 to SP4606 13 95
75TH & 100TH SP5601 to SP5602 10 125
120TH & 150TH SP6601 to SP6602 10 125
* Resistor tolerance: ±10%

12.1.23 Torque settings 12.1.24 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Table 12-21 Drive control and relay terminal data This is a summary of the EMC performance of the drive. For full details,
refer to the EMC Data Sheet which can be obtained from the supplier of
Model Connection type Torque setting
the drive.
All Plug-in terminal block 0.5 N m 0.4 lb ft
Table 12-24 Immunity compliance
Table 12-22 Drive power terminal data Type of
Standard Test specification Application Level
immunity
High current
Model Low voltage Ground 6kV contact
AC terminals DC and IEC61000-4-2 Electrosta ic Module Level 3
size DC terminal EN61000-4-2 discharge
discharge
enclosure (industrial)
braking 8kV air discharge
Screw (M6) 10V/m prior to
Terminal block Radio modulation
SPz 4.0 N m IEC61000-4-3 Module Level 3
1.0 N m (0.73 b ft) frequency 80 - 1000MHz
(2.9 lb ft) EN61000-4-3 enclosure (industrial)
radiated field 80% AM (1kHz)
Terminal block (M4 screws) modulation
1
1.5 N m (1.1 b ft) 5/50ns 2kV transient
Plug-in at 5kHz repetition
Level 4
Terminal Stud (M5) Control lines (industrial
terminal block frequency via
block Terminal 4.0 N m harsh)
1.5 N m IEC61000-4-4 Fast transient coupling clamp
2 (M5 screws) block 2.9 lb ft EN61000-4-4 burst
(1.1 lb ft) 5/50ns 2kV transient
1.5 N m (M4 screws) at 5kHz repetition Level 3
Power lines
(1.1 lb ft) 1.5 N m frequency by direct (industrial)
(1.1 b ft) injection
Terminal block (M6 screws) 6.0 N m
3 AC supply
2.5 N m 1.8 lb ft 4.4 lb ft Common mode 4kV
lines: Level 4
4 1.2/50s waveshape
M10 stud M10 stud line to ground
5 15 N m 15 N m IEC61000-4-5 Differential mode AC supply
Surges 2kV lines: Level 3
6 (11.1 lb ft) (11.1 lb ft) EN61000-4-5
1.2/50s waveshape line to line
Torque tolerance 10% Signal ports
Lines to ground Level 2
to ground 1
Table 12-23 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes
10V prior to
Model size Terminal block description Max cable size Conducted modulation
IEC61000-4-6 Control and Level 3
radio 0.15 - 80MHz
All 11 way control connectors 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) EN61000-4-6
frequency 80% AM (1kHz)
power lines (industrial)
All 2 way relay connector 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG) modulation

-30% 10ms
1 and 2 6 way AC power connector 8 mm2 (8 AWG) IEC61000-4-11
Voltage dips
+60% 100ms AC power
and
4, 5 and 6 Low Voltage DC Enable connector 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) EN61000-4-11 -60% 1s ports
interruptions
<-95% 5s
6 Heatsink fan supply connector 1.5 mm2 (16 AWG) EN50082-1 Generic immunity standard for the
IEC61000-6-1 residen ial, commercial and light - Complies
EN61000-6-1 industrial environment
EN50082-2
Generic immunity standard for the
IEC61000-6-2 Complies
industrial environment
EN61000-6-2
EN61800-3 Product standard for adjustable Meets immunity
IEC61800-3 speed power drive systems requirements for first and
EN61800-3 (immunity requirements) second environments
1 See section Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables and

connections outside a building on page 79 for control ports for possible
requirements regarding grounding and external surge protection
Emission
The drive contains an in-built filter for basic emission control. An
additional optional external filter provides further reduction of emission.
The requirements of the following standards are met, depending on the
motor cable length and switching frequency.
Table 12-25 SPz (200V) emission compliance (single and three
phase drives)
Motor cable Switching frequency (kHz)

length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16
Using internal filter:
0 to 7 E2U TBC
7 to 9 E2U E2R TBC
9 to 11 E2U E2R TBC
>11 E2R TBC
Using external filter:
0 to 20 R I
20 to 100 I

Table 12-26 SPz (400V) emission compliance Table 12-30 Size 4 (200V & 400V) emission compliance
Motor cable length Switching frequency (kHz)

(m) 3 4 6 8
length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16
Any E2R
0 to 6 E2U E2R TBC
6 to 12 E2U E2R TBC
0 to 25 I
12 to 14 E2U E2R TBC
25 to 50 I
>14 E2R TBC
50 to 75 I E2U
75 to 100 I E2U
0 to 20 R I
20 to 70 I Table 12-31 Size 4 (690V) emission compliance
70 to 100 I Do not use Motor cable length Switching frequency (kHz)
(m) 3 4 6 8
Table 12-27 Size 1 emission compliance
Any E2R
length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16
0 to 25 I
0 to 4 E2U E2R
25 to 50 I E2U
>4 E2R
50 to 75 I E2U
Using internal filter and external ferrite ring:
75 to 100 I E2U
0 to 10 E2U E2R
Table 12-32 Size 5 (400V) emission compliance
> 10 E2R
Using external filter: Motor cable length Switching frequency (kHz)
0 to 25 R I (m) 3 4 6 8
25 to 75 I Do not use Using internal filter:
75 to 100 I Do not use 100 E2U
Table 12-28 Size 2 emission compliance
0 to 100 I
Table 12-33 Size 5 (690V) emission compliance
length (m) 3 4 6 8 12 16
Motor cable length Switching frequency (kHz)
(m) 3 4 6 8
Any E2R
Using internal filter and external ferrite ring:
100 E2R
0 to 4 E2U E2R
4 to 10 E2U E2R
0 to 25 I
> 10 E2R
0 to 100 I Do not use
0 to 25 R I Table 12-34 Size 6 (400V only) emission compliance
25 to 75 I Do not use Switching frequency (kHz)
Motor cable length (m)
75 to 100 I Do not use 3 4 6
Table 12-29 Size 3 emission compliance Using internal filter:
Switching frequency (kHz) 0 to 100 E2U
Motor cable
length (m) 100 to max* E2R
3 4 6 8 12
0 to 100 I
Any E2R
Using external filter: *Refer to section 12.1.21 Maximum motor cable lengths on page 252.
0 to 20 R I Table 12-35 Size 6 (690V only) emission compliance
20 to 50 I Switching frequency (kHz)
Motor cable length (m)
Do not 3 4 6
50 to 75 I
use
0 to 100 E2U
100 to max* E2R
0 to 25 I
*Refer to section 12.1.21 Maximum motor cable lengths on page 252.

Key (shown in decreasing order of permitted emission level): 12.2 Optional external EMC filters
E2R EN 61800-3 second environment, restricted distribution Table 12-36 EMC filter cross reference
(Additional measures may be required to prevent interference)
Drive Schaffner Epcos
E2U EN 61800-3 second environment, unrestricted distribution
LS CT Reference Reference
I Industrial generic standard EN 50081-2 (EN 61000-6-4)
EN 61800-3 first environment restricted distribution (The SPz 1M/TL
following caution is required by EN 61800-3) to SP0201 to SP0205
FS23072-19-07
2.5M/TL (1 phase)
This is a product of the restricted distr bution class according (1 phase)
to IEC 61800-3. In a residential environment this product may SPz 1M/TL
cause radio interference in which case the user may be to SP0201 to SP0205
FS23073-17-07
CAUTION required to take adequate measures. 2.5M/TL (3 phase)
(3 phase)
R Residential generic standard EN 50081-1 (EN 61000-6-3) 1.5TL & 2TL SP1201 & SP1202 FS6008-10-07 B84143-A10-R207
EN 61800-3 first environment unrestricted distribution 2.5TL & 3.5TL SP1203 to SP1204 FS6008-16-07 B84143-A16-R207
4.5TL to 8TL SP2201 to SP2203 FS6008-32-07 B84143-A32-R207
EN 61800-3 defines the following:
11TL & 16TL SP3201 to SP3202 FS6008-75-07 B84143-A75-R207
• The first environment is one that includes residential premises. It
also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate 22TL to 33TL SP4201 to SP4203 FS6008-101-35 B84143-A101-R207
transformers to a low-voltage power supply network which supplies 40TL & 50TL SP5201 to SP5202 FS6008-164-40 B84143-A165-R207
buildings used for residential purposes. 1T to 2.5T SP0401 to SP0405 FS23074-11-07
• The second environment is one that includes all establishments 1.5T to 3.5T SP1401 to SP1404 FS6008-10-07 B84143-A10-R207
other than those directly connected to a low-voltage power supply 4.5T & 5.5T SP1405 to SP1406 FS6008-16-07 B84143-A16-R207
network which supplies buildings used for residential purposes.
8T to 20T SP2401 to SP2404 FS6008-32-07 B84143-A32-R207
• Restricted distr bution is defined as a mode of sales distribution in
which the manufacturer restricts the supply of equipment to 22T to 33T SP3401 to SP3403 FS6008-62-07 B84143-A75-R207
suppliers, customers or users who separately or jointly have 40T to 60T SP4401 to SP4403 FS6008-101-35 B84143-A101-R207
technical competence in the EMC requirements of the application of 75T & 100T SP5401 to SP5402 FS6008-164-40 B84143-A165-R207
drives. 120T & 150T SP6401 to SP6402 FS6008-260-99 B84143-A260-S207
IEC 61800-3:2004 and EN 61800-3:2004 3.5TM to 22TM SP3501 to SP3507 FS6008-30-07 B84143-A30-R207
The 2004 revision of the standard uses different terminology to align the 22TH to 60TH SP4601 to SP4606 FS6008-58-53 B84143-A58-R207
requirements of the standard better with the EC EMC Directive. 75TH & 100TH SP5601 to SP5602 FS6008-95-35 B84143-A95-R207
Power drive systems are categorised C1 to C4: 120TH & 150TH SP6601 to SP6602 FS6008-160-99 B84143-A0160-S207
Corresponding
Category Definition code used
above
Intended for use in the first or second
C1 R
environments
Not a plug-in or movable device, and
intended for use in the first environment
C2 I
only when installed by a professional, or
in the second environment
Intended for use in the second
C3 E2U
environment, not the first environment
Rated at over 1000V or over 400A,
C4 intended for use in complex systems in E2R
the second environment
Note that category 4 is more restrictive than E2R, since the rated current
of the PDS must exceed 400A or the supply voltage exceed 1000V, for
the complete PDS.

12.2.1 EMC filter ratings

Table 12-37 Optional external EMC filter details
Maximum Voltage Ground leakage
continuous current Power
rating Balanced supply Worst
dissipation at Discharge
Reference Manufacturer @ 40°C @ 50°C IP rating phase-to-phase and case
rated current resistors
(104°F) (122°F) W phase-to-ground
A A V mA mA
FS23072-19-07 19 17.3 11 29.5 56.9 See Note 6
240
FS23073-17-07 17 15.5 13 8 50
FS23074-11-07 11 10 480 10 16 90
FS6008-10-07 10 10 6.9 29.4 153
FS6008-16-07 16 16 9.2 38.8 277 See Note 1
480
FS6008-32-07 32 28.2 11 38.0 206
FS6008-62-07 62 56.6 20 23 66.0 357
FS6008-75-07 Schaffner 75 68.5 240 29 24.0 170
FS6008-30-07 30 30 575 15 102.0 557 See Note 3
FS6008-101-35 101 92.2 480 25 73.0 406
See Note 1
FS6008-58-53 58 52.8 690 31 66.0 344
FS6008-164-40 164 150 480 30 39.1 216 See Note 4
FS6008-95-35 95 86.7 690 30 66.0 344
FS6008-260-99 260 237 480 14.2 41.0 219 See Note 1
00
FS6008-160-99 160 146 690 5.4 88.5 296
B84143-A10-R207 10 9.1 4.2
B84143-A16-R207 16 14.6 10.8 186.5
480 <30.0
B84143-A32-R207 32 29.1 17.8
See Note 2
B84143-A75-R207 75 68.3 19.4 238
B84143-A30-R207 30 22.5 660 20 17.6 <35.0 230
B84143-A101-R207 Epcos 101 75 480 30 <30.0 180
B84143-A58-R207 58 44 690 15 <40.0 <340 See Note 5
B84143-A165-R207 165 125 480 27 <20.0 <120 See Note 2
B84143-A95-R207 95 71 690 19 <55.0 <450
B84143-A260-S207 260 195 480 13 <45.0 <375 See Note 5
00
B84143-A0160-S207 160 120 690 5 <60.0 <520
NOTE
1. 1M in a connection between phases, with the point connected by a 680k resistor to ground (i.e. line to line 2M, line to ground 1.68M)
2. 1M in a connection between phases, with the point connected by a 1.5M resistor to ground (i.e. line to line 2M, line to ground 2.5M)
3. 2M between phases with each phase connected by a 660k resistance to ground.
4. 1.5M in a connection between phases, with the point connected by a 680k resistor to ground (i.e. line to line 3M, line to ground 2.18M)
5. 1.8M in a connection between phases, with the point connected by a 1.5M resistor to ground (i.e. line to line 3.6M, line to ground 3.3M)
6. 470k between phases with each phase connected by a 2M resistance to ground.

12.2.2 Overall EMC filter dimensions

Table 12-38 Optional external EMC filter dimensions
Dimension Weight
Reference Manufacturer
H W D kg lb
FS23072-19-07
FS23073-17-07 359 mm (14.13 in) 61 mm (2.40 in) 29 mm (1.14 in) 1.2 2.64
FS23074-11-07
FS6008-10-07
440 mm (17.323 in) 100 mm (3.937 in) 45 mm (1.772in) 1.4 3.1
FS6008-16-07
FS6008-32-07 428.5 mm (16.870 in) 155 mm (6.102 in) 55 mm (2.165 in) 2 4.4
FS6008-62-07
FS6008-75-07 Schaffner 414 mm (16.299 in) 250 mm (9.842 in) 60 mm (2.362 in) 3.5 7.7
FS6008-30-07
FS6008-101-35 225 mm (8.858 in) 4 8.8
100 mm (3.937 in)
FS6008-58-53 208 mm (8.189 in) 3.8 8.4
300 mm (11.811 in)
FS6008-164-40 249 mm (9.803 in) 120 mm (4.724 in) 6.8 15
FS6008-95-35 225 mm (8.858 in) 100 mm (3.937 in) 4.4 9.7
FS6008-260-99 295 mm (11.614 in)
230 mm (9.055 in) 136 mm (5.354 in) 5.25 11.6
FS6008-160-99 357 mm (14.055 in)
B84143-A10-R207
450 mm (17.717 in) 100 mm (3.937 in) 45 mm (1.772 in) 2.1 4.6
B84143-A16-R207
B84143-A32-R207 431.5 mm (16.988 in) 155 mm (6.102 in) 55 mm (2.165 in) 3.3 7.3
B84143-A75-R207
425 mm (16.732 in) 250 mm (9.843 in) 60 mm (2.362 in) 5.1 11.2
B84143-A30-R207
B84143-A101-R207 Epcos 207 mm (8.150 in) 7.8 17.2
90 mm (3.543 in)
B84143-A58-R207 205 mm (8.071 in) 8.0 17.6
300 mm (11.811 in)
B84143-A165-R207 12.0 26.5
249 mm (9.803 in) 120 mm (4.724 in)
B84143-A95-R207 10.0 22.0
B84143-A260-S207
364 mm (14.331 in) 230 mm (9.055 in) 147 mm (5.787 in) 8.6 19.0
B84143-A0160-S207

12.2.3 EMC filter torque settings

Optional external EMC Filter terminal data
Power connections Ground connections

Reference Manufacturer
Max cable size Max torque Ground stud size Max torque
FS23072-19-07
FS23073-17-07
FS23074-11-07 4mm2 12AWG 0.8 N m (0.6 lb ft)
FS6008-10-07
FS6008-16-07 M5 3.5 N m (2.6 lb ft)
FS6008-32-07 10mm2 8AWG 2.0 N m (1.5 lb ft)
FS6008-62-07
FS6008-75-07
Schaffner 16mm2 6AWG 2.2 N m (1.6 lb ft) M6 3.9 N m (2.9 lb ft)
FS6008-30-07
FS6008-101-35 50mm2 0AWG 8 N m (5.9 lb ft) M10 25 N m (18.4 lb ft)
FS6008-58-53 2 2.3 N m (1.7 lb ft) M6 3.9 N m (2.9 lb ft)
25mm 4AWG
FS6008-164-40 2 20 N m (14.7 lb ft)
95mm 4/0AWG
FS6008-95-35 2 8 N m (5.9 lb ft)
50mm 0AWG M10 25 N m (18.4 lb ft)
FS6008-260-99
FS6008-160-99
B84143-A16-R207
4mm2 12AWG 0.6 N m (0.4 lb ft)
B84143-A10-R207 M5 3.0 N m (2.2 lb ft)
B84143-A32-R207 10mm2 8AWG 1.35 N m (1.0 b ft)
B84143-A75-R207 16mm2 6AWG 2.2 N m (1.6 lb ft)
M6 5.1 N m (3.8 lb ft)
B84143-A30-R207 10mm2 8AWG 1.35 N m (1.0 b ft)
B84143-A101-R207 Epcos
50mm2 0AWG 6.8 N m (5.0 lb ft)
B84143-A58-R207
B84143-A165-R207
95mm2 4/0AWG 20 N m (14.7 lb ft) M10 10 N m (7.4 lb ft)
B84143-A95-R207
B84143-A260-S207
B84143-A0160-S207

13 Diagnostics Figure 13-1 Keypad status modes
Status Mode
The display on the drive gives various information about the status of the
drive. These fall into three categories:
Healthy Status Alarm Status Trip Status
• Trip indications
• Alarm indications Drive status
= tripped
• Status indications
Trip type (UU
= undervolts)
Users must not attempt to repair a drive if it is faulty, nor
carry out fault diagnosis other than through the use of the
diagnostic features described in this chapter.
If a drive is faulty, it must be returned to an authorized
WARNING LEROY-SOMER distributor for repair.
Figure 13-2 Location of the status LED
13.1 Trip indications Status LED
If the drive trips, the output of the drive is disabled so that the drive stops
controlling the motor. The upper display indicates that a trip has
occurred and the lower display shows the trip. If this is a multi-module
drive and a power module has indicated a trip, then the lower display will
alternate between the trip string and the module number.
Trips are listed alphabetically in Table 13-1 based on the trip indication
shown on the drive display. Refer to Figure 13-1.
If a display is not used, the drive LED Status indicator will flash if the
drive has tripped. Refer to Figure 13-2.
The trip indication can be read in Pr 10.20 providing a trip number. Trip
numbers are listed in numerical order in Table 13-2 so the trip indication Non flashing: Flashing:
Normal status Trip status
can be cross referenced and then diagnosed using Table 13-1.
Example
1. Trip code 3 is read from Pr 10.20 via serial communications.
2. Checking Table 13-2 shows Trip 3 is an OI.AC trip.
Comms No. Trip Keypad

code display
3 OI.AC
3. Look up OI.AC in Table 13-1.

4. Perform checks detailed under Diagnosis.
Trip Diagnosis
OI.AC Instantaneous output over current detected: peak output current greater than 225%
Acceleration / deceleration rate is too short.
If seen during autotune reduce voltage boost Pr 5.15
Check for short circuit on output cabling
Check integrity of motor insulation
Check feedback device wiring
Check feedback device mechanical coupling
3
Check feedback signals are free from noise
Is motor cable length within limits for that frame size?
Reduce the values in speed loop gain parameters – Pr 3.10, Pr 3.11 and Pr 3.12 (closed loop vector and servo
modes only)
Has offset measurement test been completed? (servo mode only)
Reduce the values in current loop gain parameters - Pr 4.13 and Pr 4.14 (closed loop vector and servo modes only)

Table 13-1 Trip indications
Trip Diagnosis
br.th Internal braking resistor thermistor temperature monitoring fail (SPz only)
If no internal brake resistor is installed, set Pr 0.51 (or Pr 10.37) to 8 to disable this trip.
If an internal brake resistor is installed:
10 • Ensure that the internal braking resistor thermistor is connected correctly
• Ensure that the fan in the drive is working correctly
• Replace the internal braking resistor
C.Acc SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD Read / Write fail
Check SMARTCARD is installed / located correctly
185 Ensure SMARTCARD is not writing data to data location 500 to 999
Replace SMARTCARD
SMARTCARD trip: The menu 0 parameter modification cannot be saved to the SMARTCARD because the necessary file has
C.boot
not been created on the SMARTCARD
A write to a menu 0 parameter has been initiated via the keypad with Pr 11.42 set to auto(3) or boot(4), but the necessary file on the
SMARTCARD has not bee created
177
Ensure that Pr 11.42 is correctly set and reset the drive to create the necessary file on the SMARTCARD
Re-attempt the parameter write to the menu 0 parameter
C.bUSY SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD can not perform the required function as it is being accessed by a Solutions Module
178 Wait for the Solutions Module to finish accessing the SMARTCARD and then re-attempt the required function
C.Chg SMARTCARD trip: Data location already contains data
Erase data in data location
179
Write data to an alternative data location
C.cPr SMARTCARD trip: The values stored in the drive and the values in the data block on the SMARTCARD are different
C.dAt SMARTCARD trip: Data location specified does not contain any data
183 Ensure data block number is correct
C.Err SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD data is corrupted
Ensure the card is located correctly
182 Erase data and retry
Replace SMARTCARD
C.Full SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD full
184 Delete a data block or use different SMARTCARD
cL2 Analog input 2 current loss (current mode)
28 Check analog input 2 (terminal 7) current signal is present (4-20mA, 20-4mA)
cL3 Analog input 3 current loss (current mode)
29 Check analog input 3 (terminal 8) current signal is present (4-20mA, 20-4mA)
CL.bit Trip initiated from the control word (Pr 6.42)
35 Disable the control word by setting Pr 6.43 to 0 or check setting of Pr 6.42
ConF.P The number of power modules installed no longer matches the value stored in Pr 11.35
Ensure that all power modules are correctly connected
111 Ensure that all power modules have powered up correctly
Ensure that the value in Pr 11.35 matches the number of power modules connected
C.OPtn SMARTCARD trip: Solutions Modules installed are different between source drive and destination drive
Ensure correct Solutions Modules are installed
180 Ensure Solutions Modules are in the same Solutions Module slot
C.Prod SMARTCARD trip: The data blocks on the SMARTCARD are not compatible with this product
175 Erase all data on the SMARTCARD by setting Pr xx.00 to 9999 and pressing the red reset button
Replace SMARTCARD
C.rdo SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD has the Read Only bit set
Enter 9777 in Pr xx.00 to allow SMARTCARD Read / Write access
181
Ensure the drive is not writing to data locations 500 to 999 on the card

Trip Diagnosis
C.rtg SMARTCARD trip: The voltage and/or current rating of the source and destination drives are different
Drive rating dependent parameters (parameters with the RA coding) are likely to have different values and ranges with drives of
different voltage and current ratings. Parameters with this attr bute will not be transferred to the destination drive by SMARTCARDs
when the rating of the destination drive is different from the source drive and the file is a parameter file. However, with software
V01.09.00 and later drive rating dependent parameters will be transferred if only the current rating is different and the file is a
Drive rating parameters are:
Parameter Function
2.08 Standard ramp voltage
4.05/6/7, 21.27/8/9 Current limits
4.24 User current maximum scaling
186 5.07, 21.07 Motor rated current
5.09, 21.09 Motor rated voltage
5.10, 21.10 Rated power factor
5.17, 21.12 Stator resistance
5.18 Switching frequency
5.23, 21.13 Voltage offset
5.24, 21.14 Transient inductance
5.25, 21.24 Stator inductance
6.06 DC injection braking current
6.48 Line power supply loss ride through detection level
The above parameters will be set to their default values.
C.TyP SMARTCARD trip: SMARTCARD parameter set not compatible with drive
Press the reset button
187
Ensure destination drive type is the same as the source parameter file drive type
dESt Two or more parameters are writing to the same destination parameter
199 Set Pr xx.00 = 12001 check all visible parameters in the menus for duplication
EEPROM data corrupted - Drive mode becomes open loop and serial comms will timeout with remote keypad on the drive
EEF
RS485 comms port.
31 This trip can only be cleared by loading default parameters and saving parameters
EnC1 Drive encoder trip: Encoder power supply overload
Check encoder power supply wiring and encoder current requirement
189
Maximum current = 200mA @ 15V, or 300mA @ 8V and 5V
EnC2 Drive encoder trip: Wire break (Drive encoder terminals 1 & 2, 3 & 4, 5 & 6)
Check cable continuity
Check wiring of feedback signals is correct
190 Check encoder power supply is set correctly in Pr 3.36
Replace feedback device
If wire break detection on the main drive encoder input is not required, set Pr 3.40 = 0 to disable the Enc2 trip
EnC3 Drive encoder trip: Phase offset incorrect while running
Check the encoder signal for noise
Check encoder shielding
191
Check the integrity of the encoder mechanical mounting
Repeat the offset measurement test
EnC4 Drive encoder trip: Feedback device comms failure
Ensure encoder power supply is correct
Ensure baud rate is correct
192
Check encoder wiring
EnC5 Drive encoder trip: Checksum or CRC error
193 Check the encoder cable shielding
With EnDat encoders, check the comms resolution and/or carry out the auto-configuration Pr 3.41
EnC6 Drive encoder trip: Encoder has indicated an error
194
With SSI encoders, check the wiring and encoder supply setting

Trip Diagnosis
EnC7 Drive encoder trip: Initialisation failed
Re-set the drive
Check the correct encoder type is entered into Pr 3.38
Check encoder wiring
195
Check encoder power supply is set correctly
Carry out the auto-configuration Pr 3.41
EnC8 Drive encoder trip: Auto configuration on power up has been requested and failed
Change the setting of Pr 3.41 to 0 and manually enter the drive encoder turns (Pr 3.33) and the equivalent number of lines per
196 revolution (Pr 3.34)
Check the comms resolution
Drive encoder trip: Position feedback selected is selected from a Solutions Module slot which does not have a speed /
EnC9
position feedback Solutions Module installed
197 Check setting of Pr 3.26 (or Pr 21.21 if the second motor parameters have been enabled)
EnC10 Drive encoder trip: Servo mode phasing failure because encoder phase angle (Pr 3.25 or Pr 21.20) is incorrect
Check the encoder wiring.
Perform an autotune to measure the encoder phase angle or manually enter the correct phase angle into Pr 3.25 (or Pr 21.20).
198 Spurious Enc10 trips can be seen in very dynamic applications. This trip can be disabled by setting the overspeed threshold in
Pr 3.08 to a value greater than zero. Caution should be used in setting the over speed threshold level as a value which is too large
may mean that an encoder fault will not be detected.
Drive encoder trip: A failure has occurred during the alignment of the analog signals of a SINCOS encoder with the digital
Enc11 count derived from the sine and cosine waveforms and the comms position (if applicable). This fault is usually due to noise
on the sine and cosine signals.
Check encoder cable shield.
161
Examine sine and cosine signals for noise.
Enc12 Drive encoder trip: Hiperface encoder - The encoder type could not be identified during auto-configuration
Check encoder type can be auto-configured.
162 Check encoder wiring.
Enter parameters manually.
Drive encoder trip: EnDat encoder - The number of encoder turns read from the encoder during auto-configuration is not a
Enc13
power of 2
163 Select a different type of encoder.
Drive encoder trip: EnDat encoder - The number of comms bits defining the encoder position within a turn read from the
Enc14
encoder during auto-configuration is too large.
Select a different type of encoder.
164
Faulty encoder.
Drive encoder trip: The number of periods per revolution calculated from encoder data during auto-configuration is either
Enc15
less than 2 or greater than 50,000.
Linear motor pole pitch / encoder ppr set up is incorrect or out of parameter range
165 i.e. Pr 5.36 = 0 or Pr 21.31 = 0.
Faulty encoder.
Enc16 Drive encoder trip: EnDat encoder - The number of comms bits per period for a linear encoder exceeds 255.
166
Faulty encoder.
Drive encoder trip: The periods per revolution obtained during auto-configuration for a rotary SINCOS encoder is not a
Enc17
power of two.
167
Faulty encoder.
ENP.Er Data error from electronic nameplate stored in selected position feedback device
176 Replace feedback device
Et External trip
Check terminal 31 signal
Check value of Pr 10.32
6
Enter 12001 in Pr xx.00 and check for parameter controlling Pr 10.32
Ensure Pr 10.32 or Pr 10.38 (=6) are not being controlled by serial comms
HF01 Data processing error: CPU address error
Hardware fault - return drive to supplier

Trip Diagnosis
HF02 Data processing error: DMAC address error
HF03 Data processing error: Illegal instruction
HF04 Data processing error: Illegal slot instruction
HF05 Data processing error: Undefined exception
HF06 Data processing error: Reserved exception
HF07 Data processing error: Watchdog failure
HF08 Data processing error: Level 4 crash
HF09 Data processing error: Heap overflow
HF10 Data processing error: Router error
HF11 Data processing error: Access to EEPROM failed
HF12 Data processing error: Main program stack overflow
HF13 Data processing error: Software incompatible with hardware
Hardware or software fault - return drive to supplier
HF17 Multi-module system thermistor short circuit or open circuit
217 Hardware fault - return drive to supplier
HF18 Multi-module system interconnect cable error
HF19 Temperature feedback multiplexing failure
HF20 Power stage recognition: serial code error
HF21 Power stage recognition: unrecognised frame size
HF22 Power stage recognition: multi module frame size mismatch
HF23 Power stage recognition: multi module voltage or current rating mismatch
HF24 Power stage recognition: unrecognised drive size
HF25 Current feedback offset error
HF26 Soft start relay failed to close, soft start monitor failed or braking IGBT short circuit at power up
HF27 Power stage thermistor 1 fault

Trip Diagnosis
HF28 Power stage thermistor 2 fault, or internal fan fault (size 3)
HF29 Control board thermistor fault
HF30 DCCT wire break trip from power module
HF31 Internal capacitor bank fan failure (size 4 and larger) or a module has not powered up in a multi-module parallel drive
Check the AC or DC power supply to all modules in a multi-module parallel drive
231
If the AC or DC power supply is present, or if this is a single drive, then there is a hardware fault - return drive to the supplier
HF32 Power stage - Identification and trip information serial code error
232 Hardware fault - return drive to the supplier
It.AC Output current overload timed out (I2t) - accumulator value can be seen in Pr 4.19
Ensure the load is not jammed / sticking
Check the load on the motor has not changed
If seen during an autotune in servo mode, ensure that the motor rated current Pr 0.46 (Pr 5.07) or Pr 21.07 is Heavy Duty current
20 rating of the drive
Tune the rated speed parameter (closed loop vector only)
Check feedback device signal for noise
Check the feedback device mechanical coupling
It.br Braking resistor overload timed out (I2t) – accumulator value can be seen in Pr 10.39
Ensure the values entered in Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 are correct
Increase the power rating of the braking resistor and change Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31
19
If an external thermal protection device is being used and the braking resistor software overload is not required, set Pr 10.30 or
Pr 10.31 to 0 to disable the trip
L.SYnC Drive failed to synchronize to the supply voltage in Regen mode
39 Refer to the Diagnostics chapter in the Unidrive SP Regen Installation Guide.
O.CtL Drive control board over temperature
Check enclosure / drive fans are still functioning correctly
Check enclosure ventilation paths
23 Check enclosure door filters
Check ambient temperature
Reduce drive switching frequency
O.ht1 Power device over temperature based on thermal model
Reduce duty cycle
21
Decrease acceleration / deceleration rates
Reduce motor load
O.ht2 Heatsink over temperature
Check enclosure door filters
Increase ventilation
22
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
Oht2.P Power module heatsink over temperature
105
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load

Trip Diagnosis
O.ht3 Drive over-temperature based on thermal model
The drive will attempt to stop the motor before tripping. If the motor does not stop in 10s the drive trips immediately.
27
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
Oht4.P Power module rectifier over temperature or input snubber resistor over temperature (size 4 and above)
Check for supply imbalance
Check for supply disturbance such as notching from a DC drive
102
Reduce duty cycle
Reduce motor load
OI.AC Instantaneous output over current detected: peak output current greater than 225%
Acceleration /deceleration rate is too short.
3 Check feedback device mechanical coupling
Reduce the values in speed loop gain parameters – Pr 3.10, Pr 3.11 and Pr 3.12 (closed loop vector and servo modes only)
OIAC.P Power module over current detected from the module output currents
Acceleration /deceleration rate is too short.
104 Check feedback device mechanical coupling
Reduce the values in speed loop gain parameters – Pr 3.10, Pr 3.11 and Pr 3.12 (closed loop vector and servo modes only)
OI.br Braking transistor over-current detected: short circuit protection for the braking transistor activated
Check braking resistor wiring
4 Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
Check braking resistor insulation
OIbr.P Power module braking IGBT over current
Check braking resistor wiring
103 Check braking resistor value is greater than or equal to the minimum resistance value
Check braking resistor insulation
OIdC.P Power module over current detected from IGBT on state voltage monitoring
Vce IGBT protection activated.
109
Check motor and cable insulation.
O.Ld1 Digital output overload: total current drawn from 24V supply and digital outputs exceeds 200mA
26 Check total load on digital outputs (terminals 24,25,26)and +24V rail (terminal 22)
O.SPd Motor speed has exceeded the over speed threshold
Increase the over speed trip threshold in Pr 3.08 (closed loop vector and servo modes only)
7 Speed has exceeded 1.2 x Pr 1.06 or Pr 1.07 (open loop mode)
Reduce the speed loop P gain (Pr 3.10) to reduce the speed overshoot (closed loop vector and servo modes only)

Trip Diagnosis
OV DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or the maximum continuous level for 15 seconds
Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 0.04)
Decrease braking resistor value (staying above the minimum value)
Check nominal AC supply level
Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise – voltage overshoot after supply recovery from a notch induced
by DC drives
Check motor insulation
2
Drive voltage rating Peak voltage Maximum continuous voltage level (15s)
200 415 410
400 830 815
575 990 970
690 1190 1175
If the drive is operating in low voltage DC mode the overvoltage trip level is 1.45 x Pr 6.46.
OV.P Power module DC bus voltage has exceeded the peak level or the maximum continuous level for 15 seconds
Increase deceleration ramp (Pr 0.04)
Decrease braking resistor value (staying above the minimum value)
Check nominal AC supply level
Check for supply disturbances which could cause the DC bus to rise – voltage overshoot after supply recovery from a notch induced
by DC drives
Check motor insulation
106
Drive voltage rating Peak voltage Maximum continuous voltage level (15s)
200 415 410
400 830 815
575 990 970
690 1190 1175
If the drive is operating in low voltage DC mode the overvoltage trip level is 1.45 x Pr 6.46.
PAd Keypad has been removed when the drive is receiving the speed reference from the keypad
Install keypad and reset
34
Change speed reference selector to select speed reference from another source
PH AC voltage input phase loss or large supply imbalance detected
Ensure all three phases are present and balanced
Check input voltage levels are correct (at full load)
32 NOTE
Load level must be between 50 and 100% for the drive to trip under phase loss conditions. The drive will attempt to stop the motor
before this trip is initiated.
PH.P Power module phase loss detection
Ensure all three phases are present and balanced
107
Check input voltage levels are correct (at full load)
PS Internal power supply fault
Remove any Solutions Modules and reset
5
PS.10V 10V user power supply current greater than 10mA
Check wiring to terminal 4
8
Reduce load on terminal 4
PS.24V 24V internal power supply overload
The total user load of the drive and Solutions Modules has exceeded the internal 24V power supply limit.
The user load consists of the drive’s digital outputs, the SM-I/O Plus digital outputs, the drive’s main encoder supply and the SM-
Universal Encoder Plus encoder supply.
9
• Reduce load and reset
• Provide an external 24V >50W power supply
• Remove any Solutions Modules and reset
PS.P Power module power supply fail
Remove any Solutions Modules and reset
108
PSAVE.Er Power down save parameters in the EEPROM are corrupt
Indicates that the power was removed when power down save parameters were being saved.
The drive will revert back to the power down parameter set that was last saved successfully.
37
Perform a user save (Pr xx.00 to 1000 or 1001 and reset the drive) or power down the drive normally to ensure this trip does or occur
the next time the drive is powered up.

Trip Diagnosis
rS Failure to measure resistance during autotune or when starting in open loop vector mode 0 or 3
33 Check motor power connection continuity
SAVE.Er User save parameters in the EEPROM are corrupt
Indicates that the power was removed when user parameters were being saved.
The drive will revert back to the user parameter set that was last saved successfully.
36
Perform a user save (Pr xx.00 to 1000 or 1001 and reset the drive) to ensure this trip does or occur the next time the drive is
powered up.
SCL Drive RS485 serial comms loss to remote keypad
Reinstall the cable between the drive and keypad
Check cable for damage
30
Replace cable
Replace keypad
SLX.dF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module type installed in slot X changed
204,209,214 Save parameters and reset

Trip Diagnosis
SLX.Er Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module in slot X has detected a fault
Feedback module category
Check value in Pr 15/16/17.50. The following table lists the possible error codes for the SM-Universal Encoder Plus, SM-Encoder
Output Plus, SM-Encoder Plus and SM-Resolver. See the Diagnostics section in the relevant Solutions Module User Guide for more
information.
Error code Module Trip Description Diagnostic
0 All No trip No fault detected
SM-Universal
Check encoder power supply wiring and encoder current
Encoder Plus &
Encoder power supply overload requirement Maximum current = 200mA @ 15V, or 300mA
1 SM-Encoder
@ 8V and 5V
Output Plus
SM-Resolver Excitation output short circuit Check the excitation output wiring.
Check cable continuity
SM-Universal
Check wiring of feedback signals is correct
2 Encoder Plus & Wire break
Check supply voltage or excitation output level
SM-Resolver
SM-Universal Phase offset incorrect while Check encoder shielding
3
Encoder Plus running Check the integrity of the encoder mechanical mounting
Repeat the offset measurement test
Ensure encoder power supply is correct
SM-Universal Feedback device communications Ensure baud rate is correct
4
Encoder Plus failure Check encoder wiring
SM-Universal Check the encoder signal for noise
5 Checksum or CRC error
Encoder Plus Check the encoder cable shielding
SM-Universal
6 Encoder has indicated an error Replace encoder
Encoder Plus
Check the correct encoder type is entered into Pr 15/16/17.15
SM-Universal Check encoder wiring
7 Initialisation failed
Encoder Plus Check supply voltage level
Change the setting of Pr 15/16/17.18 and manually enter
202,207,212
SM-Universal Auto configuration on power up the number of turns bits (Pr 15/16/17.09) and the equivalent
8
Encoder Plus has been requested and failed number of lines per revolution (Pr 15/16/17.10) and the
single turn comms bits (Pr 15/16/17.11)
SM-Universal Check motor temperature
9 Motor thermistor trip
Encoder Plus Check thermistor continuity
SM-Universal Check motor thermistor wiring
10 Motor thermistor short circuit
Encoder Plus Replace motor / motor thermistor
Failure of the sincos analog
SM-Universal Check encoder cable shield.
position alignment during encoder
Encoder Plus Examine sine and cosine signals for noise.
11 initialisation
Check that the correct number of resolver poles has been
SM-Resolver Poles not compatible with motor
set in Pr 15/16/17.15.
Check encoder type can be auto-configured.
SM-Universal Encoder type could not be
12 Check encoder wiring.
Encoder Plus identified during auto-configuration
Enter parameters manually.
Number of encoder turns read from
SM-Universal
13 the encoder during auto- Select a different type of encoder.
Encoder Plus
configuration is not a power of 2
Number of comms bits defining the
SM-Universal encoder position within a turn read Select a different type of encoder.
14
Encoder Plus from the encoder during auto- Faulty encoder.
configuration is too large.
The number of periods per
Linear motor pole pitch / encoder ppr set up is incorrect or
SM-Universal revolution calculated from encoder
15 out of parameter range i.e. Pr 5.36 = 0 or Pr 21.31 = 0.
Encoder Plus data during auto-configuration is
Faulty encoder.
either <2 or >50,000.
The number of comms bits per
SM-Universal Select a different type of encoder.
16 period for a linear encoder
Encoder Plus Faulty encoder.
exceeds 255.
Check ambient temperature
74 All Solutions Module has overheated
Check enclosure ventilation

Trip Diagnosis
Automation (Applications) module category
Check value in Pr 15/16/17.50. The following table lists the possible error codes for the SM-Applications and SM-Applications Lite.
See the Diagnostics section in the relevant Solutions Module User Guide for more information.
Error Code Trip Description
39 User program stack overflow
40 Unknown error - please contact supplier
41 Parameter does not exist
42 Attempt to write to a read-only parameter
43 Attempt to read from a write-only parameter
44 Parameter value out of range
45 Invalid synchronisation modes
46 Unused
48 RS485 not in user mode
49 Invalid RS485 configuration
50 Maths error - divide by zero or overflow
51 Array index out of range
52 Control word user trip
53 DPL program incompat ble with target
54 DPL task overrun
55 Unused
56 Invalid timer unit configuration
57 Function block does not exist
58 Flash PLC Storage corrupt
59 Drive rejected application module as Sync master
60 CTNet hardware failure. Please contact your supplier
202,207,212
61 CTNet invalid configuration
62 CTNet invalid baud-rate
63 CTNet invalid node ID
64 Digital Output overload
65 Invalid function block parameter(s)
66 User heap too large
67 RAM file does not exist or a non-RAM file id has been specified
68 The RAM file specified is not associated to an array
69 Failed to update drive parameter database cache in Flash memory
70 User program downloaded while drive enabled
71 Failed to change drive mode
72 Invalid CTNet buffer operation
73 Fast parameter initialisation failure
74 Over-temperature
75 Hardware unavailable
76 Module type cannot be resolved. Module is not recognised.
77 Inter-option module comms error with module in slot 1
80 Inter-option module comms error with module unknown slot
81 APC internal error
82 Communications to drive faulty

Trip Diagnosis
Automation (I/O Expansion) module category
Check value in Pr 15/16/17.50. The following table lists the possible error codes for the SM-I/O Plus, SM-I/O Lite, SM-I/O Timer, SM-
I/O 32 Protected. See the Diagnostics section in the relevant Solutions Module User Guide for more information.
Error code Module Reason for fault
0 All No errors
1 All Digital output overload
202,207,212 2 SM-I/O Lite, SM-I/O Timer Analog input 1 current input too high (>22mA) or too low (<3mA)
5 SM-I/O Timer Real time clock communication error
74 All Module over temperature
Fieldbus module category
Check value in Pr 15/16/17.50. The following table lists the possible error codes for the Fieldbus modules. See the Diagnostics
section in the relevant Solutions Module User Guide for more information.
Error code Module Trip Description
0 All No trip
1 SM-EtherCAT No fieldbus mode has been selected
2 SM-EtherCAT Critical task over-run
SM-PROFIBUS-DP, SM-INTERBUS,
52 User control word trip
SM-DeviceNet, SM-CANOpen
58 SM-LON Incorrect non-volatile storage
61 SM-DeviceNet, SM-CANOpen, Configuration error
SM-SERCOS, SM-LON
62 SM-EtherCAT Database initialization error
63 SM-EtherCAT File system initialization error
64 SM-DeviceNet Expected packet rate timeout
65 SM-DeviceNet, SM-CANOpen, Network loss
SM-SERCOS, SM-LON
202,207,212 SM-PROFIBUS-DP Critical link failure
66
SM-DeviceNet, SM-CANOpen Bus off error
69 SM-EtherCAT No acknowledgement
All (except SM-Ethernet and SM-LON) Flash transfer error
70
SM-Ethernet, SM-LON No valid menu data available for the module from the drive
74 All Solutions module over temperature
75 SM-Ethernet, SM-EtherCAT The drive is not responding
76 SM-Ethernet, SM-EtherCAT The Modbus connection has timed out
80 All (except SM-SERCOS) Inter-option communications error
81 All (except SM-SERCOS) Communications error to slot 1
84 SM-Ethernet, SM-EtherCAT Memory allocation error
85 SM-Ethernet, SM-EtherCAT File system error
86 SM-Ethernet, SM-EtherCAT Configuration file error
87 SM-Ethernet Language file error
97 SM-Ethernet Timed event over-run
98 All Internal watchdog error
99 All Internal software error

Trip Diagnosis
SLX.HF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module X hardware fault
Ensure Solutions Module is installed correctly
200,205,210
Return Solutions Module to supplier
SLX.nF Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module has been removed
Ensure Solutions Module is installed correctly
203,208,213 Reinstall Solutions Module
Save parameters and reset drive
SL.rtd Solutions Module trip: Drive mode has changed and Solutions Module parameter routing is now incorrect
Press reset.
215
If the trip persists, contact the supplier of the drive.
SLX.tO Solutions Module slot X trip: Solutions Module watchdog timeout
Press reset.
201,206,211
If the trip persists, contact the supplier of the drive.
t038 User trip defined in 2nd processor Solutions Module code
38 SM-Applications program must be interrogated to find the cause of this trip
t040 to t089 User trip defined in 2nd processor Solutions Module code
40 to 89 SM-Applications program must be interrogated to find the cause of this trip
th Motor thermistor trip
Check motor temperature
24 Check thermistor continuity
Set Pr 7.15 = VOLt and reset the drive to disable this function
thS Motor thermistor short circuit
Check motor thermistor wiring
25 Replace motor / motor thermistor
Set Pr 7.15 = VOLt and reset the drive to disable this function
tunE* Autotune stopped before completion
The drive has tripped out during the autotune
18 The red stop key has been pressed during the autotune
The SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) signal (terminal 31) was active during the autotune procedure
tunE1* The position feedback did not change or required speed could not be reached during the inertia test (see Pr 5.12)
Ensure the motor is free to turn i.e. brake was released
Ensure Pr 3.26 and Pr 3.38 are set correctly
11
Check feedback device wiring is correct
Check encoder coupling to motor
tunE2* Position feedback direction incorrect or motor could not be stopped during the inertia test (see Pr 5.12)
Check motor cable wiring is correct
12 Check feedback device wiring is correct
Swap any two motor phases
tunE3* Drive encoder commutation signals connected incorrectly or measured inertia out of range (see Pr 5.12)
Check motor cable wiring is correct
13
Check feedback device U,V and W commutation signal wiring is correct

Trip Diagnosis
tunE4* Drive encoder U commutation signal fail during an autotune
Check feedback device U phase commutation wires continuity
14
Replace encoder
tunE5* Drive encoder V commutation signal fail during an autotune
Check feedback device V phase commutation wires continuity
15
Replace encoder
tunE6* Drive encoder W commutation signal fail during an autotune
Check feedback device W phase commutation wires continuity
16
Replace encoder
tunE7* Motor number of poles set incorrectly
Check lines per revolution for feedback device
17
Check the number of poles in Pr 5.11 is set correctly
Unid.P Power module unidentified trip
Check all interconnecting cables between power modules
110
Ensure cables are routed away from electrical noise sources
UP ACC Onboard PLC program: cannot access Onboard PLC program file on drive
Disable drive - write access is not allowed when the drive is enabled
98
Another source is already accessing Onboard PLC program - retry once other action is complete
UP div0 Onboard PLC program attempted divide by zero
90 Check program
UP OFL Onboard PLC program variables and function block calls using more than the allowed RAM space (stack overflow)
95 Check program
UP ovr Onboard PLC program attempted out of range parameter write
94 Check program
UP PAr Onboard PLC program attempted access to a non-existent parameter
91 Check program
UP ro Onboard PLC program attempted write to a read-only parameter
92 Check program
UP So Onboard PLC program attempted read of a write-only parameter
93 Check program
UP udF Onboard PLC program un-defined trip
97 Check program
UP uSEr Onboard PLC program requested a trip
96 Check program
UV DC bus under voltage threshold reached
Check AC supply voltage level
Drive voltage rating (Vac) Under voltage threshold (Vdc) UV reset voltage (Vdc)
1 200 175 215V
400 330 425V
575 & 690 435 590V
*If a tunE through tunE 7 trip occurs, then after the drive is reset the drive cannot be made to run unless it is disabled via the SAFE TORQUE OFF
(SECURE DISABLE) input (terminal 31), drive enable parameter (Pr 6.15) or the control word (Pr 6.42 and Pr 6.43).

Table 13-2 Serial communications look-up table

No. Trip No. Trip No. Trip
1 UV 40 to 89 t040 to t089 182 C.Err
2 OV 90 UP div0 183 C.dAt
3 OI.AC 91 UP PAr 184 C.FULL
4 OI.br 92 UP ro 185 C.Acc
5 PS 93 UP So 186 C.rtg
6 Et 94 UP ovr 187 C.TyP
7 O.SPd 95 UP OFL 188 C.cPr
8 PS.10V 96 UP uSEr 189 EnC1
9 PS.24V 97 UP udF 190 EnC2
10 br.th 98 UP ACC 191 EnC3
11 tunE1 99 t099 192 EnC4
12 tunE2 100 193 EnC5
13 tunE3 101 t101 194 EnC6
14 tunE4 102 Oht4.P 195 EnC7
15 tunE5 103 OIbr.P 196 EnC8
16 tunE6 104 OIAC.P 197 EnC9
17 tunE7 105 Oht2.P 198 EnC10
18 tunE 106 OV.P 199 DESt
19 It.br 107 PH.P 200 SL1.HF
20 It.AC 108 PS.P 201 SL1.tO
21 O.ht1 109 OIdC.P 202 SL1.Er
22 O.ht2 110 Unid.P 203 SL1.nF
23 O.CtL 111 ConF.P 204 SL1.dF
24 th 112 to 160 t112 to t160 205 SL2.HF
25 thS 161 Enc11 206 SL2.tO
26 O.Ld1 162 Enc12 207 SL2.Er
27 O.ht3 163 Enc13 208 SL2.nF
28 cL2 164 Enc14 209 SL2.dF
29 cL3 165 Enc15 210 SL3.HF
30 SCL 166 Enc16 211 SL3.tO
31 EEF 167 Enc17 212 SL3.Er
32 PH 168 to 174 t168 to t174 213 SL3.nF
33 rS 175 C.Prod 214 SL3.dF
34 PAd 176 EnP.Er 215 SL.rtd
35 CL.bit 177 C.boot 216 t216
36 SAVE.Er 178 C.bUSY 217 to 232 HF17 to HF32
37 PSAVE.Er 179 C.Chg
38 t038 180 C.OPtn
39 L.SYnC 181 C.RdO

The trips can be grouped into the following categories. It should be noted that a trip can only occur when the drive is not tripped or is already tripped
but with a trip with a lower priority number.
Table 13-3 Trip categories

Priority Category Trips Comments
These indicate serious internal problems and cannot be reset. The drive is inactive after
1 Hardware faults HF01 to HF16 one of these trips and the display shows HFxx. The Drive OK relay opens and the serial
comms will not function.
HF17 to HF32,
2 Non-resetable trips SL1.HF, SL2.HF, Cannot be reset. Requires the drive to be powered down.
SL3.HF
3 EEF trip EEF Cannot be reset unless a code to load defaults is first entered in Pr xx.00 or Pr 11.43.
C.boot, C.Busy, C.Chg,
C.OPtn, C.RdO, C.Err,
Can be reset after 1.0s
4 SMARTCARD trips C.dat, C.FULL, C.Acc,
SMARTCARD trips have priority 5 during power-up
C.rtg, C.TyP, C.cpr,
C.Prod
Can be reset after 1.0s
Encoder power supply
4 PS.24V, EnC1 These trips can only override the following priority 5 trips: EnC2 to EnC8 or Enc11 to
trips
Enc17
Can be reset after 1.0s, but the drive cannot be made to run unless it is disabled via the
5 Autotune tunE, tunE1 to tunE7 SAFE TORQUE OFF (SECURE DISABLE) input (terminal 31), Drive enable (Pr 6.15) or
the Control word (Pr 6.42 and Pr 6.43).
Normal trips with OI.AC, OI.Br, OIAC.P,
5 Can be reset after 10.0s
extended reset OIBr.P, OIdC.P
All other trips not
5 Normal trips Can be reset after 1.0s
included in this table
th, thS, Old1, cL2, cL3,
5 Non-important trips If Pr 10.37 is 1 or 3 (i.e. bit 0 set to 1), the drive will stop before tripping
SCL
5 Phase loss PH The drive attempts to stop before tripping
Drive over-heat based The drive attempts to stop before tripping, but if it does not stop within 10s the drive will
5 O.ht3
on thermal model automatically trip
Under voltage trip cannot be reset by the user, but is automatically reset by the drive
6 Self-resetting trips UV
when the supply voltage is with specification
Although the UV trip operates in a similar way to all other trips, all drive
functions can still operate but the drive cannot be enabled. The following
differences apply to the UV trip:
1. Power-down save user parameters are saved when UV trip is
activated except when the main high voltage supply is not active
(i.e. operating in Low Voltage DC Supply Mode, Pr 6.44 = 1).
2. The UV trip is self-resetting when the DC bus voltage rises above
the drive restart voltage level. If another trip is active instead of UV at
this point, the trip is not reset.
3. The drive can change between using the main high voltage supply
and low voltage DC supply only when the drive is in the under
voltage condition (Pr 10.16 = 1). The UV trip can only be seen as
active if another trip is not active in the under voltage condition.
4. When the drive is first powered up a UV trip is initiated if the supply
voltage is below the restart voltage level and another trip is not
active. This does not cause save power down save parameters to be
saved at this point.

13.2 Alarm indications 13.3 Status indications

In any mode an alarm flashes alternately with the data displayed on the Table 13-5 Status indications
2nd row when one of the following conditions occur. If action is not taken
to eliminate any alarm except "Autotune", "Lt" and "PLC" the drive may Upper Drive output
Description
eventually trip. Alarms flash once every 640ms except "PLC" which display stage
flashes once every 10s. Alarms are not displayed when a parameter is ACt Regeneration mode active
being edited. The regen unit is enabled and synchronised to the Enabled
Table 13-4 Alarm indications supply.
ACUU AC Supply loss
Lower
Description The drive has detected that the AC supply has been
display Enabled
lost and is attempting to maintain the DC bus voltage
br.rS Braking resistor overload by decelerating the motor.
Braking resistor I2t accumulator (Pr 10.39) in the drive has reached dc DC applied to the motor
75.0% of the value at which the drive will trip and the braking IGBT is Enabled
The drive is applying DC injection braking.
active.
dEC Decelerating
Heatsink or control board or inverter IGBT over Enabled
Hot The drive is decelerating the motor.
temperature alarms are active
inh Inhibit
• The drive heatsink temperature has reached a threshold and the
drive will trip O.ht2 if the temperature continues to rise (see the The drive is inhibited and cannot be run. Disabled
O.ht2 trip). The drive enable signal is not applied to terminal 31 or
Or Pr 6.15 is set to 0.
• The ambient temperature around the control PCB is approaching POS Positioning
Enabled
the over temperature threshold (see the O.CtL trip). The drive is positioning/orientating the motor shaft.
OVLd Motor overload rdY Ready
Disabled
The motor I 2t
accumulator (Pr 4.19) in the drive has reached 75% of The drive is ready to be run.
the value at which the drive will be tripped and the load on the drive is run Running
Enabled
>100% The drive is running.
Auto tune Autotune in progress SCAn Scanning
The autotune procedure has been initialised. 'Auto' and 'tunE' will flash Regen> The drive is enabled and is synchronising to Enabled
alternatively on the display. the line.
Lt Limit switch is active StoP Stop or holding zero speed
Indicates that a limit switch is active and that it is causing the motor to The drive is holding zero speed. Enabled
be stopped (i.e. forward limit switch with forward reference etc.) Regen> The drive is enabled but the AC voltage is too
PLC Onboard PLC program is running low, or the DC bus voltage is still rising or falling.
An Onboard PLC program is installed and running. The lower display triP Trip condition
will flash 'PLC' once every 10s. The drive has tripped and is no longer controlling the Disabled
motor. The trip code appears on the lower display .
Table 13-6 Solutions Module and SMARTCARD status indications

at power-up
Lower
Description
display
boot
A parameter set is being transferred from the SMARTCARD to the
drive during power-up. For further information, please refer to section
9.2.4 Booting up from the SMARTCARD on every power up (Pr 11.42 =
boot (4)) on page 141.
cArd
The drive is writing a parameter set to the SMARTCARD during power-
up.
For further information, please refer to section 9.2.3 Auto saving
parameter changes (Pr 11.42 = Auto (3)) on page 141.
loAding
The drive is writing information to a Solutions Module.

13.4 Displaying the trip history

The drive retains a log of the last 10 trips that have occurred in Pr 10.20
to Pr 10.29 and the corresponding multi-module drive module number
(Pr 6.49 = 0) or the trip time (Pr 6.49 = 1) for each trip in Pr 10.41 to
Pr 10.51. The time of the trip is recorded from the powered-up clock (if
Pr 6.28 = 0) or from the run time clock (if Pr 6.28 = 1).
Pr 10.20 is the most recent trip, or the current trip if the drive is in a trip
condition (with the module number or trip time stored in Pr 10.41 and
Pr 10.42). Pr 10.29 is the oldest trip (with the module number or trip time
stored in Pr 10.51). Each time a new trip occurs, all the parameters
move down one, such that the current trip (and time) is stored in
Pr 10.20 (and Pr 10.41 to Pr 10.42) and the oldest trip (and time) is lost
out of the bottom of the log.
If any parameter between Pr 10.20 and Pr 10.29 inclusive is read by
serial communications, then the trip number in Table 13-1 Trip
indications on page 261 is the value transmitted.
13.5 Behaviour of the drive when tripped

If the drive trips, the output of the drive is disabled so that the drive stops
controlling the motor. If any trip occurs (except the UV trip) the following
read only parameters are frozen until the trip is cleared. This is to help in
diagnosing the cause of the trip.
Parameter Description
1.01 Frequency/speed reference
1.02 Pre-skip filter reference
1.03 Pre-ramp reference
2.01 Post-ramp reference
3.01 Frequency slaving demand/Final speed ref
3.02 Speed feedback
3.03 Speed error
3.04 Speed controller output
4.01 Current magnitude
4.02 Active current
4.17 Reactive current
5.01 Output frequency
5.02 Output voltage
5.03 Power
5.05 DC bus voltage
7.01 Analog input 1
7.02 Analog input 2
7.03 Analog input 3
Analog and digital I/O

The analog and digital I/O on the drive continue to work correctly if a trip
occurs, except the digital outputs will go low if one of the following trips
occur: O.Ld1, PS.24V.
Drive logic functions
The drive logic functions (i.e. PID, variable selectors, threshold
detectors, etc.) continue to operate when the drive is tripped.
Onboard PLC program
The Onboard PLC program continues to run if the drive is tripped, except
if one of Onboard PLC program trips occur.
Braking IGBT
The braking IGBT continues to operate even when the output of the
drive is not enabled (except if the low voltage DC supply is being used),
but is only disabled if any of the following trips occurs or would occur if
another trip had not already become active: OI.Br, PS, It.Br, OV or any
HFxx trip.

Information Information Installation Installation Started parameters the motor operation PLC paramters Data Information
14 UL Listing Information 14.3 AC supply specification

The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more
SPz drives have been assessed to meet UL requirements. than 100,000rms symmetrical Amperes at 264Vac rms maximum (200V
Size 1 to 6 drives have been assessed to meet both UL and cUL drives), 528Vac rms maximum (400V drives) or 600Vac rms maximum
requirements. (575V and 690V drives).
14.1 Common UL information 14.4 Maximum continuous output current

Conformity The drive models are listed as having the maximum continuous output
The drive conforms to UL listing requirements only when the following currents (FLC) shown in Table 14-1, Table 14-2, Table 14-3 and Table
are observed: 14-4 (see Chapter 12 Technical Data on page 242 for details).
• The drive is installed in a type 1 enclosure, or better, as defined by Table 14-1 Maximum continuous output current (200V drives)
UL50
• The ambient temperature does not exceed 40°C (104°F) when the Model Model
FLC (A) FLC (A)
drive is operating LS CT LS CT
• The terminal tightening torques specified in section 3.12.2 Terminal SPz 1M/TL 0201 2.2 SP 4.5TL 2201 15.5
sizes and torque settings on page 55 SPz 1.2M/TL 0202 3.1 SP 5.5TL 2202 22
• If the drive control stage is supplied by an external power supply SPz 1.5M/TL 0203 4.0 SP 8TL 2203 28
(+24V), the external power supply must be a UL Class 2 power SPz 2M/TL 0204 5.7 SP11TL 3201 42
supply
SPz 2.5M/TL 0205 7.5 SP 16TL 3202 54
Motor overload protection SP 1.5TL 1201 5.2 SP 22TL 4201 68
The drive provides motor overload protection. The default overload
SP 2TL 1202 6.8 SP 27TL 4202 80
protection level is no higher than 150% of full-load current (FLC) of the
drive in open loop mode and no higher than 175% of full-load current SP 2.5TL 1203 9.6 SP 33TL 4203 104
(FLC) of the drive in closed loop vector or servo modes. It is necessary SP 3.5TL 1204 11 SP 40TL 5201 130
for the motor rated current to be entered into Pr 0.46 (or Pr 5.07) for the SP 50TL 5202 154
protection to operate correctly. The protection level may be adjusted
below 150% if required. Refer to section 8.3 Current limits on page 136 Table 14-2 Maximum continuous output current (400V drives)
for more information. The drive also provides motor thermal protection. Model Model
FLC (A) FLC (A)
Refer to section 8.4 Motor thermal protection on page 136. LS CT LS CT
Overspeed Protection SPz 1T 0401 1.3 SP 8T 2401 15.3
The drive provides overspeed protection. However, it does not provide SPz 1.2T 0402 1.7 SP 11T 2402 21
the level of protection afforded by an independent high integrity SPz 1.5T 0403 2.1 SP 16T 2403 29
overspeed protection device. SPz 2T 0404 3.0 SP 22T 3401 35
SPz 2.5T 0405 4.2 SP 27T 3402 43
14.2 Power dependant UL information SP 1.5T 1401 2.8 SP 33T 3403 56
Conformity SP 2T 1402 3.8 SP 40T 4401 68
The drive conforms to to UL listing requirements only when the following
SP 2.5T 1403 5.0 SP 50T 4402 83
is observed.
SP 3.5T 1404 6.9 SP 60T 4403 104
Fuses SP 4.5T 1405 8.8 SP 75T 5401 138
SPz and sizes 1 to 3
SP 5.5T 1406 11 SP 100T 5402 168
• The correct UL-listed fast acting fuses (class CC or class J up to 30A
and class J above 30A), e.g. Bussman Limitron KTK-R series, SP 120T 6401 205
Ferraz Shawmut ATMR series or equivalent, are used in the AC SP 150T 6402 236
supply. The drive does not comply with UL if MCBs are used in place
of fuses. Table 14-3 Maximum continuous output current (575V drives)
For further details on fusing, refer to in Table 4-3 and Table 4-4 on page 64. Model Model
FLC (A) FLC (A)
Sizes 4 to 6 LS CT LS CT
• The UL-listed Ferraz HSJ (High speed J class) fuses are used in the SP 3.5TM 3501 5.4 SP 11TM 3505 16
AC supply. The drive does not comply with UL if any other fuses or SP 4.5TM 3502 6.1 SP 16TM 3506 22
MCBs are used in place of those stated. SP 5.5TM 3503 8.3 SP 22TM 3507 27
For further details on fusing, refer to Table 4-5 on page 65.
SP 8TM 3504 11
Field wiring
SPz and sizes 1 to 4 Table 14-4 Maximum continuous output current (690V drives)
• Class 1 60/75°C (140/167°F) copper wire only is used in the
Model Model
installation FLC (A) FLC (A)
LS CT LS CT
Sizes 5 and 6
SP 22TH 4601 22 SP 75TH 5601 84
• Class 1 75°C (167°F) copper wire only is used in the installation
SP 27TH 4602 27 SP 100TH 5602 99
Field wiring connectors SP 33TH 4603 36 SP 120TH 6601 125
Sizes 4 to 6
• UL listed wire connectors are used for terminating power circuit field SP 40TH 4604 43 SP 150TH 6602 144
wiring, e.g. Ilsco TA series SP 50TH 4605 52
SP 60TH 4606 62

Information Information Installation Installation Started parameters the motor operation PLC paramters Data Information
14.5 Safety label

The safety label supplied with the connectors and mounting brackets
must be placed on a fixed part inside the drive enclosure where it can be
seen clearly by maintenance personnel for UL compliance.
The label clearly states “CAUTION Risk of Electric Shock Power down
unit 10 minutes before removing cover”.
14.6 UL listed accessories

• SM-Keypad • 15-way D-type converter
• SM-Keypad Plus • SM-Encoder Output Plus
• SM-I/O Plus • SM-PROFIBUS-DP
• SM- Ethernet • SM-DeviceNet
• SM-CANopen • SM-I/O Timer
• SM-Universal Encoder Plus • SM-INTERBUS
• SM-Resolver • SM-Applications Lite
• SM-Encoder Plus • SM-Applications
• SM-I/O Lite • SM-I/O 32
• SM-LON • SM-SERCOS
• SM-Applications Plus • SM-I/O Timer

List of figures
Figure 2-1 Features of the SPz drive .................................13 Figure 3-48 Through-panel mounting cut-out details for
Figure 2-2 Features of the size 1 to 6 drive .......................14 size 1 ................................................................51
Figure 2-3 Typical drive rating labels for SPz ....................15 Figure 3-49 Through-panel mounting cut-out details for
Figure 2-4 Typical drive rating labels for size 1 to 6 drives 16 size 2 ................................................................51
Figure 2-5 Options available with Unidrive SP ..................17 Figure 3-50 Fitting the heatsink mounted braking resistor on
Figure 3-1 Location and identification of terminal covers ..22 size 1 ................................................................51
Figure 3-2 Removing the size 1 terminal covers ...............23 Figure 3-51 Connecting the brake resistor on a surface
Figure 3-3 Removing the size 2 terminal covers ...............23 mounted size 1 .................................................51
Figure 3-4 Removing the size 3 terminal covers ...............23 Figure 3-52 Connecting the brake resistor on a through-panel
Figure 3-5 Removing the size 4, 5 and 6 terminal covers (size mounted size 1 .................................................52
4 illustrated) ......................................................24 Figure 3-53 Removing the baffle plate on a size 2 ..............52
Figure 3-6 Removing the finger-guard break-outs ............. 24 Figure 3-54 Modifying the fan baffle on a size 2 ..................52
Figure 3-7 Removing the DC terminal cover break-outs ...24 Figure 3-55 Fitting the heatsink mounted braking resistor on a
Figure 3-8 Size 4 to 6 finger-guard grommets ...................25 size 2 ................................................................52
Figure 3-9 Installation of a Solutions Module on SPz ........25 Figure 3-56 Connecting the brake resistor on a surface
Figure 3-10 Installation and removal of a Solutions Module on mounted size 2 .................................................53
size 1 to 6 .........................................................26 Figure 3-57 Connecting the brake resistor on a through-panel
Figure 3-11 Installation of a keypad on SPz ........................26 mounted size 2 .................................................53
Figure 3-12 Installation and removal of a keypad on size Figure 3-58 Locations of the power and ground terminals ...54
1 to 6 ...............................................................27 Figure 4-1 SPz power connections ....................................57
Figure 3-13 Mounting the SPz using a DIN rail ...................28 Figure 4-2 Size 1 power connections .................................58
Figure 3-14 Surface mounting the SPz drive .......................28 Figure 4-3 Size 2 power connections .................................58
Figure 3-15 Surface mounting the size 1 drive ....................29 Figure 4-4 Size 3 power connections .................................59
Figure 3-16 Surface mounting the size 2 drive ....................29 Figure 4-5 Size 4, 5 and 6 power connections ...................59
Figure 3-17 Surface mounting the size 3 drive ....................30 Figure 4-6 Size 2 ground connections ...............................60
Figure 3-18 Surface mounting the size 4 drive ....................30 Figure 4-7 Size 3 ground connections ...............................60
Figure 3-19 Surface mounting the size 5 drive ....................31 Figure 4-8 Size 4, 5 and 6 ground connections .................61
Figure 3-20 Surface mounting the size 6 drive ....................32 Figure 4-9 Location of the size 6 heatsink fan supply
Figure 3-21 Through-panel mounting the size 1 drive .........33 connections ......................................................62
Figure 3-22 Through-panel mounting the size 2 drive .........33 Figure 4-10 Size 6 heatsink fan supply connections ............62
Figure 3-23 Through-panel mounting the size 3 drive .........34 Figure 4-11 Cable construction influencing the capacitance 67
Figure 3-24 Through-panel mounting the size 4 drive .........34 Figure 4-12 Preferred chain connection for multiple motors 67
Figure 3-25 Through-panel mounting the size 5 drive .........35 Figure 4-13 Alternative connection for multiple motors ........68
Figure 3-26 Through-panel mounting the size 6 drive .........36 Figure 4-14 Typical protection circuit for a braking resistor .70
Figure 3-27 Size 4, 5 and 6 mounting bracket .....................37 Figure 4-15 Use of the EMC bracket on SPz .......................72
Figure 3-28 Orientation of the size 4, 5 and 6 mounting Figure 4-16 Installation of grounding clamp (size 1 and 2) ..72
bracket ..............................................................37 Figure 4-17 Installation of grounding clamp (size 3) ............72
Figure 3-29 Location of top surface mounting brackets for size Figure 4-18 Installation of grounding bracket (SPz) .............72
5 and 6 .............................................................37 Figure 4-19 Installation of grounding bracket (sizes 1 to 6) .72
Figure 3-30 Enclosure layout ...............................................38 Figure 4-20 Size 4 and 5 grounding link bracket in its surface
Figure 3-31 Enclosure having front, sides and top panels free mount position (as supplied) .............................73
to dissipate heat ...............................................39 Figure 4-21 Size 4 and 5 grounding link bracket folded up into
Figure 3-32 Example of IP54 (UL Type 12 / NEMA 12) through- its through- panel mount position .....................73
panel layout ......................................................40 Figure 4-22 Removal of internal EMC filter and line to ground
Figure 3-33 Installing the gasket ..........................................40 varistors (SPz) ..................................................73
Figure 3-34 Installation of IP54 insert for size 1 ..................41 Figure 4-23 Removal of internal EMC filter (size 1 to 3) ......73
Figure 3-35 Installation of IP54 insert for size 2 ..................41 Figure 4-24 Removal of internal EMC filter (sizes 4 to 6) ....74
Figure 3-36 Option 2 for achieving IP54 (UL type 12 / NEMA Figure 4-25 General EMC enclosure layout showing ground
12) through-panel mounting .............................42 connections ......................................................74
Figure 3-37 Option 3 for achieving IP54 (UL Type 12 / NEMA Figure 4-26 Drive cable clearances .....................................75
12) through panel mounting .............................43 Figure 4-27 Feedback cable, twisted pair ............................75
Figure 3-38 Footprint mounting the EMC filter .....................44 Figure 4-28 Feedback cable connections ............................76
Figure 3-39 Bookcase mounting the EMC filter ...................44 Figure 4-29 Supply and ground cable clearance
Figure 3-40 Size 4 to 6 mounting of EMC filter ....................44 (SPz and sizes 1 to 3) ......................................77
Figure 3-41 SPz external EMC filter ....................................45 Figure 4-30 Supply and ground cable clearance
Figure 3-42 Size 1 external EMC filter .................................45 (sizes 4 to 6) .....................................................77
Figure 3-43 Size 2 external EMC filter .................................46 Figure 4-31 Sensitive signal circuit clearance ......................78
Figure 3-44 Size 3 external EMC filter .................................47 Figure 4-32 Grounding the drive, motor cable shield and
Figure 3-45 Size 4 and 5 external EMC filter .......................48 filter ...................................................................78
Figure 3-46 Size 6 external EMC filter .................................49 Figure 4-33 Grounding the motor cable shield .....................78
Figure 3-47 Fitting an optional internal braking resistor (top Figure 4-34 Shielding requirements of optional external
view of drive) ....................................................50 braking resistor .................................................78

Figure 4-35 Grounding of signal cable shields using the Figure 11-12 Menu 8 logic diagram ..................................... 182
grounding bracket .............................................79 Figure 11-13 Menu 9 logic diagram: Programmable logic ... 185
Figure 4-36 Connecting the motor cable to a terminal block in Figure 11-14 Menu 9 logic diagram: Motorized pot and binary
the enclosure ....................................................79 sum ................................................................ 186
Figure 4-37 Connecting the motor cable to an isolator / Figure 11-15 Menu 12 logic diagram ................................... 190
disconnect switch ..............................................79 Figure 11-16 Menu 12 logic diagram (continued) ................ 191
Figure 4-38 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs Figure 11-17 Open-loop brake function ............................... 192
and outputs .......................................................80 Figure 11-18 Open-loop brake sequence ............................ 192
Figure 4-39 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs Figure 11-19 Closed-loop brake function ............................ 193
and outputs .......................................................80 Figure 11-20 Closed-loop brake sequence ......................... 193
Figure 4-40 Location of the RJ45 serial comms connector .80 Figure 11-21 Menu 13 Open-loop logic diagram ................. 196
Figure 4-41 Default terminal functions .................................82 Figure 11-22 Menu 13 Closed-loop logic diagram .............. 198
Figure 4-42 Access to encoder connections ........................85 Figure 11-23 Menu 14 Logic diagram ................................. 202
Figure 4-43 Location of encoder connector (SPz) ...............85 Figure 11-24 Location of Solutions Module slots and their
Figure 4-44 Connecting the encoder ground tab to the EMC corresponding menu numbers (SPz) 205
bracket ..............................................................85 Figure 11-25 Location of Solutions Module slots and their
Figure 4-45 Location of encoder connector .........................85 corresponding menu numbers (size 1 to 6) ... 205
Figure 4-46 Location of the size 4 to 6 low voltage DC mode Figure 11-26 SM-Universal Encoder Plus logic diagram ..... 208
enable connections ...........................................88 Figure 11-27 SM-Resolver logic diagram ............................ 212
Figure 4-47 Size 4 and 5 low voltage DC mode enable Figure 11-28 SM-Encoder Plus logic diagram ..................... 214
connections .......................................................88 Figure 11-29 SM-Encoder Output Plus logic diagram ......... 216
Figure 4-48 Size 6 low voltage DC mode enable Figure 11-30 SM-I/O Plus analog logic diagram ................. 219
connections .......................................................88 Figure 11-31 SM-I/O Plus digital logic diagram 1 ................ 220
Figure 4-49 Start / stop control EN954-1 category B - Figure 11-32 SM-I/O Plus digital logic diagram 2 ................ 221
replacement of contactor ..................................90 Figure 11-33 SM-I/O Lite & SM-I/O Timer digital I/O logic
Figure 4-50 Category 3 interlock using electromechanical diagram .......................................................... 223
safety contactors ...............................................90 Figure 11-34 SM-I/O Lite & SM-I/O Timer analog I/O logic
Figure 4-51 Category 3 interlock using SAFE TORQUE OFF diagram .......................................................... 224
(SECURE DISABLE) with protected wiring ......90 Figure 11-35 SM-I/O Timer real time clock logic diagram ... 224
Figure 4-52 Use of contactor and relay to avoid the need for Figure 11-36 SM-I/O 32 logic diagram ................................ 226
protected wiring ................................................91 Figure 11-37 Digital input connections when Pr 6.04 is set to 0
Figure 5-1 SM-Keypad .......................................................92 to 3 ................................................................. 239
Figure 5-2 SM-Keypad Plus ...............................................92 Figure 13-1 Keypad status modes .................................... 260
Figure 5-3 SPz Keypad ......................................................92 Figure 13-2 Location of the status LED ............................. 260
Figure 5-4 Display modes ..................................................93
Figure 5-5 Mode examples ................................................93
Figure 5-6 Parameter navigation ........................................94
Figure 5-7 Menu structure ..................................................94
Figure 5-8 Menu 0 copying ................................................94
Figure 6-1 Menu 0 logic diagram .....................................102
Figure 6-2 Fixed and variable V/f characteristics .............106
Figure 7-1 Minimum connections to get the motor running in
any operating mode (SPz) ..............................115
any operating mode (size 1 to 3) ....................116
any operating mode (size 4 to 6) ....................117
Figure 8-1 Motor thermal protection (Heavy Duty) ...........136
Figure 8-2 Motor thermal protection (Normal Duty) .........136
Figure 8-3 Torque and rated voltage against speed ........137
Figure 9-1 Installation of the SMARTCARD .....................139
Figure 9-2 Basic SMARTCARD operation .......................140
Figure 10-1 Onboard PLC program scheduling .................146
Figure 10-2 Programming options for Unidrive SP ............147
Figure 11-3 Menu 3 Open-loop logic diagram ....................163
Figure 11-4 Menu 3 Closed loop logic diagram .................164
Figure 11-5 Menu 4 Open loop logic diagram ....................168
Figure 11-6 Menu 4 Closed-loop vector logic diagram ......169
Figure 11-7 Menu 4 Servo logic diagram ...........................170
Figure 11-8 Menu 5 Open-loop logic diagram ....................172
Figure 11-9 Menu 5 Closed-loop logic diagram .................174

List of tables
Table 2-1 200V drive ratings (200V to 240V ±10%) ...........8 Table 7-1 Minimum control connection requirements
Table 2-2 400V drive ratings (380V to 480V ±10%) ...........9 for each control mode .....................................114
Table 2-3 575V drive ratings (500V to 575V ±10%) .........10 Table 7-2 Minimum control connection requirements
Table 2-4 690V drive ratings (500V to 690V ±10%) .........10 for each mode of operation .............................114
Table 2-5 Typical overload limits for SPz and size 1 to 5.... 11 Table 7-3 Parameters required for feedback device
Table 2-6 Typical overload limits for size 6 ......................11 set-up ..............................................................122
Table 2-7 Encoders compatible with Unidrive SP ............12 Table 7-4 Restrictions of drive encoder lines per revolution
Table 2-8 Solutions Module identification .........................17 with software version V01.06.01 and later.......125
Table 2-9 Keypad identification ........................................19 Table 7-5 Restrictions of drive encoder lines per revolution
Table 2-10 Parts supplied with the drive ............................20 with software version V01.06.00 and earlier ...125
Table 3-1 Mounting brackets ............................................ 37 Table 8-1 Available switching frequencies ......................137
Table 3-2 Description of fixings ........................................42 Table 8-2 Sample rates for various control tasks at each
Table 3-3 Quantity of nylon washers supplied with the switching frequency ........................................137
drive ..................................................................42 Table 9-1 SMARTCARD data blocks ..............................140
Table 3-4 Environment considerations .............................43 Table 9-2 SMARTCARD codes ......................................140
Table 3-5 Power losses from the front of the drive when Table 9-3 Key to parameter table coding ........................142
through-panel mounted ....................................43 Table 9-4 Trip conditions ................................................144
Table 3-6 Drive EMC filter details (SPz and size 1 to 6) ..44 Table 9-5 SMARTCARD status indications ....................145
Table 3-7 Drive control and relay terminal data ................55 Table 11-1 Menu descriptions ..........................................149
Table 3-8 Drive power terminal data ................................55 Table 11-2 Key to parameter table coding ........................149
Table 3-9 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes ....55 Table 11-3 Feature look-up table ......................................150
Table 3-10 Schaffner external EMC filter terminal data Table 11-4 Definition of parameter ranges & variable
(SPz) ................................................................55 maximums ......................................................153
Table 3-11 Schaffner external EMC filter terminal data........... Table 11-5 Maximum motor rated current .........................155
(size 1 to 6) .......................................................55 Table 11-6 Defaults for Pr 10.30 and Pr 10.31 .................188
Table 3-12 Epcos external EMC Filter terminal data ..........55 Table 11-7 Active reference ..............................................233
Table 4-1 Behaviour of the drive in the event of a motor Table 12-1 Maximum permissible continuous output current
circuit ground (earth) fault with an IT supply 61 @ 40°C (104°F) ambient ................................242
Table 4-2 Supply fault current used to calculate Table 12-2 Maximum permissible continuous output current
maximum input currents ...................................63 @ 40°C (104°F) ambient with IP54 insert and
Table 4-3 SPz and sizes 1 to 3 input current, fuse and standard fan installed .....................................243
cable size ratings (European) ........................... 64 Table 12-3 Maximum permissible continuous output current
Table 4-4 SPz and sizes 1 to 3 input current, fuse and @ 50°C (122°F) ambient ................................244
cable size ratings (USA) ...................................64 Table 12-4 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient ....................245
Table 4-5 Size 4 and larger input current, fuse and cable Table 12-5 Losses @ 40°C (104°F) ambient with IP54 insert
size ratings .......................................................65 and standard fan installed ..............................246
Table 4-6 Maximum motor cable lengths (200V drives) ...66 Table 12-6 Losses @ 50°C (122°F) ambient ....................247
Table 4-7 Maximum motor cable lengths (400V drives) ...66 Table 12-7 Power losses from the front of the drive when
Table 4-8 Maximum motor cable lengths (575V drives) ...66 through-panel mounted ..................................248
Table 4-9 Maximum motor cable lengths (690V drives) ...67 Table 12-8 IP Rating degrees of protection ......................249
Table 4-10 Braking transistor turn on voltage .....................68 Table 12-9 UL enclosure ratings .......................................249
Table 4-11 Heatsink mounted braking resistor data ...........69 Table 12-10 Acoustic noise data ........................................250
Table 4-12 Minimum resistance values and peak power Table 12-11 Overall drive dimensions ................................250
rating for the braking resistor at 40°C (104°F) ..69 Table 12-12 Overall drive weights ......................................250
Table 4-13 Unidrive SP and EMC filter cross reference .....71 Table 12-13 Supply fault current used to calculate maximum
Table 4-14 Second environment emission compliance input currents ..................................................250
(SPz) ................................................................76 Table 12-14 SPz and size 1 to 3 input current, fuse and cable
Table 4-15 Second environment emission compliance size ratings .....................................................251
(size 1 to 6) .......................................................76 Table 12-15 Size 4 and larger input current, fuse and cable size
Table 4-16 Connection details for RJ45 connector ............80 ratings .............................................................252
Table 4-17 Isolated serial comms lead details ...................80 Table 12-16 Maximum motor cable lengths (200V drives) .252
Table 4-18 The control connections consist of: ..................81 Table 12-17 Maximum motor cable lengths (400V drives) .253
Table 4-19 Encoder types ..................................................86 Table 12-18 Maximum motor cable lengths (575V drives) .253
Table 4-20 Drive encoder connector details .......................86 Table 12-19 Maximum motor cable lengths (690V drives) .253
Table 4-21 Feedback resolution based on frequency and Table 12-20 Minimum resistance values and peak power rating
voltage level .....................................................87 for the braking resistor at 40°C (104°F) ..........253
Table 5-1 Advanced menu descriptions ........................... 95 Table 12-21 Drive control and relay terminal data ..............254
Table 5-2 Menu 40 parameter descriptions ......................95 Table 12-22 Drive power terminal data ...............................254
Table 5-3 Menu 41 parameter descriptions ......................95 Table 12-23 Plug-in terminal block maximum cable sizes ..254
Table 5-4 Alarm indications ..............................................96 Table 12-24 Immunity compliance ......................................254
Table 5-5 Solutions Module and SMARTCARD status Table 12-25 SPz (200V) emission compliance (single and three
indications on power-up ...................................96 phase drives) ..................................................254

Table 12-26 SPz (400V) emission compliance ...................255
Table 12-27 Size 1 emission compliance ...........................255
Table 12-30 Size 4 (200V & 400V) emission compliance ...255
Table 12-31 Size 4 (690V) emission compliance ................255
Table 12-34 Size 6 (400V only) emission compliance ........255
Table 12-35 Size 6 (690V only) emission compliance ........255
Table 12-36 EMC filter cross reference ..............................256
Table 12-37 Optional external EMC filter details ................257
Table 12-38 Optional external EMC filter dimensions .........258
Table 13-1 Trip indications ................................................261
Table 13-2 Serial communications look-up table ..............274
Table 13-3 Trip categories ................................................275
Table 13-4 Alarm indications ............................................276
Table 13-5 Status indications ............................................276
Table 13-6 Solutions Module and SMARTCARD status
indications at power-up ...................................276
Table 14-1 Maximum continuous output current
(200V drives) ..................................................278
(400V drives) ..................................................278
(575V drives) ..................................................278
(690V drives) ..................................................278

Index
Symbols D
+10V user output ....................................................83 DC bus paralleling ............................................................62
+24V external input .........................................................83 DC bus voltage ................................ 68, 153, 234, 237, 238
+24V user output ..............................................................84 Deceleration68, 99, 104, 107, 118, 119, 120, 121, 129, 132,
Numerics ..................................................................... 162, 230, 234, 237
0V common ........................................................................ 83 Defaults (restoring parameter) ......................................96
A Derating .............................................................................242
AC supply contactor ........................................................65 Destination parameter ......................................................81
AC supply requirements .................................................61 Diagnostics ........................................................................260
Acceleration ....99, 104, 118, 119, 120, 121, 129, 132, 162 Digital I/O 1 ........................................................................84
Access ..................................................................................21 Digital I/O 2 ........................................................................84
Access Level ......................................................................97 Digital I/O 3 ........................................................................84
Accuracy ............................................................................249 Digital Input 1 ....................................................................84
Acoustic noise ..................................................................249 Digital Input 2 ....................................................................84
Advanced menus ...............................................................95 Digital Input 3 ....................................................................84
Advanced parameters ....................................................149 Dimensions (overall) ......................................................250
Air-flow in a ventilated enclosure ...............................39 Display .................................................................................92
Alarm ..................................................................................276 Display messages ..............................................................96
Alarm Indications ...........................................................276 Drive enable ........................................................................85
Altitude ..............................................................................248 Drive features .....................................................................12
Analog input 2 ...................................................................83 E
Analog input 3 ...................................................................83 Electrical Installation .......................................................57
Analog output 1 .................................................................84 Electrical safety .................................................................21
Analog output 2 .................................................................84 Electrical terminals ...........................................................54
Autotune ...................................................126, 129, 132, 134 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ........21, 71, 254
B EMC - Compliance with generic emission
Basic requirements .........................................................114 standards ..............................................................................77
Braking ................................................................................68 EMC - General requirements ........................................74
Braking Modes ................................................................234 EMC - Variations in the wiring ....................................78
Braking resistor values ..................................................253 EMC filter dimensions (external, overall) ...............258
C EMC filter torque settings (external) ........................259
Cable clearances ................................................................75 EMC filters (optional external) ...................................256
Cable lengths (maximum) ............................................252 Emission ............................................................................254
Cable size ratings ............................................................250 EN61800-3 (standard for Power Drive Systems) ....76
Cable types and lengths ..................................................66 Enclosure .............................................................................38
Catch a spinning motor .................................................239 Enclosure Layout ..............................................................38
Cautions .................................................................................6 Enclosure sizing ................................................................38
Closed loop vector mode ................................................11 Encoder connections ................................................. 75, 85
Control connections .........................................................81 Encoder feedback limits ................................................137
Control terminal specification ......................................83 Encoder types .....................................................................86
Cooling ................................................................................21 Environmental protection ...............................................21
Cooling method ...............................................................248 External EMC filter ..........................................................44
LS Soft ...............................................................................122 F
Current limit .....................................................................104 Fast Disable ......................................................................241
Current limits ...................................................................136 Feedback device cable shielding ..................................75
Current loop gains ......................................... 129, 132, 134 Field weakening (constant power) operation .........137
Current ratings .................................................................242 Fieldbus module category parameters ......................228
Fire protection ....................................................................21

Fixed V/F mode .................................................................11 Menu 15, 16 and 17 - Solutions Module set-up .... 205
Fuse ratings .......................................................................250 Menu 18 - Application menu 1 .................................. 229
Fuse types ............................................................................65 Menu 19 - Application menu 2 .................................. 229
G Menu 20 - Application menu 3 .................................. 229
Getting Started ...................................................................92 Menu 21 - Second motor parameters ....................... 230
Ground connections .................................................. 65, 74 Menu 22 - Additional Menu 0 set-up ....................... 232
Ground leakage ..................................................................71 Menu structure .................................................................. 93
Ground terminals ...............................................................54 Minimum connections to get the motor running in
Grounding bracket ............................................................72 any operating mode ....................................................... 115
Grounding clamp ...............................................................72 Mode parameter ................................................................ 81
H Model number ................................................................... 11
Hazardous areas .................................................................21 Monitoring ........................................................................ 106
Heatsink mounted braking resistor ....................... 50, 68 Motor (running the motor) .......................................... 114
High speed operation .....................................................137 Motor cable - interruptions ............................................ 79
Humidity ............................................................................248 Motor isolator / disconnector-switch .......................... 79
I Motor map parameters .................................................. 126
I/O module category parameters ................................219 Motor number of poles ........................ 126, 128, 131, 134
Input current ratings .......................................................250 Motor operation ................................................................ 68
Input inductor calculation ...............................................62 Motor parameters ........................................................... 111
Internal EMC filter ...........................................................73 Motor rated current ............................... 126, 128, 131, 134
IP Rating (Ingress protection) .....................................248 Motor rated current (maximum) ................................ 136
Isolator switch ....................................................................79 Motor rated frequency ................................. 126, 128, 131
Items supplied with the drive ........................................20 Motor rated power factor ............................ 126, 128, 131
K Motor rated speed .......................................... 126, 128, 131
Keypad and display - fitting / removal ................ 26, 27 Motor rated speed autotune ......................................... 132
Keypad operation ..............................................................92 Motor rated voltage ...................................... 126, 128, 131
L Motor requirements ....................................................... 248
Line power supply loss modes ....................................237 Motor thermal protection ............................................. 136
Line reactors .............................................................. 61, 248 Motor winding voltage ................................................... 67
M Mounting methods ........................................................... 27
Maximum speed / frequency .......................................138 Multiple motors ................................................................ 67
Mechanical Installation ...................................................21 N
Menu 0 .................................................................................94 Nameplate description .................................................... 14
Menu 01 - Frequency / speed reference ...................156 NEMA rating .................................................... 40, 248, 249
Menu 02 - Ramps ............................................................160 Notes ...................................................................................... 6
Menu 03 - Slave frequency, speed feedback and O
speed control .....................................................................163 Onboard PLC ................................................................... 146
Menu 04 - Torque and current control .....................168 Open loop mode ................................................................ 11
Menu 05 - Motor control ..............................................172 Open loop vector mode .................................................. 11
Menu 06 - Sequencer and clock .................................177 Operating mode (changing) .................................. 96, 114
Menu 07 - Analog I/O ...................................................179 Operating modes ............................................................... 11
Menu 08 - Digital I/O ....................................................182 Operating-mode selection ............................................ 113
Menu 09 - Programmable logic, motorized pot and Optimization .................................................................... 126
binary sum .........................................................................185 Options ................................................................................ 17
Menu 10 - Status and trips ...........................................188 Output contactor ............................................................... 68
Menu 11 - General drive set-up ..................................189 Output frequency ............................................................ 249
Menu 12 - Threshold detectors and variable P
selectors .............................................................................190 Parameter access level .................................................... 97
Menu 13 - Position control ...........................................196 Parameter ranges ............................................................ 153
Menu 14 - User PID controller ...................................202 Parameter security ............................................................ 97
Menu 15 and 16 - Solution Module set-up ..............205 Parameter x.00 ................................................................ 104

Planning the installation .................................................21 Stop modes ........................................................................236
Position feedback ............................................................114 Storage ................................................................................248
Position feedback module category parameters ....208 Supply requirements ......................................................248
Power dissipation ............................................................245 Supply types .......................................................................61
Power ratings ............................................................ 69, 242 Surface mounting the drive ............................................29
Power terminals .................................................................54 Surge immunity of control circuits - long cables
Precision reference Analog input 1 .............................83 and connections outside a building ..............................79
Product information ...........................................................7 Surge suppression for analog and bipolar inputs
Q and outputs ..........................................................................80
Quadratic V/F mode ........................................................11 Surge suppression for digital and unipolar inputs
Quick start commissioning ................................. 118, 122 and outputs ..........................................................................80
Quick start connections .................................................114 Switching frequency ............................................. 137, 138
R SYPTLite ...........................................................................146
Ramps .................................................................................104 T
Ratings ............................................................................ 7, 63 Technical data ..................................................................242
Reactor current ratings ........................................... 62, 248 Temperature ......................................................................248
Reference modes .............................................................233 Terminal block in the enclosure ...................................79
Relay contacts ....................................................................85 Terminal cover removal ..................................................21
Residual current device (RCD) ....................................71 Terminal sizes ....................................................................55
Resistances (minimum) ..................................................69 Thermal protection circuit for the braking resistor .70
Resolution .........................................................................249 Through-panel mounting the drive ..............................33
RJ45 connector - connection details ........................... 80 Torque modes ...................................................................235
Routine maintenance .......................................................56 Torque settings ......................................................... 55, 254
S Trip ......................................................................................260
SAFE TORQUE OFF ......................................................89 Trip categories .................................................................275
Safety Information ....................................................... 6, 21 Trip History ......................................................................277
Saving parameters ............................................................96 Trip Indications ...............................................................260
Sealed enclosure - sizing ................................................38 U
SECURE DISABLE ........................................................89 UL Listing Information .................................................278
Serial comms lead ............................................................80 User Security ......................................................................97
Serial communications connections ............................80 V
Serial communications look-up table .......................274 Variable maximums .......................................................153
Serial communications port isolation .........................80 Ventilation ...........................................................................40
Servo .....................................................................................11 Vibration ............................................................................249
Single line descriptions ...................................................99 Voltage boost ...................................................................105
Slip compensation ..........................................................127 Voltage mode ...................................................................127
SMARTCARD operation .................................... 139, 146 W
SMARTCARD trips ......................................................144 Warnings ................................................................................6
Solutions Module ............................................................205 Weights ..............................................................................250
Solutions Module - fitting / removal ..........................25
Speed feedback ................................................................114
Speed limits ...................................................................... 104
Speed loop gains ............................................ 130, 133, 135
Speed range ...................................................................... 249
Speed reference selection .............................................104
Speed-loop PID gains ....................................................105
Start up time .....................................................................249
Starts per hour ..................................................................249
Status ..................................................................................276
Status Indications ............................................................276
Status information ..........................................................113

MOTEURS LEROY-SOMER 16015 ANGOULÊME CEDEX - FRANCE
338 567 258 RCS ANGOULÊME
S.A. au capital de 62 779 000 €
www.leroy-somer.com

LeroySomer VSD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LeroySomer VSD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LeroySomer VSD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3890 en - 2009.

This manual is to be given

Universal variable speed drive

Drive software version

Issue Number: b (12)

7 Running the motor

3 Mechanical Installation .......................21 7 Running the motor ............................ 114

4 Unidrive SP User Guide

12 Technical Data ...................................242

14 UL Listing Information ......................278

List of figures ....................................280

Unidrive SP User Guide 5

1 Safety Information 1.4 Environmental limits

6 Unidrive SP User Guide

Normal Duty Heavy Duty (default)

Motor total Motor total

15% 50% 100% Motor speed as a 50% 100% Motor speed as a

Unidrive SP User Guide 7

Table 2-1 200V drive ratings (200V to 240V ±10%)

2 5.5TL 2202 22 5.5 7.5 24.2 17 25.5 29.7 4.0 5.0

11TL 3201 42 11 15 46 31 46.5 54.2 7.5 10

22TL 4201 68 18.5 25 74 56 84 98 15 20

27TL 4202 80 22 30 88 68 102 119 18.5 25

40TL 5201 130 37 50 143 105 157 183 30 40

5 50TL 5202 154 45 60 169 130 195 227 37 50

8 Unidrive SP User Guide

Table 2-2 400V drive ratings (380V to 480V ±10%)

40T 4401 68 37 50 74 60 90 105 30 50

50T 4402 83 45 60 91 74 111 129.5 37 60

75T 5401 138 75 100 151 124 186 217 55 100

5 100T 5402 168 90 125 184 156 234 273 75 125

Unidrive SP User Guide 9

Table 2-3 575V drive ratings (500V to 575V ±10%)

4 50TH 4605 52 37 50 57.2 43 64 5 75.2 30 40

75TH 5601 84 55 75 92 63 93 108.5 45 60

100TH 5602 99 75 100 108 85 126 147 55 75

120TH 6601 125 90 125 137 100 128 149 75 100

75TH 5601 84 75 100 92 63 93 108.5 55 75

5 100TH 5602 99 90 125 108 85 126 147 75 100

10 Unidrive SP User Guide

2.1.1 Typical short term overload limits

Table 2-6 Typical overload limits for size 6

2.2 Model number Open loop vector mode

SP 1 2 04 Typically 100% torque is available down to 1Hz for a 50Hz motor.

Model : Unidrive SP Fixed V/F mode

Unidrive SP User Guide 11

2.4 Compatible encoders

12 Unidrive SP User Guide

2.5 Drive features

Unidrive SP User Guide 13

Figure 2-2 Features of the size 1 to 6 drive

AC supply / AC supply / AC supply /

Motor Motor Motor

14 Unidrive SP User Guide

2.6 Nameplate description

Model Frequency Serial

SP0204 1.1kW Q26

Unidrive SP User Guide 15

Figure 2-4 Typical drive rating labels for size 1 to 6 drives

Input voltage Input No. of Typical input